200R98005
United States "         Office of
Environmental Protection       Administration arid         February 1998
Agency	Resources Management (2304)    	
        EPA FACILITIES MANUAL, VOLUME 1


        ARCHITECTURE, ENGINEERING,
        AND PLANNING GUIDELINES
        FEBRUARY 1998

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines
February 1998
Foreword
                                The EPA Facilities Manual
The EPA Facilities Manual is comprised of four distinct, yet complementary resources for planning and managing
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) facilities.  These four volumes are meant to be used simultaneously to
determine design intent, requirements, and the ongoing evaluation of all EPA facilities.  The use of one volume
without reference to the other three would result in an incomplete understanding of the requirements for EPA
facilities.

Volume 1:    The Architecture, Engineering, and Planning Guidelines (referred to as the AE&P Guidelines)
             provides guidance for facilities management, engineering, planning, and architecture professionals
             in the design and construction of new EPA facilities and the evaluation of existing facilities.

Volume 2:    Space Guidelines, Volume I contains information on space planning, space estimation, environment,
             materials, furniture, process, and maintenance. EPA's Office of Administration and Resources
             Management developed this document to help EPA facilities managers, space managers, and line
             personnel plan and use their space.

Volume 3:    Space Guidelines, Volume II is a technical handbook describing EPA's mission and providing space
             standards, information on technical considerations and materials safety, and other related
             documents.  It is also intended for use by EPA facilities managers, space managers, and line
             personnel.

Volume 4:    The Facility Safety, Health, and Environmental Management Manual (referred to as the Safety
            Manual) outlines safety, health, and environmental management considerations for owned or leased
             EPA facilities. The Manual's goal is to maintain a safe and healthful workplace that protects against
             injury, illness, and loss of life.

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines
                                                                                                 February 1998
Table of Contents
               Architecture,  Engineering, and Planning  Guidelines
                                              CONTENTS
Introduction	Ix

1 - General Planning and Design Data	1-1
1.1   General Scope of Project 	1-1
      1.1.1     Purpose	1-1
      1.1.2     Planning Studies. Evaluations,
               and Reports	1-1
1.2   Background Information	 1-1
      1.2.1     Existing Facility Description	1-1
      1.2.2     Facility and Campus Components .. 1-1
      1.2.3     Functional Organization 	 1-1
1.3   Planning Requirements	 1-1
      1.3.1     Planning Goals	1-1
      1.3.2     Planning Objectives	 1-2
      1.3.3     Planning Criteria	1-2
1.4   Scope of Requirements	1-3
      1.4.1     General	 1-3
      1.4.2     Codes	 1-3
       .4.3     Facility Organization	 1-3
       .4.4     Summary of Requirements	 1-3
1.5   Facility Design and Layout	 1-7
       .5.1     Overview	1-7
       .5.2     Site Development  	 1-7
       .5.3     Programmed  Space for Design
               and Layout 	 1-7
      1.5.4     Planning of Exterior Areas and
               Facilities	1-8
      1.5.5     Architectural Requirements	 1-8
      1.5.6     Space Identification	 1-14
      1.5.7     Specific  Room Requirements	 1-14
      1.5.8     Guide for Architectural Layout ... 1-14
      1.5.9     Environmental Design Requirements 1 -16
1.6   Special Room Requirements	 1-19
       .6.1     Restrooms  	 1-19
       .6.2     Janitor Closets	 1-19
1.7   Hazardous Waste Handling	1-19
       .7.1     General  Design Issues	 1-19
       .7.2     Radioisotopes 	 1-19
       .7.3     Chemical Storage and Handling ... 1-20
      1.7.4     Hazardous Materials/Waste  Storage •
               Facility	 1-20
1.8   Security	 1-20
      1.8.1     Access and Egress	 1-20
1.9   Structural Design Requirements	 1-20
      1.9.1     General	 1-20
      1.9.2     Calculations  	 1-21
      1,9.3     Loads 	 1-21
      1.9.4     Structural Systems	 1-24
      1.9.5     Building Movement Joints ....... 1-25
1.10  Lease Administration	 1-25
      1.10.1   Offer Requirements	 1-26
                                                           2 - Site Work	2-1
                                                           2.1    Scope of Project	2-1
                                                                  2.1.1    General	2-1
                                                                  2.1.2    Development Codes	2-1
                                                           2.2    Site Influences	2-1
                                                                  2.2.1    LandResources	2-1
                                                                  2.2.2    Transportation Systems	2-2
                                                                  2.2.3    Environmental Considerations	2-2
                                                           2.3    Site Investigation	2-3
                                                                  2,3.1    Site Surveys  	2-3
                                                                  2.3.2    Site Evaluation	2-4
                                                                  2.3.3    Geotechnical Investigation	2-4
                                                                  2.3.4    GroundwBter Investigation	2-5
                                                           2.4    Site Development	2-6
                                                                  2.4.1    Surveying  	2-6
                                                                  2.4.2    Site Planning and Design	2-8
                                                                  2.4.3    FacilitySiting	2-11
                                                                  2.4.4    Site Preparation	2-13
                                                                  2.4.5    Dewatering	2-13
                                                                  2.4.6    Shoring and Underpinning	2-13
                                                                  2.4.7    Earthwork	2-13
                                                                  2.4.8    Waterfront Construction  	2-13
                                                           2.5    Landscaping and Site-Related Requirements. 2-14
                                                                  2.5.1    General  	2-14
                                                                  2.5.2    Professional Qualifications for
                                                                          Site Design .,	2-14
                                                                  2.5.3    General Site Requirements	2-15
                                                                  2.5.4    Hardscape Requirements	2-17
                                                                  2.5.5    Recreational Requirements	2-17
                                                           2.6    Vehicle and Pedestrian Movement	2-17
                                                                  2.6.1    Access and Circulation  	2-17
                                                                  2.6.2    Parking and Loading Facilities	2-18
                                                                  2.6.3    Pedestrian Access	2-19
                                                                  2.6.4    Airports and Heliports	2-20
                                                           2.7    Stonnwater Management	2-21
                                                                  2.7.1    Street Drainage	 2-21
                                                                  2.7.2    Watershed Development	2-21
                                                                  2.7.3    Erosion and Sedimentation Control 2-21
                                                                  2.7.4    Stonnwater Retention and Detention 2-21
                                                                  2.7.5    Conveyance	2-21
                                                                  2.7.6    Stonnwater Quality	2-22
                                                                  2.7.7    Floodplain and Wetlands
                                                                          Development	2-22
                                                                  2.7.8    Coastal Development	2-22
                                                           2.8    Utilities and Support Services	2-23
                                                                  2.8.1    Water Distribution Systems	2-23
                                                                  2.8.2    Wastewater Collection Systems ... 2-25
                                                                  2.8.3    Natural Gas Distribution Systems . 2-26
                                                                  2.8.4    Electrical Distribution Systems  ... 2-26
                                                                  2.8.5    Telecommunications Systems  .... 2-26
                                                      ill

-------
February 1998
                           Architecture, Engineering,
                             and Planning Guidelines
                                                                                                 Table of Contents
       2.8.6    Solid Waste Collection Systems ...  2-26
2.9    Reference Materials	2-26
       2.9.1    General	2-26
       2.9.2    Sources	2-26

3 - Concrete	3-1
3.1    General Requirements 	3-1
       3.1.1    Design and Construction	3-1
       3.1.2    Codes 	3-1
       3.1.3    Use of Coal Fly Ash in Concrete ... 3-1
3.2    Concrete Formwork	3-1
3.3    Concrete Reinforcement	3-1
       3.3.1    Reinforcement Materials	3-1
       3.3.2    Reinforcement Details	3-1
3.4    Cast-In-Place Concrete	3-1
       3.4.1    General	3-1
       3.4.2    Materials, Testing, and Quality
               Control  	3-1
       3.4.3    Tolerances	3-1
       3.4.4    Selecting Proportions for Concrete
               Mixes	3-1
       3.4,5    Mixing, Transporting, and Placing .. 3-2
       3.4.6    Climatic Considerations  	3-2
       3.4.7    Post-tensioned Concrete  	3-2
3.5    Precast/Prestressed Concrete  	3-2
       3.5.1    Structural 	3-2
       3.5.2    Architectural	3-2
3.6    Cementitious Decks for Buildings	3-2
       3.6.1    General	3-2
       3.6.2    Materials, Design, and Construction  3-2
3.7    Repair and Restoration of Concrete Structures  3-2
3.8    Concrete Inspection and Testing	3-3

4 - Masonry 	4-1
4.1    General Requirements 	4-1
       4.1.1    Design and Construction	4-1
       4.1.2    Codes and Specifications	4-1
4.2    Mortar and Grout	;... 4-1
       4.2.1    General	4-1
       4.2.2    Mortar	 4-1
       4.2.3    Grout	4-1
4.3    Unit Masonry	4-1
4.4    Masonry Accessories 	4-2
4.5    Reinforced Masonry	4-2
4.6    Masonry Inspection and Testing	4-2

5 - Metals	5-1
5.1    General Requirements 	5-1
5.2    Structural Steel	5-1
5.3    Steel Joists	5-1
       5.3.1    Codes and Specifications	5-1
       5.3.2    Intended Use .	5-1
       5.3.3    Support of Vibrating Equipment ... 5-1
5.4    Steel Decks	5-1
5.5 •   Miscellaneous Metals	5-1
       5.5.1    Definition	5-1
       5.5.2    Codes and Specifications	5-1
5.6    Light-Gauge Steel	5-2
5.7    Preengineered Metal Buildings	5-2
       5.7.1    Codes and Specifications	5-2
       5.7.2    Loads 	5-2
5.8    Structural Steel Inspection and Testing	5-2

6 -Wood and Plastics	6-1
6.1    General Requirements 	6-1
6.2    Partitions	6-1
       6.2.1    Ceiling-High Partitions	6-1
       6.2.2    Wood Stud Partitions	6-1
       6.2.3    Less-Than-Ceiling-High Partitions .. 6-1
6.3    Use of Wood and Plastic	6-1

7 >Thermal and Moisture Requirements	7-1
7.1    General Requirements 	7-1
7.2    Design Characteristics	7-1
7.3    Thermal Resistance  	7-1
7.4    Moisture Transport	7-1
7.5    Panel, Curtain, and Spandrel Walls  	7-1
       7.5.1    Panel and Curtain Walls	7-1
       7.5.2    Spandrel Walls	7-1

8 - Doors and Windows	8-1
8.1    Doors	8-1
       8.1.1    General	8-1
       8.1.2    Exterior Doors	8-1
       8.1.3    Interior Doors	8-1
       8.1.4    FireDoors	8-1
       8.1.5    Laboratory Doors	8-2
8.2    Windows	8-2
       8.2.1    General	8-2
       8.2.2    Fixed Window Systems	8-2
       8.2.3    Safety of Storefront and Curtain
               WallSystems  	8-2
       8.2.4    Window Height	8-2
       8.2.5    Glazed Panels in Interior Partitions
               andWalls	8-2
8.3    Sun Shading	 8-3
       8.3.1    General	8-3
       8.3.2    Laboratory Windows	8-3

9- Finishes	9-1
9.1    Ulterior Finishes	9-1
       9.1.1    Trim and Incidental Finishes  	9-1
       9.1.2    Final Finishing Material	9-1
       9.1.3    Airspace	9-1
       9.1.4    Combustible Substances   	9-1
9.2    WallMaterials	9-1
       9.2.1    Lead-Based Paint  	9-1
       9.2.2    Wall Finishes  	9-1
       9.2.3    Wall Covering and Finishes'	9-2
9.3    Finished Ceilings	9-2
       9.3.1    General	9-2
       9.3.2    Ceilings Not Along Exit Path	9-3
       9.3.3    Ceilings Along Exit Path	9-3

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planninq Guidelines
                                      February 1998
Table of Contents
      9.3.4    Ceiling Finishes  	9-3
      9.3.5    Open Ceilings	9-3
9.4   Floor Treatments  	9-3
      9.4.1    General	9-3
      9.4.2    Carpet	9-3
      9.4.3    Vinyl Tile	;	9-4
      9.4.4    Seamless Vinyl Flooring	9-4
      9.4.5    Ceramic Tile Flooring	9-5
      9.4.6    Special Flooring  	9-5
      9.4.7    Exposed Concrete Flooring	9-5
9.5   Painting	9-5
      9.5.1    General	9-5
      9.5.2    Reflectance Values	9-5
      9.5.3    Wall and Ceiling Colors  	9-5
      9.5.4    Accent Areas	9-5
9.6   Window Covering		9-5
      9.6.1    Blinds	•....  9-6
      9.6.2    Blackout Shades  	9-6
      9.6.3    Draperies and Curtains  	9-6

10 - Specialties  	10-1
10.1  Magnetic, Liquid Chalk, Dry-Marker Boards
      andTackBoards	  10-1
10.2  Interior Signage Systems and Building
      Directory	  10-1
      10.2.1   General  	  10-1
      10.2.2   Door Identification  	  10-1
      10.2.3   RoomNumbering 	10-1
      10.2.4   Building Directory	  10-1
10.3  Portable Fire Extinguishers 	  10-1
      10.3.1   Fire Extinguisher Locations	  10-1
10.4  Safety Devices	  10-2
10.5  Laboratory Casework	  10-2
      10.5.1   General	  10-2
      10.5.2   Modular Design	  10-2
      10,5.3   Support Capability	  10-2
      10.5.4   Cabinet Assemblies	  10-2
      10.5.5   BaseCabinets	  10-3
      10.5.6   Wall Cabinets	  10-3
      10.5.7   Shelving  	  10-3
      10.5.8   Countertops	  10-3
      10.5.9   Materials	  10-3
      10.5.10  Quality	  10-4
      10.5.11  Minimum Standards 	  10-4
      10.5.12  Laboratory Fume Hoods	  10-4
      10.5.13  Environmental Rooms	  10-4
11 - Equipment	11-1
11.1  Design	  11-1
11.2  Catalog Cut Sheets	  11-
11.3  Layout and Clearances	  11-
11.4  Floor Preparation	  11-
11.5  Structural Support	  ti-
ll.6  Special Ventilation Requirements for Equipmedfl-
11.7  Equipment Specifications	  11-
11.8  High-technology Equipment	  11-
11.9  Mechanical and Electrical Equipment	  11-2
11.10 Equipment Consultants	11-2

12 - Furnishings	12-1
12.1  Furnishings	  12-1

13-Special Construction  	13-1
13.1  Noise Control	  13-1
      13.1.1    Vibration Isolation	  13-1
      13.1.2    Piping And Ducting Systems	13-1
      13.1.3    Sound Dampening	  13-2
13.2  Fire Walls and Fire Barrier Walls	  13-2
      13.2.1    Firewalls	13-2
      13.2.2    Fire Barrier Walls	  13-2
      13.2.3    Openings	  13-2
13.3  Vertical Openings and Shafts	  13-2
      13.3.1    Atriums	  13-2
      13.3.2    Shafts	  13-2
      13.3.3    Monumental Stairs  	  13-3
      13.3.4    Escalators	  13-3
      13.3.5    Penetrations 	  13-3

14 - Conveying Systems	14-1
14.1  General  	  14-1
14.2  Elevators 	  14-1
      14.2.1    Elevator Recall	  14-1
      14.2.2    Smoke Detectors	14-1
      14.2.3    CaptureFloor 	  14-1
      14.2.4    Signage	  14-1
      14,2.5    Chemical Transport Use  	  14-1
14.3  Escalators	  14-1

15 - Mechanical Requirements	15-1
15.1  General  	  15-1
15.2  References	'...  15-1
15.3  Heating, Ventilation, and Air-conditioning
      Requirements	15-2
      15.3.1    General  	  15-2
      15.3.2    HVAC System Performance	  15-2
      15.3.3    Selection Procedure  	  15-3
      15.3.4    Ventilation-Exhaust Systems	15-4
      15.3.5    Equipment Room Ventilation  	15-5
      15.3.6    Waste Heat Recovery Systems	15-6
      15.3.7    Energy Efficiency	:	15-6
      15.3.8    Laboratory   	  15-6
15.4  Energy Management Control Systems	15-7
      15.4.1    General	  15-7
      15.4.2    Zoning	  15-7
      15.4.3    Control Setback and Shutoff
               Devices	  15-7
      15.4.4    Humidity Control  	  15-7
      15.4.5    Simultaneous Heating and Cooling   15-7
      15.4.6    Mechanical Ventilation Control ...  15-8
      15.4.7    Economizer Cycle	  15-8
      15.4.8    Automatic Control Dampers  	  15-8
      15.4.9    Variable-Air-Volume System Fan
               Control  	  15-8
      15.4.10  Fire and Smoke Detection and

-------
February 1998
                          Architecture, Engineering,
                            and Planning Guidelines
                                                                                              Table of Contents
               Protection Controls	 15-8
       15.4.11  Gas-Fired Air-Handling Unit Controll5-9
       15.4.12  Zone Control/Distribution System
               Control	 15-9
       15.4.13  Control Valve Selection	 15-9
       15.4.14  Two-pipe and Three-pipe Combination
               Heating And Cooling Systems	 15-9
       15.4.15  Load Control For Hot-Water
               Systems	  15-10
       15.4.16  Load Control for Chilled-Water
               Systems	;	  15-10
       15.4.17  Cooling Tower and Water-Cooled
               Condenser System Controls	  15-10
       15.4.18  Control of Steam Systems	  15-10
       15.4.19  Energy Management Systems  ...  15-10
       15.4.20  Energy Metering	  15-11
15.5   Heating, Ventilation, and Air-Conditioning
       Systems	  15-11
       15.5.1   General	  15-11
       15.5.2   Air-Conditioning Systems	  15-11
       15.5.3   WaterChillers	  15-12
       15.5.4   Condensers/Condensing Units ...  15-12
       15.5.5   Cooling Towers	  15-13
       15.5.6   Building Heating Systems	  15-13
       15.5.7   Heating Equipment	  15-14
       15.5.8   Water Distribution Systems	  15-15
       15.5.9   Pumps and Pumping Systems  ...  15-16
       15.5.10  Steam Distribution Systems	  15-16
       15.5.11  Air-Handling and Air Distribution
               Systems	  15-16
       15.5.12  Fans/Motors  	  15-17
       15.5.13  Coils	  15-18
       15.5.14  Ducts	  15-18
       15.5.15  Walk-In Environmental and Cold
               Storage Rooms  	  15-18
       15.5.16  Central Plant Heat Generation
               and Distribution  	  15-19
15.6   Load Calculations	  15-22
       15.6.1   GENERAL  	  15-22
       15.6.2   Submission	  15-22
       15.6.3   Design	  15-22
       15.6.4   Air Volume/exchange  	  15-22
       15.6.5   Auxiliary Air  	  15-22
15.7   Laboratory Fume Hoods	  15-23
       15.7.1   Hood Requirements  	  15-23
       15.7.2   Fume Hood Exhaust 	  15-24
       15.7.3   Constant Volume Bypass-Type
               Fume Hood	  15-24
       15.7.4   Variable-air-volume (VAV) Hoods 15-25
       15.7.5   Radioisotope Hoods	  15-25
       15.7.6   Perchloric Acid Fume Hoods	  15-26
       15.7.7   Special Purpose Hoods 	  15-26
       15.7.8   Horizontal Sashes	  15-26
       15.7.9   Other Ventilated Enclosures 	  15-27
       15.7.10  Face Velocities	  15-27
       15.7.11  Annual Certification 	  15-27
       15.7.12  Exhaust System	  15-27
       15.7.13  Noise	  15-28
       15.7.14  Effluent Cleaning	  15-28
15.8  Other Equipment	 15-28
      15.8.1    GloveBoxes	 15-28
      15.8.2   Biological Safety Cabinets  	15-28
      15.8.3   Flammable Liquid Storage Cabinetsl5-29
      15.8.4   Laboratory Service Fittings	15-29
15.9  Air Filtration and Exhaust Systems	 15-29
      15.9.1    Dry Filtration 	 15-29
      15.9.2   Absolute Filtration  	15-29
      15.9.3   Air-Cleaning Devices for Special
               Applications 	 15-30
      15.9.4   Operation 	 15-30
      15.9.5   Maintenance Access	 15-30
      15.9.6   Location of Air Intake	15-30
      15.9.7   Ventilation Rates	15-30
      15.9.8   Room Air Change Rates  	15-31
      15.9.9   Plume Study (Laboratory Exhaust) 15-31
15.10 Plumbing	 15-31
      15.10.1   Piping	 15-31
      15.10.2  Plumbing Fixtures	 15-32
      15.10.3  Backflow Preventers	 15-33
      15.10.4  Safety Devices	 15-33
      15.10.5  Emergency Eyewash Units	15-33
      15.10.6  Emergency Safety Showers	 15-33
      15.10.7  Glassware Washing Sinks	 15-34
      15.10.8  Compressed-air Systems	 15-34
      15.10.9  Vacuum Systems	 15-34
      15.10.10 Centralized Laboratory Water
               Systems	 15-34
      15.10.11 Natural Gas Distribution System  . 15-35
      15.10.12 Nonflammable- and Flammable-Gas
               Systems	 15-35
      15.10.13 Drinking Fountains	 15-36
      15.10.14 Toilets, Sinks, and Lavatories ... 15-36
      15.10.15 Shower Stalls 	 15-38
      15.10.16 HoseBibbs	 15-38
15.11 Nonsanitary Laboratory Waste	 15-38
15.12 Codes and Standards  	 15-38
15.13 Testing, Balancing, and Commissioning ... 15-39
      15.13.1   Independent Contractor	 15-39
      15.13.2  Contractor Credentials	 15-39
      15.13.3  Contractor Registration	 15-39
      15.13.4  Scope of Work	 15-39
      15.13.5  Testing and Balancing Devices .. 15-40
      15.13.6  Mechanical System Commissioning 15-41
      15.13.7  Reporting 	 15-41
15.14 Ductwork	 15-41
      15.14.1  General	 15-41
      15.14.2  Fabrication  	 15-41
      15.14.3  AccessPanels	 15^2
      15.14.4  Insulation 	 15-42
      15.14.5  FireDampers 	 15-«
15.15 Fire Protection
      15.15.1  General
      15.15.2  Water Supplies	 15^12
      15.15.3  SizeandZoning	 15-43
      15.15.4  Systems
      15.15.5  Operation
      15.15.6  Codes 	 15-46
                                                       VI

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planninq Guidelines
                                     February 1998
Table of Contents
16 - Electrical Requirements	16-1
16.1  General  	  16-1
      16.1.1    Code Compliance  	  16-1
      16.1.2    Electrical Installations	  16-1
      16.1.3    Energy Conservation in Design ...  16-1
      16.1.4    Coordination of Work	  16-2
      16.1.5    Power Factors	  16-2
      16.1.6    Handicapped Accessibility
               Requirements 	  16-2
      16.1.7    Material and Equipment Standards  16-2
      16.1.8    Environmental Requirements	16-2
16.2  Primary Distribution	  16-3
      16.2.1    Ductbanks and Cable	  16-3
      16.2.2    Switches	  16-3
      16.2.3    Overhead Power Supply Lines	16-3
      16,2.4    System Redundancy	  16-3
16.3  Service Entrance	16-3
      16.3.1    Overhead Services	  16-3
      16.3.2    Underground Services	  16-4
      16.3.3    Service Capacity	  16-4
      16.3.4    Metering	  164
      16.3.5    Service Entrance Equipment	  16-4
16.4  Interior Electrical Systems	  16-4
      16.4.1    Basic Materials and Methods	16-4
      16.4.2    Service Equipment  	  16-5
      16.4.3    Conductors  	  16-5
      16.4.4    Raceways  	  16-5
      16.4.5    Harmonics	  16-6
      16.4.6    Distribution Equipment	  16-6
      16.4.7    Motor Controllers and Disconnects  16-8
      16.4.8    Grounding	 16-10
      16.4.9    Laboratory Power Requirements . 16-10
16.5  Interior Lighting System	 16-11
      16.5.1    Illumination Levels	 16-11
      16.5.2    Lighting Controls  	 16-12
      16.5.3    Lamps And Ballasts	 16-12
      16.5.4    Emergency Lighting (Battery Units)16-12
      16.5.5    Energy Conservation	 16-13
      16.5.6    GreenLights	 16-13
      16.5.7    Glare	 16-13
      16.5.8    Automatic Data Processing Areas  16-13
16.6  Fire Safety Requirements for Lighting
      Fixtures	 16-13
      16.6.1    Mounting   	 16-13
      16.6.2    Fluorescent Fixtures  	 16-14
      16.6.3    Light Diffusers 	 16-14
      16.6.4    Location   	 16-14
16.7  Exterior Lighting Systems  	 16-14
      16.7.1    General	 16-14
      16.7.2    Parking Lot Lighting	 16-14
      16.7.3    Building Facade Lighting  	 16-14
      16.7.4    Traffic Control Lighting	 16-14
      16.7.5    Roadway Lighting	 16-15
      16.7.6    Exterior Electric Signs	 16-15
16.8  Emergency Power System	 16-15
      16.8.1    General	 16-15
      16.8.2    Emergency Loads  	 16-16
       16.8.3   Uninterruptible Power Supply ... 16-17
16.9  Lightning Protection System	 16-20
       16.9.1   Minimum Scope  	 16-20
       16.9.2   Additional Scope	 16-20
       16.9.3   Master Label	 16-20
16.10 Seismic Requirements 	 16-20
       16.10.1  Seismic Review	 16-20
16.11 Automatic Data Processing Power Systems  . 16-20
       16.11.1  Isolation of ADP Systems  	 16-20
       16.11.2  Computer Power	 16-20
       16.11.3  Power Panelboards and Distribution
               Panels	 16-21
       16.11.4  Ughting  	 16-21
       16.11.5  Grounding	 16-21
16.12 Cathodic Protection 	 16-21
       16.12.1  Investigation and Recommendation 16-21
16.13 Environmental Considerations (Raceways,
      Enclosures) 	 16-21
       16.13.1  Corrosive Atmosphere	 16-21
       16.13.2  Saltwater Atmosphere	 16-21
       16.13.3  ExtremeCold 	 16-21
       16.13.4  Explosive Atmosphere	 16-21
       16.13.5  Floodplain Areas	 16-22
16.14 Communication Systems	 16-22
       16.14.1  Telecommunications/Data Systems 16-22
      16.14.2  Video Conference Rooms	 16-22
       16.14.3  Recording Systems  	 16-22
       16.14.4  Satellite Dishes	 16-22
       16.14.5  Television Broadcast Systems ... 16-22
       16.14.6  Microwave Communications .... 16-23
      16.14.7  Other	 16-23
16.15 Alarm and Security Systems	 16-23
      16.15.1  Fire Alarm System	 16-23
       16.15.2  Safety Alarm System	 16-28
       16.15.3  Security Systems		 16-29
       16.15.4  Disaster Evacuation System	 16-32
       16.15.5  Exit Lighting and Markings	 16-32
APPENDICES

Appendix A:   Codes, Regulatory Requirements,
               Reference Standards, Trade
               Organizations, and Guides

Appendix B:   Indoor Air Quality (IAQ)
               Requirements

Appendix C:   Room Data Sheets

Appendix D:   Design Guidelines

Appendix E:   Abbreviations and Acronyms

INDEX
                                                      Vll

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines	.  ,_  ,	February 1998
Introduction
                                           Introduction
PURPOSE

The Architecture, Engineering, and Planning Guidelines (hereafter referred to as either the AE&P Guidelines or this
Manual) is a compilation of generic information that shall be used in conjunction with the Facility Safety, Health, and
Environmental Management Manual (the Safety Manual) as the basis for the Program of Requirements (FOR) and
Solicitation for Offers (SFO) for new construction (including additions and alterations) of Environmental Protection
Agency (EPA) laboratory facilities projects and for the evaluation of existing facilities.  This Manual is not a Program
of Requirements or a Solicitation for Offers but is a set of standards and guidelines to be used for a number of purposes.
It shall be used alongside codes and regulations to develop construction documentation for EPA facilities. This Manual
is restrictive only in that it is a set of guidelines and minimum standards.  It is intended to be used throughout the
design process, with the concurrence of EPA, to develop and establish solutions that meet the requirements established
herein in the form of construction documents for public bidding and the award of construction contracts.

Citations of standards, codes, or references within this Manual should be assumed to refer to the most current edition.
Years and publication dates specifically stated in the Manual reflect the version in use when the Manual was originally
written and published. When using this Manual, the user should verify that the documents referenced are the most
current and have not been superseded.

The primary purpose of this Manual is to establish a consistent, Agencywide level  of quality and excellence in the
planning, design, and construction of all EPA facilities projects. The Manual provides basic standards and guidelines
for design and construction. It is not intended to deter use of more stringent or greater performance criteria for design.
Project-specific design and construction requirements that are not in conflict with the requirements of this document
should be met in developing the final program. The generic information and requirements described herein must be
verified and further defined and refined. They are used in specific design cases.

ORGANIZATION OF THE MANUAL

This document is generally organized according to the Masterformat, published by the Construction Specifications
Institute (CSI).  The 16-section format, outlined below, should be familiar to many in the fields of architecture,
planning, engineering, and construction. When used throughout this Manual, the term "new construction*' shall be
understood to include additions and alterations to existing buildings.

SECTION 1:     GENERAL PLANNING AND DESIGN DATA
                This section provides information on EPA's planning goals, which may relate to any specific project
                The various project-specific EPA offices and their organizations are defined,  and the planning
                objectives and criteria are documented.  The requirements that may apply to a specific project are
                compiled, and the project-specific requirements documented, in an overview and summary fashion.
                General facility requirements will be unique to each project. This section outlines the categories that
                should be addressed.

                The section mixes project-specific information with guidelines that may be used for all projects. It
                provides an overview of new construction and describes the major elements of, and information for,
                any project for which predesign and conceptual design can be performed. Section 1 sets the tone for
                any specific project design and its development. The general information in Section 1 shall be
                carefully modified to be made project specific.  Section 1  also contains an outline for lease
                administration and offer requirements, which shall also be made project specific.
                                                  IX

-------
February 1998
Architecture, Engineering,
 and Planning Guidelines
                                                                                         Introduction
SECTION!:    SITE WORK
               Section  2 provides site and civil requirements for EPA facilities.  In addition to technical
               requirements relating to site work, this section contains design criteria and landscape requirements.

SECTION 3:    CONCRETE
               Section 3 contains standards and guidelines that apply to all new construction and alterations, along
               with some project-specific information.

SECTION 4:    MASONRY
               Section 4 contains standards and guidelines that apply to all new construction and alterations, along
               with some project-specific information.

SECTIONS:    METALS
               Section 5 contains standards and guidelines that apply to all new construction and alterations, along
               with some project-specific information.

SECTION 6:    WOOD AND PLASTICS
               Section 6 contains standards and guidelines that apply to all new construction and alterations, along
               with some project-specific information.

SECTION?:    THERMAL AND MOISTURE REQUIREMENTS
               Section 7 contains standards and guidelines that apply to all new construction and alterations, along
               with some project-specific information.

SECTION 8:    DOORS AND WINDOWS
               Section 8 contains standards and guidelines that apply to all new construction and alterations, along
               with some project-specific infonnatioa

SECTION 9:    FINISHES
               Section 9 contains standards and guidelines that apply to all new construction and alterations, along
               with some project-specific information.

SECTION 10:   SPECIALTIES
               Section 10 contains standards and guidelines that apply to all new construction and alterations, along
               with some project-specific information.

SECTION 11:   EQUIPMENT
               Section 11 contains standards and guidelines that apply to all new construction and alterations, along
               with some project-specific information.

SECTION 12:   FURNISHINGS
               No information specific to furnishings is  included in  this manual.  Information on  Green
               specifications can be obtained from the Architecture, Engineering and Real Estate Branch (AEREB)
               and the Green Buildings Council.

SECTION 13:   SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
               Section 13 contains standards and guidelines that apply to all new construction and alterations, along
               with some project-specific information.

SECTION 14:   CONVEYING SYSTEMS
               Section 14 contains standards and guidelines that apply to all new construction and alterations, along
               with some project-specific information.

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines	February 1998
Introduction


SECTION 15:    MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
                Section 15 contains standards and guidelines that apply to all new construction and alterations, along
                with some project-specific information.

SECTION 16:    ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
                Section 16 contains standards and guidelines that apply to all new construction and alterations, along
                with some project-specific information.

APPENDICES   Several appendices are included with this document. They contain certain necessary project-specific
                and generic information, descriptions, procedures, and data that are required for the project but are
                too lengthy and detailed to be included in the main document.  Included in these appendices are
                guideplates of room data and floor plans for specific room types. These guideplates illustrate
                minimum dimensions,  handicapped access, equipment,  furnishing layouts, and specific room
                requirements for finishes; heating, ventilation, and air-conditioning (HVAC); electrical power,
                plumbing; and communications.

INDEX         The Index provides an alphabetical listing of topics contained in this Manual referenced to paragraph
                numbers.
USE OF THIS MANUAL

This Manual does not relieve the architects, engineers, and consultants of any of their responsibilities as design
professionals.  It is intended only to clarify and supplement existing codes and requirements to facilitate the design
process for the design professional and the offerer. The architect, engineers, and consultants who will be involved in
the design of an EPA-occupied laboratory, office, or storage facility shall be licensed professionals in their fields of
expertise and shall be experienced in the design of such facilities. They will be required to ensure that all portions of
the project comply with all established applicable codes, regulations, and practices for laboratory facilities, as well as
with this Manual.

This document establishes basic design parameters.  It is a set of standards and guidelines that must be used in
programming and designing a laboratory.
FORMATTING AND PARAGRAPH NUMBERING

The paragraphs in each section of this Manual are considered to be subsections and are identified by a hierarchical
numbering system. When a paragraph is not numbered, it should be considered pan of the preceding subsection.
When subsections from this Manual are used in the project-specific manual, the subsections shall have the same
numbers that they have in this Manual. Because the subsections of the project-specific manual are not renumbered,
the project-specific manual can be directly compared and referenced to subsections in this generic Manual.  When
subsections from this Manual are not used, those numbers are omitted from the project-specific manual.  As an
alternative, the project-specific manual may contain all subsection numbers from this Manual, with the notation "this
subsection not used" inserted after those numbers not included in the project-specific manual.


END OF INTRODUCTION
                                                  XI

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines	February 1998
Section 1 - General Planning and Design Data
                 Section 1 - General Planning and Design Data


1.1    General Scope of Project

1.1.1   PURPOSE
       A description and purpose of any proposed new facility shall be provided. The following questions are among
       the items to be addressed when a new facility is under consideration:

       •   Does the new facility construction replace an old facility or a number of facilities?

       •   Does the new facility construction represent expansion of an existing facility or the addition of new square
           footage without moving the current operation?

       •   Does the new facility construction represent consolidation?

       •   Has a specific site been established?

       •   Are there special studies that must be performed early in the project development, such as analysis of
           whether a group must consolidate or whether more or less space is required?

       •   Is the proposed project required for the upgrade  and/or improvement of the efficiency of existing
           operations?

1.1.2   PLANNING STUDIES, EVALUATIONS, AND REPORTS
       A list of all planning documents, studies, evaluations, and reports shall be provided, along with an executive
       summary of their conclusions and results.
                     i


1.2    Background Information

1.2.1  ' EXISTING FACILITY DESCRIPTION
       A brief overview and description of all existing facilities, and of the campus if the facilities are so composed,
       shall be provided. The use of photographs is encouraged.

1.2.2   FACILITY AND CAMPUS COMPONENTS
       A more descriptive short subsection on each component of the facility or campus shall be provided.

1.2.3   FUNCTIONAL ORGANIZATION
       A brief introductory description of the organization of the various branches and laboratories in the project and
       how they interrelate, and a more detailed description of each branch and laboratory, shall be provided.


1.3    Planning  Requirements

1.3.1   PLANNING GOALS
       A brief description of the goals of the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and of the subgoals required
       to reach each goal shall be provided for any given project. The goals and subgoals should state which current
       conditions are good or correct and  must be maintained and which current conditions are not good or not
       correct and must be resolved or improved.  Each subgoal should state any new condition that must be met.
       Examples are as follows:

                                               1-1

-------
                                                                               Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998                                                                    and Planning Guidelines
                                                             Section 1 - General Planning and Design Data


        •  Increase interaction and communication among offices and laboratories, among all laboratories, and/or
           among all offices, as necessary.
           Improve circulation for safety and to minimize travel distances and time.
           Consolidate laboratories if such consolidation is necessary and feasible.
           Anticipate expansion.
           Zone and separate according to function.
           Share resources.
           Design laboratories according to a modular design plan.
           Design the typical laboratory module for flexibility.
           Increase efficiency of laboratory module.
           Increase flexibility and adaptability.
           Decrease maintenance costs.
           Enhance image.
           Enhance quality of life.
           Increase personnel safety.
           Define spaces or functions that must be adjacent to one another.

1.3.2    PLANNING OBJECTIVES
        Each of the goals listed under Planning Goals shall be defined, and the specific subgoal shall be stated. Each
        requirement shall also be noted and described.

1.3.3    PLANNING CRITERIA
        Planning criteria must be established and agreed upon in order to establish the net design area for the project
        (net design area is defined in subsection 1.5.3). There are likely to be several categories of space, such as
        office spaces, laboratory spaces, specialized spaces, and storage spaces. An additional category, exterior areas,
        contains space not directly included within the facility and not included in net design area.

1.3.3.1     GROSS AND NET AREA
           Cross area represents all net area plus all additional space required to provide a complete and functioning
           facility (e.g., egress and other required corridors, stairs, restrooms, mechanical and electrical rooms,
           interior and exterior walls, building structure, shafts and similar nonoccupied or nonoccupiable spaces,
           and construction). Net area is the gross area less circulation and utility spaces, as defined by the General
           Services Administration (GSA).  The net area divided by the gross area yields the percentage design
           efficiency of the facility. Definitions of net usable and gross usable area (which are distinct from net and
           gross design areas) can be obtained from the EPA project officer.

1.3.3.2     INCLUSION OF EXTERIOR AREA
           Exterior area is space that is not included within the facility buildings but that must be on the facility site.
           This space may be open air and unprotected, such as storage areas for vehicles; semienclosed (for instance,
           under a shed roof or in a fenced enclosure), such as fuel storage areas; or totally enclosed, such as a remote
           power plant for support services.

1.3.3.3     OFFICE SPACE
           Planning criteria must be established  for general office and interior support spaces. Criteria may be
           established by using the GSA formula, which sets primary square footage for office space for clerical,
           administrative, paraprofessional, professional, managerial, and executive personnel at 125 net square feet
           per person plus an additional 22 percent, or 27'/z net square feet per person, for support areas. Support
           areas do not include storage or specialized spaces.  Thus, with this method, 1521/3 net square feet are
           allocated per individual.  EPA must agree upon the method to be used to establish square footage. The
           above (GSA) method of determining general office and interior support space shall be followed unless
           specific and demonstrated functional requirements would justify doing otherwise.
                                                  1-2

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines                                                                  February1998
Section 1 - General Planning and Design Data


1.3.3.4     LABORATORY-RELATED OFFICE SPACE
           Laboratory personnel who must also evaluate and interpret data and prepare written reports and
           manuscripts must have some office space outside of the laboratories where they work. The size of these
           offices should be computed as indicated in subsection 1.3.3.3. The same standards utilized for the regular
           office spaces are applicable to these office spaces, with the added provision that the laboratory-related
           office space should be located as close as possible to the laboratory space to which it relates. Laboratory-
           related office space shall not be included within the physical laboratory room.

1.3.3.5     LABORATORY SPACE
           Planning criteria must be established for modular laboratory space. Square footage may be set at 308 net
           design square feet per module. On the basis of EPA functions and tasks, a module size of 11 feet by no
           less than 26 feet and no more than 33 feet has been established as the standard that must be followed in
           all laboratories except those where functions and tasks would justify using a different standard.

1.3.3.6     SPECIALIZED SPACE
           Specialized spaces include special laboratories that do not fit a set module and require square footages
           significantly  greater than those needed  for standard laboratories.  Such  spaces include pilot plant
           operations and animal care facilities. These spaces may or may not need to be located with other modular
           laboratory space or office space.

1.3.3.7     STORAGE SPACE
           Storage spaces, as herein classified, represent large open  storage areas that are required to support
           specialty or specific  functions; these include, in addition to standard storage space, storage space that is
           part of laboratory or office space.  This storage space may have to be adjacent to or near a laboratory or
           remote from the new facility.

1.3.3.8     DAY-CARE FACILITIES
           Day-care centers must comply with National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 101, Life Safety Code,
           as well as with EPA's guidelines, GSA's Child Care Center Design Guide (PBS-PQ140), and the
           licensing requirements of the local jurisdiction. Refer to the Safety Manual for minimum requirements.


1.4     Scope of Requirements

1.4.1    GENERAL
        A brief overview of the  scope of the specific project requirements shall be provided.

1.4.2    CODES
        A brief statement about  applicable local codes that must be followed shall be provided here, with a reference
        to Appendix A, Codes,  Regulatory Requirements, Reference Standards, Trade Organizations, and Guides.
        This reference shall include a statement noting that not all potentially applicable codes, requirements,
        references, organizations, and guides may be listed.  Include the occupancy classification of the facility and
        reference to compliance with applicable codes. A code review document shall be produced that documents
        the research performed to comply with all applicable codes. This document shall be updated, at a minimum,
        at the end of each phase of the project.

1.4.3    FACILITY ORGANIZATION
        Program function statements shall be provided for each of the offices, branches, and laboratories involved in
        the project and for their interrelationships.

1.4.4    SUMMARY OF REQUIREMENTS
        A general description of the required total net area of the new facility shall be provided, excluding all exterior
        areas.  A general description of the net exterior area shall be provided.

                                                 1-3

-------
                                                                           Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998                                                                 and Planning Guidelines
                                                          Section 1 - General Planning and Design Data


1.4.4.1    FACILITY SUMMARY
          A general listing of net assignable space shall be provided in net area for each of the following types of
            ace:

          •  Office space
          *  Modular laboratory space
          *  Specialized space
          *  Storage space
          •  Exterior areas
             -  Vehicle holding
             -  Fuel storage
             .  Hazardous material/waste storage.

1.4.4.2    NET AREA SUMMARY
          A sample summary chart of total net area is provided in Table 1.4.4.2, Net Area Summary.

1.4.4.3    PERSONNEL SUMMARY
          A sample summary chart of personnel, by organization and group, is provided in Table 1.4.4.3, Personnel
          Summary.
                                               1-4

-------
 Architecture, Engineering,
 and Planning Guidelines
February 1998
Section 1 - General Planning and Design Data
Table 1.4.4.2 Net Area Summary
(Example for Illustration and Format Only)
Net Area (square feet)
EPA Building
ORD




















OAR





OARM








Total


HERL
OD
NTD
GTD
RSD
DTD
ETD
AREAL
OD
ACMD
MRDD
HEFRD
QATSD
EERD
AEERL
OD
GECD
PCD
. ECAO
OSORD

OAQPS
00
ESD
AQMD
TSD

OARM
OD
CMD
HRMD
NCPD
FMSD-O
FMSD-C
NDPD

Office
127,900
41,283
1,375
6,937
10,138
6,000
6,650
10,183
54,325
4,950
14,375
10,500
9,625
7,500
7,375
20,670
3,035
8,170
9,465
9,372
2,250
55,030
55,030
2,935
20,900
19,195
12,000
71.125
71,125
2,250
7,000
3,500
11,250
6,250
6,250
40,875
254,055
Lab
137,597
73,350
0
11,110
16,720
1,100
15,180
31.240
42,120
0
9,680
12,100
6,920
9,020
4,400
16,590
0
3,520
13,070
0
3,537
4,620
4,620
0
0
0
4,620
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
142,217
Special
99,535
38,733
1,320
1,210
1,870
30,583
1,440
2,310
22,305
990
3,190
6,985
4,840
3,860
440
33,482
6,402
3,840
23,240
1,400
3,615
9,385
9,385
2,455
1,680
3,650
1,600
100,415
100,415
600
1,920
1,920
2,525
11,505
23,980
57,965
209,335
Storage
15,470
2,890
600
220
0
1,410
0
660
9,080
5,200
440
220
3,200
0
240
1,100
0
0
1,100
1,600
800
3,680
3,680
0
400
640
2,640
10,023
10,023
150
738
300
300
3,385
0
5,150
29,173
Total
380,722
158,256
3.295
19,477
28.728
39,093
23,270
44,393
128,050.
11,140
27,685
31,805
24,585
20,380
12,455
71.842
9,437
15,530
46,875
12,372
10,202
72,715
72,715
5,390
22,980
23,485
20,860
181,563
181,563
3,000
9,658
5,720
14,075
21,140
23.980
103,990
635,000
The above acronyms are sample organizational codes. Each major organization must be subdivided into its component groups.
                                                          1-5

-------
February 1998
Architecture, Engineering,
  and Planning Guidelines

Table 1.4.4.3

EPA Building
ORD




















OAR





OARM








Total

Personnel Summary



HERL
00
NTD
GTD
RSD
DTD
ETD
AREAL
OD
ACMD
MRDD
HEFRD
QATSD
EERD
AEERL
OD
GECD
PCD
ECAO
OSORD

OAQPS
OD
ESD
AQMD
TSD

OARM
OD
CMD
HRMD
NCPD
FMSD-0
FMSD-C
NDPD


Section 1 - General Planning
and Design Data
(Example for Illustration and Format Only)

Office*
893
254
11
42
55
48
40
58
417
22
115
84
77
60
59
142
23
58
61
62
18
418
418
19
160
143
96
567
567
18
56
28
90
50
0
325
1,878
Number of Personnel
Technician**
428
295
0
46
89
35
45
80
60
60
0
0
0
0
0
73
4
23
46
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
108
108
0
0
0
0
0
0
108
536

Total
1,321
549
11
88
144
83
85
138
477
82
115
84
77
60
59
215
27
81
107
62
18
418
418
19
160
143
96
675
675
18
56
28
90
50
0
433
2,414
* Office personnel working in laboratories are shown only as office occupants.

"The term "technician" refers to laboratory personnel who do not have office space outside of the laboratory area.
  This is done so that the total personnel count reflects an accurate head count of people.

The above acronyms are sample organizational codes. Each major organization must be subdivided into its component groups.
                                                            1-6

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines                                                                   February 1998
Section 1 • General Planning and Design Data
1.5    Facility Design and Layout

1.5.1    OVERVIEW
        In general, the information contained in this document must apply to existing buildings as well as to any
        possible new construction. EPA can only present the generic space requirements, identify the types of spaces
        anticipated for the various functions of the facility, identify general technical requirements, and give general
        guidance for actual layout.  This subsection contains design requirements that shall be used as guides and
        references.  In addition, model room data sheets are included in Appendix C with examples that provide
        general, and some specific, program requirements.  Specific program criteria and space identification and
        sizes shall be developed during the programming phase of the specific  project.  The  purpose of the
        programming phase is to determine the quantitative and qualitative requirements of the specific program and
        to relate these requirements to the available budget. Specific project criteria and requirements must be
        verified with EPA.  The design professional must work in close coordination with EPA to produce the final
        building layout in accordance with this document and the guidance gained through consultation with EPA.
        Appropriate local, state, and federal regulatory agencies shall also be consulted.

1.5.2    SITE DEVELOPMENT
        Design and layout requirements relating to the facility site and exterior environment are discussed in
        Section 2, Site Work, of this Manual.

1.5.3    PROGRAMMED SPACE FOR DESIGN AND LAYOUT
        The final accepted program shall establish the definite net design area requirements for the facility and shall
        establish gross and net area requirements for the exterior areas of the project. Exterior areas are areas that
        are not contained within the building envelope of the main facility but must be on-site. An understanding of
        the design efficiency of the facility and all exterior areas provides the foundation for the layout of all on-site
        requirements. EPA may require additional space in remote facilities; however, these facilities are not a part
        of the program established by this document.

1.5.3.1     EFFICIENCY
           Net design area for the project is established by the planning goals and objectives and the planning criteria
           defined in subsection 1.3. The planning goals and objectives, along with the established typical generic
           or specific laboratory requirements, as defined in the room data sheets included in Appendix C, produce
           a design efficiency for research facilities of this type (ratio of net to gross area).  Generally, the design
           efficiency ratio ranges from approximately SO percent to 65 percent, with an average efficiency of
           approximately 58 percent.

1.5.3.2     EXPANSION
           Providing for future expansion is an integral part of the requirements for any new EPA project.  The
           design  professional shall review and/or confirm with EPA all anticipated expansion needs and shall
           recommend methods of accommodating expansion to meet these anticipated needs, as well as addressing
           future expansion beyond the anticipated needs.  The design professional shall be responsible for
           recommending the direction(s) of expansion, after  consultation with EPA.  All expansion  shall be
           accommodated in a logical manner, both programmatically and by construction sequencing.  For new
           construction, EPA expects provision for a 25 percent expansion.

           •   Corridor layout and circulation patterns shall enhance flexibility and aid in future expansion. Open
              plans, which allow greater flexibility in expansion and general facility changes, are encouraged where
              feasible, practical, and permitted by EPA.

           •   Floor plans that encircle a department with permanent corridors, stairs, mechanical and electrical
              rooms, or other fixed building elements that are difficult to relocate should be avoided.
                                                 1-7

-------
                                                                               Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998                                                                   and Planning Guidelines
                                                             Section 1 - General Planning and Design Data


           *  Column-free functional areas should be maximized, and use of transfer beams should be minimized.

           •  Anticipated expansion must be reviewed by representatives of all disciplines on the project.

           •  Expansion space shall be designed for each type of space used in the facility and for parking facilities.

           *  Electrical, mechanical, plumbing, and other support systems should be designed and sized to permit
              modification and expansion with the least cost and least disruption to overall operations.

              -  Utilities and support services, such as heating, ventilation, and air-conditioning (HVAC);
                 plumbing; and electrical systems,  shall allow expansion or contraction in the services provided.
                 The location of utilities and support services and the size of lines, method of connection, and
                 valving shall be such as to minimize interruption of service, maximize the systems' accessibility
                 to the space they service, and allow access to each module of the system for service and repair
                 without disrupting services in other modules.

           •  Design drawings that show existing building and site conditions along with proposed building and site
              designs are required to show both proposed building and expansion areas. All drawings shall be at
              the same scale. Enlarged studies of selected areas may be included.  However, EPA desires a complete
              overview massing of the entire site for each proposed design, with expansion and flexibility clearly
              defined.

1.5.4    PLANNING OF EXTERIOR AREAS AND FACILITIES
        The types of spaces included as exterior areas are listed in subsection 1.3.3.2. Information for specific facility
        design and layout is provided in subsection 1.5, Facility Design and Layout, and subsection 2.4, Site
        Development Exterior areas may include the following areas and facilities:

1.5.4.1     OUTSIDE SERVICE AREAS
           Outside service areas comprise:

              Meters
              Vaults
              Transformers
              Dumpsters
              Compactor units
              Emergency generators
              Oxygen tank/manifold
              Pressure reducers
              Valves
              Pump hoses
              Loading docks.

1.5.4.2     ANCILLARY FACILITIES
           Ancillary facilities are appurtenant facilities that are required by the building program and must be located
           immediately outside of a laboratory or specialty space or in close proximity to that space.

1.5.5    ARCHITECTURAL REQUIREMENTS
        The architectural design of all EPA facilities must meet the requirements set forth in the following
        subsections. Goals and guidelines to be considered in the architectural design process are also presented.
                                                 1-8

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines	February 1998
Section 1 - General Planning and Design Data


1.5.5.1     GENERAL
           Hie architecture of any proposed EPA facility shall be functional and flexible—capable of keeping pace
           with the changes that are continually occurring in EPA programs. Facility components shall be organized
           in a functional and aesthetic manner, according to a modular design concept that addresses the needs of
           all users of the facility. The facility should blend in with its natural and man-made environment. The
           design should provide for reduced energy consumption as called for in these design guidelines.

1.5.5.1.1       LIGHTING
              Use of natural light should be maximized where possible. Proposed nonlaboratory work areas that are
              above grade and contiguous with an outside wall shall have windows. Goals set forth in EPA's Green
              Lights Program shall be followed throughout the facility.

1.5.5.1.1.1        LABORATORY LIGHTING
                 Lighting considerations for laboratory space include adequate task lighting; use of natural lighting,
                 where feasible; and reduced energy consumption.

                 •  Laboratories require a high quality of lighting for close investigative work in order to eliminate
                    eye strain and fatigue. Task lighting must be bright, uniform, and glare free. Lighting fixtures
                    must be so positioned as to provide shadow-free  illumination of the laboratory work area.

                 •  The introduction of natural light into the laboratory provides operators with an opportunity for
                    visual relief from the pressures and stress of the work environment. This issue presents design
                    challenges in large, multistoried facilities and has significant impact on planning and
                    functional zoning concepts. Whenever possible, and unless achievement of this end is in direct
                    conflict  with functional requirements, laboratories shall be located in a way that maximizes
                    natural daylight.  Windows in laboratory spaces shall be fixed-panel, nonoperable windows.
                    Laboratories utilizing photographic and optical diagnostic techniques  shall have blackout
                    capability.

1.5.5.1.2       QUALITY-OF-LIFE STANDARDS, LABORATORIES
              This subsection establishes quality-of-life standards for laboratory spaces in the facility. Comfortable
              work environments stimulate productivity, enhance recruitment, and help EPA retain top scientific
              investigators.

1.5.5.1.3       FLEXIBILITY AND ADAPTABILITY
              The building itself and  all of its systems—architectural, mechanical, and electrical—shall be as
              flexible and adaptable as possible because functions and related laboratory operations often change.
              The proposed building(s) and systems shall allowfor future space adjustments with minimal disruption
              to ongoing activities.

1.5.5.1.4       MODULAR DESIGN
              Modular design is the concept upon which flexible laboratory facilities are based. In this design, the
              laboratory module represents the fundamental planning and organizing element. The discipline of
              repetitiveness and regularity of size, shape, and arrangement of space provides the ability to convert
              and renovate space quickly on the basis of  each investigator's unique set of laboratory design
              requirements and demands.

1.5.5.1.4.1        PLANNING MODULE
                 The laboratory planning module establishes a dimensional discipline for dividing space and a
                 method of calculating laboratory systems requirements and distribution concepts. The intent is to
                 determine common denominators for space and systems that will accommodate a variety of
                 functions and uses. As changes are required, the modular planning approach allows the expansion,
                                                 1-9

-------
                                                                                Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998                                                                    and Planning Guidelines
                                                              Section 1 - General Planning and Design Data


                 subdivision, or reconfiguration of rooms without disturbing adjacent spaces or altering or forcing
                 shutdown of, central building utility systems.

                 •   A modular design is required. The planning module size represents the size thought to be most
                     responsive to user requirements.   The  design professional shall, therefore, study the
                     requirements, evaluate the equipment and instrumentation needed for each laboratory, and
                     either use the planning module size or propose other module sizes that architecturally and
                     operationally will provide the required features.

                 •   The structural system shall allow for future changes in various mechanical and utility services.
                     Floor-loading capability shall be uniform throughout the building to permit space usage
                     conversions.

                 •   Laboratory systems capacity must be  determined on the basis of a common per-module
                     denominator that anticipates future needs. In this determination, each module represents a unit
                     of capacity for the building system (e.g., gallons of water, watts of power, cubic feet per minute
                     [dm] of supply and exhaust air).  This generic method of calculating systems distribution
                     ensures  adequate  building utility systems  capacity  and prevents costly shutdown  and
                     reconstruction of primary building systems components.

                 •   Modular laboratory design shall integrate primary building systems (HVAC, piping, electrical
                     power, and communications) into a distribution loop with modulated, consistent, recurring
                     points of distribution relative to each planning module.  These points of distribution give each
                     module access to all laboratory systems; any additional services required in the future can easily
                     be extended from the main distribution loop to the point of use. Each module shall have a
                     readily accessible disconnect from each building system.

                 •   Building systems must be readily accessible for maintenance and servicing. Components that
                     require routine servicing should be located in corridor ceiling spaces or other spaces outside
                     the laboratory perimeter.  Servicing building systems components inside the laboratories is
                     disruptive and difficult because of the amount of scientific equipment that must be protected.
                     Whenever systems  components are placed above ceilings, a lay-in type ceiling should be used,
                     or access panels  installed, to facilitate access for servicing and maintenance.

1.5.5.1.4.2        SIZE OF LABORATORY MODULE
                 The size of a laboratory module shall be as follows:

                 •   The width of the laboratory module shall always be at least 11 feet, from the centerline of the
                     walls framing the laboratory module.

                 •   The depth of a laboratory module should not be less than 26 feet or more than 33 feet. Within
                     these limits,  size shall be determined  on the basis of the task requirements and shall be
                     consistent throughout a given block of laboratory rooms within a laboratory building.

1.5.5.1.4.3        EXPANSION
                 Recognizing the probability of future expansion, a plan should be established that zones the facility
                 horizontally and/or vertically and accommodates future growth in a logical manner. This plan
                 must establish a framework for central building systems, which framework can easily be extended
                 or added to depending on the amount of growth.
                                                 1-10

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines	February 1998
Section 1 - General Planning and Design Data


1.5.5.2     ENTRANCE REQUIREMENTS
           All entrances to the facility must be clearly defined. There shall be only one main entrance, although
           access to this main entrance may be from a variety of directions.  The following are general design
           requirements for the main entrance:

           •  Means of egress shall comply with all applicable codes, with particular attention to the fire safety
              requirements in NFPA101 and Chapter 4, paragraph 4, of the Safety Manual.

           •  The main entrance shall be consistent with the design of the facility. The design of the space(s) and
              the material selection shall express EPA's and the facility's position in the world environmental
              community. Materials shall be high quality and durable,

           •  All entry spaces should be open, airy, and inviting to the entrant

           •  The main entrance must be easily recognizable and allow easy transition to other facility areas by first-
              time users of the facility.

           •  The building subdivisions and the arrangement of exits, corridors, vestibules, lobbies, and rooms
              should allow fast and orderly exit in case of emergency and provide appropriate security for personnel,
              property, and experiments. The facility and interior modules shall have controllable access, which
              should ensure a safe and secure working environment.

           •  A security control station shall be at the main entrance, and security personnel shall have good visual
              control over the building's main entrance and lobby space, as well as monitor control over all other
              exits and entrances.

              -  Often a full-time security station is not economically justified by the amount of staff and visitor
                 traffic through the main entrance of the facility. The receptionist may need to fulfill the security
                 role.

           •  Administrative areas shall be near security control stations.

           •  The receptionist shall support the security control staff, and the reception and security control areas
              shall be at the same location within the entrance/lobby area.

           •  The lobby shall be sized and designed to accommodate the special concerns of tours while maintaining
              discrete security and function.

1.5.5.3     AMENITIES
           A workplace that encourages communication, interaction, and collaboration among its users enhances
           worker productivity and increases employee retention. Staff interaction, especially in laboratory facilities,
           must be promoted by the design solution. Functional organization and relationships that promote such
           interaction  must be utilized.  Strategic  location of common support areas (i.e., conference rooms,
           restrooms, coffee and vending areas, clerical support services, and supplies) and carefully considered
           circulation patterns shall be incorporated to foster meaningful interaction. It is also important to provide
           a place to safely consume food and drink outside of the laboratory. Building amenities must be dedicated,
           neutral spaces that are protected from encroachment and future conversion.

1.5.5.4     HANDICAPPED ACCESS
           The design and layout of an EPA facility must ensure  that the facility is accessible to the physically
           challenged, in accordance with the Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (UFAS) (1988) adopted by
           the GSA in 41 CFR Parts 101-19.6, the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), and all other applicable
           federal, state, and  local laws and standards for buildings and facilities required to be accessible to and


                                                  1-11

-------
                                                                                Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998                                                                    and Planning Guidelines
                                                              Section 1 - General Planning and Design Data


           usable by physically challenged people (barrier-free design). Where different laws and standards are in
           conflict, the most stringent code shall apply.  If there is difficulty in determining which code is most
           stringent, the Government reserves the right to make the final decision on the interpretation of all codes.

1.5.5.4.1      GENERAL ACCESSIBILITY
              General access to the facility and any portion thereof shall be based on common sense design and shall
              comply with all applicable standards, guidelines, and codes, including ADA and GSA 41 CFR Parts
              101-19.6. EPA recognizes that the facility will not be designed only for physically challenged
              individuals.  All applicable requirements shall be clearly understood, and the final design shall not
              only meet these requirements but shall apply their essence in a commonsense manner throughout the
              facility. At a minimum, the design shall meet and exceed all applicable standards, guidelines, and
              codes.  Other aspects of general access are as follows:

              •  Avoid crossing pedestrian and vehicular circulation paths.

              •  Provide adequate circulation space at points of traffic congestion and provide architectural features
                 that emphasize overall circulation patterns and major entrances.

              •  Avoid confusing corridor systems  and extensions of through corridors from department to
                 department

              •  Avoid horseshoe-shaped major corridor systems that require excessive walking distances.

              •  Avoid dead-end departmental corridors.

              •  Minimize single-loaded corridors.

              •  Eliminate major corridors through elevator lobbies or through other areas that tend to concentrate
                 circulation patterns.

              •  Locate vertical transportation so that it is visible from major entrances.

1.5.5.4.2      LABORATORY ACCESSIBILITY
              Accommodating the handicapped in a laboratory demands a design that is flexible, adaptable, and
              common sense. The environment must function properly within handicapped regulatory requirements
              of the law and must offer safety for the users. Casework in all laboratories shall be capable of being
              modified to meet accessibility requirements at minimum cost Some general criteria for handicapped
              accommodation in laboratories are as follows:

              . •  The handicapped-accessible workstation shall provide a work surface that is 30 inches above the
                 floor, with all  wheelchair clearances below.  Adjustable work surfaces that provide a range of
                 height adjustments shall be considered for all such workstations.

              •  Utilities, equipment, and equipment controls for laboratory furniture should be within easy reach
                 of persons who are physically handicapped and have limited mobility. Controls shall have single-
                 action levers or blade handles for easy operation.

              •  Aisle widths and clearances shall be adequate for maneuvering of wheelchair-bound individuals.
                 Aisle widths of 60 inches are required.

              •  Handicapped-accessible workstations shall be located as close to laboratory exits and safety showers
                 as possible.
                                                 1-12

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines                                                                    February 1998
Section 1 - General Planning and Design Data


1.5,5.5     EXTERIOR BUILDING MATERIALS
           In selecting building materials, careful consideration shall be given to all technical criteria.

1.5.5.5.1       EXTERIOR ELEMENTS
              Mechanical, electrical, transportation, and equipment elements that are to be located on the exterior
              of the facility shall be integrated elements of the design. These elements include air intake and
              exhaust vents, exterior lights, utility connections, plumbing vents, fuel tank vents, liquid oxygen tanks,
              transformers, trash compactors, containers, loading docks, condensers, coolingtowers, and mechanical
              equipment

              Mechanical equipment should not be located on roofs, due to vibration concerns, unless it is totally
              impractical to do otherwise. .If mechanical or other equipment is located on the roof, particular
              attention  must be paid to the vibration and to isolating such vibration inside the building. The
              equipment must also be aesthetically screened. Screening shall be designed to aesthetically hide the
              equipment and to prevent the entrance of rain into the fresh-air intakes of the facility and to prevent
              entrainment of laboratory exhaust air into the fresh-air intakes of the facility and adjacent facilities.
                                      t

1.5.5.5.2       DESIGN CHARACTERISTICS
              The design characteristics of wall schemes shall be evaluated in terms of aesthetics, function, and cost
              effectiveness with respect to the following:

              •  Moisture transport.
                                                                 *
              •  Thermal performance.

              •  Aesthetic appropriateness.

              •  Historic considerations (if applicable and appropriate).

              •  Durability (life cycle maintenance costs).

              •  Exterior wall termination at the roof or top of parapet walls (including penthouse).

              •  Construction and control joint locations, considering impact on construction sequence and building
                 movement due to expansion and contraction.

              •  Corner conditions, especially material relationships at the intersection of vertical planes and the
                 continuity of wall supports and flashings.

              •  Load transfer of the wall to the structure, including consideration of structural frame exposure and
                 lateral wall supports.

              •  Weathertight design, including sealant profiles, material adjacencies, and flashing configuration.

              •  Window placement relative to the wall, secondary connection requirements, material adjacencies,
                 window washing, glass type and thickness, and life safety hardware.

           Refer to Section 7, Thermal and Moisture Requirements, of this Manual for additional information on
           exterior building requirements in relation to thermal and moisture protection.
                                                 1-13

-------
                                                                             Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998                                                                  and Planning Guidelines
                                                           Section 1 - General Planning and Design Data


1.5.5.6    PARTITIONS
          Standardization of interior partitions is desirable.  Partitions within the administrative area should be
          easily removable.  Sound isolation and laboratory partitions between modules shall be designed to be
          removable in order to accommodate future reconfiguration of spaces.

1.5.5.6.1       SUBDIVIDING PARTITIONS
              Office subdividing partitions shall comply with the applicable local building code requirements. These
              partitions must be provided at a ratio of 1 linear foot per 10 square feet of space. Partitioning over
              interior office doors is included in the measurement. Partitions must extend from the finished floor
              to the finished ceiling and have a flame spread rating of 25 or less, a smoke development rating of 450
              or less (American Society for Testing and Materials  [ASTM]  E-84 Test), and a minimum sound
              transmission loss (STL) rating of 40.

1.5.5.6.2      PERMANENT PARTITIONS
              Permanent partitions must be provided, as necessary,  to surround stairs, corridors, elevator shafts,
              toilets, janitor closets, meeting and conference rooms, and mechanical rooms. They shall have a flame
              spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke development rating of 450 or less (ASTM E-84 Test). Stairs,
              elevators, and  other floor openings shall be enclosed by partition(s) and have the fire resistance
              required by applicable codes.   These partitions shall extend from the floor to the underside of the
              structure above, shall  effectively isolate sound  and vibration, and shall meet all fire separation
              requirements.

1.5.6    SPACE IDENTIFICATION
        Specific information will be provided for each project

1.5.7    SPECIFIC ROOM REQUIREMENTS
        This subsection describes information and design requirements for specific rooms and areas.

1.5.7.1    ROOM DATA SHEETS
          A typical room data sheet, which can be used for various anticipated functions, is contained in Appendix
          C,  along with examples of how to use room data sheets. These room data sheets must indicate specific
          room or laboratory requirements and identify appropriate installed equipment.  Location of fume hoods
          within laboratory spaces shall conform with the specifications of Appendix C, as applicable. The design
          professional will be responsible for the final design for these areas, after consultation with representative
          facility users and approval by EPA.

1.5.7.2    STANDARDS AND SYMBOLS
          In addition to specific requirements, standard requirements for each area and room must be identified in
          the various sections of the guidelines.  An annotated example of a listing and definitions of standard
          requirements, symbols, and abbreviations (where used) shall be presented in this subsection of the project-
          specific manual.

1.5.7.3    SPECIAL EQUIPMENT
          The list of movable equipment and furnishings required  on the room data sheets is meant to provide
          assistance in determining the anticipated demand loads for electrical, HVAC, plumbing, specialty gas, and
          other piped services connections.  All special equipment will be furnished by EPA unless otherwise
          identified during the program verification and design phase of the specific project. The exceptions are
          major fixed pieces of equipment requiring hard-connected electrical and piped utility services and HVAC
          (e.g., fume hoods, environmental rooms, glassware washers). Each room and area housing special
          equipment must have  the utilities, electrical power, and HVAC capability necessary to  ensure the
          equipment's proper and efficient operation.
                                                1-14

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines                                                          	February 1998
Section 1 - General Planning and Design Data


1.5.8    GUIDE FOR ARCHITECTURAL LAYOUT
        The concept for architectural layout should be to group all administrative functions and all technical functions
        into separate organizational blocks of space while keeping them sufficiently close together to facilitate and
        encourage employee interaction.  The guiding principle in developing this basic concept shall be the
        separation of the facility into three definable zones: administrative with support, laboratory, and building
        support. This division will allow not only the most flexibility for facility design, but also the most cost-
        effective construction.  In reference  to the interior space of a building or facility, the following definitions
        apply:

        *   Rooms and spaces refer to individual divisions of space, each one usually defined or enclosed by partitions
           or walls.

        •   Blocks are groups or series of rooms or spaces, usually having similar orientation and adjacencies.

        •   Zones are composed of two or more blocks of spaces, often providing the same or similar functionality.

1.5.8.1     ADJACENCIES
           The building design concept shall establish the appropriate horizontal and vertical alignments of the
           facility to facilitate required programmatic relationships.  Floor plate  areas shall be optimized to
           accommodate the required occupancies and to allow for future expansion or alterations.

1.5.8.1.1      LABORATORY ZONE
              This zone shall include all laboratories and laboratory support blocks within an individual branch or
              section. Laboratory-related office blocks shall be located in close proximity to related laboratories and
              laboratory support blocks. These offices shall be across from related laboratory space or in "clusters"
              along a laboratory related corridor. The laboratory block(s) shall utilize a modular laboratory planning
              concept to maximize flexibility and adaptability of research space. Window exposure for both offices
              and laboratories should be maximized.

1.5.8.1.2      ADMMSTRATTVE-WITH-SUPPORTZONE
              The administrative-with-support zone should be physically separated from the laboratory zone in the
              same building. Building links between the administrative-with-support zone and the laboratory zone
              shall house pleasant and comfortable interaction spaces, such as a lounge. Administrative-with-
              support spaces shall include, but shall not be limited to, break areas, restrooms, copier areas,
              mailrooms, and conference areas.

1.5.8.1.3      BUILDING SUPPORT ZONE  '
              The building support zone should be located adjacent to the laboratory zone to facilitate the movement
              of equipment and material to and from the laboratories. Its location shall be determined in accordance
              with the site master plan and should optimize service vehicle circulation. The building support zone
              design shall house a receiving dock, facility physical plant, mechanical equipment, and central storage.
              An isolated hazardous materials/waste storage facility (HMSF) shall  be located near this zone to
              facilitate transportation and handling of explosive/flammable  materials, toxic  chemicals, and
              biohazardous waste before disposal at an off-site location by a licensed contractor.

1.5.8.2     BUFFER ZONES
           The buffer zone between the EPA facility and other existing or potential sites for building(s) shall be no
           less than  100 feet.  The HMSF shall be at least 50 feet away from any building or potential sites for
           building(s).  Both the main facility and the HMSF shall be located at least 50 feet away from the property
           line.  Existing highways and streets can be part of the 100-foot buffer zone. Paved parking area(s) for
           vehicles can be considered as part of the building buffer zone.
                                                1-15

-------
                                                                               Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998	                                                 and Planning Guidelines
                                                             Section 1 - General Planning and Design Data


1.5.8.3     TECHNICAL SPACE
           Research support personnel (i.e., technicians, postdoctoral employees, laboratory assistants) should be
           provided with work space outside of the laboratory room in order to minimize long-term exposure to
           laboratory chemicals and the hazards presented by their use. Technician space, such as shared offices,
           alcoves, and cubicles, does not have to be directly outside of the laboratory as long as it can be placed
           reasonably close to the laboratory.  Some desktop work space should also be provided in the laboratory for
           laboratory-related reporting and documentation that should not be done at the laboratory bench. These
           workstations, where provided, must be so located as to minimize exposure to noxious, or otherwise
           hazardous, conditions. The supply air and exhaust distribution system within the laboratory must be
           carefully coordinated with the designed work space to provide one or more "clean air" zones.  In some
           instances, a physical separation, or barrier, may be required between the work space and the laboratory
           bench.

1.5.8.4     LABORATORY SUPPORT BLOCK
           The laboratory support block is defined as the  space that houses  common, or shared, activities or
           equipment,  such as analytical  instrumentation, specialized equipment, environmental rooms, and
           glassware preparation areas, that indirectly support laboratory activities. These spaces can be interspersed
           between laboratories, supporting a specific activity, or can be grouped together adjacent to a block of
           laboratories. Particular attention shall be paid to functional relationships among laboratory support spaces
           and laboratories, with an emphasis on the efficiency of the travel path of personnel, tasks, and material
           within a particular zone and between zones.

1.5.9    ENVIRONMENTAL DESIGN REQUIREMENT'S
        The facility shall be designed to conserve energy, to avoid the use of construction materials insensitive to the
        environment, to efficiently utilize water, to promote effective recycling, to be free of radon, to have excellent
        indoor air quality, and to avoid the use of ozone-depleting chemicals.

1.5.9.1     GENERAL
           The architectural and engineering design of the facility shall use  proven methods, strategies, and
           technologies exhibiting respect for, and protection of, the environment. These methods, strategies, and
           technologies include the selection of site, materials, and construction systems that prevent infiltration of
           radon; to the extent possible, the use of recycled construction materials and construction materials
           produced with minimal expenditure of energy, and use of insulation, fire protection, and refrigeration
           systems that avoid use of chlorofiuorocarbons (CFCs) and other ozone-depleting chemicals. The facility
           shall also be designed to promote the use of natural light and to afford optimum use of energy-efficient
           lighting systems (e.g., ballasts, task lighting). The facility shall be designed to meet the requirements of
           the EPA Internal Pollution Prevention Program. All EPA buildings should be designed to meet ecological
           design criteria, which include maximum use of natural tight, Green Lighting, light fixtures operated by
           sensors, recycled material, and other devices that save energy without jeopardizing safety. This section
           of the project-specific manual should state that the facility design must meet the requirements of the
           following Executive Orders and Memorandum:  Executive Order 12856, Federal Compliance with Right-
           to-Know Laws and Pollution Prevention Requirements; Executive Order 12873, Federal Acquisition,
           Recycling and Waste Prevention; Executive Order 12902, Energy Efficiency and Water Conservation at
           Federal  Facilities; Executive Order 12843, Procurement Requirements and Policies for the Federal
           Agencies for Ozone-Depleting Substances; Executive  Order  12845,  Requiring Agencies to  Purchase
           Energy Efficient  Computer Equipment; the presidential memorandum on environmentally beneficial
           landscaping; or any subsequent or superseding Executive Order relating to the protection of the
           environment.
                                                 1-16

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines	February 1998
Section 1 - General Planning and Design Data


1.5.9.2     ENERGY-CONSCIOUS DESIGN
           Fundamental design decisions related to energy conservation snail be made during the planning stages.
           The new design shall utilize passive design techniques to minimize heating and cooling loads. These
           techniques include:

           •  Siting of facilities in relation to sun path, wind, and vegetation.

           •  Efficient design of building form and envelope in response to climate.

           •  Reducing cooling load through use of daylighting.

              -  The use of natural but controlled daylighting shall be maximized to the extent that it does not
                 conflict with other EPA energy conservation objectives. EPA values natural light and considers
                 it part of a good working environment  The building organization and design concept shall
                 consider bringing natural light into personnel spaces.

              -  Size, number, and location of windows shall be determined on the basis of need for natural light
                 and ventilation and of other energy considerations. All windows in heated or air-conditioned
                 spaces shall be double-glazed, insulated windows. Low E glass should be used for all exterior
                 windows. Laboratory windows shall be fixed-pane, nonoperative windows. In an air-conditioned
                 building where office windows are operative, these windows must have a removable operating
                 handle.

           *  Reducing solar heat gains through proper design of solar-shading devices combined  with proper
              selection and location of building materials. Laboratory windows in particular are sensitive  to solar
              gain and should be shaded on the exterior from direct rays with efficient devices.

           •  HVAC systems designed for an integrated, energy-conserving facility.

           In addition, the new facility shall meet energy efficiency standards set by the American Society of Heating,
           Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE 90-1,1989) for new buildings. The building
           design, and all construction features (materials and methods of installation, including mechanical and
           electrical systems) shall provide concepts that will reflect reduced energy consumption.

1.5.9.3     CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS
           EPA wishes to take a very active role in the selection of the materials used in the project and during the
           construction process.  In this regard, the design professional, in close coordination with EPA, shall
           carefully examine the environmental sensitivity of materials and products specified for construction and
           build-out for the new facility.  EPA will encourage minimal use of products that are insensitive to the
           environment during and after manufacture.

1.5.9.3.1       MATERIALS TO BE AVOIDED AND/OR NOT USED
              These materials are as follows:

              *   Insulation containing CFCs and other refrigerants harmful to the environment.

              •   Products that off-gas chemical pollutants and whose presence is hazardous (e.g., formaldehyde-
                 treated materials, especially materials  containing urea-formaldehyde). (See also EPA/400/1-
                 91/033, Building Air Quality: A Guide for Building Owners and Facility Managers, December
                 1991.)

              •   Products that are not biodegradable when repaired or removed.
                                                 1-17

-------
                                                                               Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998                                                                    and Planning Guidelines
                                                             Section 1 - General Planning and Design Data


              •  Products that contain asbestos.

              •  Lead-containing plumbing, lead-based solder, lead-soldered tanks and valves. These should not
                 be used for potable drinking water supplies.  Drinking water plumbing products (faucets, values,
                 fittings, piping, etc.) shall be prohibited from use in EPA facilities unless they bear the National
                 Sanitation Foundation (NSF) standard 61 certifying mark indicating compliance with USEPA
                 Safety Drinking Water Act

1.5.9.3.2      MATERIALS TO USE
              Materials must meet the following requirements:

              •  Interior architectural systems must be made of nontoxic materials and components and be free of
                 asbestos, lead-based paints, and toxic fumes. (See the Safety Manual.)

              •  Materials should minimize the depletion of natural resources and should not require a high energy
                 input to produce.

              *  Sanitation finishes shall be nonpenneable, noncorrosive, easily cleaned, and easily maintained.

1.5.9.3.3      RECYCLED CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS
              Under Section 6002 of the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA), EPA has set guidelines.
              which apply to federal, state, and local procuring agencies using appropriated federal funds, for
              purchasing items composed of the highest practicable percentage of recovered materials. EPA wishes
              its facility to follow the guidelines, Procurement ofBuilding Insulation Products Containing Recovered
              Materials, 40 CFR Part 248, February 17,1989, and Cement and Concrete Containing Fly Ash, 40
              CFR Part 249, January 28,1983, within the constraints of cost and required technical performance.

1.5.9.3.4      BUILDING SHELL MATERIALS
              The external treatment and materials utilized shall be of proven long-term durability and require
              minimum maintenance.  The quality of materials shall be consistent with the image and dignity
              appropriate to a U.S. agency. Material selection should be based on an anticipated 100-year life cycle.

1.5.9.4     RECYCLING
           The facility shall be designed to support an aggressive solid waste management plan. The facility design
           shall properly locate, and provide for, spaces that facilitate the collection, separation, compaction, storage,
           and shipment of all recyclable materials. General office space, freight elevator area, shipping and storage
           area, and loading docks shall be designed with this important activity in mind.

1.5.9.5     RADON ABATEMENT
           EPA seeks to limit the presence of radon and radon daughters in the new facility. Site geological surveys
           shall be carefully examined to obtain predictive radon infiltration data from subgrade geological
           structures. Building materials, such as concrete aggregate and stone, shall be selected from sources with
           low probabilities of radioactivity. The level of activity in any area of the building shall  not exceed 4
           picocuries per liter (pCi/L) of air. In areas known to have high radon in structures, buildings shall be
           designed to include preventive techniques such as caulking of all joints between concrete slab and walls
           below grade, caulking of all pipe penetrations, and  venting of all nonoccupied spaces below grade.

1.5.9.6     ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELDS
           EPA seeks to limit the presence of electromagnetic fields (EMFs) in close proximity to people within the
           new facility. Prudent avoidance is required in the routing of electrical power. EPA recommends that the
           routing  of power throughout the facility be well away from people and offices; for instance, elevator
           electrical chases and other electrical chases should be located away from offices and on exterior walls.
                                                 1-18

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines	;	February 1998
Section 1 - General Planning and Design Data


1.5.9.7     WATER CONSERVATION
           EPA requires that the design of new facilities minimise water consumption through the use of water-
           saving measures.  The facility design shall make use of gray-water recycling where feasible, flow-
           restricting spray nozzles for faucets and showers, and low-flow fhishments for fixtures, and shall optimize
           the sizing of all plumbing systems.

1.5.9.8     OZONE DEPLETION PROTECTION
           Any contribution to depletion of the ozone layer of the geosphere by the use of CFCs will be discouraged.
           EPA requires that selection of materials and processes using CFCs be consistent with the guideline goals
           related to Protection of Stratosphere Ozone, 40 CFR Part 82, August 1988.

1.5.9.8.1       CHLOROFLUOROCARBONS
              Current recommendations, guidelines, and requirements shall be reviewed and addressed.

1.5.9.8.2       REFRIGERANTS
              Equipment in an EPA facility may use any significant new alternatives policy (SNAP) approved
              refrigerant with zero ozone depletion potential for electrically driven screw or centrifugal chiller
              designs.  (See Chapter 7 of the Safety Manual.) In addition, a design professional shall specify which
              portable refrigerant reclamation/recycling unit is used with each refrigeration system, excluding water-
              cooled centrifugal chillers. Ventilation requirements for the chiller plant(s), new or existing, shall
              comply with ASHRAE standard 15-1991, Safety Standard for Mechanical Refrigeration.

1.5.9.8.3       HALON
              Use of halon for fire protection systems is prohibited. To obtain the most current list of alternatives
              approved under SNAP, call the Stratospheric Ozone Protection Hotline at 1-800-296-19% or access
              the associated Internet site at http://www.epa.gov/docsyozone/title6/snap/snap.html.

1.5.9.8.4       INSULATION
              All work shall be done in accordance with EPA's recommended uses of hydrochlorofluorocarbons
              (HCFCs) and hydrofluorocarbons (MFCs) in replacing CFC-based insulation. (See also Chapter 7 of
              the Safety Manual.)

1.5.9.9     INDOOR AIR QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
           Refer to Appendix B of this Manual for the indoor air quality requirements.


1.6    Special Room Requirements

1.6.1   RESTROOMS
       Each men's and women's restroom that is located in the laboratory area shall have shower stalls and adequate
       lockers for the laboratory operation and the number of people, men and women, who may be required to use
       it.  All sanitation finishes shall be nonpermeable, noncorrosive, and easily maintainable.

1.6.1.1     FINISHES
           All restrooms shall have ceramic tile to a height of 4 feet 6 inches and wall covering of not less than
           13 ounces per square yard or equivalent quality, as approved by the contracting officer, on remaining wall
           areas, unless an alternate finish is approved by the contracting officer.

1.6.2   JANITOR CLOSETS
       Janitor closets shall be provided in sufficient numbers to service the various areas of the building(s). Each
       block shall have at least one janitor  closet with mop sink. These rooms shall be equipped with exhaust
       ventilation and louvered doors.
                                                1-19

-------
                                                                              Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998                                                                   and Planning Guidelines
                                                            Section 1 - General Planning and Design Data
1.7    Hazardous Waste Handling

1.7.1    GENERAL DESIGN ISSUES
        Safe handling and storage of hazardous materials within the laboratory spaces, and in the facility generally,
        shall be provided. A system for managing hazardous waste materials for the facility must be carefully planned
        with EPA and the facility users.  The plan shall consider receiving, storage, distribution, use, and waste
        removal for all materials utilized in the laboratory spaces of the facility. To reduce the quantities of hazardous
        materials stored in the laboratories, the plan must provide for centralized storage areas specifically designed
        to store and dispense hazardous materials.

1.7.2    RADIOISOTOPES
        Requirements for laboratories using radioisotopes vary depending on the quantity and energy level of the
        isotopes utilized. The design professional shall be responsible for verifying and evaluating with the users of
        the facility the specific project requirements for the safe storage and handling of radioisotopes. A space shall
        be provided near the loading dock of the facility where radioisotope waste containers can be marshaled for
        removal from the facility by a certified radioisotope waste contractor.

1.7.3    CHEMICAL STORAGE AND HANDLING
        Ventilated cabinets (vented  to the outside, either directly, by manifolding, or by connection to fume hood
        exhaust stack) must be provided for collection of waste in each laboratory. A central area must be provided
        for collection and storage of chemical waste for disposal where the chemical waste disposal contractor can
        collect the waste for removal from the facility.  Refer to the following subsection.

1.7.4    HAZARDOUS MATERIALS/WASTE STORAGE FACILITY
        The storage of flammable and combustible liquids shall comply with the restrictions set forth in 29 CFR
        Chapter XVII, paragraph 1910.106(a), (b), (c), (d), (e), and (f). The primary purpose of the HMSF is to
        house large quantities of hazardous and flammable materials away from the main laboratory facility and other
        structures. The determination of "large quantities" shall be made in conjunction with the facility used and
        the Safety, Health and Environmental Management Division (SHEMD). This facility shall be constructed
        for the highest hazard rating per applicable building code and in accordance with NFPA 30, Flammable and
        Combustible Liquids Code.  The facility shall be located at least SO feet from the main facility and from the
        property line and shall contain fully enclosed rooms for the separate storage of drum containers, flammable
        and combustible liquids, toxic chemicals, and acids.  Cylinder gas*q may be in an open space part of the
        facility, as long as the space meets all applicable code and safety requirements.  If the HMSF is located less
        than SO feet from the main facility, then the two must be separated by appropriate fire separation. Whenever
        possible, and where required by weather conditions, the HMSF shall be connected to the main laboratory by
        a covered walkway.


1.8    Security

1.8.1    ACCESS AND EGRESS
        The building subdivisions and the arrangement of exits, corridors, vestibules, lobbies, and rooms shall allow
        fast and orderly exit in case of emergency and provide appropriate security for personnel, property, and
        experiments.  The facility, buildings, and interior modules shall have controllable access, which should ensure
        a reasonably safe and secure working environment.
                                                1-20

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines	February 1998
Section 1 - General Planning and Design Data
1.9    Structural Design Requirements

1.9.1    GENERAL
        This section applies to the structural elements of buildings and other incidental structures. The structural
        elements include, but are not limited to, the following:

        •   All floor, roof, and wall framing members and slabs.
        •   All piers, walls, columns, footings, piles, and similar elements of the substructure.
        •   All other substructures and superstructure elements that are proportioned on the basis of stress, strength,
           and deflection requirements.

1.9.1.1     MATERIAL, FRAMING SYSTEMS, AND DETAILS
           Material, framing systems, and details shall be compatible with the following:

           •  Clear space and span requirements.
           •  Serviceability requirements.
           •  Applicable fire protection classification,  applicable local building code, and/or NFPA  220,
              as applicable.
           •  Security requirements.
           •  Foundation conditions.
           •  Future expansion requirements.
           •  Architectural requirements.
           *  Climatic conditions.
           *  Structural design loads for the specific facility and location.

1.9.1.2     CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS AND LABOR
           Local availability of construction materials and labor force shall be considered in the selection of the
           structural system.

1.9.1.3     DESIGN CRITERIA
           The structural design drawings shall indicate  the design criteria; the structural  materials and their
           strengths, with applicable material standards; the design loads, including loads that can occur during
           construction; and the allowable foundation loads that were used in the design.

1,9.2    CALCULATIONS
        Calculations shall be prepared and presented as stated in the following paragraphs.

1.9.2.1     GENERAL
           All design (including calculations) shall be performed and checked by a registered structural engineer.
           All calculations shall be on S'/i-by-l 1-inch paper. Calculations  shall be indexed and every page
           numbered. Dividers shall be placed between distinct sections.  A summary shall be included describing
           the type of structure and indicating the live load capacity of each floor and roof.

1.9,2.2     MANUALLY PREPARED CALCULATIONS
           Manually prepared calculations shall be neat  and legible.  Each  sheet shall indicate the structural
           consultant's firm name, address, and telephone number.  Each sheet shall indicate the designer's name
           or initials, the checker's name or initials, and the date prepared. Design assumptions regarding live loads,
           material strengths, conditions of fixity, etc.,  shall be clearly stated.  Calculations  shall be sufficiently
           cross-referenced that a third party can review the calculations without requiring additional information.
                                                 1-21

-------
February 1998
Architecture, Engineering,
 and Planning Guidelines
                                                        Section 1 - General Planning and Design Data
1.9.2.3     COMPUTER ANALYSIS AND DESIGN
                                            1-22

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines                                                                    February 1996
Section 1 - General Planning and Design Data


           Computer software used for structural analysis and design shall be from a nationally recognized vendor.
           Each separate run shall indicate software licensee, project name and number, engineer's name, and date.
           Additional manual annotation shall be provided, if necessary, to adequately cross-reference computer
           printouts, so that a third party can review the calculations without requiring additional information.

1.9.3    LOADS
        Structures and their elements shall be designed for the loads prescribed in these criteria unless applicable
        codes or ordinances provide more stringent requirements. The most stringent requirement shall be used.

1.9.3.1     DEAD LOADS
           Dead loads are loads that remain permanently in place. They shall include the weights of all permanent
           materials and equipment (including the structure's own weight) supported in, or on, a structure. Load
           calculations shall include an allowance for any loadings that are anticipated to be added at a later date.
           Initially assumed loads shall be revised so that the final design reflects the configuration shown on the
           drawings.

           •  The minimum allowance for the weights of partitions, where partitions are likely to be rearranged or
              relocated, shall be as follows:

              -  For partition weights of 150 pounds per linear foot (plf) or less, an equivalent uniform dead load
                 may be used, determined on the basis of the room dimensions (normal to the partition) and the
                 partition weight in pounds per linear foot, but not less than 20 pounds per square foot (psf)-

              -  For partition weights above 150 plf, the actual loads shall be used.

              -  Partitions that are  likely to be rearranged or relocated should be calculated as live loads for load
                 factor design. A factor of 1.1 shall be applied to the live loads due to movable partitions before
                 application of building code-required live-load factors.

           •  The unit weights of materials and construction assemblies for buildings and other structures shall be
              those given in American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/American Society of Civil Engineers
              (ASCE) Standard ANSI/ASCE Standard 7-88. Where unit weights are neither established in that
              standard  nor determined by test or analysis, the weights shall be determined from  data in the
              manufacturer's drawings or catalogs.

           •  Design dead loads shall include  the weight of all permanent service equipment.  Service equipment
              shall include plumbing stacks, piping, heating and air-conditioning equipment, electrical equipment,
              flues, fire sprinkler piping and valves, and similar fixed furnishings. The weight of service equipment
              that may be removed with change of occupancy of a given area shall be considered as live load.

1.9.3.2     LIVE LOADS
           Live loads shall include all loads resulting from the occupancy and use of the structure whether acting
           vertically down, vertically up, or laterally. The weight of service equipment that may be removed with
           change of occupancy of a given area (e.g., fume hoods) shall be considered as live load.   Operating,
           moving, stopping, and impact forces shall be considered part of the live loads. Live loads shall include
           neither dead loads nor loads from the environment, such as wind, tornado, earthquake, thermal forces,
           earth pressure, and fluid pressure.

           •  Live loads for buildings and other structures shall be those produced by the intended use or occupancy.
              In no  case shall they  be less than the minimum uniform load or concentrated load stipulated in
              ANSI/ASCE Standard 7-88, or required by the local building code, whichever is more stringent. A
              minimum of 60 psf of hanging load shall be included for any central energy plant or major mechanical
              room where significant hanging loads are anticipated.

                                                 1-23

-------
                                                                               Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998                                                                   and Planning Guidelines
                                                             Section 1 - General Planning and Design Data


           •   Live loads on roofs shall be as stipulated in ANSI/ASCE Standard 7-88, or as required by local
              building codes, whichever is more stringent. Live loads on roofs shall include the minimum roof live
              loads or the snow loads and snow drifts or possible rain loads stipulated in the code, whichever
              produces the more severe effect  An allowance of 10 psf shall be included in the design of all roofs
              to allow for one reroofing in the future.

           •   In continuous framing and cantilever construction, the design shall consider live load on all spans, as
              well as arrangements of partial  live load that will produce maximum stresses in the supporting
              members.

1.9.3.3     SNOW LOADS
           Snow loads shall be as calculated in compliance with the provisions of ANSI/ASCE Standard 7-88, or the
           requirements of local building codes, whichever is more stringent

1.9.3.4     WIND LOADS
           Wind load design for buildings and other structures shall be determined in accordance with the procedures
           in ANSI/ASCE Standard 7-88, or local codes, whichever is more stringent, by using the basic wind speed
           obtained by the procedures used.

           •   Exposure "C," as defined in ANSI/ASCE Standard 7-88, shall be used as a minimum for all
              construction unless it can be shown that the necessary permanent shielding will be provided by natural
              terrain (not including shielding from trees or adjacent buildings).

           •   To determine the design wind loads, all factors and coefficients stipulated in ANSI/ASCE  Standard
              7-88 shall be applied to the site-specific basic wind speeds.

           •   Building additions shall be designed as parts of a totally new building without regard to shielding from
              the original building and without regard to lesser wind resistance for which the original building may
              have been designed. The possibility that the original portion of the building may require strengthening
              because of an increase in the wind loads acting on it shall be considered.

1.9.3.5     SEISMIC LOADS
           To comply with Executive Order 12699, Seismic Safety of Federal and Federally Assisted or Regulated
           New Building Construction, seismic load design for buildings and other structures shall be determined
           in accordance with the recommendations of the Interagency Committee on Seismic Safety in Construction
           (ICSSC). Thus, the completed design for all new construction projects shall be submitted along with
           proper certification from a registered structural engineer that the design substantially meets or exceeds
           the seismic safety level in the National Earthquake Hazard Reduction Program (NEHRP) Recommended
           Provisions for the Development of Seismic Regulations for New Buildings.

           •   Each of the model codes listed below provides a level of seismic safety substantially equivalent to that
              provided by use of the NEHRP Recommended Provisions, with the requirement that revisions of these
              model codes must be affirmed to be substantially equivalent to or to exceed the then current or
              immediately preceding edition of the NEHRP Recommended Provisions, as it is updated triennially.

              -  The Uniform Building Code,  published by the International Conference of Building  Officials
                 (ICBO).

              -  The National Building Code, published by the Building  Officials and Code Administrators
                 International (BOCA).

              -  The Standard Building Code, published by the Southern Building Code Congress International
                 (SBCCI).

                                                1-24

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines                             	                         	    February 1998
Section 1 - General Planning and Design Data


           •  State, county, local, or other jurisdictional building ordinances adopting and enforcing these model
              codes in their entirety without significantly diluting seismic safety are also adequate.  In all other
              circumstances, substantial equivalency of the ordinances to the seismic safety level contained in the
              NEHRP Recommended Provisions must be confirmed by a registered structural engineer.

1.9.3.6     OTHER LOADS
           Other load requirements are as follows:

1.9.3.6.1       EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
              Equipment supports shall be designed to avoid resonance resulting from the harmony between the
              natural frequency of the structure and the operating frequency of reciprocating or rotating equipment
              (e.g., fume hood exhaust fens, vacuum pumps) supported on the structure. The operating frequency
              of supported equipment shall be determined from manufacturers' data before completion of structural
              design.  Resonance shall be  prevented by designing equipment isolation  supports to  reduce the
              dynamic transmission of the applied load to as low a level as can economically be achieved in the
              design.

1.9.3.6.2       FOUNDATION OR OTHER RETAINING STRUCTURES
              Every foundation or other wall serving as a retaining structure shall be designed to resist, not only the
              vertical loads acting on it, but also the incident lateral earth pressures and surcharges, and the
 \            hydrostatic pressures corresponding to the maximum probable groundwater level

1.9.3.6.3       RETAINING WALLS
              Retaining walls shall be designed for the earth pressures and  the potential groundwater levels
              producing the highest stresses and overturning moments.  When a water-pressure-relief system is
              incorporated into the design, only earth pressures need be considered. In cohesive soils, the long-term
              consolidation effects on the stability of the walls shall be considered. Lateral  earth pressures shall be
              determined in accordance with accepted structural and geotechnical engineering practice.

1.9.3.6.4       STRESSES AND MOVEMENTS
              The design of structures shall  include the effects of stresses and movements resulting from variations
              in temperature. The rise and fall in the temperature shall be determined for the localities in which the
              structures are to be built. Structures shall be designed for movements resulting from the maximum
              seasonal temperature change.

1.9.3.6.5       CREEP AND SHRINKAGE
              Concrete and masonry structures shall be investigated for stresses and deformations induced by creep
              and shrinkage. For concrete and masonry structures, the minimum linear coefficient of shrinkage shall
              be assumed to be 0.0002 inch per inch, unless a detailed analysis indicates otherwise. The theoretical
              shrinkage displacement shall be computed as the product of the linear coefficient and the length of the
              member.

1.9.3.6.6       VIBRATION-SENSITIVE EQUIPMENT
              The design professional shall be responsible for verifying the requirements of, and for, installation of
              vibration-sensitive equipment in all laboratory areas.  The structural system in laboratory areas shall
              be designed to accommodate and control specific high localized frequency loads and vibration inputs
              from the general building systems to these sensitive areas.  Five controls must be pursued:

              •  Use of physical separation  to keep powerful sources of vibration well clear of the laboratory space.

              •  Identification and isolation of particular services that involve running speeds close to the natural
                 frequencies of the floor.
                                                 1-25

-------
                                                                              Architecture, Engineering,
February1998	and Planning Guidelines
                                                             Section 1 • General Planning and Design Data


              •  Identification and additional isolation of sources that, although they do not match the running
                 speed of equipment and primary structural response frequencies, may produce sufficient vibration
                 to cause a threat to the building.

              •  Identification, and, where possible, appropriate attenuation, of powerful transient impulses from
                 services (e.g., switching in or out).

              •  Providing structural stiffliess to reduce the peak acceleration responses caused by footfall-induced
                 vibration.

1.9.3.7     LOAD COMBINATIONS
           Combination of loads, allowable stresses, and strength requirements for buildings and incidental structures
           shall be as stipulated in the governing local building code.

1.9.4    STRUCTURAL SYSTEMS
        The following paragraphs concern the basic supporting systems of buildings.

1.9.4.1     FOUNDATIONS
           The provisions of the local governing building code shall be the minimum requirements for foundation
           design. The potential adverse effects of frost heave and movements due to expansive soils shall also be
           considered in the design. For all structures, the requirements of standard design criteria shall be met with
           respect to determining subsurface conditions, recommending foundation type, establishing allowable soil-
           bearing pressure, determining seismic potential, and differential settlement

           *  Where concrete slab-on-grade construction is used, the slab shall be placed on a capillary waterbarrier
              overlying a compacted subgrade. A moisture retardant shall be used under the slab, where moisture
              conditions warrant. Excess loads,  or equipment subject to vibration, shall be supported by separate
              pads isolated from the rest of the floor slab with flexible joints.

1.9.4.2     FRAMING SYSTEMS
           Buildings shall  be framed to allow for simple formwork,  fabrication, and construction procedures.
           Structural systems shall be designed for ductile modes of failure to the extent feasible.

           •  In the selection of a framing system, consideration shall  be given to the structure's functional
              requirements, including:

              -  Column-free areas
              -  Floor-to-ceiling heights
              -  Number of stories
              -  Elevator, escalator, crane, and hoist installations
              -  Heavy loads
              -  Other requirements pertaining  to the specific facility.

           •  For framed floors, the economy of prefabricated systems shall be considered, especially systems that
              simplify the installation of mechanical, electrical, and communications services.

1.9.4.3     LATERAL LOAD-RESISTING SYSTEMS
           Lateral load-resisting systems shall be provided to resist the effects of wind, earthquake motions, thermal
           forces, soil pressures, and dynamic forces caused by rotating, reciprocating, or moving equipment. Use
           systems recognized by the local building code. In the absence of local building code criteria, use structural
           systems recognized by the BOCA National Building Code for use in resisting seismic loads.
                                                 1-26

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines	February 1998
Section 1 - General Planning and Design Data


1.9.5   BUILDING MOVEMENT JOINTS
       Devices, usually in the form of joints, shall be designed into buildings to control movement

1.9.5.1    CONTROL JOINTS
          Control joints shall be provided in all materials subject to drying shrinkage. Control joint size and spacing
          shall be based on a rational analysis.

1.9.5.2    EXPANSION JOINTS
          Expansion joints shall be provided in all materials subject to thermal expansion. Expansion joint size
          shall be based on a rational analysis. In the absence of local building code requirements, building
          expansion joints shall be provided as recommended in the publication Expansion Joints in Buildings
          (Federal Construction Council of the Building Research Advisory Board).

1.9.5.3    SEISMIC JOINTS
          When seismic design is required, building expansion joints shall be seismic type. Buildings shall be
          separated adequately to prevent contact during an earthquake that would damage the structural systems
          of the buildings.


1.10  Lease Administration

       For a leased facility the following topics must be included in the Solicitation for Offers. The  required
       information in this section shall be provided by EPA for each specific project. Contact the project officer for
       project information.

       DEFMTION OF GROSS AREA
       NET USABLE SQUARE FEET
          General
          Square Feet
          Appurtenant Areas and Facilities

       VENDING FACILITIES

       JANITORIAL SERVICES

       MAINTENANCE AND TESTING OF SYSTEMS
          General
          Testing
          Watertight Integrity
          Additional Requirements

       FLAG DISPLAY
          General
          Display

       SAFE AIR CONTAINMENT LEVELS
          General
          Asbestos
          Post-Asbestos-Abatement Monitoring
          Abatement Actions Other than Removal
          Nonfriable Asbestos
          Abatement Plan
          Inspection and Testing

                                              1-27

-------
                                                            Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998                                                   and Planning Guidelines
                                               Section 1 - General Planning and Design Data


1.10.1  OFFER REQUIREMENTS

      HO WTO OFFER
      OVERVIEW OF SERVICES •
      PHASES, TASKS, AND DELIVERABLES
      OFFER DUE DATE
      OCCUPANCY
      TERM
      NEGOTIATIONS
      PRICE EVALUATION
      AWARD
      CONSTRUCTION
      FIRE PROTECTION/OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND ENVIRONMENTAL SAFETY
      HANDICAPPED AND SEISMIC SAFETY
      ALTERNATE PROPOSALS
      QUALIFICATION CRITERIA
      EVALUATION FACTORS FOR AWARD

END OF SECTION 1
                                     1-28

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines                                                                  February 1998
Section 2-Site Work
                                   Section 2 - Site Work
2.1     Scope of Project

2.1.1    GENERAL
        The location, type of building and support facility proposed, impact on site development, and general scope
        of work shall be described for the project.  The description shall include such elements as access roads,
        parking areas, and loading and unloading areas.

2.1.2    DEVELOPMENT CODES
        All projects must comply with the applicable zoning and building codes and with the requirements of the
        Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).  Information on applicable codes must be provided as stated in the
        following subsections.

2.1.2.1     ZONING
           A brief overview of local zoning and land development codes and their impact on site development shall
           be given for the proposed project

2.2.2.2     BUILDING CODES
           Description of the applicable building codes shall be provided, with any specific references to seismic,
           floodplain, or coastal development as it relates to site development.

2.1.2.3     ADA REQUIREMENTS
           The proposed project will comply with current federal (28 CFR Parts 35 and 36), state, and local ADA
           guidelines for the physically disabled.


2.2     Site Influences

2.2.1    LAND RESOURCES
        Information shall be provided on the geography, geology, climate, and hydrology of the site areas.

2.2.1.1     SITE VICINITY
           The geographic  location of the project shall be described. Site location with respect to designated
           floodplains will be noted. EPA facilities shall not be located within the 100-year floodplain. Appropriate
           information on the local area economy, business, and industry shall also be provided.

2.2.1.2     PHYSIOGRAPHY AND GEOLOGY
           A general description ofknown site geology and physiography shall be provided. Appropriate information
           shall be taken from the preliminary geotechnical investigation if this has been performed and is available
           when information is being gathered for this document.  Site planning must consider seismic effects and
           the geological, foundation, and tsunami (seawave) hazards often associated with earthquakes. Probability
           with respect to severity and frequency of ground shaking varies from one geographic region to another;
           regions in which there are similar hazard factors are identified as seismic zones. Refer to the National
           Earthquake Hazards Reduction Program to determine the seismic zone in which the site is located.  Site
           planning must avoid fault zones because damage caused by ruptures along a fault cannot be prevented by
           reasonable design and construction practices.
                                                2-1

-------
                                                                               Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998                                                                    and Planning Guidelines
                                                                                   Section 2-Site Work


2.2.1.3     CLIMATOLOGY
           The specific climatic conditions of the proposed site shall be described, especially precipitation and
           predominant wind directions and highest expected wind gust on the site.  Where available, local
           precipitation data shall be used in lieu of regional data for specific site hydrologic modeling.

2.2.1.4     HYDROLOGY
           A general description of site hydrology shall be provided. This description shall include data taken from
           the preliminary geotechnical investigation and the Soil Conservation Service soil survey. The following
           specific site information shall be assembled for use in the hydrologic modeling of the project:

              Geographic location.
              Precipitation frequency data.
              Drainage area.
              Soil and cover.
              Runoff distribution.
              Groundwater.
              Rainfall intensity-duration curves based on historic record should be developed and used for each
              locale. The design storm events shall be based on a study of precipitation frequency, runoff potential,
              and runoff distribution relative to the physical characteristics of the watershed.  Where available,
              stream gauge data shall be used to estimate design flows in major channels. Where stream gauge data
              are inadequate or unavailable,  rainfall information shall be taken from documented sources, such as
              National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration/U.S. Weather Bureau Technical Paper No. 40.
              Design storm precipitation values taken from documented sources or derived by published engineering
              methodology shall be used to estimate design flood discharges.

2.2.2    TRANSPORTATION SYSTEMS
        The transportation requirements of the project and the project's relationship to and effect on existing roadways
        shall be described.

2.2.2.1     AIR
           A general description of project requirements for heliports or airfields shall be provided

2.2.2.2     LAND
           A general description of the  proposed project and its location relative to existing roadways shall be
           provided.  Development of the proposed facility and the impacts on the existing roadway system shall be
           addressed. This assessment shall  include references to the traffic impact analysis if such an analysis is
           required for the project.  For sites located in metropolitan areas with extensive public transportation
           systems, access to public transportation is desirable.

2.2.2.3     WATER
           A general description of project requirements relative to boating shall be provided, including requirements
           for marinas, docking and/or storage facilities, seawalls and refueling facilities. Applicable permitting
           requirements of federal, state, and local agencies shall also be addressed.

2.2.3    ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS
        The project's effects on air quality, water quality, and noise levels shall be addressed. This subsection also
        provides requirements related to environmental justice and community involvement.

2.2.3.1     AIR QUALITY
           The impact of the proposed project on air quality shall be addressed. The assessment shall include all
           sources of air emissions and compliance with the requirements of federal, state, and local agencies.
                                                  2-2

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines	February 1998
Section 2 - Site Work


2.2.3.2     WATER RESOURCES
           The proposed project's impact on available water resources, including both ground and surface waters,
           shall be addressed.

2.2.3.3     NOISE POLLUTION
           Any  noise  pollution that will be associated with the proposed project, its impact on surrounding
           development, and the project's compliance with applicable zoning and land development codes on noise
           pollution shall be addressed.

2.2.3.4     ENVIRONMENTAL JUSTICE
           Environmental justice should be considered in selecting a location for a new EPA facility.  Communities
           involved should be given the opportunity to participate in the selection of the site and in the identification
           of ways to reduce adverse environmental effects that negatively affect human health.


2.3    Site Investigation

2.3.1    SITE SURVEYS
        The design professional shall be responsible for providing site investigations, land (metes and bounds)
        surveys, and an environmental assessment of the site.  Site investigations, land surveys, and environmental
        assessments shall be performed by registered professional engineers and/or land surveyors, as applicable.

        At a minimum, the survey(s) shall show legal property boundaries, easements^ and legal restrictions, as well
        as all man-made and natural physical characteristics, utility service locations (temporary and permanent),
        horizontal and vertical controls, benchmarks, roadways, and parking areas. Land surveys should conform
        to the requirements of General Services Administration (GSA) document PBS-PQ280, as applicable.

        The degree of accuracy of construction, control, property, and topographic surveys shall be consistent with
        the nature and importance of each survey. Where required by law (i.e., applicable state statutes), all control
        and property surveys at EPA sites shall be performed by, or under the supervision of, a professional land
        surveyor registered in the state in which the site is situated.

2.3.1.1     PRELIMINARY SUBSURFACE EXPLORATION
           Preliminary subsurface exploration  shall be performed by a registered geotechnical  engineer. The
           registered geotechnical engineer  shall supervise all required testing, review and analyze all data and
           samples, and submit a report. All tests shall be performed by independent testing laboratories. Subsurface
           investigations should conform to the requirements of GSA document PBS-PQ280, as applicable.

2.3.1.2     ENVIRONMENTAL ASSESSMENT
           Design and environmental professionals selected by EPA will evaluate the effects that the additions and
           improvements will have on the local environment. Under the purview of the National Environmental
           Policy Act (NEPA), an environmental assessment (EA) may also be required, which will determine the
           need for an environmental impact statement (EIS).  The EA should  conform to EPA environmental
           assessment requirements, as applicable. The preparation of the environmental assessment, if required,
           may be included as a part of the professional services contract. See also Chapter 7, paragraph 9, of the
           Safety Manual.

2.3.1.3     OUTDOOR POLLUTANT SOURCES
           The facility shall meet the indoor air quality requirements described in Appendix B of this document. To
           address these requirements, primary strategies for indoor air quality control, as listed in Appendix B,
           subsection B. 1.1.2, shall be addressed. The first strategy for indoor air quality control is source control,
           which involves outdoor pollutant sources. The design professional must respond to the requirements
           established in Appendix B, subsection B. 1.2.1.3, which includes a list of factors that must be considered.

                                                 2-3

-------
                                                                               Architecture, Engineering,
February 199B                                                                   and Planning Guidelines
                                                                                   Section 2-Site Work


2.3.2    SITE EVALUATION
        Site elements must conform to the siting requirements noted in subsection 1.5, Facility Design and Layout,
        of this Manual and in Chapter 1, paragraph 9, of the Safety Manual.

2.3.2.1     PURPOSE OF STUDY
           The ultimate purpose of the site evaluation is to provide EPA with sufficient pertinent data to allow a
           complete understanding of the physical assets and liabilities of the given project site.

2.3.2.2     SITE DATA COLLECTION
           Using the information developed above and in other sources required by this document, the design
           professional shall consider planning and zoning criteria for the subject property. This consideration shall
           include the investigation of all potential site development regulations such as density limitations, building
           setbacks, building height, building coverage, buffer requirements, and other development guidelines set
           forth in any applicable campus, site, or facility master plan or elsewhere in this document.

           •  An on-site investigation and review shall be conducted, which shall include representatives of the
              client, the design professional, and the preconstruction testing and inspection company.  A site
              representative shall verify land features indicated on the survey.  Photographs shall be taken at various
              locations to provide a visual record to aid in the development of the site analysis drawings.

2.3.2.3     SITE RESOURCE INVENTORY AND ANALYSIS
           A site resource inventory and analysis shall be prepared, which shall include investigation of soil
           information, identification of site vegetation, hydrology and drainage analysis, topographic and elevation
           analysis, and analysis of view corridors and other physical characteristics of the site. A "buildable area"
           plan shall be developed by compiling information from the various analysis drawings. This plan shall
           indicate the acres of land that are suitable for construction. The site inventory and analysis shall include,
           but shall not be limited to, the following:

           •  The site overview will include, but will not be limited to, location, parcel delineation and acreage,
              existing zoning, and adjoining land uses.

           •  Physical site characteristic analyses include, but are not limited to, slope analysis, elevation analysis,
              existing vegetation identification, hydrology analysis, geological and soils analysis, site analysis,
              buildable areas analysis, and analysis of prevailing winds.

           •  Utilities include, but are not limited to, stormwater drainage, potable water, sanitary sewer, electrical
              power and communications, and mechanical systems.

2.3.3    GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION
        For permanent structures, subsurface conditions shall be determined by means of borings or other methods
        that  adequately disclose soil  and groundwater conditions.  Data obtained  from previous subsurface
        investigations shall be used, along with any additional investigations at the location that are deemed
        necessary. Subsurface investigations shall be performed under the direction of a professional geotechnical
        engineer. In earthquake-prone areas, appropriate geological investigations shall be made to determine the
        contribution of the foundation  (subsurface) to the earthquake loads imposed on the structure.  These
        investigations shall include, but shall not be limited to, a recommendation of foundation type, determinations
        of allowable soil bearing capacity, and assessment of the possible effects of seismic activity on the soil mass.
        A settlement analysis under different design loads shall be performed where differential settlement may cause
        structural, architectural, or any other type of building damage.
                                                 2-4

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines	February 1998
Section 2-Site Work


2.3.3.1     TESTING AND SAMPLING METHODS
           Testing and sampling shall comply with American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) standards,
           including ASTM D-1586, ASTM D-1587, and ASTM D-2113. Soil samples shall be taken below the
           existing grade and at each change in soil stratification or consistency. The depth of soil samples shall be
           determined by the geotechnical engineer after consultation with the project engineer on site-related design
           requirements.

2.3.3.2     TEST REPORTS
           All data required by ASTM or the other standard test methods used shall be obtained, recorded in the field,
           and referenced to boring numbers. Soil shall be visually classified in the field logs in accordance with
           ASTM D-2488, but the classification for final logs shall be based on the field information, results of tests,
           and further inspection of samples in the laboratory by the geotechnical engineer preparing the report. At
           a minimum, the report shall:

           •  Include a chart illustrating the soil classification criteria and the terminology and symbols used in the
              boring logs.

           •  Identify the ASTM or other recognized standard sampling and test methods used.

           •  Provide a plot plan giving dimensioned locations of test borings.

           •  Provide vertical sections plotted showing (1) material encountered, (2) reference to known  datum,
              (3) number of blows per linear foot (N value), and (4)  groundwater  level for all holes where
              groundwater is encountered.  Data for groundwater shall include both the initial groundwater level and
              the static groundwater level.  Groundwater levels must be recorded when initially encountered and
              after they have been allowed to stabilize.

           *  Note the location of strata containing organic materials, weak materials, or other inconsistencies that
              might affect engineering conclusions.

           •  Describe the existing surface conditions.

           •  Summarize the subsurface conditions.
                   *
           •  Provide pavement structural design data, including results of California bearing ratio tests or modulus
              of subgrade reaction tests.

           •  Provide a profile and/or topographic map of rock or other bearing stratum.

           •  Analyze the probable variations in elevations and movements of subsurface water due to seasonal
              influences.

           •  Report all laboratory determinations of soil properties, including shrinkage and expansion properties.

2.3.4    GROUNDWATER INVESTIGATION
        A groundwater investigation shall be made before selection of a dewatering control system. The investigation
        shall examine the character of subsurface soils, groundwater conditions and quality, and the availability of
        an electric power source. The source of seepage shall be determined and the boundaries and seepage flow
        characteristics of geologic and soil formations at, and adjacent to, the site shall be analyzed in accordance with
        the mathematical, graphic, and electroanalogous methods discussed in Technical Manual 5-818-5, U.S. Army
        Corp of Engineers.  Field reports identifying groundwater elevations and other relevant features should be
        provided to the construction contractor responsible for dewatering  and groundwater investigation.
                                                 2-5

-------
                                                                             Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998                                                                  and Planning Guidelines
                                                                                 Section 2-Site Work
2.4    Site Development

2.4.1    SURVEYING
        The following surveys must be conducted, and the following survey documentation provided, for each site.

2.4.1.1     GENERAL
           Construction, control, properly, and topographic surveys shall be coordinated with the appropriate EPA
           authority. Where feasible, surveying support available from EPA contractors shall be used. Survey field
           notes shall be legibly recorded on standard (8'/2-by-l 1-inch) field-note forms. Field notes and final plots
           of surveys shall be furnished to the appropriate EPA authority. Any boundary surveys and recorded maps
           shall be forwarded to the appropriate EPA authority.

           The degree of accuracy of construction, control, property, and topographic surveys shall be consistent with
           the nature and importance of each survey. Where required by law (i.e., applicable state statutes), all
           control and property surveys at EPA sites shall be performed by, or under the supervision of, a professional
           land surveyor registered in the state in which the subject site is situated.

2.4.1.2     SURVEY CONTROL
           The appropriate EPA authority shall be responsible for establishing, recording, and perpetuating primary
           on-site horizontal and vertical control monumentation. In addition, the appropriate EPA authority shall
           be responsible for correlating primary site-specific horizontal and vertical monumentation with that of
           other appropriate agencies.  All surveying and mapping shall conform to the standards listed in Table
           2.4.1.2, Survey Standards.
 Table 2.4.1.2  Survey Standards	
 Survey Standard	Survey Type	
 TEC-1110-1-147                                   CORPS Construction
 ETL-1110-1-150                                   Global Positioning System (GPSyDredging
 EM-1110-1-1000                                   Photogrammetry
 EM-1110-1-1001                                   Geodetic control
 EM-1110-1-1002                                   Monumentation
 EM-1110-1-1003                                   GPS control
 EM-1110-1-1005                                   Topographic and field supervision and maintenance
                                                  [FY-94]
 EM-1110-1-1006                                   Land boundary  [FY-95]
 EM-1110-2-1003                                   Hydrographic survey
 EM-1110-1-1807                                   Computer-aided drafting design (CADD) (volumes 1-4)
2.4,1.3     MONUMENTATION
           Requirements with respect to monumentation are as follows.

2.4.1.3.1       TEMPORARY CONTROL
              For temporary control monuments:

              •   Where the scope and complexity of the project warrants, the placement, number, and location of
                 temporary horizontal  and vertical control monuments in new development areas shall be
                 coordinated with the existing system and approved.

                                                2-6

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines                                                                  February 1998
Section 2-Site Work


              •  A minimum of two intervisible control monuments shall be placed along, or adjacent to, right-of-
                 way lines. These temporary control monuments shall be tied to an established grid. The surveyor
                 who sets  such momimentation shall  submit  legible notes, drawings, and reproducible
                 documentation to the appropriate EPA authority. The location and construction of all temporary
                 monuments in the immediate vicinity of new construction shall be indicated on the construction
                 drawings.

              •  Temporary control monuments shall be S/8-inch-diameter mild steel bars or 3/4-inch-diameter iron
                 pipe with a minimum length of 2 feet or plastic hubs.  These monuments shall be set flush with,
                 or within 0.2 feet of, the ground surface. Manhole rims, markings chiseled in concrete, PK nails
                 in asphalt, and lead and tack in bedrock shall be suitable as alternative temporary monumentation
                 when approved.

              •  Three guard posts with reflective-paint striping shall be installed adjacent to temporary control
                 monuments in high-traffic areas to prevent vehicular damage. Temporary control monuments shall
                 be set in conformance with the accuracy standards of the U.S. Corps of Engineers.

2.4.1.3.2       PERMANENT CONTROL
              For permanent control monuments:

              •  The placement, number, and location of permanent survey monuments for horizontal and vertical
                 control shall be coordinated with, and approved by, the appropriate EPA authority. The location
                 and description of the nearest permanent survey monument shall be provided on construction
                 drawings. These monuments shall be tied to an established state plane coordinate system.

              •  Any surveyor who sets a permanent survey monument shall submit legible notes, sketches, or other
                 reproducible documentation that shows the location of the new monument relative to the on-site
                 horizontal and vertical control network, to the applicable state plane coordinate system, to the
                 North American Datum (NAD) of 1983, and to the Navigable Ground Vertical Datum (NGVD)
                 of 1929. The convergence, scale factor, and elevation at the monument shall also be shown.

              •  Permanent survey monuments shall be considered properly positioned and represented only after
                 the appropriate EPA authority has approved all survey procedures and calculations and has verified
                 conformance to the Corps of Engineers standards and specifications. ,

              •  Permanent survey monuments shall be identified as prescribed by Corps of Engineers standards.

              •  These identification numbers shall be documented within the survey field notes and shown on the
                 design drawings and within related documents. Temporary point identification for permanent
                 survey monuments maybe assigned by the surveyor, however, permanent point identification shall
                 only be  assigned to such monuments by the appropriate EPA authority.  Permanent survey
                 monuments shall not be removed without prior authorization from the appropriate EPA authority.

2.4.1.3.3       BENCHMARKS
              For benchmarks:

              •  A minimum of one permanent benchmark for vertical control shall be established in each new
                 development area. A minimum of three benchmarks shall be established if there are no existing
                 benchmarks within a 3-mile radius of each new development area. Elevations shall be referenced
                 to the North American Vertical Datum (NAVD) of 1983 and to the NGVD of 1929. Level section
                 misclosures between fixed benchmark elevations shall equal or exceed third-order accuracy, as
                 defined in the Federal Geodetic Control Committee (FGCC) Standards and Specifications for
                 Geodetic Control Networks or the Corps of Engineers standards.

                                               2-7

-------
                                                                              Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998                                                                  and Planning Guidelines
                                                                                  Section 2-Site Work


              *  Permanent benchmarks shall be identified in the same manner as permanent survey monuments.
                 Permanent benchmarks shall  not be removed without prior approval by the appropriate EPA
                 authority.  The location and description of all benchmarks in the immediate vicinity of new
                 construction shall be indicated on the construction drawings.

2.4.1.3.4      UTILITY, ROADWAY, AND PARKING AREA SURVEYS
              Surveys of utilities, roadways, and parking areas shall be conducted according to the following
              requirements:

              •  Coordinates and elevations shall be determined for utilities, roads, and parking areas at their
                 principal points of definition. Triisinfonnationshallbeprovidedontheconstruction drawings. The
                 principal points of definition for utility systems shall be utility poles, obstructions, manholes, valve
                 boxes,  and other  appurtenances for heating  and cooling lines,  sewers,  and overhead and
                 underground power and telephone systems.

              •  Principal points of definition for potable water, and natural gas, distribution systems shall be valve
                 boxes, main line intersects, and fire hydrants.

              •  The principal points of definition for roads shall be roadway centerline intersects. Road alignment
                 surveys shall include stationing, bearings, and curve information tied to these principal points of
                 definition. Where applicable, the following information shall also be provided on the construction
                 drawings:

                 -  Stations and deflection angles for each point of intersection.
                 •  Right-of-way lines and markers.
                 -  Spot elevations (centerline, edge of pavement, and at intersects) at maximum intervals of 100
                    feet
                 -  Otherimpojvements (e.g., coinage inlets, wheelchair ramps, fire hydrants, sidewalks, and curt)
                    and gutter).
                 -  Topographic features within project limits.
                 -  Elevation contours.
                 -  Overhead and underground utility crossingsi(plan and profile).
                 -  Roadway drainage crossings. •
                 -  Location and description of underground utility witness markers.

2.4.1.3.5      UNDERGROUND UTILITIES
              Where exact routes of underground utilities are not defined within record drawings, the appropriate
              EPA authority shall coordinate  necessary electronic  line detection and exploratory excavation
              activities. Such utilities shall be located by survey and documented on the construction drawings.

2.4.1.3.6      CONSTRUCTION STAKING
              Construction staking for new EPA facilities shall comply with local standards and with practices
              approved by the appropriate EPA  authority.

2.4.2    SITE PLANNING AND DESIGN
        In the development of a site proposed for construction, it is necessary, at a minimum, to address, analyze, and
        assess all site-related issues outlined below and to comply with the requirements of Chapter 2, Site Planning
        and Landscape Design, GSA PBS-PQ100.1, as applicable.

2.4.2.1     IMPACT
           The following issues are to be studied in assessing the impact of a project on a given site:

           •   On-site capacities of present and future utilities.

                                                 2-8

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines                                                                    February 1998
Section 2 - Site Work


           •  Existing buildings (discussion shall include any need for temporary facilities and services to these
              buildings).

           •  Existing site utilities (discussion shall include any need for utility relocation and shutdown).

           •  Existing traffic patterns and vehicles, including emergency and service vehicles.

           •  The need for traffic phasing and control-plan requirements.

           •  Existing parking structures and surface parking (discussion shall include any need for temporary
              parking areas and additional capacity).

           •  Need for an environmental impact statement

2.4.2.2     DEVELOPMENT
           The following issues must be taken into account in determining whether the proposed development is
           appropriate and compatible with its natural environment and surrounding community.

           •  PTeservingsurroundingneighborhoodsandcommuruties. Laboratory facilities shall be located in areas
              where local zoning permits; however, facilities should be no less than one-quarter mite from existing
              residential developments and shall be located in such a way that prevailing winds will not direct fumes
              exhausting from EPA stacks toward existing residential developments.

           •  Preserving the character of the site, to the maximum possible extent, by retaining natural features, such
              as ground forms, trees, and other natural vegetation.

           •  Using the existing site to best advantage by locating and orienting buildings so that they are
              compatible with  natural site features.

           •  Developing functional relationships between site access points, parking lots, buildings, service areas,
              and all other project site elements.

           •  Providing for orderly future expansion of facilities by considering logical expansion of buildings,
              parking, and support services.

           •  Reviewing and assessing the impact of development with respect to any approved campus master plan
              and site infrastructure master plan.

2.4.2.3     DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
           The following issues must be considered in planning any EPA facility or site.

2.4.2.3.1      ENERGY CONSIDERATIONS
              Sun angles, prevailing winds, existing topography, microclimatic conditions, and major wooded areas
              shall be carefully analyzed to contribute to a more energy-efficient solution. Energy conservation
              should be enhanced by careful consideration and evaluation of the orientation of buildings.  Climate
              assets should be  maximized and climate liabilities  minimized

2.4.2.3.2      VIEWS
              Proper orientation of facilities to capitalize on major vistas is strongly encouraged.  Views into the site
              from major roadways should be carefully designed to be attractive and reflective of EPA's mission.
                                                  2-9

-------
                                                                              Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998                                                                  and Planning Guidelines
                                                                                  Section 2-Site Work


2.4.2.3.3      TOPOGRAPHY AND DRAINAGE
              A design shall be provided that works with, and not against, the existing grades. Significant positive
              drainage away from any existing or new construction is a primary concern. The design shall preserve,
              as much as is practical, any major existing drainage patterns.

              •   The natural grades of the site should be used to develop multilevel entry points, if possible.
                 Positive drainage away from all portions of the building is required.

              *   The location of the 100-year floodplain should be determined, and if this is present on the site, the
                 boundaries should be delineated on all surveys and site plans.

              •   The impact of development on stormwater runoff must be assessed

2.4.2.3.4      ADJACENT LAND USE
              In siting a facility, consideration should be given to existing land uses or potential development
              nearby, because such hind use may affect or restrict the facility design. Existing and proposed traffic
              patterns shall be considered in the design of site access and driveway locations.

2.4.2.3.5      NOISE, FUMES, AND ODORS
              Adjacent land uses may contribute noise, fumes, and odors; these uses shall be considered in the site
              development process.  Noise or odors may be severe enough to disqualify a site from consideration;
              therefore, a thorough analysis of neighboring facilities must be undertaken to ensure compatibility of
              the proposed facility with the existing adjacent land uses and environment

2.4.2.3.6      VIBRATION
              If there are adjacent land uses that produce vibrations that can be measured on a proposed site, the
              extent of the vibration and whether it will affect the proposed program shall be determined.

2.4.2.4     HISTORICAL AND ARCHAEOLOGICAL CONSIDERATIONS
           All publicly available documents shall be reviewed for any on-site historical or archaeological information.
           Any public record indicating historically or archaeologically sensitive areas on-site must be reported to
           EPA before any design is initiated. Archaeologically and historically sensitive areas on-site must be
           completely avoided until, and after, a thorough investigation has been completed and findings documented
           that provide direction on whether the area(s) in question may be used or must be preserved for future
           exploration.

2.4.2.5     COMMUNITY ISSUES AND ENVIRONMENTAL JUSTICE
           Environmental justice issues, as established by EPA, shall be addressed and the requirements of any
           required community review processes ascertained. A report shall be provided to EPA early in the design
           process and well before any community review is required on the project. All community reviews are over
           and above any EPA design review, reviews shall not be combined. Requirements of community review
           panels may include, but are not limited to, the following:

           •   Separate plans prepared to specifically highlight or emphasize that group's concern.

           •   Research  and data collection to be used  in generating special reports and in the environmental
              assessment.

           •   Presentation graphics for a formal submission or presentation during the review process.

           •   Documentation of the review and approval process, submission requirements, deadlines for each
              portion of the process, and the sequence that must be followed.
                                                2-10

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines	February 1998
Section 2-Site Work


           •  Identification of the methodologies, research, and data needed to identify and evaluate populations at
              disproportionately high environmental or human health risks and to ensure that these needs are
              considered in developing any EPA facility.

2.4.3    FACILITY SUING
        This subsection addresses facility siting issues and requirements.

2.4.3.1     GENERAL
           A site development plan shall be used to locate new facilities on existing or new sites in order to ensure
           effective site utilization and avoid future conflicts between existing and new facilities.

           •  During facility siting, an environmental assessment shall be prepared before the initiation  of a
              Government action that may significantly affect the environment

           •  To the extent possible, facilities shall not be sited in floodplains or in areas subject to flash floods;
              facility siting shall minimize destruction, loss, or degradation of wetlands.

           •  In selecting sites for new facilities, the following conditions and requirements shall be considered:

              -  Programmatic and operating efficiency.
              -  Natural topographic and geologic conditions.
              -  Existing cultural, historical, and archaeological resources.
              -  Endemic plant and animal species.
              -  Past use of site and existence of known Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA) and/or
                 Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation, and Liability Act (CERCLA) sites.
              -  Special siting requirements for facilities containing, using, or processing hazardous materials.
              *  Health, safety, and environmental protection requirements.
              -  Indoor air quality impacts (e.g., presence of radon in foundation soils and contamination from
                 other exterior sources, natural or man-made).
              *  Hazardous operations and consequences of potential accidents in adjacent facilities.
              -  Natural hazards, including seismic activity, wind, hurricane, tornado, flood, hail, volcanic ash,
                 lightning, and snow.
              -  Wave action within any natural or man-made body of water  (in accordance with the Coastal
                 Engineering Research Center f CERC] Shore Protection Manual).
              -  Physical protection requirements, security, and safeguard requirements (e.g., patrol rooms, gates,
                 security posts, and vehicle barriers).
              -  Adequacy of existing or planned support and service  facilities, including utilities, roads, and
                 parking areas.
              -  Interrelationships among facilities and facilities' aesthetic compatibility.
              -  Energy conservation requirements.
              -  Impact of site selections.

2.4.3.2     LABORATORY SITING
           New laboratories, EPA owned and leased, should be sited in consideration of the following guidance.

           •  Guidance  from Criteria for Siting of Laboratory Facilities Based on Safety and Environmental
              Factors, prepared for EPA by Johns Hopkins University, School of Hygiene and Public Health, Peter
              S. J. Lees and Morton Com.

           •  Siteacquisitionmethodologyasprescribedin the Environmental ClosureProcessforEPALaboratories
              chapter of the Safety, Health and Environmental Management Program Guidelines.

           •  Local zoning code.

                                                2-11

-------
February 1998
 Architecture, Engineering,
'' and Planning Guidelines
                                                                                  Section 2-Site Work
           •  Indoor air quality criteria referenced in Chapter 7, paragraph 3.e, of the Safety Manual.

           •  Location shall be large enough to accommodate the laboratory building and outbuildings (hazardous
              materials building) with adequate setbacks meeting local requirements and RCRA requirements.

           •  Laboratories preferably shall be located in light industrial areas where there are provisions for
              containing accidental spills prior to discharge to the local stormwater system and in areas that have
              fully staffed emergency  response personnel (fire and medical), including  hazardous materials
              (HAZMAT) teams.

           •  Laboratories shall not be located in residential areas or in mixed-occupancy high rise locations.

2.4.3.3     BUILDING LOCATION
           New buildings and building additions  shall be located in accordance with the site development plan.

2.4.3.3.1      OPEN SPACE
              Open space shall be provided between structures to accommodate site security, landscaping, and other
              environmental considerations.  Sufficient access shall be provided  around building exteriors to
              accommodate emergency vehicles, maintenance vehicles, and snow removal equipment In cold
              climates, building entrances, stairs, and other pedestrian circulation features should not be placed
              along the north side of buildings or within shaded areas.   Off-site drainage areas and the
              environmental impacts that proposed stormwater management practices will have on surrounding
              properties shall also be carefully reviewed.

2.4.3.3.2      CONDITIONS AND REQUIREMENTS
              The following conditions and requirements shall be considered during site selection for new buildings:

                 Architectural and functional compatibility with the environment
                 Operation and service function relationships
                 Natural topographic and geologic conditions
                 Existing cultural and archaeological resources
                 Historic sites
                 Abandoned mines or wells and potential for subsidence
                 Endemic plant and animal species
                 Availability of existing utility services
                 Building setback requirements
                 Availability of existing road systems
                 Traffic volume
                 Refuse handling and loading zone requirements
                 Adequacy for parking, future expansion, and other land use requirements
                 Health, safety, and environmental protection requirements
                 Physical protection requirements
                 Security and safeguard requirements
                 Energy conservation requirements
                 Indoor air quality impacts (e.g., presence of radon in foundation soils)
                 Impact of site selection  -
                 Minimum fire separation between buildings (in accordance with National Fire Protection
                 Association [NFPA] 80A).

2.4.3.4     HAZARD SEGREGATION
           In general, occupancies posing different levels of risk shall be separated by fire-resistive construction.
           Areas shall be segregated as noted below and as required by local building codes and NFPA 101.
                                                2-12

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines	February 1998
Section 2 - Site Work


2.4.3.4.1      PARKING STRUCTURES
              The construction, protection, and control of hazards in parking structures shall comply with the
              requirements of NFPA 88 A.  Parking garages located within buildings that contain other occupancies
              shall be separated from the remainder of the building by construction that has a fire resistance of at
              least 2 hours. Entrances between garages and elevators shall be protected by a vestibule having a 1 l/a-
              hour, Class B or higher fire door.  Doorways between garages and stairs, building corridors, or other
              non-garage areas shall be protected by 1 '/2-hour, Class B or higher fire doors. The garage ventilation
              system must be designed as a separate entity from the main building and from the occupied spaces,
              with the exhaust from the garage directed outside.  No recirculation of air is allowed in garages. In
              garages located under buildings, elevator vestibules shall be positively pressurized to prevent garage
              vapors from entering the occupied areas.

2.4.4    SITE PREPARATION
        Local topography shall be considered during project and facility design. New facilities shall be planned to fit
        the local topography and to require a minimum amount of grading. Design shall include provisions for erosion
        control and soil stabilization in ditches, fill slopes, embankments, and denuded areas, and restoration of areas
        disturbed by the project Restoration shall be to original or improved conditions.

2.4.4.1     DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
           Site preparation design shall meet the following criteria:

           •  Vehicle parking, sidewalks,  and road requirements shall comply with subsection 2.6 of this Manual

           *  Site drainage design shall comply with subsection 2.7 of this Manual

           •  Site power and lighting shall comply with Section  16, Electrical Requirements, of this Manual.

           •  Site security requirements shall be taken into account and provided for in accordance with criteria
              established by the appropriate EPA authority.

2.4.5    DEWATERING
        The design, installation, and  operation of dewatering  systems for groundwater  control  shall be the
        responsibility of the construction contractor, unless otherwise stipulated in the contract. The groundwater
        investigation and the selection and design of a dewatering control system shall comply with TM 5-818-5. The
        design engineer shall determine whether the assistance  of a qualified groundwater hydrologist shall be
        required.

2.4.6    SHORING AND UNDERPINNING
        All shoring and underpinning shall comply with the safety requirements of CFR Part 1926,  Subpart P.
        Remedial  underpinning shall be performed where existing foundations are inadequate. Precautionary
        underpinning shall be performed where new construction adjacent to an existing structure requires deeper
        excavation. A structural engineer specializing in underpinning shall perform any underpinning design, which
        shall comply with the principles in  Winterkorn and Fang, Foundation Engineering Handbook.

2.4.7    EARTHWORK
        Earthwork includes excavation, filling, stabilizing, and  compaction of earth at the site. Earthwork also
        includes the addition of borrow and the disposal of excavated  material.   The earthwork design  shall
        incorporate the findings of the geotechnical report required by subsection 2.3.3 of this Manual.

2.4.8    WATERFRONT CONSTRUCTION
        Waterfront construction includes seawalls, docks, marinas, and other ancillary boating facilities associated
        with coastal development. This type of construction for EPA facilities shall comply with applicable federal,
        state, and local standards and with practices approved by the appropriate EPA authority.

                                                 2-13

-------
                                                                               Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998                                                                    and Planning Guidelines
                                                                                    Section 2-Site Work
2.5    Landscaping and Site-Related Requirements

2.5.1    GENERAL
        Landscape planning, design, and development must be integrated with building massing, design, and
        materials. The landscaping design process must coincide with the building design process to create a single
        design that integrates site and buildings(s). The use of datable exterior materials that enhance both the site
        landscaping and the building design and help to integrate the two design disciplines is strongly encouraged.

        If the facility is to be a part of an existing campus or among other buildings in a master-planned development,
        the landscape design as well as the building design must be integrated with, and compatible with, the style(s)
        of the previously constructed permanent facilities on campus. The existing and developed site assets shall be
        used to full advantage. The existing physical features of the site and surrounding buildings shall be observed
        and documented.

        •  The landscaping of the site shall create an environmentally sensitive and aesthetically attractive design.
           The natural environment should blend with the proposed new construction.

        •  Landscaped courts and open spaces that are accessible to all staff are encouraged.

        •  Grass-covered areas away from public view shall be provided and equipped as outside eating and visiting
           areas (with picnic tables, benches, and landscape furnishings).

        •  The facility surroundings shall be landscaped with trees, shrubs, flowering plants, and grass in a way that
           will enhance the aesthetic character of the building(s) and hide or screen exposed equipment and building
           parts, features, or functions that, by their nature, are not aesthetically pleasant.  Vegetation may be used
           to screen, or form a barrier to, paniculate matter and to protect the building{s) from motor vehicle
           pollutant sources.

        •  The topography of the site around the building(s) shall slope away from the buildiag(s) and away from
           neighboring building(s) to direct any water away from the new facility and from any neighboring
           building(s).

        •  Xeriscape design practices (use of vegetation requiring minimal watering) shall be used to minimize
           maintenance of the plantings.

        •  In general, low-maintenance landscape design and features shall be used.

2.5.2    PROFESSIONAL QUALIFICATIONS FOR SITE DESIGN
        All site landscaping shall be designed by a  registered landscape architect This landscape architect must
        maintain his or her registration continuously and without break for at least the entire design and construction
        process and for the life of the design contract for the project

        •  All site landscaping shall be  installed and/or  modified by a professional landscaper or professional
           gardener.  All landscaping (plants and grass), except for annuals, if used, shall be guaranteed for 16
           months after acceptance by EPA.

        •  All costs for the landscaping shall be anticipated in the final cost estimate.  These costs shall be included
           in the overall costs of the project.  Such costs shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following:

           -  Retaining curbs and walls
           -  Plantings and grasses
           -  Exterior signage and graphics

                                                 2-14

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines	February 1998
Section 2 - Site Work


           -  Site furniture and furnishings
           -  Irrigation
              Site hardscape and special pavings
           -  Warranties and guarantees
           -  Exterior screens and barriers
           -  Specialty features incorporated into the design
              Maintenance guarantees
           -  Site lighting
           -  Site sculpture.

2.5.3    GENERAL SITE REQUIREMENTS
        All landscaping and site amenities for the proposed development shall be in accordance with all applicable.
        local, state, and federal codes and industry standards. Also, landscaping and site amenities shall comply with
        any master plan or campus design requirements and all construction requirements and standards. The more
        stringent requirements shall be used if a conflict exists.
                                                        \

2.5.3.1     EXISTING CONDITIONS
           The landscape architect shall (1) preserve existing trees and undergrowth, where appropriate, for buffers;
           (2) review buffer requirements of the local community; and (3) use existing trees to the extent possible,
           since the larger size will provide greater immediate impact on-site.

2.5.3.2     PLANTINGS
           Guidelines on plantings are as follows:

           •  Establish functional design criteria.
           •  Consider focal or entry area; design main entry area to produce an obvious sense of arrival at facility
           *  Create views or screen views as needed.
           •  Develop color and seasonal interest
           •  Provide orientation (e.g., with respect to sun and wind) for facility and creation of shade.
           *  Consider ultimate size and scale relative to specific area or site size.
           •  Consider formal planting plan or informal, naturalistic plan.
           •  Avoid major plantings in areas where expansion is planned.
           •  Provide appropriate location of plantings relative to prevailing wind and sun.
           •  Break up large areas of pavement with landscape islands.
           *  Choose plants and design plantings to be tolerant of climate, weather conditions, rainfall, and other
              environmental conditions.
           •  Determine irrigation requirements.
           •  Determine maintenance requirements such as fertilization rates, soil acidity, and, if required, pruning
              and trimming needs.
           *  Coordinate plantings with location of signs, light standards, hydrants, underground utilities, and other
              man-made structures.
           •  Ensure that lawns slope to provide proper drainage (minimum 1 percent grade).
           •  Provide ground cover on severe slopes for aesthetic and maintenance considerations.
           •  Planting must be reviewed and approved by the appropriate EPA personnel.

2.5.3.3     SITE FURNITURE AND FURNISHINGS
           Guidelines for choosing and locating site furniture and furnishings are as follows:

              Select furniture design to complement the building theme.
              Determine quantity and location of furniture.
              Establish function intended for seating and waiting areas, outdoor meeting areas, and eating areas.
              Determine flag pole heights, location, and quantity and integrate into the design.
              Locate fences and identify their style, color, and purpose.

                                                 2-15

-------
                                                                               Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998                                                                   and Planning Guidelines
                                                                                   Section 2 -Site Work


           •  Integrate trash receptacles, cigarette urns, newspaper dispenser boxes, and mailboxes into the design.
           *  Include safety review of proposed surfaces, equipment, and layout of programmed recreational and
              playground equipment.

2.5.3.4     SITE LIGHTING
           The following guidelines apply to site lighting:

           •  Design lighting to complement the architectural and land planning theme and to accord with any
              current nmstGr pl3n or csunpus
           •  Utilize energy-efficient and easily maintainable fixture types (the selection of lighting fixtures must
              consider long-term costs).

           •  Heights of lighting standards must be appropriate to the scale of the building and the area being lit.

           •  Provide lighting intensity that is commensurate with the use of the area and the health and safety of
              employees and other persons accessing the building during non-daylight hours.

           •  Control light with respect to adjacent property.

2.5.3.5     EXTERIOR SIGNAGE AND GRAPHICS
           Considerations with respect to exterior signage are:

              Appropriate scale.
              Viewing angle and speed of observer.
              Appropriate color and letter style and clarity of message.
              Appropriate locations for signage, including intersections, parking lots, and entries.
              Design that complements the building style, accent color, or building color.
              Clear identification of functions: traffic direction, orientation, and general information.
              Coordination of building identification at site entries with that on the  buildings themselves;
              identification should be strong, legible, and compatible with interior signage and graphics.
              Compliance with signage ordinances (such compliance is required).
              Providing special identification for the project, if required.
              Signage must be reviewed and approved by appropriate EPA personnel.
              Designing exterior signage to allow future removal and change without damage to existing exterior
              materials and to allow possible reuse of the signage after its removal and/or reuse of the lettering of
              the removed signage.

2.5.3.6     OUTSIDE SERVICE AND UTILITY AREAS
           Many elements are necessary for the proper operation of a building. Some are visually undesirable and
           require proper planning for screening and buffering, which should be incorporated into the building
           design.  The design professional is responsible for coordinating the  work of all disciplines and for
           identifying all elements of the proposed project that will have a visual impact.  The following are among
           the items that may require appropriate screening and buffering:

              Meters
              Vaults
              Transformers
              Dumpsters
              Compactor units
              Emergency generators
              High pressure gas cylinder storage and manifold systems
              Pressure reducers

                                                 2-16

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines                                                                 February 1998
Section 2-Site Work


              Valves
              Pump hoses
              Outdoor storage areas
              Loading docks
              Mechanical equipment
              Compressors and cooling lowers.

2.5.4    HARDSCAPE REQUIREMENTS
        Hardscape (paving) and hardscape materials shall be integrated with the building and architectural planning
        and with landscaping design and concept. In general, materials that soften typical hardscape (paving) designs
        shall be used. Appropriate material usage shall be integrated with  an understanding of project budget and
        public versus restricted access and use areas.

2.5.5    RECREATIONAL REQUIREMENTS
        Recreational site requirements shall be reviewed with EPA on a project-by-project basis.


2.6     Vehicle and Pedestrian Movement

2.6.1    ACCESS AND CIRCULATION
        Although visual and other aesthetic aspects of access to the project site, and thus to the project facilities, are
        critical, the primary access requirements involve fire and life safety. The most current version of the Safety
        Manual shall be reviewed for these guidelines. Either traffic data will be provided or a traffic impact analysis
        will be performed. Geometric design of all roads, streets, access drives, and parking areas shall also comply
        with American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHFO) GDHS-84. Gradients
        for roads, streets, and access drives also shall comply with AASHTO GDHS-84. Road and street grade
        changes in excess of 1 percent shall be accomplished by means of vertical curves. The length of vertical curves
        shall be determined in accordance with AASHTO GDHS-84. Roadway centerline gradient profiles shall be
        shown for vertical control.

        •   Design and details of construction of flexible and rigid pavements shall comply with the local state
           highway department standards. Concrete valley gutters may be provided if swales with flexible pavements
           are necessary. Joint layout plans and details shall be provided for all rigid pavements. A thickened edge
           shall be used along edges of rigid pavement where future construction will occur.

        •   Signs, pavement markings, channelization, and other traffic control measures shall comply with the
           requirements of the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT) Manual of Uniform Traffic Control
           Devices.

2.6.1.1     FIRE DEPARTMENT APPARATUS ACCESS
           Public records must be reviewed for any codes, on-site and campus design requirements, ordinances, and
           local fire department requirements for all emergency requirements.  Fire department access involves fire
           department apparatus and on-site fixed fire safety equipment (e.g., fire hydrants, fire loops, postindicator
           valves, automatic  sprinkler and standpipe system connections), vehicular circulation, pedestrian
           circulation, and parking. The following minimum requirements shall be met:

           •   All new buildings shall have at least two sides readily accessible to fire department apparatus at all
              times.

           •   Fire lanes shall be provided for buildings that are set back  more than 150 feet from a road or that
              exceed 30 feet in height and are set back more than 50 feet from a road.
                                               2-17

-------
                                                                                Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998                                                                    and Planning Guidelines
                                                                                    Section 2-Site Work


           *  Fire lanes shall be at least 20 feet wide, and the road edge closest to the building shall be at least 10
              feet from the building.

           •  The minimum roadway turning radius shall conform to a 48-foot semitrailer template.

           •  Fire lanes shall be constructed of an all-weather driving surface capable of supporting imposed loads
              of 25 tons.  If appropriate for the area and climate, these lanes may consist of compacted earth with
              top soil and seed

           •  Any dead-end road more than 300 feet long shall be provided with a turnaround at the closed end of
              at least 90 feet in diameter.

           •  Fire lanes and access areas for fire hydrants and automatic sprinkler or standpipe connections shall
              be clearly identified by painting the curbs yellow, with black lettering reading "NO PARKING - FIRE
              LANE" spaced at 40-foot intervals. In addition, signage carrying the same message shall be posted
              at 100-foot  intervals along the restricted area.

2.6.1.2     VEHICULAR CIRCULATION
           Vehicular circulation design shall comply with the following requirements and guidelines:

           •  Vehicular circulation shall be designed in accordance with industry standards, code requirements, and
              any overall campus master plan or facilities master plan philosophy in effect at the subject site.
              Circulation shall respect the pedestrian circulation environment of the campus and/or facilities and
              provide for safe movement of vehicles and pedestrians. Existing traffic studies shall be evaluated and
              coordinated in order to implement the best possible overall circulation system.

           *  Vehicular access to a new project shall be evaluated with  respect to existing and  planned site
              circulation and shall provide for clear separation of staff, visitor, service, and bus vehicular circulation.

           *  Adequate emergency vehicle access shall be provided to all points on the building periphery by use of
              proper grades, surface materials, clearances, and other design features.

           *  Entrances to the facility or campus shall be clearly marked and located so that access to each building,
              parking area, group of buildings, and service area is convenient and recognizable.

           •  The siting of new buildings shall take into account the requirements of future expansion, design of
              buildings, roads, and surface and structured parking.

           •  Site vehicular design shall provide adequate space for queuing at drop-offs and exit drives for visitors,
              buses,  18-wheel vehicles, taxis, and other vehicle types, keeping turning conflicts to a minimum and
              permitting proper service vehicle maneuvering and staging.

           •  Internal drive aisle widths and turning radii shall be designed to allow for the expected service and
              emergency  vehicles.

2.6.2    PARKING AND  LOADING FACILITIES
        Parking areas should  not be located in front of buildings or at visually prominent locations along routes of
        approach.  Landscaping, grading, and location shall emphasize  attractive features and de-emphasize or
        obscure undesirable features. Parking lots shall meet local governmental standards for circulation, layout, and
        safety.  Handicapped parking allocations shall comply with ADA  guidelines. Perimeter concrete curbs and
        gutters shall be considered for all parking areas and access drives  in built-up areas. In remote or little-used
        areas, concrete  curbs and gutters shall  be used only when required to control drainage. Removable
                                                 2-18

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines                                                                     February1998
Section 2-Site Work


        prefabricated concrete wheel stops may be used where appropriate. Specific parking design guidelines are
        presented in the following subsection.

2.6.2.1     PARKING DESIGN
           Parking for the proposed development shall be based on applicable codes for occupancy, local zoning
           requirements, and any campus or facility master plan in effect at the subject site. As part of the site
           development phase, multilevel parking garages or below-ground parking shall be considered as an
           alternative to surface parking. At a minimum, the following guidelines shall be followed:

           •   Distribution of total parking (e.g., employee [by type], police, emergency vehicle, visitor, handicapped,
               motorcycle, bicycle) shall be calculated and clearly shown in the site development  phase. The
               minimum size for standard passenger car stalls shall be 9 feet x  19  feet.  Up to 15 percent of the
               parking may be designated for compact cars. Stalls for compact cars shall be at least 8 feet x is feet.

           •   The structural design for pavement on surface lots shall comply with local state highway department
               standards for general parking areas.

           •   Parking aisles and lots subject to frequent truck traffic shall be evaluated to determine whether thicker
               pavement sections are required.

           •   Design calculations shall provide for a potential growth in staff of 10 percent Provision shall also be
               made for 25 percent expansion of the facility, with the design for future parking expansion shown.

           *   Parking areas must be clearly related to entry points. Walking distances should be kept to a minimum.

           *   Handicapped  parking spaces shall be provided in  accordance  with ADA requirements or the
               requirements of state codes and ordinances if these are more restrictive.

           *   Sufficient slope (1 percent minimum) shall be provided for positive drainage for runoff.

           *   Slopes shall be no more than 4 percent.

           •   Sufficient open lawn area shall be allowed adjacent to parking lots for snow storage, as required by
               climate and area.

           •   Wherever possible, 90-degree parking design should be used.

           •   Surface drainage in parking areas must not cross designated pedestrian paths.

           •   Dead-end parking bays are not allowed.

           •   Existing large trees should be integrated into new parking areas, where feasible.

           •   Parking areas should provide curbs (consistent with  site design) with a minimum 2-foot overhang
               behind the curb. Use of concrete wheel stops should be avoided.

2.6.3    PEDESTRIAN ACCESS
        A functional system of walks connecting structures, operational areas, parking areas, streets, and other access
        paths shall be provided to meet the demands of pedestrian traffic. The location and width of these areas and
        paths shall be determined in accordance with the site development plan. Walks subject to use by the physically
        disabled shall comply with current ADA guidelines. Specific guidelines for the design of pedestrian walkways
        are prescribed in the following subsection.
                                                  2-19

-------
                                                                                Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998                                                                    and Planning Guidelines
                                                                                    Section 2-Site Work


2.6.3.1     DESIGN OF PEDESTRIAN WALKWAYS
           Pedestrian circulation shall be designed in accordance with industiy standards, code requirements, and
           any overall campus master plan philosophy in effect at the subject site.

           •  Sidewalks $iiaii follow accepted design standards.

           *  Pedestrian walks shall have a minimum of 1 percent cross pitch for drainage.

           •  The width of walks shall be a function of pedestrian traffic volumes determined by the master plan
              and/or by specific project requirements.

           •  Walks shall accommodate handicapped persons.  Slopes, landings, and access points shall be in
              accordance with ADA requirements as well as with the most stringent applicable code or combination
              of codes applicable to the project.

           •  Crosswalks from parking and other buildings shall be clearly painted and properly assigned.

           •  Walkway paths shall be designed in response to the expected-origin/destination analysis of the site and
              its users.

           •  Drop curbs shall be used to provide transition for handicapped persons at crosswalks, drop-off zones,
              and ends of walkways.

2.6.4   AIRPORTS AND HELIPORTS
        This subsection provides general guidelines for design of aviation facilities and indicates requirements and
        conditions that must be considered in designing and assessing such facilities.

2.6.4.1     GENERAL
           Planning and design of aviation facilities and airspace clearances shall comply with Federal Aviation
           Administration (FAA) AC 150/5050-5. Planning and design of aviation facilities shall emphasize safety
           for all modes of aircraft operations. Aircraft installations require permanent unobstructed airspace, and
           facilities and equipment constructed to facilitate maintenance, ground handling, and flight operations.

           •  Landing and takeoff paths  (traffic patterns) shall be oriented to avoid need for critical-facility
              overflights. Traffic patterns  and altitudes shall be established and published to provide for aircraft
              approaches that are away from critical facilities.

           •  Heliports shall be sited, and traffic patterns established, so that normal operation does not require
              overflights of critical facilities. Heliports shall not be located closer to critical facilities than 2 times
              the dimension of the landing pad or 3 times the rotor diameter of the largest helicopter authorized to
              land at the heliport.

2.6.4.2     SITE CONSIDERATIONS
           The following site conditions shall be taken into account in determining the adequacy of the aviation
           facility:

              Topography
              Vegetation and existing construction
              Weather elements
              Prevailing wind direction in summer and winter
              Soil conditions
              Flood hazards
              Natural and man-made obstructions

                                                 2-20

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines	February 1998
Section 2 - Site Work


              Adjacent land uses
              Availability of usable airspace
              Accessibility of usable roads
              Location of site utilities
              Accommodation of future expansion
              Aboveground utilities.

2.6.4.3     DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
           The layout of airfield facilities shall support operational efficiency and provide safe conditions for takeoff
           and landing operations and for ground handling of aircraft.

           *  Airfield safety clearances shall comply with the clearance criteria of FAA AC ISO/5300. The critical-
              decision-point and emergency land^g areas for the various airci^usingafadUryshal^
              on the basis of the respective aircraft performance charts.

           •  All other applicable design elements shall conform to the most current FAA criteria.

           •  In accordance with FAA AC 150/5070-6A, airfield layout shall also consider:

              -  Wind direction and velocity analyzed
              -  A taxiway system
              -  Parking aprons
              -  Supporting facilities.


2.7     Stormwater Management

2.7.1    STREET DRAINAGE
        Street drainage in developed areas shall be conveyed within the roadway cross section. Curb inlets shall be
        used to divert storm flows to surface and subsurface stormwater conveyance systems. Curb inlets shall not be
        located within curb returns or in areas of heavy pedestrian traffic. Pedestrian and cyclist safety shall be
        considered during selection of storm inlet grates. Curb gaps shall be used where roadside drainage swales
        exist. Wherever possible, curb openings with inlets located in grassed areas should be utilized in lieu of curb
        inlets.

        In locations where uninterrupted vehicular access is essential to critical operational activities, roadway cross
        sections shall be designed to convey runoff from the 25-year, 6-hour storm so that one driving lane width (12
        feet) is free of flowing or standing water. Lower classification roadways shall be designed to convey runoff
        from the 10-year, 6-hour storm. Stormwater management systems shall have sufficient capacity to ensure that
        runoff from the 100-year, 6-hour design storm will not exceed a depth of 10!/a inches at any point within the
        street right-of-way or extend more than 2V» inches above the top of the curb in urban streets. Inverted crown
        roadway cross sections shall not be used unless approved by EPA.

2.7.2    WATERSHED  DEVELOPMENT
        Site development plans shall  be developed with careful review of the impact the plan will have on  the
        watershed. Appropriate stormwater management strategies shall be developed to minimize or eliminate
        adverse effects on existing and future development within the watershed.

2.7.3    EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL
        Erosion and sedimentation control measures, in accordance with federal, state, and local standards, should
        be used during construction. The site should be properly graded and planted to minimize erosion.

2.7.4    STORMWATER RETENTION AND DETENTION

                                                2-21

-------
                                                                              Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998	and Planning Guidelines
                                                                                  Section 2-Site Work


        Site development plans shall incorporate appropriate stormwater retention/detention facilities into the storm
        drainage system. These facilities must be designed in strict accordance with all applicable federal, state, and
        local requirements.

2.7.5    CONVEYANCE
        Subsurface and open channel stormwater conveyance systems shall meet the following requirements.

2.7.5.1     STORM SEWERS
           Subsurface drainage systems shall be sized to accommodate runoff from the 10-year, 6-hour storm and
           shall be sized for a greater storm in locations where there is substantial risk to critical facilities and
           operations.  Subsurface system designs shall meet sediment transport requirements.  Storm sewers shall
           be designed to maintain a minimum scour velocity of 2 feet per second. New storm sewers shall be sized
           for open channel flow. The minimum storm sewer size shall be 15 inches. The minimum culvert size shall
           be IS inches. For roof drain systems, the minimum pipe size for laterals and collectors shall be 6 inches.

2.7.5.2     OPEN CHANNELS
           Open channel stormwater conveyance systems shall be sized to accommodate the 10-year, 6-hour design
           flow with a minimum freeboard and shall be sized for a  greater storm in  locations where there is
           substantial risk to critical facilities and operations.

           Open channel stormwater conveyance systems shall be designed for minimum maintenance. The potential
           for scour or deposition within earth-lined channels shall be considered before approval by the appropriate
           EPA authority. Preference for earth-lined or "armored" channels shall be based on a comparison of capital,
           maintenance, and operation costs. Inlets to open channel stormwater conveyance systems shall be placed
           at locations where  erosion potential is minimal.

2.7.6    STORMWATER QUALITY
        Site development shall incorporate quality control measures that reduce the concentration of pollutants in
        stormwater prior to discharge into receiving waters.

2.7.7    FLOODPLAIN AND WETLANDS DEVELOPMENT
        Development, modification, or occupancy of floodplains and wetlands should be avoided, particularly when
        practical alternatives exist To the extent possible, EPA shall meet the requirements of Executive Orders
        11988 and 11990.  EPA shall:

        •  Avoid, to the extent possible, the long-term and short-term adverse impacts associated with the destruction
           of wetlands and the occupancy and modification of floodplains and wetlands, and avoid direct and indirect
           support of floodplain and wetlands development wherever there is a practicable alternative for new
           development.

        *  Incorporate floodplain management goals  and wetland protection considerations into its planning,
           regulation, and decision making.

        •  Carefully consider the potential impacts of any EPA action in a floodplain and the impacts of any new
           EPA construction in wetlands not located in a floodplain.

        •  Identify, consider, and, as appropriate, implement alternative actions to avoid or mitigate adverse impacts
           on floodplains and wetlands.

        *  Provide opportunity for early public review of any plans or proposals for actions in  floodplains or.new
           construction in wetlands.
                                                 2-22

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines	.	February 1998
Section 2 - Site Work


        •   Ensure that construction within floodplains or wetlands complies with 10 CFR Part 1022 and NEPA and
           implementing regulations.

2.7.8    COASTAL DEVELOPMENT
        The development of site boating, docking, and seawall facilities shall conform to all federal, state, and local
        requirements.


2.8     Utilities and Support Services

2.8.1    WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS
        This subsection applies to water distribution systems for domestic (potable) and industrial (nonpotable) uses.
        The use of dual water systems (i.e., domestic and industrial or irrigation) is subject to the approval of the
        appropriate EPA facilities engineering group. Where use of dual water systems is approved, the location and
        alignment of such systems must be clearly identified by location markers placed throughout the site at
        intervals specified by the appropriate EPA facilities engineering group.  Both systems must also be clearly
        identified on the record drawings.

        •   Cross connections between domestic and industrial or irrigation systems are prohibited. Domestic water
           conveyed within distribution systems that serve EPA facilities shall comply with the applicable Safe
           Drinking Water Act (SDWA) requirements; 40 CFR Parts 141-142; and all other applicable state,
           regional, and local requirements. The quality of domestic water within such distribution systems shall be
           protected from degradation by installation of reduced-pressure principal assembly backflow preventers to
           prevent backflow of contaminants or pollutants into the system.

        *   Backflow prevention devices shall be installed in accordance with the National Plumbing Code. Only
           devices approved by the Foundation for Cross-Connection Control and Hydraulic Research shall be used.
           (Refer to Manual of Cross-Connection Control [6th Edition, August 1979].)

2.8.1.1     PLANNING CONSIDERATIONS
           The following considerations shall be incorporated into the project planning.

           •  During route selection and initial planning for water distribution systems, the following conditions and
              requirements shall be considered:

              -  Projections concerning future population and development
              -  Anticipated average daily flow for fully developed conditions
              •  Anticipated peak flows for domestic, industrial, fire, and special water usage
              -  Hydraulic design criteria
              -  Health and safety requirements
              -  Physical constraints (e.g., utility corridors and topographic features)
              -  Energy conservation and environmental constraints.

           •  Distribution system layouts shall be as simple and direct as possible. Where feasible, initial planning
              efforts shall optimize system layouts (e.g., system loop lines) in order to:

              -  Facilitate future system expansion
              -  Strengthen fire protection capabilities
              -  Minimize conflicts with other utilities
              -  Reduce maintenance requirements.

           •  Water distribution systems shall be included within the utility master plan.
                                                2-23

-------
                                                                               Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998	\	.	and Planning Guidelines
                                                                                   Section 2-Site Work


2.8.1.2     SYSTEM DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
           Domestic water distribution mains shall be sized to accommodate the greatest anticipated demand (e.g.,
           fire demand, special requirements, or the peak domestic demand). Domestic water distribution systems
           shall be designed to deliver a peak domestic flow of 214 times the average daily demand, plus any special
           demands, at a minimum residual pressure of 30 pounds per square inch (psi) at ground elevation (or
           higher pressure residual pressure if special conditions warrant).

           •  Domestic water distribution systems that also serve fire protection requirements shall be designed to
              satisfy fire flow requirements plus 50 percent of the average domestic requirements plus any industrial
              or process demands that cannot be reduced during a fire.

           •  Each fire hydrant within the distribution system must be capable of delivering 1,000 gallons per
              minute (gpm) at a minimum residual pressure of 20 psi. Where domestic water distribution systems
             . must serve internal fire protection systems (i.e., sprinklers or foamite systems), adequate residual
              pressures shall be maintained for proper operation of these systems. Fire hydrant branches (from main
              to hydrant) shall be not less than 6 inches in diameter and shall be no longer than 300 feet. A  gate
              valve shall be installed within each fire hydrant branch to facilitate maintenance. Fire hydrants shall
              be installed at  maximum intervals of 400 feet and shall not be located more than 300 feet from the
              buildings to be protected.  Each building shall be protected by at least two hydrants. All water mains
              supplying fire  protection systems and fire hydrants shall be treated as fire mains and installed in
              accordance with NFPA 24.  Water mains shall have a minimum pressure rating of ISO psi. Water
              distribution systems shall be designed to maintain normal operating pressures of 40 psi to 100 psi (at
              ground level) in mains and building service lines. Where the gradient across the service area is such
              that multiple pressure zones are  necessary to maintain the normal operating pressures, pressure*
              reducing valves shall be used to separate each pressure zone. Use of pressure relief and surge relief
              valves shall be considered, as necessary, to preclude system damage from water hammer.

           •  Air release and vacuum breaker valves shall be installed, as required, at high points within the
              distribution system and in long supply mains.

           •  DistribuUonsystemmaimshallhaveanunimumdepthofcoverof3feet. In cold climates, at roadway
              crossings in high traffic areas, and at railroad crossings, additional cover shall be provided to prevent
              freezing. Building service lines shall be at least 1 inch in diameter. Service lines that are less than 2
              inches in diameter shall be connected to the distribution main by a corporation stop and a copper
              gooseneck, with a service stop below frostline. Service lines that are more than 2 inches in diameter
              shall be connected to the distribution main by a rigid connection and shall have a gate valve located
              below frostline. Risers from frostline to floorlines of buildings shall be adequately insulated.  Water
              storage facilities shall comply with NFPA 22.

           *  Soil and groundwater conditions (e.g., soil corrosivity) on the site shall be considered in the selection
              of pipe materials. Where ferrous pipe is installed within the distribution system, insulating couplings
              shall be installed to prevent galvanic corrosion.

2.8.1.3     WELLHEAD DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS FOR RESEARCH PURPOSES
           Where and when water must be provided for fish culture, on-site drilled wells shall be  capable of
           producing a minimum of 20 gallons of water (of consistent quality) per minute unless otherwise required
           by the EPA project officer.  The water must be of a suitable quality for rearing and maintaining  fish
           cultures. It must not be contaminated with pesticides, heavy metals, sulfides, silica, or chlorides.  The
           anions should be those found in natural lakes or streams. Water quality parameters should be as follows:

           •  Dissolved oxygen:   > 6.0 milligrams per liter (mg/L)
           •  pH:                7.2-8.5
           •  Hardness:          40-200 mg/L (as CaC03)

                                                 2-24

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines                                                                   February 1998
Section 2-Site Work


           •  Alkalinity:         Slightly less than hardness
           *  Iron:               < 1.0 mg/L
           *  Chlorides:          < 250 mg/L as chlorides and sulfates
           *  Sulfides:           < 2.0 micrograms per liter (^g/L) as undissociated H2S.

           The well and pump shall be protected from the elements. Two 500-gallon water tanks shall be installed
           as reservoirs for water prior to distribution.

2.8.2    WASTEWATER COLLECTION SYSTEMS
        This subsection applies to sanitary wastewater collection systems (i.e., lift stations, force mains, collector
        sewers and interceptor sewers, and building sewers 5 feet beyond the building foundation).

2.8.2.1     SYSTEM DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
           Industrial wastewater and pollutants above the minimum concentrations specified by EPA shall be
           excluded from sanitary wastewater collection systems.

           •  Pretreatment systems (such as acid neutralization) shall be installed where required and shall meet
              EPA specifications.

           •  Hydraulic design of wastewater collection systems shall comply with TM 5-814-1, TM 5-814-2, and
              American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) 37. All wastewater collection systems shall be designed
              for gravity flow unless such systems are not economically feasible. Sewage lift stations and force mains
              shall not be used unless approved by the appropriate EPA authority. Feasibility analyses and economic
              evaluations of the costs of lift stations and force mains for construction, operation, and maintenance
              shall be prepared and submitted to the appropriate EPA authority for approval. Sewers and force mains
              shall be sized to accommodate the estimated daily maximum and minimum flow for the initial and
              final years of the design period. These  maximum and minimum flows shall be specified by the
              appropriate EPA authority in accordance with ASCE 37.

              -  Velocities in gravity sewers and force mains shall not exceed 10 feet per second.
              -  Gravity sewers shall be designed for a minimum velocity of 2 feet  per second.
              -  Force mains shall be designed for a minimum velocity of 3 Vt feet per second.

           •  For the preliminary design, domestic water consumption rates shall be used to approximate wastewater
              flows. For the final design, where possible, actual flow data from an adjacent service area similar to
              the service area under consideration shall be used to estimate wastewater discharges. In the absence
              of such data, metered water use, less the consumptive use (i.e., water withdrawal rate), can be used.

           •  Sewers and force mains shall have a minimum depth of cover of 2 feet. Additional cover shall be
              provided to prevent freezing in cold climates and at roadway crossings. Sewer and force main trench
              widths shall be minimized; however, excavations, trenching, and shoring shall comply with 29 CFR
              Part 1926, Subpart P. Pipe bedding specified by the pipe manufacturer shall be in place before sewers
              and force mains are installed.

           •  Sewers or force mains shall not be  routed within 50 feet (75 feet in  pervious soils) of any well or
              reservoir that serves as a potable water supply. In all instances where such horizontal separation cannot
              be maintained, the sewer or force main shall be ductile iron pipe.  Where groundwater is near the
              surface, special precautions shall be taken to prevent sewer infiltration or exfiltration. Where feasible,
              sewers or force mains shall  not be routed  within 10 feet of potable water lines or firelines.

           •  The horizontal distance between the water pipe and a sewer or force main shall not be less than 10 feet
              except where the bottom of the water line  will be at least 12 inches above the top of the sewer pipe or
              force main, in which case the water pipe shall be laid at least 6 feet (horizontally) from the sewer or


                                                 2-25  .

-------
                                                                             Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998	and Planning Guidelines
                                                                                 Section 2 -Site Work


              force main. Where water pipes cross under gravity-flow sewer lines, the sewer pipe shall be fully
              encased in concrete for at least 10 feet each side of the crossing or, for this same distance, shall be
              made of pressure pipe, with no joint located within 3 feet horizontally of the crossing. Water lines
              shall, in all cases, cross above sewage force mains or inverted siphons and shall be at least 2 feet above
              the sewer main. Joints in the sewer main that are within 3 feet (horizontally) of the crossing shall be
              encased in concrete.

           •   Where feasible, sewers and force mains shall not be routed under buildings or other permanent
              structures. Sewers and force mains shall be adjacent and parallel to paved roadways. Sewers and force
              mains shall not pass beneath paved roadways except at roadway crossings. Where feasible, utility cuts
              within existing roadways shall be perpendicular to the roadway centerline to minimize trench length.
              Diagonal roadway cuts shall be avoided whenever possible.

           •   The selection of sewer and force main material shall be based on wastewater characteristics and soil
              conditions.  Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) shall be considered where tree roots and infiltration  are
              problems. Ductile iron pipe shall be used for force main and gravity sewer stream crossings. Ductile
              iron shall also be used for sewers located in parking lots and other high-traffic areas. Pipe joints shall
              have a watertight seal. Maximum infiltration-exfiltration test requirements shall be specified within
              the contract documents.

2.S.3    NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS
        Gas distribution shall comply with local codes and requirements. Fuel gas systems shall comply with NFPA
        54. Liquefied petroleum gas systems shall comply with NFPA 58.

2.8.4    ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS
        Site power and lighting shall be coordinated as detailed in Section 16, Electrical Requirements, of this
        Manual.

2.8.5    TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
        Site cx>mmuiucationssliaH be coor
-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines	February 1998
Section 3 - Concrete
                                  Section 3 - Concrete
3.1     General Requirements

3.1.1    DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
        This section covets the design and construction of plain, reinforced, and prestressed concrete structures,
        whether of cast-in-place or precast concrete construction. The use of recycled materials in cast-in-place and
        precast applications is encouraged, to the extent permitted by local and applicable technical codes. The
        requirements of this section shall be used in conjunction with the structural design activities.

3.1.2    CODES
        Concrete materials, design, and construction for buildings and other structures shall comply with American
        Concrete Institute (ACI) 318 and local building codes.

3.1.3    USE OF COAL FLY ASH IN CONCRETE
        Basic guidelines for using coal fly ash in concrete are contained in ACI 211.1.


3.2     Concrete Formwork
        Formwork for concrete construction shall comply with ACI 347, ACI SP-4, and local building codes.


3.3     Concrete Reinforcement

3.3.1    REINFORCEMENT MATERIALS
        Reinforcement materials for buildings and other incidental structures shall comply with local building codes
        and ACI 318.

3.3.2    REINFORCEMENT DETAILS
        Reinforcement details shall comply with ACI 352R, ACI SP-66, ACI 318, and local building codes.


3.4     Cast-ln-Piace Concrete

3.4.1    GENERAL
        This subsection covers the selection of materials; proportioning of mixes; and mixing, placing, testing, and
        quality control of cast-in-place concrete.

3.4.2    MATERIALS, TESTING, AND QUALITY CONTROL
        Materials, testing, and quality control shall comply with ACI 318 and local building codes. Recycled
        materials shall be used to the extent permitted by codes.

3.4.3    TOLERANCES
        Tolerances shall be as recommended in ACI 347.

3.4.4    SELECTING PROPORTIONS FOR CONCRETE MIXES
        The proportions for concrete mixes of normal-weight concrete shall comply with ACI 211.1. The proportions
        for structural lightweight  concrete shall comply with ACI 211.2.
                                              3-1

-------
                                                                           Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998                                                                and Planning Guidelines
                                                                               Section 3 - Concrete


3.4.5   MIXING, TRANSPORTING, AND PLACING
       Mixing, transporting, and placing shall comply with the recommendations of ACI304.

3.4.6   CLIMATIC CONSIDERATIONS
       Hot-weather concreting shall comply with the recommendations of ACI 305R. Cold-weather concreting shall
       comply with the recommendations of ACI 306R.

3.4.7   POST-TENSIONED CONCRETE
       In addition to the standards and resources referenced in other subsections, the Post-Tensioning Institute (PTI)
       Post-Tensioning Manual may be used for the design and construction of post-tensioned concrete structures.


3.5   Precast/Prestressed Concrete

3.5.1   STRUCTURAL
       This subsection covers materials, design, and construction of precast, precast and prestressed, and precast
       and post-tensioned structures. In addition to meeting the requirements of other subsections, precast concrete
       shall comply with the Precast Concrete Institute Manual (PCI MNL)-116. PCI MNL-120 and the PTI Post-
       Tensioning Manual may also be used as guides for the design and construction of precast concrete structures.

3.5.2   ARCHITECTURAL
       This subsection covers materials, design, and construction of architectural precast, and architectural precast
       and prestressed, concrete members. In addition to meeting the requirements of other subsections, architectural
       precast members shall comply with the PCI MNL-117.


3.6   Cementitious Decks for Buildings

3.6.1   GENERAL
       This subsection covers materials, design, and construction of cementitious decks for building structures and
       prefabricated floor and roof systems such as:

       *   Lightweight precast reinforced concrete planks
       •   Lightweight precast reinforced concrete channel slabs
       •   Reinforced gypsum planks
       •   Structural cement-fiber roof deck systems
       •   Reinforced poured-gypsum-over-formboard roof systems.

3.6.2   MATERIALS, DESIGN, AND CONSTRUCTION
       The materials, design, and construction of cementitious decks for  buildings shall  comply with the
       requirements of local building codes and the manufacturer's recommendations. In the event of a conflict
       between the local building code and the manufacturer's recommendations, the more stringent shall apply.


3.7   Repair and Restoration of Concrete Structures
       This subsection covers the evaluation of damage or deterioration,  selection  of repair methods, surface
       preparation, and repair and restoration of concrete structures. The materials covered are portland cement
       mortars and concretes, latex-modified portland cement mortar, epoxy mortars, epoxy concrete, and methyl
       methacrylate concrete.  Methods, procedures, and materials for the repair and restoration of concrete
       structures shall comply with guidelines ACI 503.4 and ACI 546.1R.
                                               3-2

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines                                                             February 1998
Section 3 - Concrete


3.8    Concrete Inspection and Testing
       Inspection and testing shall comply with the requirements of local building codes and ACI318.

END OF SECTION 3
                                            3-3

-------

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines	February 1998
Section 4 - Masonry
                                    Section 4 - Masonry
4.1     General Requirements

4.1.1    DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
        This section covers the design and construction of masonry structures.  It shall apply to unit masonry
        construction; reinforced and unreinforced masonry structures; structures using cement, clay, and stone
        products; and those including brick, block, and tile structures.  The requirements of this subsection shall be
        used in conjunction with those in other sections and subsections.

4.1.2    CODES AND SPECIFICATIONS
        Materials, design, and construction of masonry structures shall comply with the requirements of local building
        codes. Recycled materials shall be used to the extent practical and allowed by code. The following sources
        may also be used as guides for the design of masonry structures:

        •   American Concrete Institute (ACI) S31
        •   ACI 531.1
        •   National Concrete Masonry Association (NCMA) TR 75B
        •   Brick Institute of America (BIA) Building Code Requirements for Engineered Brick Masonry.


4.2     Mortar and Grout

4.2.1    GENERAL
        Requirements for materials, mixing, strength, and specifications for mortar and grout used in masonry
        structures shall comply with local building codes.

4.2.2    MORTAR
        Mortar shall be designed to perform the following functions:

        *   Join masonry units into an integral structure.

        •   Create tight seals between masonry units to prevent the entry of air and moisture.

        •   Bond with steel joint reinforcement, metal ties, and anchor bolts, where used, so that they act integrally
           with the masonry.

        •   Give exposed masonry surfaces a desired architectural quality through color contrasts or shadow line from
           various joint-tooling procedures.

        •   Compensate for size variations in the units by providing a bed to accommodate the different unit sizes.

4.2.3    GROUT
        Grout shall be used in reinforced load-bearing masonry construction to bond the masonry units  and the
        reinforcing steel so that they act together to resist the imposed loads. It may also be used in unreinforced load-
        bearing masonry construction to give it added strength.
                                                4-1

-------
                                                                         Architecture, Engineering,
February1998                                                              and Planning Guidelines
                                                                              Section 4 - Masonry
4.3    Unit Masonry
       Materials, design, and construction of masonry units shall be in accordance with the requirements in
       subsection 4.1, General Requirements.


4.4    Masonry Accessories
       Joint reinforcement, anchors, ties, and wire fabric shall comply with the following:

       •  Local building codes
       •  ACI 530.1.
4.5    Reinforced Masonry
       Design and construction of reinforced masonry shall comply with the following:

       •  Local building codes
       •  ACI 530
       •  ACI 530.1.
4.6    Masonry Inspection and Testing
       Inspection and testing of unit masonry, grout, mortar reinforcing, and accessories shall comply with the
       following:

       •  Local building codes
       •  ACI 530.1.

END OF SECTION 4
                                              4-2

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines                                                                 February 1996
Section 5 - Metals
                                     Section 5 - Metals
5.1     General Requirements
        This section covers the design and construction of steel and aluminum structures. The requirements of this
        section shall be used in conjunction with those of other sections.


5.2     Structural Steel
        Structural steel for buildings and other incidental structures shall comply with the following:

        •   Local building codes
        •   American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc., (AISC) MO 16 or M015L.
5.3    Steel Joists

5.3.1    CODES AND SPECIFICATIONS
        Steel joists and joist girders shall comply with the following:

        •   Local building codes
        •   Steel Joist Institute's StandardSpecifications: Load Tables and Weight Tables for SteelJoists and Joist
           Girders.

5.3.2    INTENDED USE
        Steel joists shall not be used for wind bracing or other types of bracing. They shall be used only as horizontal
        load-carrying members supporting floor and roof decks.

5.3.3    SUPPORT OF VIBRATING EQUIPMENT
        Steeljoists shall not be used to support air-conditioning, air-handling, or any type of vibrating equipment.
        Steeljoists serving as floor joists and roof purlins shall not have bracing members attached to them that would
        transmit vibrations from vibrating equipment into the steel joists and/or structural diaphragms.


5.4    Steel Decks
        Steel decks shall comply with the following:

        •   Local building codes
        •   Steel Deck Institute Publication 20
        •   Steel Deck Institute Publication DDM01.
5.5     Miscellaneous Metals

5.5.1    DEFINITION
        Miscellaneous metals are all ferrous and nonferrous metals other than structural steel as defined in the AISC
        Code of Standard Practice.
                                                5-1

-------
                                                                           Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998                                                                and Planning Guidelines
                                                                                  Section 5 - Metals


5.5.2    CODES AND SPECIFICATIONS
        Miscellaneous metals shall comply with the requirements of local orders and with all applicable industry
        standards for the specific type of metal and use, as listed elsewhere in this section.


5.6    Light-Gauge Steel
        Light-gauge steel shall comply with the following:

        •  Local building codes
        •  American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural
          Members.
5.7    Preengineered Metal Buildings

5.7.1    CODES AND SPECIFICATIONS
        Preengineered metal buildings shall comply with:

        *  Local building codes
        *  The Metal Building Manufacturers Association Metal Building Systems Manual.

5.7.2    LOADS
        Where the use of the design loads specified in these design criteria would prevent procurement of
        preengineered metal buildings, consideration may be given  to deviating from said loadings.   Such
        considerations shall be based on an evaluation of whether such deviations would jeopardize personnel and/or
        material safety, a review of the type of occupancy and functional requirements of the particular building, and
        a determination of whether such deviation could be considered justified and permissible in accordance with
        local building codes.


5.8    Structural Steel Inspection and Testing
        Structural steel inspection shall be as required by:

        •  Local building codes
        •  AISC Manual of Steel Construction.

END OF SECTION 5
                                               5-2

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines	February 1998
Section 6 - Wood and Plastics
                            Section 6 - Wood and Plastics
6.1     General Requirements
        This section covers the use of wood and plastic materials in construction. The use of recycled materials in
        compliance with local and industry codes is encouraged. The requirements of this section shall be used in
        conjunction with the requirements of other sections in this Manual.


6.2     Partitions
        Partitions requiring fire-resistance ratings shall be constructed of noncombustible/limited combustible
        (NC/LC) materials and either listed by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) or approved by Factory Mutual
        (FM) and listed in its approval guide. Refer to the description of off-gassing in Chapter 4, paragraph 3.b, of
        the Safely Manual for more information on indoor material requirements.

6.2.1    CEILING-HIGH PARTITIONS
        As restricted by subsection 6.2, all ceiling-high partitions shall be constructed of NC/LC material.  Interior
        finish or trim may be combustible to the extent permitted by the description in the interior finish discussion
        in Section 9, Finishes, of this Manual. Combustible insulation on electrical installations may be used to the
        extent described in Section 16, Electrical Requirements, of this Manual.

6.2.2    WOOD STUD PARTITIONS
        Wood studs shall  not be installed as part of new construction or as part of a major alteration or space
        adjustment in other types of construction.

6.2.3    LESS-THAN-CEILING-HIGH PARTITIONS
        Bank type partitions, acoustical screens, freestanding space dividers, and other partitions that do not reach
        the ceiling shall conform to the requirements for movable partitions set  forth by the General Services
        Administration (GSA) in PBS-PQ100.1. In addition, the placement of partitions relative to sprinklers shall
        comply  with National Fire  Protection Association (NFPA) 13, and  adequate passageway width and
        identification of means of egress shall comply with NFPA 101.  Another factor limiting the height and
        location of partitions is that  tall or massive partition systems may interfere with the even distribution of
        conditioned air. Consideration should be given to the location of supply diflusers and return registers; the
        location of thermostats; and the clearance above, below, and around die partitions to allow adequate air
        circulation.
6.3     Use of Wood and Plastic
        Laboratory shelving and casework may be fabricated using wood (plywood) and plastic materials.  See
        subsection 10.5 of this Manual for requirements.

END OF SECTION 6
                                               6-1

-------

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines                                                       	     February 1998
Section 7 - Thermal and Moisture Requirements
                Section 7 - Thermal and Moisture Requirements


7.1     General Requirements
        In selecting building materials, careful consideration shall be given to all technical criteria. Vapor barriers
        to vapor flow through the walls and roofs shall be placed with the aim of preventing moisture accumulation
        and condensation within the building structure, reduction of thermal performance, and increased latent
        cooling load in the space.
7.2     Design Characteristics
        Design characteristics of exterior wall sections should be evaluated for functional and cost effectiveness in
        relation to the following:

        •  Moisture transport
        •  Thermal performance
        •  Weathertight design, including sealant profiles, material adjacencies, and flashing configuration.


7.3     Thermal Resistance
        For information on the thermal characteristics of single materials or wall assemblies, refer to the American
        Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) Handbook of Fundamentals
        or the manufacturer's certified technical information.  Thermal resistance (R) values shall be identified for
        each element in the building shell. "IT factor calculations are prepared by following the recommended
        procedures as documented in the ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals.


7.4     Moisture Transport
        Dew point calculations are prepared by following the recommended design procedures in the ASHRAE
        Handbook of Fundamentals. The exterior envelope will be designed to prevent condensation within wall
        cavities, building spaces, etc.


7.5     Panel, Curtain, and Spandrel Walls
        Openings between panel, curtain, and spandrel walls and the building structure or floor slabs around them,
        shall be fire stopped in accordance with the provisions outlined in Section 13, Special Construction, of this
        Manual. The requirements in this subsection in no way reduce the requirements for protection of walls subject
        to an exterior fire exposure. See Chapter 3, paragraph 8, of the Safety Manual for information on exposure
        protection.

7.5.1    PANEL AND CURTAIN WALLS
        All panel and curtain walls shall conform to the requirements for nonbearing walls for the type of construction
        and model code involved and shall be securely anchored to the building in a manner that will prevent failure
        of the anchors in a fire or failure of the panel and its components in high wind.

7.5.2    SPANDREL WALLS
        Except as noted below, spandrel walls shall be provided at each floor and shall have a height of at least 3 feet
        above the finished floor and a fire resistance equivalent to the floor involved.
                                              7-1

-------
                                                                            Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998                                                                 and Planning Guidelines
                                                         Section 7 - Thermal and Moisture Requirements


7.5.2.1     EXCEPTION NO. 1
           Exterior spandrel walls are not necessary and, if provided, are not required to have any fire resistance if
           the rooms located directly inside the exterior wall of the building and on the floor below contain low-
           hazard occupancies or occupancies that are sprinkler protected

7.5.2.2     EXCEPTION NO. 2.
           Spandrel walls are not required at grade level.

END OF SECTION 7
                                               7-2

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines	;	February 1998
Section 8 - Doors and Windows
                            Section 8 - Doors and Windows
8.1    Doors

8.1.1    GENERAL
        Unless otherwise noted, all doors shall be 36 inches wide. Doors in designed egress ways shall swing in the
        direction of egress. Doors shall not swing into exit ways in a manner that reduces the effective exit width.

8.1.1.1     HARDWARE
           All doors shall be equipped with heavy-duty hardware. Each leaf (up to 80 inches high) shall be provided
           with minimum 1 Vi pair butt hinges or 2 pair butt hinges on doors higher than 80 inches. All doors shall
           have floor stops or wall bumpers. Exterior, egress, and laboratory doors shall have automatic closers. All
           public-use doors must be equipped with push plates, pull bars or handles, and automatic door closers.
           Corridor and outside doors must be equipped with cylinder locks and door checks. All locks must be
           master-keyed. The Government must be furnished with at least two master keys and two keys for each
           lock. Hardware for doors in the means of egress shall conform to National Fire Protection Association
           (NFPA) standard 101.

8.1.1.2     ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS
           Doors,  windows, and hardware exposed to highly corrosive conditions, as  in marine or very humid
           environments, shall be nonferrous or provided with a protective, corrosion-resistant finish.

8.1.2    EXTERIOR DOORS
        Exterior doors shall be weathertight and equipped with an automatic door closer, shall open outward, and
        shall have a drip rain diverter mounted above the door to channel water to the exterior wall. The force of the
        door closer shall comply with requirements of the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).

8.1.3    INTERIOR DOORS
        Interior doors must have a minimum opening of 36 inches (width) by 80 inches (height) and shall comply
        with AD A. Hollow-core wood doors are not acceptable. Hardware shall be AD A compliant. Doors shall be
        operable by a single effort and shall be provided with vision panels in accordance with all applicable code
        requirements.  All requirements of AD A shall be incorporated.

8.1.3.1     LANDING AREAS
           The landing areas for doors that open onto walkways, ramps, corridors, and other pedestrian paths shall
           be clear and level with a slope of no greater than 1:50; they shall extend at least 5 feet from the swing side
           of the door, 4 feet from the opposite side, and at least 1 '/j feet past the latch side (pull side) of the door and
           1 foot past the latch side (push side).

8.1.4    FIRE DOORS
        Fire doors  shall conform to NFPA 80.  Doors, hardware, and frames shall bear the label of Underwriters
        Laboratories, Inc.; Factory Mutual; or another approved laboratory testing organization, in accordance with
        American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) E-152. Glazing material shall not be allowed in fire
        doors with a 3-hour fire protection rating or in fire doors with a 1.5-hour fire protection rating that are used
        in locations with severe fire exposure potential (such as in a flammable-liquids storage room). The maximum
        area of glazing in a 1- or 1.5-hour door shall be 100 square inches (0.06S square meters) unless the area has
        been tested and meets the requirements of NFPA 80.  The area of glazing in fire doors that have less than 1-
        hour fire-resistance ratings shall be limited to the maximum area tested. All glazing shall be wired glass or
        other glass approved for use in fire doors.
                                                 8-1

-------
                                                                             Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998                                                                   and Planning Guidelines
                                                                        Section 8 - Doors and Windows


8.1.4.1     EXIT DOORS
           Fire doors in exits or means of egress shall also conform to the requirements contained in Chapter 4,
           paragraph 4, of the Safety Manual. Fire doors in air-handling systems shall also conform to the
           requirements outlined in Section 15, Mechanical Requirements, of this Manual.

8.1.5    LABORATORY DOORS
        Laboratory doors shall be 48 inches wide (36 inches wide for the active leaf and 12 inches wide for the
        inactive leaf) and 84 inches high to facilitate easy movement of equipment and carts. Laboratory doors must
        swing out and should be inserted in alcoves regardless of the corridor width.  In general, large vision panels
        should be provided to allow easy and quick safety inspection of laboratory spaces. Hardware shall be ADA-
        compliant and shall provide various levels of access control as required; it will include both combination and
        key access locks. Areas where a high level of security will be required shall be provided with card-key access
        control.
8.2    Windows

8.2.1    GENERAL
        The use of natural but controlled daylighting should be maximized as part of a total energy conservation
        program.  EPA values natural light and perceives it as part of an exemplary working environment as well as
        a potential source of energy savings. The building organization and design concept shall bring adequate
        natural light into personnel spaces. Window size, number, and location shall be determined on the basis of
        need for natural light and ventilation and of energy considerations.  All exterior windows in heated or air-
        conditioned spaces shall use double-glazed, insulated, low E glass and thermal break sashes.  All windows
        in laboratory rooms that may contain explosive materials shall be glazed with safety glass.

8.2.2    FIXED WINDOW SYSTEMS
        Laboratory space shall have windows that are nonoperable (except with a key, where windows must be opened
        for cleaning purposes) in order to maintain temperature and humidity control and room pressurization
        relationships.

8.2.3    SAFETY OF STOREFRONT AND CURTAIN WALL SYSTEMS
        Windows extending to within 18 inches of the floor and located at least 4 feet above grade shall be provided
        with a safety bar on the interior window approximately 3 feet above floor level. Off-street, ground-level
        windows and those accessible from fire escapes and adjacent roofs must have anti-intrusion alarm systems
        to deter forcible entry.

8.2.4    WINDOW HEIGHT
        Wherever windows extend to within 36 inches of the finished floor and are at least 4 feet above grade, a
        suitable metal barrier shall be provided on the interior side, approximately 56 inches above floor level.
        (Perimeter heating and cooling units may form this barrier.)  If the glass construction can withstand a
        horizontal force of 200 pounds or more and meets the requirements of 29 CFR § 1910.23,16 CFRPart 1201,
        and the local building code, no barriers are required. For windows in walls that must  have a fire-resistance
        rating, see NFPA 80 A and Chapter 2, paragraph 7, of the Safety Manual.

8.2.5    GLAZED PANELS IN INTERIOR PARTITIONS AND WALLS
        Interior glazed panels must comply  with the Consumer Products Safety Commission Safety Standard for
        Architectural Glazing Materials (16 CFR Pan 1201). When glazing panels and windows are used in fire
        barrier walls, such use shall also meet the criteria set forth in the Safety Manual.
                                                 8-2

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines                                                                February 1998
Section 8 - Doors and Windows


8.3     Sun Shading

8.3.1    GENERAL
        The design professional shall be responsible for providing window coverings for interior and exterior windows
        where required by the room data sheets. All exterior windows shall be reviewed and considered for window
        coverings. Use of window coverings shall be considered even when such coverings are not required by the
        data sheet, when solar glare and heat gain should be controlled.  Nonpermanent window coverings installed
        on the inside of windows are considered "interior finishes" and are discussed in subsection 9.6 of this Manual.

8.3.2    LABORATORY WINDOWS

        Laboratory windows exposed to direct sunlight shall be shaded with permanent exterior shading devices that
        shade the window from direct sun.

END OF SECTION 8
                                               8-3

-------

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines	February 1998
Section 9 - Finishes
                                     Section 9 - Finishes
9.1     Interior Finishes
        The required finishes for each room are specified in the room data sheets included in Appendix C. The
        following requirements apply to interior finishing.

9.1.1    TRIM AND INCIDENTAL FINISHES
        Interior wall and ceiling finish that covers no more than 10 percent of the aggregate wall and ceiling area
        involved may be Class C material in accordance with National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 101,
        Chapter 6.

9.1.2    FINAL FINISHING MATERIAL
        Wallpaper, paint, veneer, and other thin finishing materials that are applied directly to the surface of walls
        and ceilings and are not more than 1/28-inch thick shall not be considered as interior finishes per NFPA 101,
        Chapter 6.

9.1.3    AIRSPACE
        Whenever an airspace is located behind combustible material,  the space  shall be blocked so that no void
        extends more than 10 feet in any direction. For example, wood paneling applied to wood furring strips will
        meet the requirement if the distance between the furring strips is no more than 10 feet in both a horizontal
        and a vertical direction.

9.1.4    COMBUSTIBLE SUBSTANCES
        Materials composed of basically combustible substances (e.g., wood, fiberboard) that have been treated with
        fire-retardant chemicals throughout the material (e.g., pressure impregnation), as opposed  to surface
        treatment, may be used as interior finish subject to the following conditions: (1) the treated material shall be
        installed in full accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and (2)  the treated material shall not be
        installed in any location where conditions exist that may reduce the effectiveness of the fire-retardant
        treatment (e.g., high humidity). Surface treatments may be used to reduce  the risks associated with existing
        conditions, in accordance with Chapter 6 of NFPA 101.  No material that will result in higher flame spread
        or smoke development ratings than those permitted in this Manual shall be used as an interior finish.


9.2     Wall Materials
        Wall materials must be capable of withstanding washing with detergents and disinfectants. Materials selected
        shall be compatible with their intended use and shall  emphasize  durability and low maintenance while
        creating a comfortable work environment.

9.2.1    LEAD-BASED  PAINT
        Lead-based paint shall not be used in EPA facilities per subsection 1.5.9.3.2 of this Manual. Refer to
        Chapter 4, paragraph 3.a, of the Safety Manual for restrictions on the use of lead-based paint.

9.2.2    WALL FINISHES
        In general, walls shall be gypsum wallboard, with a painted finish, on metal studs. Walls in laboratory areas
        will be required  to support additional loads due to movable casework, mounting rails, upper cabinets or
        adjustable shelves, and equipment anchorage. Therefore, structural wall studs, backing plates, and lateral
        bracing sufficient to withstand heavy loads will be required. Where concrete masonry unit (CMU) block or
        poured concrete  walls are used to meet other design requirements or constraints, they shall be furred with
        gypsum wallboard or covered with another appropriate finish.
                                                 9-1

-------
                                                                              Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998                                                                   and Planning Guidelines
                                                                                   Section 9 - Finishes


9.2.3    WALL COVERING AND FINISHES
        Wall coverings and finishes, and the process by which they are selected, must meet the requirements outlined
        in the following subsections.

9.2.3.1     GENERAL
           The required finishes must be designated for each room in the room data sheets, a copy of which is
           included with this  document  Actual material selection, color, texture, etc., is  left to the design
           professionals who shall make selections in consultation with the users. Paint shall be carefully selected
           so as not to affect laboratory operations.  The design professional must also select finish materials for
           items and areas not specifically designated in the room data sheets. These selections shall be submitted
           to the Government representative for final approval.

9.2.3.2     FLAME SPREAD  AND SMOKE LIMITATIONS
           Wall finishes on walls that are part of a means of egress must have an interior finish of Class A (flame
           spread 0-25, smoke developed 0-450). (Interior finish ratings are derived from American Society for
           Testing and Materials [ASTM] E-84 and NFPA 255.) For any existing construction that is not protected
           throughout by a sprinkler system meeting the Government's approval, wall finishes must have an interior
           finish of Class A (flame spread 0-25, smoke developed 0-450). All new construction for EPA shall be
           protected throughout by a sprinkler system meeting the Government's approval; in construction that is
           so protected, wall finishes in all areas, except those that are a part of the means of egress, may have an
           interior finish of Class B (flame spread 26-75, smoke developed 0-450), unless otherwise restricted by an
           applicable code. The most restrictive requirement shall govern.  In sprinkler-protected exit accesses or
           passageways, the interior finish may be composed of materials with a Class B interior finish rating (flame
           spread 26-75, smoke developed 0-450). (See NFPA 101 and PBS-PQlOO.l as the  sources of this
           requirement.)

9.2.3.3     WALL COVERING
           Wall covering made of materials that are considered "environmentally friendly" shall be provided in the
           administrative and other office areas when required (none shall be provided in the laboratory areas). Such
           wall covering shall meet the following criteria:

           •  Construction: All material shall be of uniform color throughout. Colors and patterns shall be chosen
              and approved by EPA from standard manufacturer lines offered by the design professional.

           •  Maintenance properties: All wall covering shall be resistant to permanent stains and mildew and shall
              be capable of being cleaned with mild, nonabrasive cleaners.

           •  Fire hazard requirements:  Each type of wall covering used will have a minimum interior finish of
              Class C (flame spread 76-200, smoke developed 0-450) when tested in accordance with ASTM E-84.

           •  Application: Application  of all wall covering shall be in accordance with the  manufacturer's
              recommendations.
9.3    Finished Ceilings

9.3.1    GENERAL
        Ceilings shall be set at a minimum height of 9 feet 8 inches in laboratory zones both in general spaces and
        in laboratory spaces and at a minimum height of 8 feet in corridor and office spaces. Except in service areas,
        ceilings must have acoustical treatment acceptable to the contracting officer, a flame spread rating of 25 or
        less, and a smoke development rating of 450 or less (ASTM E-84). Protrusion of fixtures into traffic ways
        is not allowed. Refer to the Safety Manual for fire-resistance requirements for ceilings.
                                                 9-2

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines	]	February 1998
Section 9 - Finishes


9.3.2    CEILINGS NOT ALONG EXIT PATH
        Ceilings and interior finishes in areas that are not part of the normal exit route may have an interior finish
        of Class C (flame spread 76-200, smoke developed 0-450), unless an applicable code is more restrictive.

9.3.3    CEILINGS ALONG EXIT PATH
        In sprinkler-protected exit ways or enclosed corridors leading to exits, ceilings and interior finishes may be
        composed of materials with an interior finish rating of Class B (flame spread 26-75, smoke developed 0-450),
        unless an applicable code is more restrictive.  The most restrictive applicable code shall be used.

9.3.4    CEILING FINISHES
        Where ceiling finishes are required, they will, in general, be suspended acoustical tile with recessed
        fluorescent lighting fixtures. Other ceiling finishes will be required in special rooms, as specified on the room
        data sheets. These finishes will include hard ceilings with sealed openings for clean analytical laboratories.
        Special consideration shall be given to the type of grid system and acoustical tile when the ceiling is in a moist
        area or in food service and other specialty areas.

9.3.5    OPEN CEILINGS
        All areas above open ceilings shall be painted. The necessary coordination shall occur for all requirements
        regarding painting of exposed areas, including engineered systems that require color-coded painting or
        stenciling and general code-required stenciling of nomenclature defining the rating of fire walls.


9.4     Floor Treatments

9.4.1    GENERAL
        Floor finishes shall be compatible with the intended use of the room and shall emphasize durability and low
        maintenance. Floors and floor coverings may be of any material normal to the intended use. Materials may
        be either combustible or noncombustible, including wood, asphalt tile, carpet, rags, linoleum, concrete, and
        terrazzo. Interior floor finishes shall meet the interior finish requirements noted above. (See subsection 9.1.1
        on page 9-1 for more information on interior finish requirements.) Materials must be smooth, nonabsorbent,
        skid-proof, and wear resistant  Laboratory flooring should resist the adverse effects of acids, solvents, and
        detergents. Materials must be monolithic or have a minimum number of joints. The base may be a 4-inch
        vinyl or rubber base or an integral-coved base where sheet vinyl flooring is used.

9.4.1.1     FIRE SAFETY
           Interior floor finishes shall be in accordance with Chapter 6 of NFPA 101 and shall be  tested  in
           accordance with NFPA 253. Flooring materials used as wall sections or wall coverings shall comply with
           the fire safety characteristics described in Chapter 4, paragraph 13.c, of the Safety Manual for flame
           spread and smoke development.  The flame  spread and smoke development characteristics shall be
           determined through testing in the orientation in which the material is to be installed (NFPA 253 results
           shall not be used to evaluate flooring tested in the vertical position).

9.4.2    CARPET
        Carpet tiles shall cover all office floors and must meet the static buildup and flammability requirements that
        follow.

9.4.2.1     SPECIFICATIONS
           The following specifications must be met for all new carpet installation:

           •  Pile yarn  content:  Continuous filament soil-hiding nylon  or wool/nylon combinations.

           •  Carpet pile construction: Level loop, textured loop, level cut pile, or level cut/uncut pile.
                                                 9-3

-------
                                                                               Architecture, Engineering,
February 1996                                                                    and Planning Guidelines
                                                                                    Section 9 - Finishes


           »  Pile weight. Minimum of 28 ounces per square yard.

           *  Secondary back:  Synthetic fiber or jute for glue-down installation.

           •  Total weight: Minimum of 64 ounces per square yard.

           •  Flammability:  In all areas except exits, carpet must have a critical radiant flux (CRF) of 0.25 or
              greater, with a specific optical density not higher than 450. Carpet in exits most have a CRF of at least
              0.50. Carpet passing the Consumer Products Safety Commission FFL-70 (Pill Test) is acceptable for
              office areas; it may also be used in corridors that are protected by automatic sprinklers. Check
              applicable codes for any more restrictive requirements. The most restrictive requirement shall apply.

           •  Static buildup: 3.5 kilovolts (kV) maximum with built-in static dissipation is recommended; static-
              controlled is acceptable. More restrictive levels shall be required in sensitive areas such as computer
              rooms; these levels shall be determined by calculations for any special equipment in use.

           •  Interior finish requirements: As required by NFPA 101, Section 6-5.

9.4.2.2     COLOR
           For new carpet, the Government shall be provided with at least three color samples.  The sample and color
           must be approved by EPA prior to installation. No substitutes may be made after sample selection.

9.4.2.3     INSTALLATION
           Carpet must be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

           *  In leased space, carpet shall be replaced at least once every 7 years during Government occupancy, or
              whenever backing or underlayment is exposed and/or there are noticeable variations in surface color
              or texture, whichever occurs first.

           •  Carpet replacement shall include the moving and returaing-m-plara of aUfiirniture. Floor perimeters
              at partitions must have wood, rubber vinyl, or carpet base. Any exceptions must be approved by the
              contracting officer.

           •  An additional 10 percem of the selected carrot tiles sriall be provided^ the contractor for the owner's
              own stock and replacement These carpet tiles are not to be used during the warranty period.

           •  The off-gassing requirements in Chapter 4, paragraph 3.b, of time Safety Manual shall be followed.

9.4.3    VINYL TILE
        Unless otherwise indicated elsewhere in this document, all new vinyl tile shall be 12 inch * 12 inch * 1/8-inch
        thick, shall have 35 percent to 40 percent reflectance, and shall be high density, meeting the requirements of
        Federal Specification SS-T-312, Type IV. Adhesives used to set tiles shall be environmentally acceptable.
        Colors and patterns will be selected from three or more samples by the contracting officer or his or her duly
        appointed  representative.

9.4.4    SEAMLESS VINYL FLOORING
        Seamless flooring shall be vinyl seamless flooring, shall be chemical-resistant as manufactured by Tarket or
        Mipolan or an approved equal, and shall be coved 4 inches up the wall using the same  material. Joints shall
        be chemically welded smooth without any grooves. Adhesive used to set the flooring shall be environmentally
        acceptable.
                                                  9-4

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines                                              .                    February 1998
Section 9 - Finishes


9.4.5    CERAMIC TILE FLOORING
        Ceramic tile flooring shall be sealed in all grout areas. At least five color samples shall be incorporated into
        the color boards for selection and approval by the contracting officer (or his or her duly appointed
        representative).

9.4.6    SPECIAL FLOORING
        Special floor-coating systems shall be troweled, jointless floor systems with slip-resistant top coatings which
        shall be waterproof and resistant to alkalies and acids.  The special flooring system selected should be
        compatible with its intended use.

9.4.7    EXPOSED CONCRETE FLOORING
        Steel trowel finish shall be used on exposed concrete floors that will not receive other finish. Exposed interior
        concrete floors shall be sealed withapenetrating-type solvent base or water-emulsion base unpigmented sealer
        containing a suitable type resin and no wax


9.5     Painting

9.5.1    GENERAL
        Before occupancy, all surfaces designated for painting must be newly painted with paint finish and colors
        acceptable to, and approved by, the contracting officer or that officer's duly appointed representative. The
        contracting officer or duly appointed representative shall be provided with color samples and color schemes,
        with their average surface reflectance value clearly identified, for selection.

9.5.2    REFLECTANCE VALUES
        Minimum average surface reflectance values that will be used as a base for the selection of interior colors are
        as follows:

        •   Ceiling:  80 percent.
        •   Walls: 50 percent
        •   Floors: 30 percent.
        •   Furniture and equipment: 35 percent.
        •   Chalkboards: Not less than 15 percent nor more than 20 percent, as recommended by the American
           Illuminating Engineering Society and the American Institute of Architects in their report, American
           Standard Practice for School Lighting, AIA No. 32F28.

9.5.2.1     ADDITIONAL SPECIFICATIONS
           Deviations from the above reflectance requirements are allowed for aesthetic treatment of such areas as
           conference rooms, lobbies, corridors, and executive offices. Surfaces shall also have a matte finish to
           prevent excessive brightness ratios and to minimize specular reflections.

9.5.3    WALL AND CEILING COLORS
        Ceiling color can be extended from 1 to 3 feet down the walls, or to the level of the fixtures, to obtain up to
        20 percent increase  in illumination.

9.5.4    ACCENT AREAS
        Up to 20 percent of wall surfaces may have reflectance values lower than those listed, for accent purposes,
        without being considered part of the  average.


9.6     Window Covering
        Permanent devices installed on the outside of buildings to control sunlight are considered sun shades and are
        discussed in subsection 8.3 of this Manual.

                                                9-5

-------
                                                                             Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998                                                                  and Planning Guidelines
                                                                                  Section 9 - Finishes


9.6.1    BLINDS
        Window blinds in laboratory spaces may be either vertical or horizontal with nonmetallic slats.  Color
        selection will be made by the EPA representative. The hardware and bUnd mechanisms shall be made of acid-
        resistive materials.

9.6.2    BLACKOUT SHADES
        Rooms requiring blackout capability  shall be  equipped  with blackout shades.   Shades should be a
        preengraeered unit with a fiberglass-coated fabric shadecloth. They must have a noncorroding, concealed-
        variable adjustment mechanism, adjustable from 100 percent friction (static mode) with finite positions to 15
        percent friction (dynamic mode) with only preselected positions.

9.6.3    DRAPERIES AND CURTAINS
        All draperies, curtains, and similar hanging materials gh»u be of a noncombustible or flame-resistant fabric
        (chemically treated). Flame-resistant means that the fabric or films (e.g., thin plastic sheets or cellophane)
        must meet the performance criteria described in NFPA 701.  In addition, draperies, curtains, and other
        window finishes shall be formaldehyde free and shall meet the off-gassing criteria set forth  in Chapter 4,
        paragraph 3 .b, of the Safety Manual.

END OF SECTION 9
                                                9-6

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines                                                                 February 1998
Section 10 - Specialties
                                 Section 10 - Specialties


10.1   Magnetic, Liquid Chalk, Dry-Marker Boards and Tack Boards
        Magnetic dry-marker boards (liquid chalk) shall be used except when the solvent markers used on these
        boards would affect operations undertaken in laboratories; chalk-type chalkboards shall not be used.
        Locations of magnetic dry-marker boards and tack boards shall be determined by the design professional in
        close coordination with the contracting officer's representative (COR).


10.2   Interior Signage Systems and Building Directory

10.2.1   GENERAL
        All signage, identification, room numbering, and building directories shall comply with the requirements of
        the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).

10.2.2   DOOR IDENTIFICATION
        Door identification shall be installed in approved locations adjacent to office entrances. The form of door
        identification must be approved by the COR. Toilet, stairway, and corridor doors must be identified by the
        international symbol of accessibility at a height of 54 to 66 inches above the floor, wherever possible, such
        identification should be mounted on the wall at the latch side of the door. Seldom-used doors to areas posing
        danger to the blind must  have knurled or acceptable plastic-abrasive-coated handles.  Tactile warning
        indicators shall not be used to identify exit stairs.

10.2.3   ROOM NUMBERING
        A room-numbering and room-naming system is required for the identification of all spaces in the facility.
        Plans shall be submitted to the COR for review and approval before construction documentation begins.

10.2.4   BUILDING DIRECTORY
        A wall-mounted, glass-enclosed directory with lock shall be provided at a conspicuous location in the lobby
        or entrance of the building.  The directory shall be approximately 2 feet by 3 feet in size. The building
        directory shall be approved by the COR.


10.3   Portable Fire Extinguishers
        Portable fire extinguishers shall be provided and located within recessed cabinets, in accordance with National
        Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 10, Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers. Portable fire extinguishers
        shall be provided on the basis of the classes of anticipated fires and the size and degree of hazard affecting
        the extinguishers' use.  Portable fire extinguishers containing halon shall not be used.

10.3.1   FIRE EXTINGUISHER LOCATIONS
        Portable fire extinguishers shall be provided in every laboratory room. In the other areas of the building, the
        minimum number of fire extinguishers needed for protection shall be determined in accordance with NFPA
        10, Chapter 3, Distribution of Extinguishers.

        •   Class A and D extinguishers shall be located so that the travel distance to the respective Class A and D
           hazard areas does not exceed 75 feet.

        •   Class B extinguishers shall be located so that the travel distance to the Class B hazard areas does not
           exceed 50 feet.
                                               10-1

-------
                                                                              Architecture, Engineering,
February 1996                                                                   and Planning Guidelines
                                                                                Section 10-Specialties


        •   Extinguishers with Class C ratings shall be located on the basis of the anticipated Class A or B hazard.

        •   One extinguisher may be installed to provide protection for several hazard areas provided that travel
           distances are not exceeded.
10.4   Safety Devices
        Eye and face washing equipment and safety showers must be provided for every laboratory and laboratory
        support room where chemicals are being utilized, in accordance with the American National Standards
        Institute (ANSI) Standard Z3S8.1.  At least one double-spray-head, hands-free-operating eyewash shall be
        provided within every laboratory, or for every two laboratory modules, next to or as close as possible to the
        source of hazard (e.g., fume hood or other hazard). Safety showers shall be provided in accessible locations
        that require no more than 10 seconds to reach from hazard locations; safety showers should be no more than
        SO feet travel distance from the hazard source. The location and installation of emergency showers and
        eyewash equipment shall be in accordance with the Safety Manual.


10.5   Laboratory Casework

10.5.1   GENERAL
        Preferably, all laboratory casework and associated fume hoods required in the facility shall be the product of
        one manufacturer and shall be installed under the recommendations of that manufacturer. The laboratory
        casework shall meet the functional, aesthetic, flexibility, and maintenance needs of each user. Unless noted
        otherwise, all surfaces shall be of stainless steel or another nonporous, durable, corrosion-resistant material.
        Plastic laminate or other similar facing materials, over wood or composite material, are permitted only when
        the laminate or surfacing material is  certified by the manufacturer to be impervious to acids and other
        common laboratory solvents.

10.5.2   MODULAR DESIGN
        Design of laboratory casework (cabinets, counters, fume hoods, etc.) should be coordinated and compatible.
        Basic laboratory casework systems shall  be composed of modular dimensioned units of modern design
        consisting of a self-supporting steel frame capable of containing service piping and drain lines and permitting
        the attachment and/or  support of various styles of countertops, sinks, cupsinks, and utility hoses and
        connections, independently from base cabinet assemblies. Support systems shall provide the flexibility and
        unlimited horizontal interchangeability of any or all cabinet sizes without removal of the working top or
        interference of immediate vertical legs, supports, brackets, or framing between cabinets.  Fixed laboratory
        casework shall be similarly flexible. The design of fixed casework shall be approved by the COR.

10.5.3   SUPPORT CAPABILITY
        The system shall support work surfaces and steel undercounter cabinets independent of one another.  All
        components shall be self-supporting and essentially independent of the building structure. The system shall
        support sinks, service fittings, plumbing fixtures, and service and waste lines by utilizing pipe clamps. The
        assembly shall be designed and manufactured in such a manner that each linear foot of span between
        supporting elements, is capable of supporting a live load of 200 pounds per linear foot plus a dead load of 50
        pounds per linear foot.  In addition, it should be possible to place a concentrated load of 250 pounds on the
        front edge of the assembly at any point (assuming legs spaced at 6 feet on center) without causing the system
        to fail in its suspension or tip or deflect more than Vi< of an inch.

10.5.4   CABINET ASSEMBLIES
        Cabinet assemblies shall be suspended from the support system with fastener devices mounted in front of the
        unit for attachment to the front rail and shall be designed so that removal of units can be easily accomplished
        by use of common hand tools. Such fastener devices shall be of forged or cast steel and shall be commercially
        cadmium plated.  Filler panels shall be provided at exposed-to-view areas, between backs of cabinets and

                                                 10-2

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines                                                       	February 1998
Section 10 - Specialties


        walls, between backs of cabinets at the end of the peninsula or island benches, and at knee openings, to allow
        for the maintenance of mechanical services.

10.5.5  BASE CABINETS
        Casework shall be of a metal construction of slimline design and shall be built in accordance with the highest
        standards and practices of the metal casework industry. Superior quality casework shall be established by use
        of proper machinery, tools, dies, fixtures, and skilled workmanship so that the fit of doors and drawers allows
        vertical and horizontal openings of minimum tolerance. All units shall be of flush-front construction so that
        drawer and door faces are in the same planeasexteriorcase members. Each unit shall be a completely welded
        structure and should not require additional parts such as applied panels at ends, backs, or bottom.

10.5.6  WALL CABINETS
        Upper wall cabinets shall be designed so that cabinets hang rigidly vertical without sag or tilt. The design
        professional shall be responsible for ensuring that proper reinforcement is installed at the walls to support the
        load of the cabinets and contents.  Construction of wall cabinets shall be of similar to that of base cabinets;
        wall cabinets shall be modular in design and installation to permit immediate interchangeability of all wall
        cabinets and/or shelf units.

10.5.7  SHELVING
        The following subsections provide information on reagent and adjustable shelving.

10.5.7.1    REAGENT SHELVES
           Reagent shelves shall be 1-inch-thick plywood, faced on both sides with acid-resistant plastic laminate,
           with all exposed edges edge-banded in 3-millimeter (Vn-inch) thick polyvinyl chloride (PVC).

10.5.7.2    ADJUSTABLE SHELVING
           Adjustable shelving  shall be  16-gauge steel shelving with hat-section reinforcing  and shall be
           interchangeable with wall-hung cabinets. Shelving standards shall be double-slotted, 30 inches in length,
           mounted at a height of 54 inches above finished floor (measured to the bottom of the standard). Brackets
           shall be 16-gauge metal with three blade hooks and shall be screwed to each shelf.

10.5.8  COUNTERTOPS
        Countertop materials will vary depending on the intended use. The design professional shall be responsible
        for evaluating the requirements of the laboratories to determine what countertop material is most suitable for
        each specific application. The material used for the countertop shall also be used for back-splashes, side-
        splashes, and services ledge covers.

10.5.8.1    PLASTIC LAMINATE
           Chemically resistant plastic laminate countertops may be used in many applications where the use of
           extremely corrosive chemicals or large amounts of water is not expected.  •

10.5.8.2    EPOXY RESIN
           Epoxy resin countertops shall be utilized in laboratories or in areas where large quantities of water or
           extremely corrosive chemicals are being utilized on a routine basis.  All joints shall be bonded with a
           highly chemical-resistant and corrosion-resistant cement having properties similar to those of the base
           material.

10.5.8.3    STAINLESS STEEL
           Stainless steel countertops shall be used in special applications where sterile conditions are required (e.g.,
           glassware washing areas, autoclave rooms), where there are controlled environmental temperatures (e.g.,
           cold rooms, growth chambers), and where radioisotopes are being used.
                                                 10-3

-------
                                                                             Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998                                                                   and Planning Guidelines
                                                                               Section 10 - Specialties


10.5.9   MATERIALS
        Standard laboratory casework shall be of metal construction unless otherwise indicated. For rooms that do
        not require casework of metal construction, the casework materials shall be wood or approved plastic.
        Hardware used for wood or plastic casework shall be epoxy coated

10.5.10  QUALITY
        The laboratory casework that is subject to the above requirements shall have components, configuration,
        materials, finish, and performance (including performance on chemical and physical performance tests)
        comparable to cantilevered frame (C-frame) casework systems manufactured by Hamilton Industries and
        Kewaunee Scientific Equipment Corporation. Equipmentinanufacturedby others is acceptable if the products
        are of equal performance and have similar appearance and construction, but only after approval by the
        contracting officer.

10.5.11  MINIMUM STANDARDS
        Performance set forth herein shall establish minimum standards for design, performance, and function.
        Products that Ml to meet these standards will not be considered.

10.5.12  LABORATORY FUME HOODS
        Fume hoods shall be provided in all laboratories and laboratory support spaces where hazardous chemicals
        or other toxic materials are being utilized. The purpose of the laboratory fume hood is to prevent or minimize
        the escape of contaminants from the hood into the laboratory.  The fume hood work surface shall be of
        recessed design so that spills can be effectively contained.  The design professional shall be responsible for
        determining, with the users of the facility,  types and sizes of fume hoods appropriate to their intended use.
        See Section 15, Mechanical Requirements, of this Manual for more specific requirements.

10.5.12.1  FUME HOOD LOCATION
          Fume hoods must be located away from doors and pedestrian traffic. The location of the hood shall be at
          the end of a room or bay, but not less than 1 foot from the corner, where the operator is essentially the only
          one who enters the zone of influence. Further, hoods shall be placed in such a way that one hood cannot
          draw air from another hood

10.5.13  ENVIRONMENTAL ROOMS
        Environmental rooms shall be of modular, insulated panel construction, providing temperature and humidity
        control with specified setpoint control. Temperature requirements for individual rooms shall be appropriate
        to the rooms' intended use. Rooms shall be provided with emergency auxiliary power backup to allow 24-
        hour operation. All rooms involving laboratory procedures shall be ventilated.  Fume hoods shall not be
        allowed in environmental rooms. The following should also be provided: remote air-or water-cooled dual-
        sequencing compressor, temperature and humidity recorders, high/low alarm, adjustable epoxy-coated wire
        shelving on wall supports or movable racks, and personnel emergency alarm.
                         •
END OF SECTION 10
                                                10-4

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines	February 1998
Section 11 - Equipment                                                                          11-1
                                 Section 11 - Equipment


11.1   Design
        Planning for equipment shall be integrated with the planning of architectural, structural, mechanical, and
        electrical systems.  Equipment shall be arranged and organized to provide circulation, workflow, and
        maintenance clearances.


11.2   Catalog Cut Sheets
        Appropriate catalog cut sheets shall be provided for all items of equipment. Each cut sheet shall have a
        logistical category and code.  Each item shall be clearly identified if it has unique utility requirements,
        structural support needs, or space requirements.


11.3   Layout and Clearances
        Equipment should be arranged to provide service clearances and maintenance access so that service and
        maintenance can be executed with minimum disruption to workspaces. When expansion is anticipated in a
        project, the design professional should ensure that some additional equipment can be added without disruption
        or reconfiguration of workflow.


11.4   Floor Preparation
        Floor depressions shall be provided to accommodate items and design requirements, such as can washers,
        environmentally controlled room equipment, walk-in refrigerators, computer rooms, and any other appropriate
        spaces or items, except in laboratory spaces where future flexibility is a requirement.


11.5   Structural Support
        Wall-partitioning systems for wall-hung equipment and toilet accessories shall be adequately reinforced.
        Ceiling support systems for service columns, hoist equipment, and other ceiling-mounted items shall be
        structurally braced. All fixed equipment shall be mounted to resist seismic forces in accordance with seismic
        levels defined for each applicable project.


11.6   Special Ventilation Requirements for Equipment
        Control of ventilation for the employee working environment must be provided by the equipment supplier.
        All requirements of Appendix B, Indoor Air Quality, shall be addressed.


11.7   Equipment Specifications
        Equipment specifications shall be developed for all equipment that does not have current guide specifications.
        All equipment specifications should permit procurement of the most current model of equipment through
        General Services Administration (GSA) services where possible.  All equipment specifications should be
        developed to accommodate reputable vendors.  Equipment specifications should discuss the scope of services
        to be provided by mechanical and electrical contractors installing Government-furnished equipment.
                                               11-1

-------
                                                                    Architecture, Engineering,
February1998	      and Planning Guidelines
                                                                    •  Section 11 - Equipment


11.8   High-Technology Equipment
                                          11-2

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines                                                               February 1998
Section 11 - Equipment                                                                         11-3


       Project-specific guidance should be obtained on high-technology equipment. Design shall be in accordance
       with selection and guidance of the respective manufacturers.


11.9  Mechanical and Electrical Equipment
       Refer to Sections 15 (Mechanical Requirements) and 16 (Electrical Requirements) of this Manual for
       information on mechanical and electrical equipment respectively.


11.10 Equipment Consultants
       Use of an equipment consultant is recommended for defining and specifying what research equipment must
       be procured.  Such consultants  shall also provide information on equipment during the design and
       construction document phases to assist in planning and documentation.

END OF SECTION 11
                                              11-3

-------

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines                                                                February 1998
Section 12 - Furnishings
                               Section 12 - Furnishings


12.1   Furnishings                                                     (
        No material specific to furnishings is included in this Manual.

        Information on "Green" specifications can be obtained from the Architecture, Engineering and Real Estate
        Branch (AEREB).  Sample copies of Green Rider provisions are available to assist in determining Green
        furnishings. Additional information may be obtained from the Green Buildings Council.

END OF SECTION 12
                                             12-1

-------

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines	February 1998
Section 13 - Special Construction
                           Section 13 - Special Construction
13.1   Noise Control
        Noise levels in the different rooms of the facility should be in accordance with the American Society of
        Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.  (ASHRAE) handbook, HVAC Systems and
        Applications, Chapter 52 (Sound and Vibration Control). Proper schematic planning should isolate noise-
        sensitive areas from noise sources by separation with a nonsensitive buffer area.  In addition, dedicated
        laboratory support spaces should be provided to isolate noise-producing equipment, such as centrifuges and
        vacuum pumps, from laboratories. In any instrument or laboratory space in which one or more fume hoods
        are used, the noise level should be 55 or less decibels of sound measured on an A-scale (dBA) but shall not
        exceed 70 dBA at the working position in front of the hood.

        The combined noise resulting from several pieces of equipment shall not exceed 65 dBA when measured 3
        feet from any piece of  equipment.  Noise generated  from vibration  by heating, ventilation, and air-
        conditioning (HVAC) systems may be minimized by several means: judicious equipment selection; limitation
        of fluid flow velocities; isolation of key mechanical, piping, and ducting  systems; and other prudent
        engineering and architectural means.

13.1.1   VIBRATION ISOLATION
        Vibration isolation systems should be provided on rotating  mechanical  equipment of greater than 1A
        horsepower (hp)  (for equipment located within a critical area), greater than 5 bp (for other areas in the
        building), and greater than 10 hp (outside and within 200 feet of the building). Reciprocating equipment
        (other than emergency equipment) shall not be used.  Vibrating equipment shall not be placed on top of
        buildings, unless no other locations are feasible. Vibrating equipment that must be mounted on the roof shall
        be placed directly over columns and on pads and springs to totally isolate the vibration from the building
        structure.

        •   Concrete inertia bases will be used with rotating mechanical equipment handling liquids (e.g., pumps) and
           with compressors.  Steel frames will be used for air-handling equipment.

        *   Flexible pipe connectors (e.g., twin-sphere connectors) will be used on piping connecting to isolated
           equipment and where piping and ducting exit the mechanical room(s).

        •   Flexible duct connectors will be used  in a manner similar to flexible piping connectors.

13.1.2   PIPING AND DUCTING SYSTEMS
        Passive piping and ducting systems are defined as those that are at a great distance from their energy source
        and have low flow rates and/or infrequent use (examples of such systems are city water, gases, and waste
        water).  Conversely, active piping systems are defined as those that are close to energy sources and can
        constitute a major vibration problem requiring isolation.

        •   Active piping and ducting shall be sized for economical flow velocities.
  l
        *   Ducts that are less than 24  inches in diameter do not require isolation, provided that the flow velocities
           do not exceed  1,200 feet per minute.  Ducting that does not meet this requirement shall be isolated.

        •   Active piping associated with HVAC  (chilled water, condenser water, hot water, steam, and refrigerant
           piping) within mechanical rooms, or at  least 50 feet (whichever distance is greater)  from connected
           vibration-isolated equipment (e.g., chillers, pumps, air handlers) or from the ground, shall be isolated from
           the building structure; resilient  penetration sleeves shall be used where this piping penetrates walls.


                                                13-1

-------
                                                                               Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998	•.   .	.'.  and Planning Guidelines
                                                                         Section 13 - Special Construction


           Flexible piping connectors shall be used where the piping leaves the mechanical room.  All active piping
           in the critical area having a diameter of 4 inches or less shall be isolated.

13.1.3  SOUND DAMPENING
        Sound  dampening  features (acoustical treatment), preferably of rigid materials, shall be provided in
        instrument rooms so that the noise level does not exceed 55 decibels (dBa).  If a hood is required in these
        rooms, the noise level shall not exceed 70 dBa at the face of the hood.
13.2   Fire Walls and Fire Barrier Walls
        Fire walls must be structurally independent and have sufficient structural stability under fire conditions to
        allow collapse of construction on either side of the firewall without collapse of the fire wall itself. The wall
        is also required to allow collapse of the structure on one side without compromising the integrity of the
        structure on the opposite side of the fire wall. Fire walls differ from fire barrier walls, which do not require
        structural stability.  Fire barrier walls may rely on the building structure for support. Refer to National Fire
        Protection Association (NFPA) 221 for specific criteria related to fire walls and fire barrier walls.

13.2.1   FIREWALLS
        Every fire wall shall be made of noncombustible material with the fire-resistance rating required by local
        codes for segregating the building into separate buildings or fire areas.  Openings in fire walls shall be
        protected as noted in subsection 13.2.3 below. Unprotected windows are not allowed in fire walls.

13.2.2   FORE BARRIER WALLS
        Unless other fire-resistive construction is provided to create a complete enclosure on all sides, all fire barrier
        walls must extend from floor slab to floor slab or to roof deck.  Openings in fire barrier walls shall be
        .protected as noted in subsection 13.2.3 below.

13.2.3   OPENINGS
        Openings in fire walls  and fire barrier walls shall be protected with fire-rated components capable of
        maintaining the fire-resistive integrity of the wall. The minimum fire-resistance requirement for protection
        of openings in fire walls and fire barrier walls shall be the more restrictive of Chapter 6 of NFPA 101 and the
        local building code. Greater fire resistance maybe required by code requirements for specialized occupancies
        such as computer rooms and laboratories. Fire window assemblies are allowed in fire barrier walls with a
        1-hour or lower fire-resistance rating. The maximum allowed glazing area in windows shall be the maximum
        area tested and shall be in accordance with NFPA 80.  Refer to Chapter 2 of the Safety Manual for restrictions
        on utilities penetrating required fireproofing.


13.3   Vertical Openings and Shafts
        Fire-resistance ratings for enclosures of vertical  openings and shafts shall conform to the requirements in
        NFPA 101, Chapter 6. Openings into vertical openings and shafts shall be protected by fire doors or fire
        dampers as outlined in subsection 13.3.2 and in Chapter 2, Basic Fire Safety Standards, oftheSafetyManual.

13.3.1   ATRIUMS
        Atriums and other openings, where permitted by  NFPA 101 and the local building code, shall be protected
        in accordance with Chapter 6 of NFPA 101. In addition, exits shall be separately enclosed from the atrium.
        Access to exits is permitted to be within the atrium space.

13.3,2   SHAFTS
        When telephone rooms, electrical closets, and similar spaces are located one above the other, the enclosure
        walls are considered to form a shaft, and protection shall be provided in accordance with the requirements
        of NFPA 101 and the local building code. Shafts shall not be installed between a structural member and the
        fireproofing for that member. If allowed by the local building code, all floor penetrations within telephone

                                                 13-2

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines	February 1998
Section 13 - Special Construction


        and electric closets can be sealed or otherwise grouted, in lieu of creating a shaft, to maintain the fire
        resistance of the floor assembly.

        Structural members passing through a shaft shall be fireproofed separately from the shaft enclosure so that
        the entire structural member is protected as required by the model building codes. The fireproofing shall be
        of concrete, plaster, or other hard material that is resistant to mechanical damage and not subject to rusting
        or corrosion,

13.3.3   MONUMENTAL STAIRS
        Large, open stairs shall be protected by one of three methods. If the stairs are not involved in the building
        exit requirements, they may extend one floor above and one floor below the main entrance lobby, provided
        that fire partitions and self-closing fire doors are installed at the upper and lower levels.  Alternatively, they
        may be protected as a vertical opening in accordance with the requirements of Chapter 6 of NFPA101. If the
        stairs are pan of the exit system, they must be protected as outlined in Chapter 5 of NFPA 101.

13.3.4   ESCALATORS
        Escalators shall be treated in the  same manner as monumental stairs with the additional option of using
        curtain boards and sprinkler protection as detailed in NFPA 13.

13.3.5   PENETRATIONS
        Openings around penetrations in vertical openings and shafts shall be fire-stopped as described in subsection
        13.3.2 above.

END OF SECTION 13
                                                13-3

-------

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines                                                                   February 1996
Section 14 - Conveying Systems                                                             -*_
                            Section 14 - Conveying Systems


14.1   General
        Elevators, dumbwaiters, escalators, and moving walks shall be in accordance with American National
        Standards Institute (ANSI) Standard A17.1. Other requirements are described below.


14.2   Elevators

14.2.1  ELEVATOR RECALL
        All automatic elevators having a travel distance of 25 feet or more shall be  recalled when any fire
        alarm-initiating device, such as elevator lobby smoke detectors, manual fire alarm stations, or sprinkler
        system waterflow switches, is activated. All elevators must be recalled when the recall system is activated.
        Smoke detectors other than those required by ANSI A17.1 shall not initiate automatic elevator recall.

14.2.2  SMOKE DETECTORS
        Smoke detectors shall be provided for every elevator lobby, including the main lobby. Smoke detectors that
        activate the automatic elevator recall are also required in the elevator machine rooms. Elevator lobby smoke
        detectors should not initiate the building fire alarm system but shall send an alarm to the fire department or
        central station service and shall activate the elevator recall system.

14.2.3  CAPTURE FLOOR
        An alternate capture floor shall be provided in accordance with Rule 211.3b(2) of ANSI A17.1. Activation
        of an alarm-initiating device on the main capture floor shall return the elevators to the alternate capture floor.

14.2.4  SIGNAGE
        Signs must be placed in the elevator lobbies next to all elevators to inform occupants not to use the elevators
        if there is a fire!

14.2.5  CHEMICAL TRANSPORT USE
        If elevators are used to transport chemicals, provisions shall be made to ensure that nonlaboratory personnel
        and space (administrative or business occupancies)  are not exposed to or contaminated by chemical
        substances. For example, chemicals must be packaged in accordance with U.S. Department of Transportation
        (DOT) specifications, or an alternative route of transport must be provided. This alternative route may
        include an elevator opening into a vestibule separate from administrative or business occupancies, a multiple-
        door elevator entering into a laboratory, separate dumbwaiters, or alternate corridors or routes. A combination
        of these options can be used to achieve this goal.


14.3   Escalators
        Escalators shall be treated in the same manner as monumental stairs with an additional option of providing
        curtain boards and sprinkler protection as detailed in National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 13.

END OF SECTION 14
                                                14-1

-------

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines
February 1998
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
                      Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
15.1     General
         The design professional shall be responsible for ensuring that all mechanical systems conform to the
         requirements of this section and that all systems are installed and operating in accordance with all governing
         codes, ordinances, and regulations; the most current edition of applicable publications; and as set forth
         below.  The design professional is responsible for the design of all mains, lines, meters, and other
         mechanical components required for utility services. The building air-conditioning, heating, and ventilation
         systems shall provide a safe and suitable environment both for occupants and for functional operation of the
         facility.
15.2    References
         All work discussed in this section shall comply with all applicable federal, state, city, and local codes,
         regulations, ordinances, publications, and manuals. When codes or publications conflict, the most stringent
         standard shall govern.  Unless  otherwise specified in this Manual or approved by the Architecture,
         Engineering and Real Estate Branch (AEREB) and the Safety, Health and Environmental Management
         Division (SHEMD), all mechanical system installations shall conform to the applicable requirements of the
         following National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) and American Society of Heating, Refrigerating,
         and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc. (ASHRAE) standards, American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
         safety codes, and other sources in the following list:

            Carbon Dioxide Extinguishing Systems (NFPA 12)
            Installation of Sprinkler Systems (NFPA 13)
            Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems (NFPA 14)
            Water Spray Fixed Systems (NFPA 15)
            Dry Chemical Extinguishing Systems (NFPA 17)
            Wet Chemical Extinguishing Systems (NFPA 17A)
            Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances (NFPA 24)
            Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance of Water-Based Fire Protection Systems (NFPA 25)
            Automotive and Marine Service Station Code (NFPA 30A)
            Installation of Oil Burning Equipment (NFPA 31)
            Spray Application Using Flammable and Combustible Materials (NFPA 33)
            Stationary Combustion Engines and Gas Turbines (NFPA 37)
            Fire Protection for Laboratories Using Chemicals (NFPA 45)
            National Fuel Gas Code (NFPA 54)
            Storage and Handling of Liquefied Petroleum Gases (NFPA 58)
            Storage and Handling of Liquefied Natural Gas (NFPA 59 A)
            Protection of Electronic Computer/Data Processing Equipment  (NFPA 75)
            Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems (NFPA 90A)
            Installation of Exhaust Systems for Air Conveying of Materials (NFPA 91)
            Smoke Control Systems (NFPA 92A)
            Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations (NFPA 96)
            Water Cooling Towers (NFPA 214)
            Water Supplies for Suburban and Rural Firefighting (NFPA 1231)
            Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems (NFPA 2001)
            Elevators, Dumbwaiters, Escalators, and Moving Walks (ANSI A17.1)
            Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality (ANSI/ASHRAE 62)
            Emergency Eyewash and Shower Equipment (ANSI Z358.1)
            Laboratory Ventilation (ANSI/American Industrial Hygiene Association [AIHA] Z9.5)
                                              15-1

-------
                                                                            Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998                                                                 and Planning Guidelines
                                                                 Section 15-Mechanical Requirements


         •  Quantitative Performance Test for Laboratory Fume Hoods (ASHRAE 110-1985)
         •  MethodofTestingPerformanceofLaboratoryFumeHoods(ANSI/ASHRAE 110, as modified per EPA
            requirements)
         •  Procedures Manual for Certifying Laboratory Fume Hoods To Meet EPA Standard
         •  Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration (ANSI/ASHRAE IS)
         *  Fire Suppression Rating Schedule (Insurance Services Office)
         •  Building Air Qualify: EPA  Guide for Building Owners and Facility Managers, EPA/400/1-91/033 or
            December 1991
         •  Industrial Ventilation: A Manual of Recommended Practice, American Conference of Government
            Industrial Hygienists (ACGIH)
         *  Prudent Practices in the Laboratory: Handling and Disposal ofChemicaIs,National'Research Council,
            1995
         •  Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association (SEFA) 1/1994
         •  National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) standard 49 for Biohazard Safety Cabinets.


15.3    Heating, Ventilation, and Air-Conditioning Requirements
         A heating, ventilation, and air-conditioning (HVAC) system that will satisfy the requirements indicated in
         this document shall be provided. The air-conditioning and refrigeration equipment for the mechanical
         systems shall not use chlorofluorocarbon (CFC) refrigerants. The use of hydrochlorofluorocarbon (HCFC)
         will be permitted only if the equipment required cannot be replaced with equipment that uses a non-ozone-
         depleting refrigerant.

15.3.1    GENERAL
         Building HVAC systems and subsystems shall be evaluated, and major HVAC equipment components shall
         be selected on the basis of a consideration of health and safety requirements, initial costs, operating costs,
         and maintenance costs.  A life cycle cost analysis (LCCA) done with a nationally recognized computer
         program shall be performed to select the most cost-effective HVAC system.

15.3.2    HVAC SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
         HVAC system performance shall meet the following requirements.

15.3.2.1     Indoor space shall meet the EPA National Ambient Air Quality Standards. As established in ASHRAE
            62-1989, HVAC systems will be designed and operated to provide:

            •  20 cubic feet per minute (cfm) of outdoor air per person in offices and 20 cfm of outdoor air per
               person in laboratories.

            •  60 cfm of outdoor air per person in smoking lounges, which also must have local mechanical exhaust
               with no air recirculation.

            *  A local mechanical exhaust with no air recirculation for copy rooms and rooms with similar
               stationary sources of contaminants.

15.3.2.2     Installation of new furniture, rugs, or drapery that may off-gas chemical contaminants (particularly in
            a facility that minimally meets the HVAC performance criteria listed above) should, ideally, be done
            with at least 48 hours of off-gassing time before occupancy. Providing a high rate of fresh air ventilation
            during this time will increase the effectiveness of the off-gassing process. This procedure should be used
            to speed dispersion of gases, vapors, and other potentially harmful building products resulting from
            activities  such as painting and application of pesticides.
                                               15-2

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines	February 1996
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements


15.3.2.3     HVAC intakes should be located as far as possible from cooling towers, vehicle exhaust sources, and
            laboratory hood exhaust systems. The position and design of the HVAC intakes should minimize
            potential contamination from such sources, both on-site and off-site.

15.3.2.4     For maintenance program requirements, see the Safety Manual.

15.3.3    SELECTION PROCEDURE
         HVAC equipment shall be sized to satisfy the building and cooling load requirements and to meet all
         equipment design and selection criteria contained in the ASHRAE Fundamentals, HVAC Systems and
         Equipment, HVAC Applications, sad Refrigeration handbooks.

15.3.3.1     INSIDE DESIGN TEMPERATURES
            Environmental design temperatures and relative humidities for special space uses other than those listed
            here shall be designated in the project criteria. The design temperatures shall be 5 degrees Fahrenheit
           . (°F) lower for cooling, and 5°F higher for heating, than the required operating temperature.

            •  When space cooling is required, the inside design temperature (design values are not necessarily the
               same as operational values) for maintaining personnel comfort shall be 70°F, dry bulb (db), unless
               otherwise indicated in project criteria.   The relative humidity shall be SO percent.  Summer
               humidification shall not be provided for personnel comfort. Cooling systems shall be designed to
               maintain the relative humidity conditions of space through the normal cooling process and should
               not have controls that limit the maximum relative humidity unless system type or project-specific
               criteria dictate.

            •  The inside design wintertime temperature (design values are not necessarily the same as operational
               values) for personnel comfort shall be 77°F db unless otherwise indicated here or directed by other
               project-specific criteria. Table 15.3.3.1, Inside Design Temperatures (Heating), shows the design
               temperatures for a number of space uses.

            •  Except where it can be substantiated from records or engineering computations that the inside
               relative humidity will be less than 30 percent, winter humidification for personnel comfort and
               health shall not be provided.  Where such a condition has been substantiated, a design relative
               humidity of 30 percent shall be used in establishing minimum requirements for humidification
               equipment.

TABLE 15.3.3.1 Inside Design Temperature* (Heating)
Temperature ("F db)	Space	•	
As indicated by project criteria                 Storage (unoccupied)
         55                               Storage (occupied)
         50                        ,       Warehouses
         60                               Kitchens
         65                             '  Laundries
         65                               Shops (high work activity)
         70                               Toilets
         75                               Change rooms (heating only when occupied)
As indicated by project criteria                 Specialty rooms (e.g., laboratories, clean rooms)
15.3.3.2     OUTSIDE DESIGN TEMPERATURES


                                                15-3

-------
                                                                              Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998                                                                  and Planning Guidelines
                                                                   Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements


            The HVAC system equipment shall be designed by using the outside design temperatures shown in
            Table 15.3.3.2, Outside Design Conditions, for the particular application. The percentages of dry bulb
            and wet bulb (wb) temperatures are derived from the sources of tabulated weather data described below.
            When data for a particular location are not  listed, design conditions shall be estimated from data
            available at nearby weather stations or by interpolation between values from stations, taking into account
            elevation and other local conditions affecting design data.  Weather data for use in sizing HVAC
            equipment shall be obtained from one or more of the following:

            •   Local weather station
            *   ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals.

Table 15.3.3.2 Outside Design Conditions	
	Winter	Summer	Application	
99% db              1 %db and mean coincident wb        Process, laboratory, and other uses where close
                                                         temperature and humidity control is required by
                                                         project criteria
97.5% db             2.5% db and mean coincident wb       Personnel comfort systems
   —                1%wb                             Cooling towers* and research, technical-type
                                                         systems
   —                1%dbplusS°F                      Air-cooled condensers*
•Temperature should be verified by reviewing actual site conditions.


15.3.3.3     EQUIPMENT SIZING
            The capacity of central heating, refrigeration, and ventilation equipment shall be set for the peak block
            building or the maximum simultaneous zone heating and cooling design loads and in accordance with
            the ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals. The equipment shall not be sized for future additional
            capacity or to provide redundancy unless indicated in project-specific criteria.  Individual zone
            equipment shall be sized according to the peak zone load.

15.3.3.4     EVAPORATrVE/ADIABATJC COOLING
            In locations where a wide variation exists between the dry bulb and wet bulb temperatures for extended
            periods of time, evaporative/adiabatic cooling shall be considered for the applications listed below.
            Selection of cooler types shall depend on system configuration, user experience, and LCCA. All
            evaporative coolers shall maintain a positive water-bleed and water-makeup system for control of
            mineral buildup.
                                  #
            •   Applications for which evaporating adiabatic cooling are considered include warehouses, shops that
                do not require close (within 5°F plus or minus) temperature control, nonresidential-size kitchens,
                makeup air ventilation units, and mechanical equipment spaces.

            *   Air duct design, number and location of coolers, and relief of the higher rate of air supply to the
                atmosphere shall be considered as means of ensuring a satisfactory operating system.  Multistage
                evaporative cooling systems shall also be considered.

            •   Indoor design dry bulb temperatures for spaces that are air-conditioned by adiabatic cooling systems
                shall be as specified in project-specific criteria. Design operating efficiency of adiabatic cooling
                equipment shall be at least 70 percent. System-installed capacity shall be based on the peak design
                cooling load for the air-conditioned space.  An arbitrary air-change rate shall not be used for design
                airflow.  Adiabatic cooler specifications shall be stated in terms of the air capacity, the entering
                ambient dry and wet bulb temperatures, and the leaving dry bulb temperature.
                                                15-4

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines	February 1998
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements


15.3.4   VENTILATION-EXHAUST SYSTEMS
         All processes, operations, or other situations that present the possibility of hazardous accumulation of
         combustible or explosive vapors, dust, fumes, or other airborne substances shall be provided with ventilation
         facilities in accordance with NFPA 91 and NFPA 45. Ventilation-exhaust systems shall be selected for the
         effective removal of noxious odors, hazardous gases, vapors, fumes, dusts, mists, and excessive heat and for
         the provision of fresh air to occupants.  The design criteria contained in this subsection shall be followed
         in determining the required air quantity and quality for ventilation and exhaust systems.

15.3.4.1     Use of exhaust stack(s) to provide exhaust air dispersion and prevent exhaust-to-intake return of air to.
            the facility or to an adjacent facility shall be considered. Local weather and site conditions, along with
            guidance found in the ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals shall be used to determine an appropriate
            solution.

15:3.4.2     Areas from which air shall not be recirculated include areas that produce or emit dust particles, heat,
            odors, fumes, spray, gases, smoke, or other contaminants that cannot be sufficiently treated and could
            be injurious to health and safety of personnel or damaging to equipment. These areas shall be 100
            percent exhausted (e.g., fume hood  exhausts).  Project criteria shall indicate other  areas of
            nonrecirculation.

15.3.4.3     Restrooms, janitor closets, garbage rooms, and other malodorous spaces shall be exhausted at a rate of
            not less than 50 cfin per toilet or urinal, and as specified in ASHRAE standard 62 or in local building
            codes, whichever is the more stringent, regardless of any other calculated ventilation requirements.

15.3.4.4     Air from adjacent spaces should be used as the ventilation supply air for the 100 percent exhausted
            spaces, as long as:

            •   Ventilation by this method does not violate any requirements of NFPA 90 A or NFPA 101 or special
                space pressurization requirements.

            •  The air supplied is not potentially more hazardous than the air from the space being exhausted.

            •  Adjacent spaces are not laboratory or specialty spaces requiring once-through ventilation.

15.3.4.5     Industrial-type facilities and laboratories shall be pixmd
            as required for heat exposure control or dilution ventilation. Ventilation air shall be provided in the
            quantities required to comply with Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) air quality
            requirements. Design air quantities and transport velocities shall be calculated according to the methods
            prescribed in the ASHRAE Handbook ofHVAC Systems and Equipment, the ASHRAE Applications
            Handbook, the ACGJK Industrial Ventilation manual, and NFPA 45.

15.3.4.6     Cooking equipment used in processes that produce smoke or grease shall be designed and protected in
            accordance with NFPA 96.  Any insulation shall be of noncombustible materials.  If other utilities are
            included in a vertical shaft with the grease duct, they shall not be insulated or lined with combustible
            materials.

15.3.4.7     The guidelines in the ASHRAE HVACApplications Handbook (under the topic of Laboratories) shall
            be followed in  designing laboratories and laboratory buildings,  except where the standards in this
            Manual are more stringent. Makeup air shall be provided in the quantities needed to maintain required
    .   .—-   positive or negative room static pressure and to offset local exhaust air quantities. Makeup air shall be
            tempered.

15.3.5   EQUIPMENT ROOM VENTILATION
                                                 15-5

-------
                                                                             Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998	[	and Planning Guidelines
                                                                  Section 15-Mechanical Requirements

         /
         Mechanical and electrical equipment rooms shall be exhausted so that room temperature does not exceed
         National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) equipment ratings.  The project criteria shall
         establish the space temperature limits.  Where mechanical ventilation cannot maintain a satisfactory
         environment, evaporative cooling systems (indirect evaporative cooling for electrical rooms) or other
         mechanical cooling systems shall be provided. Exhaust air openings should be located adjacent to heat-
         producing equipment to minimize ambient thermal loads.

         *  Thermostatic controls shall be used to operate the ventilation and exhaust systems.

         •  Equipment rooms containing refrigeration equipment shall be ventilated in accordance with ASHRAE
            standard 15.

         •  For all equipment roomswithfuel-bumingappliancesorequipment, combustionairfortheseappliances
            and this equipment shall be drawn directly from the outside, in accordance with Building Officials and
            Code Administrators International, Inc. (BOCA) Basic/National Mechanical Code.

15.3.6    WASTE HEAT RECOVERY SYSTEMS
         Energy conservation and waste heat recovery systems shall be considered and designed according to the
         procedures  outlined  in specific  chapters  of the ASHRAE Fundamentals,  Systems and Equipment,
         Applications, and Refrigeration handbooks, and the Sheet Metal and Air-Conditioning Contractors National
         Association (SMACNA) Energy Recovery Equipment and Systems Manual, The following types of heat-
         recovery methods and systems shall be considered for incorporation into the building HVAC system design
         where appropriate.

         •  Useof rotary heat exchanger, heat pipe, or coil runaround systems for heating and air-conditioning air-
            handling systems.

         *  Recovery of rejected heat from the condenser systems of central station cooling equipment for use in
            heating the remainder of the building (when the central station cooling equipment must operate during
            the heating season to cool computer rooms or high internal gain areas or to meet process requirements).

         •  Use of exhaust heat from the condenser systems of continuously operated refrigeration equipment for
            space heating or domestic hot-water heating.

         *  Use of a free cooling system that uses cooling tower water (water-side economizer)  when air-side
            economizer systems are not feasible.

         •  Use of a heat pump runaround loop.

15.3.7    ENERGY EFFICIENCY
         After a careful study of the facility's requirements as well as of the day-to-day operation of its various
         departments has been made, systems shall be designed that meet the operating requirements in an energy-
         efficient manner.  The local utility companies shall be contacted to investigate the system dollar credits for
         load shifting to off-peak times.  The health and safety aspects of the operation must be given first priority,
         and they cannot be relaxed or traded off for greater efficiency.

15.3.8    LABORATORY
         Requirements specific to laboratory spaces are as follows.

15.3.8.1     GENERAL
            Laboratory spaces shall be designed with 100 percent outside air (OSA) ventilation systems.  In no
            circumstances will the air supplied to any laboratory space be recirculated to any other space.
                                                15-6

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines	.	.	February 1998
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements


15.3.8.2     LABORATORY PRESSURIZATION
            Laboratory spaces shall be designed to maintain a pressurization level, relative to other common spaces,
            that is appropriate for the type of work performed in each laboratory and is negative to the laboratory
            corridor.  In general, biology and chemistry laboratories shall be maintained with a negative
            pressurization relative to common spaces to ensure containment of odors and contaminants. Levels of
            pressurization shall be project specific.


15.4    Energy Management Control Systems

15.4.1    GENERAL
         This subsection covers safety and operating controls, automatic temperature and humidity controls, energy
         monitoring and (central supervisory) control systems, energy conservation requirements for controls, and
         zoning requirements and restrictions.

         •  Special control requirements shall be indicated in the project-specific criteria. Control systems and
            associated equipment shall be chosen on the basis of cost and maintainability.

         •  Control air compressors shall be duplex nonlubricated type with oil-lubricated crankcase and distance
            piece. Air shall be filtered and dried by refrigerated air dryers for dew point of 15°F and above, and by
            regenerative silica air dryers for dew point below 15°F.

         •  Copper piping shall be used for high-pressure air in inaccessible locations (plastic piping may be used
            if it is installed in conduit). Air leakage shall not exceed 5 percent of pressure in 24 hours. Transmitters
            ' shall be capable of being field calibrated, and thermometers or pressure gauge ports shall be provided
            at transmitters.  All controllers and thermostats shall be pilot-bleed type.

15.4.2    ZONING
         Zoning for automatic control of space temperature, static pressure, humidity, ventilation, and smoke and
         fire detection shall satisfy health and safety requirements as indicated in the project criteria. Zoning
         requirements are as follows:

         •  Automatic controls shall be provided to shut off heating or cooling to any individual zone or central air-
            handling unit.

         •  Interior zones shall not be combined with external zones if this can be avoided.

         •  Interior space zones shall be placed on separate air-handling systems from external zones, if such
            placement is cost-effective.  External space zones shall be selected for each individual exposure.

15.4.3    CONTROL SETBACK AND SHUTOFF DEVICES
         Automatic control setback and shutdown devices with a manual override feature shall be provided for all
         HVAC systems except those used for spaces for research or process and those used for other environmentally
         sensitive spaces identified by the project criteria as requiring constant year-round temperature or humidity
         control. Use of separate, or dual-setting, thermostats, switches, time clocks, or connections for on/off control
         through the energy management system (EMS) shall be considered for control of air-conditioning to raise
         the cooling setpoint with humidity override during unoccupied periods in the summer and to control the
         heating setpoint during unoccupied periods in the winter.

15.4.4    HUMIDITY CONTROL
         Summer and winter space or zone humidity control shall be provided only on a space-by-space or zone-by-
         zone basis and not for the entire central ventilation system unless required for project-specific humidity
         requirements as stated in the project criteria. No controls shall be provided for dehumidifying spaces to

                                                15-7

-------
                                                                             Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998	;	and Planning Guidelines
                                                                  Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements


         below 50 percent relative space humidity or for humidifying spaces to greater than 30 percent relative space
         humidity unless required by project-specific criteria.

15.4.5    SIMULTANEOUS HEATING AND COOLING
         Simultaneous heating and cooling, which controls comfort conditions within a space by reheating or
         recooling supply air or by concurrently operating independent heating and cooling systems to serve a
         common zone, shall not be used except under the following conditions:

         •  Renewable energy sources are used to control temperature or humidity.

         •  Project-specific temperature, humidity, or ventilation conditions require simultaneous heating and
            cooling to prevent  space  relative humidity from  rising above special-space relative  humidity
            requirements.

         •  Project-specific building construction constraints, as established in the project criteria, prohibit
            installation of other types of HVAC systems.

15.4.6    MECHANICAL VENTILATION CONTROL
         All supply, return, and exhaust ventilation systems shall be equipped with automatic and manual control
         of fan operation to shut off the fan when ventilation is not required. To prevent introduction of outside air
         when ventilation is not required, these systems shall also be provided with manual gravity-operated or
         automatic control of dampers for outside air intake and exhaust or relief.  Systems that circulate air shall
         be provided with minimum outdoor air damper position  control to ensure that the minimum amount of
         outdoor air is being introduced into the system. Unless  otherwise required by life safety or the specific
         project criteria, automatic dampers should fail open for return air and fail to a minimum setting for outside
         air.

15.4.7    ECONOMIZER CYCLE
         Where feasible, all air-handling systems that recirculate air and are used for space cooling shall be designed
         to automatically use outside air quantities of up to 100 percent of the fan system capacity for cooling the
         space.  Economizer cycle control shall not be used for air-handling systems in which introduction of the
         additional outside air would actually increase energy consumption.

         •  The economizer cycle control system shall have a reset feature.

         *  The economizer cycle control system shall be designed with a relief air control cycle designed to
            positively relieve the supply air from the space by sequencing return  or relief fans or dampers to
            maintain a constant room static pressure. Systems that use the economizer cycle should be provided
            with adequate air filtration to handle the quality of the outside air.

15.4.8    AUTOMATIC CONTROL DAMPERS
         Automatic air control dampers must be of the low-leakage type with a maximum leakage of 6 cfm per square
         foot at a maximum system velocity of 1,500 feet per minute (fpm) and a 1-inch pressure differential, as
         stipulated in Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA) standard 500. The dampers shall be opposed-
         blade type for modulating control, but may be parallel-blade type for two-position control. Pilot positioners
         and operators shall be out of the airstream.

15.4.9    VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME SYSTEM FAN CONTROL
         Variable-air-volume (VAV) systems shall be designed with control devices that sense ductwork static air
         pressure and velocity air pressure, and control supply-fan airflow and static pressure output through
         modulation of variable inlet vanes, inlet/discharge dampers, scroll dampers, bypass dampers, variable pitch
         blades, or variable frequency  electric drive controls, as described  in ASHRAE HVAC Applications
         Handbook, Chapter 41, and ASHRAE Handbook of HVAC Systems and Equipment, Chapter 18. These

                                                15-8

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines                                                             	February 1998
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements


         control systems shall have a minimum of one static pressure sensor mounted in ductwork downstream of
         the fan and one static pressure controller to vary fan output through either the inlet vane, the damper, the
         belt modulator, or the speed control. Exhaust fans, supply fans, and return or relief fans shall have devices
         that control the operation of the fans to monitor air volumes and maintain fixed minimum outdoor air
         ventilation requirements.

15.440   FIRE AND SMOKE DETECTION AND PROTECTION CONTROLS
         All air-handling systems shall be provided with the smoke and fire protection controls required by NFPA
         72.

         •  All supply, return, relief, and exhaust air ventilation systems shall have interlock controls that interface
            with the fire and smoke detection system controls.  In the event of fire, these interlock controls shall
            either turn off or selectively operate fans and dampers to prevent the spread of smoke and fire through
            the building. These controls shall comply with NFPA 90A.

         *  Special exhaust systems shall be designed to include fire and smoke safety controls as required by NFPA
            91. Kitchen exhaust ductwork systems shall be designed to include all fire and smoke safety controls
            as required by NFPA 96.

         •  Engineered smoke pressurization and evacuation systems shall comply with the following:

            -  NFPA 90A
            -  NFPA 72
            •  ASHRAE manual, Design of Smoke Control Systems for Buildings
            -  ASHRAE Htmdbook of HVAC Systems and Equipment.

         •  Special hazard protection systems that initiate an alarm shall be in accordance with the provisions in
            Section 16, Electrical Requirements, of this Manual.

15.4.11   GAS-FIRED AIR-HANDLING UNIT CONTROL
         Gas-fired air-handling units shall be equipped with operating limit, safety control, and combustion control
         systems. Gas burner and combustion controls shall comply with Factory Mutual (FM) loss prevention data
         sheets and be listed in the FM Approval Guide.  Gas-fired air-handling units shall  have controls that lock
         out the gas supply in the following conditions:

            Main or pilot flame failure
            Unsafe discharge temperature (high limit)
            High or low gas pressure
            No proof of airflow over heat exchanger
            Combustion air loss
            Loss of control system actuating energy.

15.4.12   ZONE CONTROL/DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM CONTROL
         Each zone or air-handling system shall be designed with individual terminal unit-valved control. Use of
         either two-way or three-way  valves shall  be considered on the basis of part-load pump  performance
         requirements and potential pump boiler horsepower (bhp) savings.

         Water systems that vary the load to the terminal by varying water flow rates with two-way control valves
    	'shall be provided with differential pressure controls to reduce system pressure buildup and save energy.
         These controls shall either signal control valves to route water flow around terminal devices, signal variable-
         speed pumping controls to reduce pump speed, or turn off one or several pumps  working in parallel or
         series.
                                               15-9

-------
                                                                            Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998                                                                  and Planning Guidelines
                                                                  Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements


15.4.13   CONTROL VALVE SELECTION
         Temperature control valves shall be either two-way or three-way proportioning-type valves. Control valves
         shall be calibrated to allow for a 3-to-S pound-per-square-inch (psi) pressure differential across the valve
         or a pressure differential of 50 percent of the combined branch piping and coil pressure drop, whichever is
         greater. Control valves shall use either pneumatic, electric, electronic, or self-contained controllers. Valves
         in cooling and heating systems shall be fail-safe.  Valve operators shall be selected to close against pump
         shutoff head for two-way valves.

15.4.14   TWO-PIPE AND THREE-PIPE COMBINATION HEATING AND COOLING SYSTEMS
         For fan coil terminal devices with one coil, control valves shall be operated by a room or coil discharge
         temperature thermostat that can change from summer to winter operation.  For air-handling units with
         heating and cooling coils, control valves shall be controlled by normal sequences of operation but shall be
         provided with two-position control valves in the piping entering each coil, to prevent hot water from
         entering the cooling coil and chilled water from entering the heating coil and to sequence on/off and
         summer and winter operation.

         If the two-pipe or three-pipe water distribution system is not provided with heat exchangers to isolate the
         boilers and chillers from the distribution system, a control system that uses three-way control valves to
         control and route water around the source devices shall be designed to prevent hot water from entering the
         chiller and cold water from entering the boiler during the changeover periods from heating to cooling
         systems.

15.4.15   LOAD CONTROL FOR HOT-WATER SYSTEMS
         The temperature of hot water for building heating systems shall be controlled by a supply temperature sensor
         that modulates the boiler-operating controls. If feasible, the supply delivery temperature shall be reset on
         the basis of either the temperature outside (lowering the delivery temperature as the outdoor air temperature
         rises and raising the delivery temperature as the outdoor air temperature falls) or, preferably, discriminator
         logic from the control devices.

15.4.16   LOAD CONTROL FOR CHILLED-WATER SYSTEMS
         Central station cooling equipment producing chilled water shall be controlled by a signal from a sensor
         mounted in the return chilled-water piping or, preferably, in the leaving chilled-water piping; this signal
         modulates the chiller to control chilled-water supply. Central station cooling equipment shall be provided
         with controls to limit the current draw of the cooling equipment in periods of high electrical demand.

         When appropriate, additional controls and sensors  may be added to the central chilled-water system to
         provide chilled water to laboratory equipment that may require it.  In addition, provisions for supplying
         emergency chilled water to laboratory equipment may be required.

15.4.17   COOLING TOWER AND WATER-COOLED CONDENSER SYSTEM CONTROLS
         Design of cooling tower fans shall consider use of variable-speed drives (if feasible) or two-speed motors
         (if feasible) and on/off controls to reduce power consumption and maintain condenser water temperature.
         Bypass valve control shall be provided, if required, to mix cooling tower water with condenser water in order
         to maintain the temperature of entering condenser water at the low limit.  To decrease compressor energy
         use, condenser water temperature shall be allowed to float, as long as the temperature remains above the
         lower limit required by the chiller. The design shall provide basin temperature-sensing devices and, if the
         cooling tower is operated under freezing  conditions, shall provide additional  heat and control system
         components to maintain cooling tower sump water temperatures above freezing.

         When appropriate, additional controls and sensors may be added to the condenser water system to provide
         condenser water  to laboratory equipment that may require it.  In addition, provisions  for supplying
         emergency condenser water to laboratory equipment may be required.
                                               15-10

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines                                                                 February 1996
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements


15.4.18   CONTROL OF STEAM SYSTEMS
         Each zone air handler, heating coil, and individual terminal unit shall be controlled by two-way control
         valves that are activated either electrically, pneumatically, or through use of self-contained liquid or wax-
         filled sensing elements. These control valves shall modulate the steam flow to the coil or terminal unit,
         according to the space temperature or the coil discharge temperature preset to meet zone temperature
         requirements.   Steam pressure and temperature control  valves shall be selected according to the
         requirements in the ASHRAE handbooks.

15.4.19   ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS   .
         Central emergency management systems shall be provided where feasible.  If such integration is cost-
         effective,  an EMS shall be combined with integral fire and smoke detection supervisory systems and
         lighting-control systems.  An EMS shall have the capability of connecting to additional building utility
         systems.  When use of an EMS is contemplated for the future, the design professional shall sect other
         building system controls and instrumentation that will connect easily to the future EMS.

15.4.20   ENERGY METERING
         In facilities where the energy consumption is expected to exceed 500 million British thermal units (Btu) per
         year, energy metering systems for all incoming electric, gas, oil, and water utilities shall be designed to be
         monitored and tracked by the EMS. Submetering of utilities to various buildings or equipment shall be
         based on project criteria or, in the absence of these, on sound engineering judgment.


15.5    Heating,  Ventilation, and Air-Conditioning Systems

15.5.1    GENERAL
         Selection of central station cooling systems  shall be based on the LCCA procedures. Size, selection, and
         design shall be based on guidelines in the ASHRAE Fundamentals, HVAC Systems and Equipment, and
         HVAC Applications handbooks.  Refrigeration equipment shall comply with  Air-Conditioning and
         Refrigeration Institute (ARI) 520, ARI550, and ARI590. To ensure the most economical operation, the
         number and size of central station cooling units  shall be based on the annual estimated partial-load
         operation  of the plant

         •  The project design  criteria shall provide direction on installed standby chiller capacity.  Wherever
            possible, the central station chilled-water equipment shall be designed into the chilled-water distribution
            systems as part of a primary-secondary loop system maintaining the chilled-water inlet temperature
            below  a maximum  predetermined value; ideally, the central station cooling equipment will be the
            secondary portion of the loop.

         •  Temperature-critical areas (such as laboratories and computer centers), as determined by project criteria,
            shall be provided with independent refrigeration systems with backup systems if the areas are involved
            with vital programs. Use of off-peak cooling systems shall be considered in areas that have high electric
            peak demand charges.

15.5.2    AIR-CONDITIONING SYSTEMS
         The refrigerant in air-conditioning systems should be recycled during servicing, as required under Section
         608 of the Clean Air Act. Existing chillers should be retrofitted or replaced with CFC-free refrigerant
         systems. Except as set forth herein, all air-conditioning and ventilating systems for the handling of air that
         is not contaminated with flammables or explosive vapors or dust shall conform to the requirements of NFPA
         90A.

15.5.2.1      AIR DISTRIBUTION
            No vertical portion of the exit facilities or protected hallways leading from the vertical exit to the outside
            of the building shall be used for the normal distribution or return of air.

                                              15-11

-------
                                                                              Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998	                                                           and Planning Guidelines
                                                                   Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements


15.5.2.2      SMOKE CONTROL SYSTEMS
             Smoke control systems shall be provided in all facilities that are 12 stories tall or taller. Smoke control
             systems shall be provided in accordance with NFPA 92A.

15.5.2.3      SHAFT CONSTRUCTION
             The construction of shafts containing, or used as, vertical ducts shall comply with the vertical shaft
             requirements contained in Section 13, Special Construction, of this Manual and Chapter 2, Basic Fire
             Safety Standards, of the Safety Manual.

15.5.2.4      AUTOMATIC FIRE DOORS AND DAMPERS
             Automatic fire doors and fire dampers shall be provided in the air distribution and air return and exhaust
             systems per the requirements of NFPA 90A and Section 8, Doors and Windows, of this Manual, except
             where doors and dampers are omitted in accordance with other standards (e.g., no fire dampers are to
             be provided in fume hood exhaust ducts, per NFPA 45).

15.5.3    WATER CHILLERS
         The selection of either centrifugal, reciprocating, helical,  rotary-screw, absorption, or steam-powered
         chillers shall be based on coefficients of performance under full-load and partial-load conditions; these
         coefficients are used in analysis done by LCCA methods.  LCCA shall also consider the pumping-energy
         burdens on the chilled-water  and condenser water system as pan of the evaluation.  Compression
         refrigeration machines shall be designed with the safety controls, relief valves, and rupture disks noted
         below, and design shall be in compliance with the procedures prescribed by ASHRAE standard 15 and
         Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) 207.

         *   Controls shall include, at a minimum:

             -   High-discharge refrigerant pressure cutout switch
             -   Low-evaporator refrigerant pressure or temperature cutout switch
             -   High and low oil pressure switches
             •   Chilled-water flow interlock switch
             -   Condenser water flow interlock switch (on water-cooled equipment)
             -   Chilled-water low-temperature cutout switch.

         •   Centrifugal compressors shall be designed to operate with inlet control or variable-speed control for
             capacity modulation.  Units shall be capable of modulating to  10 percent of design capacity without
             surge. Reciprocating compressors shall bedesignedforcapacitycontrolbycylinderunloading. Designs
             using hot-gas bypass  control of compressors for capacity modulation shall  not be used except when
             capacity modulation is required at conditions below 10 percent of the rated load. Compressor motors
             for refrigeration equipment shall be selected in compliance with all requirements of the National
             Electrical Code (NEC).

         •   Absorption refrigeration machines shall be provided with the following safety controls, at a minimum:

             -   Condenser water flow switch
             -   Chilled-water flow switch
             -   Evaporation refrigerant level switch
             -   Generator high-temperature limit switch (gas-fired units)
             -   Generator shell bursting disc (high-temperature water or steam)
             -   Concentration limit controls.

         •   Liquid coolers (evaporators) shall be designed to meet the design pressure, material, welding, testing,
             and relief requirements of ASHRAE standard 15  and the American Society of Mechanical Engineers
                                                15-12

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines	February 1998
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements


            (ASME) Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section Vm. Evaporators shall be selected according to the
            requirements of ASHRAE standard 24-78.

15.5.4   CONDENSERS/CONDENSING UNITS
         Water-cooled condensers shall comply with ASHRAE standard 15 and ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
         Code, Section Vm.  Water-cooled condenser shells and tubes shall have removable heads, if available, to
         allow tube cleaning. The use of marine water boxes on the condenser shall be considered for ease of tube
         cleaning.

         Air-cooled condensers and condensing units shall meet the standard rating and testing requirements of ARI
         460 and ASHRAE standard 20. Air-cooled condenser intakes shall be located away from any obstructions
         that will restrict airflow. Air-cooled equipment shall be located away from noise-sensitive areas, and air-
         cooled condensers shall have refrigerant low-head-pressure control to maintain satisfactory operation during
         light loading.

15.5.5   COOLING TOWERS
         Cooling towers shall be located and placed to avoid problems with water drift and deposition of water
         treatment chemicals. Cooling towers shall have ample clearance from any obstructions that would restrict
         airflow, cause recirculation of discharge air, or inhibit maintenance.

15.5.5.1     Cooling tower acceptance and factory rating tests shall be conducted in accordance with Cooling Tower
            Institute (CTI) Bulletin ATC-105.

15.5:5.2     An automatically controlled water-bleed shall be designed for all cooling towers. A cooling tower water
            treatment program should be selected by a specialist

15.5.5.3     Cooling towers shall have sump water heating systems if they will operate during freezing weather.

15.5.5.4     Combustible casings are acceptable in cooling towers, provided that the fill and drift eliminators are
            noncombustible. (Polyvinyl chloride [PVC] and fire-retardant-treated, fiberglass-reinforced plastic are
            classified as combustible.) In determining cooling tower requirements, the definitions of combustible
            and noncombustible in NFPA 214 shall be used. Cooling towers with more than 2,000 cubic feet of a
            combustible fill  shall be provided with an automatic sprinkler system, designed in accordance with
            NFPA 214, when any of the following conditions exist:

            •  The continued operation of the cooling tower is essential to the operations in the area it services.
            •  The building is totally sprinkler protected.
            •  A fire in the cooling  tower could cause structural damage or other severe fire exposure to the
               building.
            •  The value of the cooling tower is five or more times the cost of installing the sprinkler protection.
               The cost of the sprinkler protection shall include all factors involved, such as the sprinkler piping
               distribution system, the heat-sensing system, the control valve, and any special water supplies or
               extension of water supplies required.                                                       c

15.5.5.5     Cooling towers with airstreams that pass through water shall have the water treated with an  EPA-
            approved biocide to control etiological organisms or any chlorinated hydrocarbon pesticides, herbicides,
            or other chemicals that may be present because of local conditions.  A maintenance program must be
            established to ensure continued, effective operation of these treatment systems.

15.5.6   BUILDING HEATING SYSTEMS
         This subsection applies to heat-generating equipment or heat-transfer equipment and accessories located
         in individual  buildings.  The project criteria shall provide direction on factors to be considered in the
         selection of heating system capacity; such factors include redundancy, future expansion or  building

                                                15-13

-------
                                                                              Architecture, Engineering,
February 1996                                                                  and Planning Guidelines
                                                                   Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements


         modification, thermal storage or solar assistance, and other project-specific considerations. If maintaining
         the building design temperature is critical, a stand-alone heating system shall be designed with backup
         capability and with no dependence on other facility systems.

15.5.6.1      Where buildings are connected to the central plant heat generation/distribution system, one of the
             following shall be provided:

             •   Steam-to-building hot water heat exchanger
             •   High-temperature water (HTW)-to-building hot water heat exchanger
             •   Steam-pressure reducing station.
                                                           t
15.5.6.2      For space heating by hot water, conversion of the central heating plant steam or HTW shall provide a
                      heating-water supply temperature of 200°F for building terminal units. For space heating
            by steam, the building steam supply pressure shall be reduced to 1 5 pounds per square inch gauge (psig)
            unless a higher supply pressure is needed for process requirements. For process-related or other high
            temperature requirements, the project criteria shall indicate the capacities and the temperature and
            pressure requirements.  For facilities with a central plant condensate return system, a condensate
            receiver with duplex pumps shall be specified. Steam-to-hot-water or HTW-to-building heating water
            converters shall be selected on the basis of design criteria contained in the ASHRAE Handbook ofHVA C
            Systems and Equipment and ASHRAE HVAC Applications Handbook.

15.5.6.3     The use of direct and indirect gas-fired units, electric heating, heat pumps (air-cooled and water-cooled),
            low-temperature  gas infrared  heating, and hot-water radiant heating and hot-water distribution to
            terminal units, shall be considered, with selection based on the building type, the facility preference, and
            LCCA.  Office buildings, and particularly buildings with occupants sitting near fenestration, shall be
            designed with perimeter finned-tube radiation heating systems or other perimeter heating systems.

            •   If the selected heating fuel is fuel oil, storage tanks, installed in accordance with national,  state, and
                local EPA  regulations, shall provide 30 days of full heating capacity.  Each tank shall be fully
                trimmed for safety and operating conditions and shall include a remote level gauge. Tanks shall
                comply with NFPA 30 requirements.

15.5.7    HEATING EQUIPMENT
         Furnaces and boilers for central heating systems shall be enclosed in a room with  2-hour fire-rated walls,
         floors, and ceilings, and with openings protected by automatic or self-closing 1 l/z-hour fire doors.  For small
         units consisting of a  single furnace operating a hot air system or a boiler not exceeding IS psi pressure or
         a rating of 10 bhp, a 1-hour fire-rated enclosure is permissible.

15.5.7.1     STANDARDS
            Heating equipment will comply with the following standards, except where noted otherwise:

            •   Oil-fired— NFPA 31
            -   Gas-fired— NFPA 54
            •   Liquefied petroleum gas-fired— NFPA 58
            •   Liquefied natural gas-fired— NFPA 59A.

15.5.7.2     FUEL STORAGE
            Where liquid fuel is used, a recessed floor or curb shall be provided, with ramps at the openings. The
            height of the recess or curb shall be sufficient  to contain all the fuel in case the tank or container
            ruptures.
                                                15-14

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines                                                          	February 1998
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements


15.5.7.3     SHOP OPERATIONS
                                             15-15

-------
                                                                              Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998                                                                  and Planning Guidelines
                                                                   Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements


             Shop, storage, and other operations that involve flanunable or combustible materials and are not directly
             related to the operations in the furnace or boiler rooms shall be located elsewhere unless the furnace or
             boiler room is sprinkler protected. Incidental operations that do not utilize significant amounts of
             flammable materials are allowed in furnace or boiler rooms if proper separations are maintained between
             combustible materials and ignition sources (e.g., boiler equipment).

15.5.7.4      BURNERS
             Regardless of size, burners on suspended oil-fired heaters shall be provided with flame supervision that
             will ensure shutdown in not more than 4 seconds if flame failure occurs or trial for ignition does not
             establish a flame.

15.5.7.5      SPACE HEATERS
             When used in approved locations, space heaters and portable heaters shall be approved or listed by the
             American Gas Association, UL, or another nationally recognized testing authority. They shall be
             installed in accordance with all of the requirements of the manufacturer, the facility owner, and the EPA
             Safety, Health and Environmental Management Manager involved. Any combustion space heater should
             be directly vented to the outside by a flue to avoid the contamination of the occupied space with
             combustion gases. Portable liquid-fueled space heaters shall not be used in EPA-occupied spaces.

15.5.7.6      GAS PIPING
             Gas piping entry into the building shall be protected against breakage due to settling, vibration, or,
             where appropriate, seismic activity.  Where practical, piping shall be  brought in above grade and
             provided with a swing joint before it enters the building. Where it is necessary for gas piping to enter
             a building below ground, the physical arrangement shall be such that a break in the gas line due to
             settling or other causes at or near the point of entry cannot result in the free flow of gas into the building.
             Local gas utility and code  requirements shall be followed.

15.5.7.7      GAS METER REGULATORS
             To avoid placing any strain on the gas piping, any meters, regulators, or similar attachments shall be
             adequately supported. Any vents or rupture discs on the equipment shall be vented to the outside of the
             building.

15.5.7.8      VALVES
             Earthquake-sensitive shutoff valves shall be provided for each gas entry, where applicable.

15.5.7.9      PIPING LOCATION
             Gas piping shall not be run in any space between a structural member and its fireproofing.

15.5.7.10     GAS METER ROOMS
             Gas meter rooms shall be vented in a way that removes any leaked gas without transporting it through
             the structure.

15.5.7.11     FIRE-RESISTANT SHAFTS OR CONDUIT
             For large-capacity gas services (piping greater than 3-inch diameter at 4 inches of water pressure head
             or any other size with equivalent or greater delivery capabilities) within a building, the piping shall be
             enclosed in fire-resistive shafts and vented directly to the outside at top and bottom. Any horizontal runs
             of the gas pipe shall be enclosed in a conduit or chase, also directly vented at each end to the exterior
             or to the vented vertical shaft. Automatic gas detection and automatic shutoff shall be provided.

15.5.8    WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS
         Economical pipe sizes shall be selected for chilled water, hot water, condenser water, boiler feed, and
         condensate return systems based on the allowable pressure drop, flow rate, and pump selection criteria
         prescribed in the ASHRAE Fundamentals, HVAC Systems and Equipment, and HVAC Applications


                                                15-16

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines	February 1998
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements


         handbooks. Insulation shall be provided on all water distribution piping and system components. Strainers
         shall be provided at the suction side of each pump and of each control valve. Flexible connectors shall be
         specified for installation on the suction and discharge piping of base-mounted end-suction type pumps and
         on electronically driven chillers.

         *  Check valves and balancing valves, or combination check-shutoff-balance valves, shall be installed in
            the discharge piping of all pumps operating in parallel pumping systems.  Balancing valves shall be
            installed in the discharge piping of all pump systems.

         •  Service valves shall be installed in the suction and discharge piping of all major pieces of equipment.
            Balancing valves shall be provided in the discharge piping of all coils and in central station cooling
            equipment

         •  An air elimination pressure control, venting, and automatic filling system (with backflow prevention)
            shall be provided for each hot-water and chilled-water distribution system; water treatment injection
            should also be provided, if required.

         •  Expansion or compression tanks and fill piping connections shall be located on the suction side of the
            distribution system pump or pumps. Expansion tanks and air separation devices shall be sized according
            to the methods in the ASHRAE Handbook ofHVAC and Equipment, and specified in accordance with
            the requirements of ASME B31.1.  Gauge glasses, drain valves, and vent valves shall be provided for
            all expansion tank systems.

    '     •  Water treatment design information for chilled-water, hot-water, and boiler feed water systems shall be
            provided by a specialist and based on project criteria (tested water condition).

15.5.9    PUMPS AND PUMPING SYSTEMS
         Pumps for chilled-water, hot-water, condenser water, boiler feed water, and condensate systems shall be
         centrifugal-type pumps and shall be selected on the basis of the criteria in the ASHRAE handbooks.
         Materials, types of seals, bearings, wear rings, shafts, and other features shall be  selected on the basis of
         specific system requirements. Use of primary-secondary type pumping systems and high-efficiency motors
         shall be considered for pumps for all hot-water and chilled-water distribution systems.

         •  For systems where system pumping horsepower requirements are greater than 20 bhp, use of variable-
            speed drives or parallel-pumping arrangement shall be considered.

         •  Standby pumps shall be provided for all systems, as dictated by project-specific criteria.

15.5.10  STEAM DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS
         All steam piping shall comply with ASME B31.1 and shall be at least Schedule 40 black steel. Fittings,
         valves, and accessories shall be selected on the basis of pipe size and temperature and pressure conditions.

15.5.11  AIR-HANDLING AND AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS
         Air-handling equipment and air distribution systems shall be sized to optimize performance, initial cost,
         and operating and maintenance costs over the life of the system.  All air-handling system equipment (e.g.,
         fans, terminal units, air-handling units) shall be provided with vibration isolators and flexible ductwork
         connectors to minimize transmission of vibration and noise. Systems shall satisfy the noise criteria (NC)
         levels recommended for various types of spaces and the vibration criteria listed in the ASHRAE handbooks.
         Where air-handling equipment and air distribution systems cannot meet these requirements, sound, and
         vibration-attenuation devices shall be installed in the air-handling systems.

15.5.11.1    The HVAC system for the sections of the laboratory building (including corridors) where the laboratory
            and laboratory support rooms are located shall be a one-pass air system. These sections of the laboratory

                                                15-17

-------
                                                                              Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998                                                                   and Planning Guidelines
                                                                   Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements


             building, as well as the hazardous chemical storage building, shall have an independent air-handling
             unit(s). The general exhaust and special instrument canopy hoods in these sections and in the hazardous
             chemical storage building shall be 100 percent constant volume at all times.

             Minimum airflow requirements to be maintained are: 250 cfm with four air changes per hour for an
             unoccupied laboratory, or calculated to prevent concentration of volatile vapors at or'above 25 percent
             of their lower flammable/explosive limit (LEL) within the hood; and not less than eight air changes per
             hourduringoccupiedhours, while maintaining negative pressure within laboratories relative to adjacent
             corridors and nonlaboratory spaces. Specifications for controls and monitoring devices for exhaust and
             air-handling units should be consistent with these minimum airflow requirements.

             The setback mechanism shall provide a low-speed operations setting for the fen motors of air-handling
             unit(s) and fume hoods in a particular zone. Fan motors can be simultaneously activated.  The setback
             mechanism shall be designed to provide 250 dm minimum for 6-foot and smaller laboratory hoods; it
             shall provide room temperatures of approximately 55T in the winter and approximately 85°F in the
             sununerunJessother.ovemdingteraperaturerequirementsarcspecificallystated. TheHVACsystcm(s)
             nighttime setback shall be controlled by a timer connected to the energy management control system of
             the building. The fume hood face velocity reduction of25 percent of full open-flow air volume (100 fpm
             hood face velocity) and the general exhaust and special canopy hood operation at 100 percent airflow
             are to be balanced by an appropriate reduction in  supply air (air-handling unit) fan speed in order to
             maintain negative pressure in the laboratory and laboratory support rooms with respect to the hallways.


             Room exhaust systems shall, at all times, be capable of eliminating concentrations of fumes, odors, heat,
             and moisture.  HVAC design, materials, and installation shall minimize the occurrence of molds,
             mildew, fungi, and microbial agents in the system. The combined noise level generated by mechanical
             and electrical building equipment and fume hoods should not exceed 70 decibels [dBa] at the face of the
             hoods (with the systems operating) or 55 dBa elsewhere.

             The average face velocity shall be 100 fpm for all sash heights up to and including 80 percent open.
             Operating sash heights of less than 100 percent open require installations of sash stops and audible and
             visual alarms to warn operators of less than 100 fpm velocities.

15.5.11.2     Use of a VAV mechanical ventilation system is permitted if the following design and installation criteria
             are achieved.

             •  The system must  be able to consistently provide 100 fpm average face velocity for conventional
               laboratory fume hoods irrespective efface opening setting.

             •  Fume hood systems must pass the performance test outlined in the Procedures Manual for Certifying
               Laboratory Fume  Hoods To Meet EPA Standard This test requires an average face velocity of 100
               fpm.

             •  Of particular concern is the containment of a tracer test or smoke stick when the sash is opened and
               closed.  Some VAV systems have unacceptable delays in the supply and exhaust motors in response
               to changes in the sash height. This will cause the backflow of contaminants into the work space and
               the temporary loss of negative pressure in the laboratory space relative to corridors and other
               adjacent spaces.

             •  In addition to avoiding these unacceptable conditions, a VAV system must maintain a minimal flow
               of  air within the hood and ductwork to  purge gases, vapors, and  other substances; avoid
               condensation, impaction, and deposition in the ductwork; and achieve sufficient stack velocity so that
                                                15-18

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines	February 1998
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements


                the contaminated airstream clears the building and does not reenter the building along with supply
                air.

            Refer to subsection 15.5.11.1 for minimum airflow requirements.

15.5.12  FANS/MOTORS
         Fans shall be designed and specified to ensure stable, nonpulsing aerodynamic operation in the range of
         operation, over varying speeds. Fans with motors of 20 horsepower (hp) or less shall be designed with
         adjustable motor pulley sheaves to assist in air balancing of systems. Fans with motors of greater than 20
         hp shall use fixed (nonadjustable)  drives that can be adjusted by using fixed motor pulley sheaves of
         different diameters. Supply air-handling units and return air fens in VAV systems shall control capacity
         through the use of variable-speed drives, inlet vanes, or scroll bypass dampers.  All fans shall comply with
         AMCA standard 210, ASHRAE standard 51,  and the ASHRAE Handbook of HVAC Systems and
         Equipment.

         •  Fans shall be located within the ductwork system, in accordance with the requirements of AMCA
            Publication 201. Motors shall be sized according to properly calculated bhp fan requirements and shall
            not use oversized fans and motors to meet future capacity needs unless so directed by the project criteria.
            Fan construction materials shall be selected on the basis of corrosion resistance and cost. Spark-resistant
            construction shall be used where required by NFPA.  All fans and accessories shall be designed and
            specified to meet all smoke and flame spread requirements of NFPA 255. Fans used in exhaust systems
            of fume hoods shall also be of the noiseless type and shall be corrosion-resistant to the fumes generated
            in the hood.

         •  Smoke detectors for automatic control in air distribution systems shall be located in accordance with the
            requirements of NFPA 90A, Chapter 4.

15.5.13  COILS
         Heating and cooling coils shall comply with ART 410. Heating and cooling coil selection shall comply with
         the guidelines in the ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals and the ASHRAE Handbook of HVAC Systems
         and Equipment.  Coil manufacturers shall certify coil performance by ARI certification or provide written
         certification from a nationally recognized independent testing firm that coil performance is in accordance
         with ARI 410.

         •  Heating and cooling coils shall be composed of materials appropriate for the corrosive atmosphere in
            which they operate. Cooling coils shall be designed with a maximum face velocity of 550 fpm.  Coils
            designed with face velocities exceeding 500 fpm shall have features that prevent condensate carryover
            or use moisture eliminators. Coils shall have a drain feature.

         •  Recirculating air systems designed for outside-air winter temperatures below freezing shall have a
            preheat coil, located either in the outside air intake or in the mixed-air stream upstream of the cooling
            coil, unless the theoretical  mixed-air temperature is calculated to be above 35 °F.  In this case, the
            preheat coils may be omitted if adequate baffling is provided to guarantee positive mixing of the return
            and outdoor  air.  Preheat  coils shall be  designed to maintain discharge air temperature without
            modulation of the steam or hot-water flow through use of modulating face dampers and bypass dampers.
            In moderate climates where  the method has been proved to be reliable and there is no concern about coil
            freeze-up, steam modulation may be used for control of steam coils.

15.5.14  DUCTS
         Ducts shall conform to the requirements of NFPA 90 A. Exhaust ductwork for laboratories with fume hoods
         shall be constructed  with welded longitudinal seams  and welded transverse joints, or equivalent
         construction, in accordance with the requirements of Section 6, Ductwork, of American National Standard
         (ANSI/AMA) Z9.5-1992. Any  duct linings or coverings shall be of noncombustible construction. The total

                                                 15-19

-------
                                                                              Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998                                                                   and Planning Guidelines
                                                                   Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements


         assembly of the duct lining, including adhesive and any coatings or additives involved, shall have an interior
         finish rating of Class A (flame spread 0*25, smoke developed 0-450). Use of porous duct liners that can
         collect dirt and moisture contributes  to indoor air quality problems. The use of such liners should be
         avoided and should not be considered for new construction.  Where such liners are already in use, and
         particularly in areas close to humidification or dehumidification (cooling) equipment, provisions shall be
         made to protect the lining from dirt and moisture contamination.

         •  Duct smoke detectors, as described under Section 16, Electrical Requirements, of this Manual shall be
            installed in accordance with NFPA 90A requirements.

15.5.15   WALK-IN ENVIRONMENTAL AND COLD STORAGE ROOMS
         Walk-in environmental rooms are rooms in which temperature and/or humidity is controlled at a single set
         condition within specified tolerances  regardless of activity in the room.  In determining the appropriate
         room temperature, uniformity, and gradient, the design professional should discuss heat loads (in terms of
         process loads and ventilation requirements) with the end user. Walk-in environmental rooms shall be
         capable of maintaining a 4°C room temperature with a uniformity of ±0.5°C and a maximum gradient of
         1 °C, unless otherwise specified in the program requirements. A walk-in cold storage room shall be capable
         of maintaininga minus 20°C room temperature with a uniformity of±1 °C and a maximum gradient of 3 °C,
         unless otherwise specified. Rooms shall feature temperature displays visible from a contiguous hallway and
         shall be capable of producing a continuous record of temperature. Alarm systems with manual override
         capability shall be provided to advise room operators of fault conditions. Doors to rooms shall be provided
         with a locking mechanism capable of release at all times from the room interior whether or not the door is
         locked.  Walk-in environmental and cold storage spaces shall include  shelving.  Walk-in coolers are
         considered enclosed spaces and require automatic fire sprinkler protection inside them.

         A separate refrigeration system shall be provided for these rooms. If refrigeration is provided by the main
         building's chilled-water system, a backup self-contained system shall also be provided.

15.5.16   CENTRAL PLANT HEAT GENERATION AND DISTRIBUTION
         The following criteria shall be applied in the planning and design of steam and HTW generation and
         distribution systems and of cogeneration facilities.

15.5.16.1    FACILITY SIZING
            The design professional shall consider creating a plant design that can be easily expanded to meet
            potential future loads in addition to meeting confirmed near-term loads. Load computations to establish
            boiler capacity shall be based on the building design heating load, as determined in conformance with
            the ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals, plus process heating loads (if any) and an allowance for
            piping plants. The process heat losses shall be investigated during the design stage to determine whether
            heat can be recovered, thereby reducing the boiler load.

            •  Modular boiler installation shall be considered for all applications in order to maintain a high
               operating plant efficiency throughout the year. The number and size of the boilers shall be based on
               the number of operable hours at full and partial load operation, the turn-down ratio of the  boiler
               being considered, efficiency at partial loads, and year-round process or summer loads. Use of a
               caseload boiler shall be considered when a year-round process demand exists. The system shall be
               designed to satisfy peak demand by operating over its maximum rating for short periods of time.

            '  The possibility of operating small local boilers rather than the central plant to satisfy summer loads
               shall also be considered.  Sufficient capacity shall be furnished to  allow one boiler to be down for
               inspection or maintenance or to be on standby while the remaining boiler(s)  maintain normal
               operations.
                                                15-20

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines	.	February 1998
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements


            •   The generating facilities shall be so located as to allow efficient steam/hot-water distribution
                throughout the site and to allow for future expansion of the generating and distribution system. The
                facility location shall also be chosen to take advantage of prevailing winds and to minimize problems
                associated with the following:

                -   Noise
                -   Dirt
                •   Air pollution
                -   Harmful effects on adjacent property owners
                -   Accommodation of fuel deliveries and storage.

            •   The option of installing one or more satellite boiler facilities rather than a  single central boiler
                complex shall be evaluated when one or more of the following conditions exist:

                -   An extensive distribution system connecting several separate steam users is required.
                -   Requirements exist for several different steam pressures.
                -   Variable steam loadings exist with respect to time or quantity.

            •   The use of a cogeneration plant as a possible alternative shall be considered in the planning of any
                large steam generation facility. The feasibility of cogeneration with HTW or HTW boilers or HTW-
                to-steam generators shall be considered. In determining the feasibility of cogeneration, the following
                factors shall be considered:

                -   Energy demand and cost, peak load, average load, seasonal variations, and utility rate structures.
                -   Regulatory concerns: Public Utility Regulatory Policies Act (PURPA), relevant environmental
                   regulations, and current local regulations.

            •   Cogeneration plants shall be sized to accommodate existing loads.

15.5.16.2    STEAM AND HIGH-TEMPERATURE WATER GENERATION
            All boilers shall comply with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

            •   In  determining whether to select a steam or an HTW system, the following factors shall be
                considered:

                -   Whether the system will be operated intermittently or continuously
                -   Whether fast response to significant load variation is important
                -   Pumping costs
                -   Length, size, and configuration of required piping
                •   The possibility of using HTW to generate the steam at its point of use, in a facility where only
                   a few processes require steam.

            *   Steam boilers shall be designed to provide dry, saturated steam unless the economics of electricity
                generation, meeting specific process requirements, or accommodating extensive distribution systems
                necessitates use of superheated steam.  If required for process, the use of high-pressure satellite
                boilers located close to the process shall be considered in lieu of distribution of high-pressure steam.

            •   An HTW system is a system that generates heating or process water with a temperature above 300 °F.
                HTW boilers shall be of the controlled forced-circulation type, specifically designed for high-
                temperature water service. Because of costs associated with high-pressure pipe, valves, and fittings,
                HTW systems should  not be designed for higher temperatures and pressures than are absolutely
                necessary.
                                                15-21

-------
February 1998
Architecture, Engineering,
 and Planning Guidelines
                                                                    Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
             *   IB a gas-pressurized HTW system, an inert gas, such as nitrogen, shall be used and the pressurizing
                tank shall be installed vertically to reduce the area of contact between gas and water, thus reducing
                the absorption of gas into the liquid. Gas-pressurized systems should be maintained at a pressure
                that is well above the pressure at which the HTW will flash to steam.  Pump pressurization is
                generally restricted to small process heating systems. In larger HTW systems, pump pressurization
                can be combined with gas pressurization.

15.5.16.3     CIRCULATION PUMPS
             In selecting and installing circulation pumps, energy efficiency shall be emphasized.  Consideration
             shall be given to the use of variable-speed circulation pumps. In steam-pressurized systems, circulating
             pumps shall be located in the supply lines to maintain pressure above the flashpoint of the hottest water
             in the distribution system. A inixing connection that allows some of the coil return water to pass into
             the supply line at the pump suction shall be provided to safeguard against flashing or cavitation at the
             pump(s). In a gas-pressurized HTW system, the circulating pumps may be installed in either the supply
             lines or the return lines.

15.5.16.4     FUEL STORAGE AND HANDLING SYSTEMS
             Control, containment, and treatment of rainwater runoff from coal storage yards shall comply with
             effluent guidelines and standards for steam-electric power-generating point sources (40 CFR Part 423).
             The relative economy of a central natural gas-fired plant compared with a  gas distribution system
             serving the individual requirements of each building shall be considered. The long-range availability
             of the gas supply and the possible need for a secondary fuel shall be established. The economics of
             intemiptible versus uninterruptible gas service relative to availability of secondary fuel shall be
             considered.

             *   Fully automatic mechanical-firing equipment and mechanical draft equipment shall be provided.
                Mechanical-firing equipment capable of developing 100 percent to 125 percent of the boiler capacity
                shall be specified.

             •   Ash-handling systems shall comply with Federal Construction Council Technical Report No.  51,
                Chapter HI, Section 3.1.  Land availability  for storage or disposal, water availability, nearness to
                residential areas, the possibility of selling the ash as a means of disposal, and environmental
                regulations shall be considered.  Collection and treatment of ash-carrying liquid effluents shall
                comply with 40  CFR Part 423.

             •   Stationary internal combustion engines,  such as gasoline- or diesel-powered generators or fire
                pumps, shall conform to the requirements of NFPA 37.

             •   The use of underground tanks shall be avoided.

15.5.16.5     BOILER WATER TREATMENT
             Boiler water treatment shall be provided to prevent deposits on or corrosion of internal boiler surfaces
             and to prevent the carryover of boiler water solids into the steam. A boiler water treatment specialist
             shall be consulted to determine appropriate treatment measures. Water quality measures for the steam
             plant and for other site process water users should be coordinated.  The design of the plant shall provide
             for daily sampling  to determine internal water conditions.  Provisions shall be made for introducing
             treatment chemicals into the feed water.  The  plant shall contain adequate space and equipment for
             storing, handling, and mixing chemicals. Continuous versus intermittent blowdown operations shall
             be considered to determine which system will keep the concentration of total solids within acceptable
             limits. For continuous blowdown operations, the economics of installing a heat recovery system shall
             be considered.
                                                 15-22

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines                                                                  February 1998
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements


            •  A minimum of two boiler feed pumps, each sized to handle the peak load, shall be provided to allow
               one pump to be oiu of service without affecting facility operations. Pumps shall be equipped with
               automatic controls that regulate feed water flow to maintain the required water level and with a relief
               valve. Relief valves shall be preset to lift at a lower pressure than the boiler safety valve setting plus
               static and friction heads.

15.5.16.6    BOILER ROOM CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION
            Boiler plant instrumentation and control panels shall include devices for monitoring the combustion
            process and consoles in equipment in which such devices are mounted. Boiler room controls and
            instrumentation shall comply with the appropriate standard from among NFPA 8501, NFPA 8502,
            NFPA 8503, NFPA 8504, NFPA 8505, and NFPA 8506.

15.5.16.7    PLANT INSULATION
            All hot surfaces within 7 feet of the plant floor, or on any catwalk, shall be insulated to prevent surface
            temperatures above 60°C (where contact would be unintentional and unlikely) and above 49°C (where
            contact is likely or necessary for equipment operation). Insulation shall be in accordance with the
            manufacturer's recommendations and the ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals.

15.5.16.8    STEAM AND HIGH-TEMPERATURE WATER DISTRIBUTION
            Steam and HTW distributions systems shall be sized to accommodate, without extensive modification,
            any future expansion anticipated in the project criteria.

            •  When aboveground steam or HTW distribution systems are to be constructed, pipe shall be installed
               on concrete pedestals,  on concrete/steel  stanchions, or on poles.   Where piping crosses over
               roadways, a minimum of 14 feet of clearance shall be provided.

            •  Provisions shall be made for expansion and contraction in the piping system. Expansion loops shall
               be provided where space allows. Where space does not allow expansion loops, expansion joints may
               be used. Piping shall comply with ASME B31.1

            •  Unless economics dictates otherwise, steam shall be supplied to the distribution system at the lowest
               pressure  that  will adequately serve the  connected load.   The economics of higher pressure
               distribution shall be considered. Processes  requiring higher pressures shall be serviced, where
               practical, by a separate section of the distribution system to avoid operating the entire system at
               higher pressures than necessary.

            •  Warm-up bypass valves shall be provided at all shutoff valves in steam distribution lines. Steam
               velocities shall be selected for the type of service being considered but shall not exceed 10,000 fpm.

            •  Steam and condensate pipe shall, where possible, be graded at a minimum of 1 inch in 40 feet in the
               direction of flow. Drip stations and steam traps shall be provided at all low points in steam lines.

            •  To ensure tightness of the steam system, all joints to valves and fittings that are larger than 1.25
               inches shall be welded, except in the boiler house, where flanges shall be used to facilitate
               maintenance of equipment, connections, and valves.

            •  HTW piping shall be sized for an average velocity of 5 feet per second, a maximum velocity of 10
               feet per second, and a minimum velocity of 2 feet per  second. To ensure tightness of the HTW
               system, all joints to valves and fittings that are larger than 1.25 inches shall be welded, except in the
               boiler house, where flanges shall be used to facilitate maintenance of equipment, connections, and
               valves.
                                               15-23

-------
                                                                              Architecture/Engineering,
February 1998	and Planning Guidelines
                                                                   Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements


             •  Unlike steam piping, HTW piping way follow the natural terrain; however, proper provisions shall
               be made for draining and venting the piping.

15.5.16.9     PIPING INSULATION
             Insulation containing asbestos is prohibited.  The possibility that water infiltration will cause physical
             damage to, or loss of thermal characteristics of, underground pipe insulation shall be considered in the
             selection of insulation.  All insulation installed aboveground, in tunnels, and in manholes shall be
             provided with either a metal jacket, either factory or field installed, or a hard cement finish.


15.6    Load Calculations

15.6.1    GENERAL
         Load calculations shall be based on data and procedures outlined in the ASHRAE handbooks and shall be
         in accordance with the conditions specified in this Manual.

15.6.2    SUBMISSION
         A complete set of calculations shall be submitted showing building heating and cooling loads and equipment
         capacity requirements.

15.6.3    DESIGN
         Load calculations may be performed manually or by a nationally recognized computer-based load program.
         Specialty programs that are not recognized must be approved by the contracting officer prior to use.

15.6.4    AIR VOLUME/EXCHANGE
         For laboratory spaces, the specific volume of air required to achieve a predetermined air exchange rate shall
         be dictated by the type of work being performed in the laboratory.

15.6.5    AUXILIARY AIR
         If a separate auxiliary air system is provided, the auxiliary air must be heated and cooled to within the room
         dry bulb temperature. Auxiliary air shall not exceed 70 percent of total fume hood exhaust requirements.


15.7    Laboratory Fume Hoods
         Certification of EPA laboratory  fume hoods, as constructed, manufactured, installed, and used, shall
         conform to current EPA requirements.  The design professional, in consultation with the users of the facility,
         shall be responsible for selecting fume hood types and sizes that are appropriate to the hoods* intended use.
         The requirements of this subsection and of Chapters, paragraph 12, of the SofetyMonual shall be followed.
         The requirements of the EPA fume hood standards, Quantitative Performance Test for Laboratory Fume
         Hoods, shall also be followed. In accordance with Procedures Manual for Certifying Laboratory Fume
         Hoods To Meet EPA Standard, fume hood face velocity must be provided at 100 linear feet per minute with
         a uniform face velocity profile of+10 percent of the average velocity with the sash fully open to provide
         protection from operations performed in the hood.

15.7.1    HOOD REQUIREMENTS
         Certification of EPA laboratory  fume hoods, as constructed, manufactured,  installed, and used, shall
         conform to current EPA requirements. Before EPA purchases any hood model, the laboratory fume hood
         manufacturer, at a test facility provided by the manufacturer, and at no cost to the Government, shall certify
         the proper performance of the fume hood in accordance with EPA's criteria.  In addition to complying with
         EPA's fume hood criteria, each hood shall have an ASHRAE  110 standard performance rating,  as
         manufactured,  of 4.0 AM O.OS.  After the new hoods are installed, EPA requires  the manufacturer to
         evaluate the installation and performance of the hoods prior to acceptance and use by EPA.


                                                15-24

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines                                                                   February 1998
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements


         SHEMD is responsible for approving the certification of fame hoods.  SHEMD should document the
         approval of all newly installed fume hoods for AEREB. A list of approved or certified hoods is available
         from SHEMD.

         Materials used in the construction of fume hoods and of exhaust blowers shall meet corrosion-resistance
         standards for the chemicals used and generated in the hood, as described in the hood uses; blowers should
         be rated or otherwise approved for use; and plumbing fixtures and electrical outlets should meet existing
         codes.  EPA specifications and testing procedures for checking the performance of fume hoods are available
         from AEREB and SHEMD.

         All hoods specified in the design criteria shall have a rating of 04A AM 0.04, in accordance with the
         ASHRAE 110-93 fume hood test procedure, EPA Fume Hood Procurement Manual, and the EPA fume
         hood standard. Quantitative Performance Test for Laboratory Fume Hoods. Exhaust from fume hoods and
         general laboratory exhausts shall be routed to the exterior of the building at the highest part and position
         of the exhaust stacks to prevent entrainment of fumes at fresh-air intake points. Exhaust discharge stacks
         shall be at least 7 feet above the adjacent roofline and shall be so located with respect to openings and air
         intakes of the laboratory or adjacent buildings as to avoid reentry of the exhaust discharge. The operational
         exhaust discharge shall have an exhaust velocity of at least 3,000 fpm (at least 4,000 fpm is recommended)
         and  shall conform to ANSI Z9.S.  Stacks shall be designed in accordance with ASHRAE and ACGIH
         industrial ventilation guidelines. All fume hoods shall be installed under the manufacturer's supervision.
         In the case of VAV fume hoods, the hoods shall be installed under the supervision of the hood manufacturer
         and the room control systems manufacturer.  All hoods shall be certified per EPA's certification manual
         prior to turnover.

         *  Ceiling and wall supply diffusers for the distribution of supply air in the laboratory shall be designed for
            a maximum air velocity of 25 fpm at 6 feet above the finished floor at the face of the hood.

         *  Face Velocities:  Although the Safety Manual allows for an 80  fpm airflow, the Safety, Health and
            Environmental  Management Program (SHEMP) contends that EPA  is unable to demonstrate
            uninterrupted "ideal conditions" (e.g., pedestrian traffic). Therefore, EPA must design for realistic
            scenarios and demonstrate adequate safety at an airflow of 100 fpm (plus or minus 10 percent at any
            given measurement).

15.7.2    FUME HOOD EXHAUST
         The  design for laboratory fume hood exhaust shall be in accordance with the design criteria of NFPA 45.
         Provisions shall be made in the design of the laboratory supply air system for 25 percent future expansion
         of fume hoods beyond what is presently required to meet program design needs. Fume hoods, biological
         safety cabinets (BSCs), and general laboratory exhaust maybe combined in a commonly manifolded exhaust
         duct system for blocks of hoods; however, such combined  systems require the prior approval of EPA
         Headquarters Health and Safety Approving Officers. Provisions should be made for separate, dedicated duct
         and exhaust systems for special fume hood exhausts, including, but not limited to, perchloric acid hoods,
         high-energy radioisotope hoods, and exhausted biological safety cabinets, that cannot be combined in a
         commonly manifolded system.

15.7.2.1     MANIFOLDING OF FUME HOODS
            In order for manifolded fume hoods to be safe, sufficient dilution of air within the ductwork must be
            maintained to avoid significant chemical  reactions, which may result in  fire, corrosion, deposition,
            and/or increased toxicity.  Low airflows afforded by VAV may increase the potential for significant
            reaction. Special purpose hoods (for example, but not limited to, radioisotope hoods, glove boxes,
            biocabinets) should not be connected with general chemistry hoods. Hoods used for dissimilar purposes
            or hoods that are far apart from each other should not be manifolded. The costs and balancing of
            logistics for all affected hoods in the system exhaust  and the supply system with each change in the
                                                15-25

-------
                                                                                Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998                                                                    and Planning Guidelines
                                                                     Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements


             system may outweigh the advantages of manifolding hoods. (See subsection 15.7.12 below.) Perchloric
             acid hood exhaust ducts shall not be manifolded and shall have separate exhaust ducts.

15.7.3    CONSTANT VOLUME BYPASS-TYPE FUME HOOD
          The laboratory fume hood is often an integral pan of the building exhaust  system. The volume of air
          exhausted should be constant, achieved by an airflow bypass above the sash through which room air can pass
          as the sash is lowered.  A horizontal bottom and a vertical side airfoil must be specified and used on all
          hoods, and the face edges must be shaped to minimize entering air turbulence. Vertical foils on the sides
          also result in a slight airflow improvement by minimizing the eddies caused as air enters the hood. The
          work surface should be recessed three-eighths of an inch or more so that spills can be effectively contained.
          The front raised edge should extend just past the airfoil but not far enough to be used as a working surface
          near the face opening.

          The bypass sizing and design must be such that the following conditions are met:

          •   The total airflow volume is essentially the same at all sash positions. As the sash is lowered, the face
             velocity increases to a rate that shall not exceed three times the design velocity for a fully open sash
             position.

          •   The bypass must provide a sight-tight barrier between the hood work space and the room when the sash
             is lowered.

          •   The bypass opening is dependent only on the operation of the sash. Selected sash configurations are
             listed and described below:

             •  The vertical-rising fume hood sash shall be full-view type providing a clear and unobstructed side-to-
                side view of the fume hood interior and the service fitting connections. The sash shall be Vi-inch
                laminated safety glass.  The sash system shall utilize a single-weight pulley cable counterbalance
                system pennitungone-fingeroperationalongthe length of the sash pull. The counterbalance system
                will hold  the sash at any position without creep and  will prevent sash drop in the event of
                malfunction or failure of a cable.

             -  The combination vertical-rising and horizontal-sliding fume hood sash shall be similar in design to
                the vertical-rising sash configuration but with multiple horizontal sliding sashes of'/-inch laminated
                safety glass panels on multiple tracks within the vertical  rising sash frame.

          •   The following hood models are approved for use in EPA facilities:

             -  Safeaire 54L597 6-foot bench hood
             -  Safeaire S54S710 5-foot walk-in hood
             -  Pace-aire 54L51200 3-foot bench hood.

          •   The hoods listed above are constant-volume bypass hoods but can be field-converted to an auxiliary
             air-type hood (described below).  While current EPA policy discourages the use of auxiliary air-type
             hoods in new construction, their use may be justified under special circumstances, such as in renovations
             where the existing ventilation  system is inadequate and where expansion of system capacity may be
             mechanically unfeasible or too costly. Auxiliary air hoods are hoods that are provided with a source of
             air in addition to that taken from the room. It is essential that all air for these hoods be supplied from
             outside the hood face. Any model that introduces air behind the sash must not be used, because this
             arrangement reduces the control velocity at the face and could actually pressurize the work chamber if
             the exhaust flow is  reduced (e.g., by foreign  matter in fan, a broken belt,  or normal wear and
             maintenance). Features described for the  constant-volume bypass-type hood, including the bypass
             arrangement,  are  applicable to  the auxiliary air hood. Auxiliary air supplies must be turned off to test

                                                 15-26

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines                                                                  February 1998
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements


            the face velocity of the hood; a readily accessible means of turning off auxiliary air electrical power will
            facilitate such testing.

15.7.4    VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME (VAV) HOODS
       •  Certification of EPA laboratory fume hoods, as constructed, manufactured, installed, and used, shall
         conform to current EPA requirements.  The variable flow controls for the hood exhaust and those for the
         laboratory exhaust and supply system must be manufactured by the same  company.  The control
         manufacturer, in conjunction with the hood manufacturer, shall supervise the installation and certify that
         the hood and laboratory system operation is as designed. The design shall follow EPA's Standard Chemical
         Laboratory Design Recommendations for VAV Fume Hoods (contact AEREB for these design criteria).
         Response times for reestablishing the proper face velocity after a maximum change in sash position shall
         not exceed 0.8 seconds.  The minimum airflow through a VAV hood must meet or exceed 250 cfin, with
         four room air changes per hour for an unoccupied laboratory, or must be calculated to limit the accumulation
         of volatile vapors  within the fume hood to less than 25 percent of their lower flammable limit. The
         minimum airflow during occupied hours will be capable of eight room air changes per hour in the
         laboratory. As an alternative to relying on minimum airflows for preventing accumulation of vapors, fume
         hoods, whose interior may be classified as described in NEC Article 500, and appropriate electric devices
         and equipment within the fume hood enclosure may be used. However, the minimum flows still must be
         capable of maintaining the laboratories at a negative air pressure relative to adjacent corridors and
         nonlaboratory spaces! Refer to NFPA 45 for guidance on electrical classification of fume hood enclosures.

15.7.5    RADIOISOTOPE HOODS
         Radioisotope hoods shall be similar to the fume hood types described above, except that the interior liner
         material shall have panels at the sides, back, top, and plenum enclosure of 18-gauge Type 302 stainless steel
         and structural members, reinforcements, and brackets of 16-gauge Type 302 stainless steel. The work
         surface should be 14-gauge Type 302 stainless steel. Joints should be fully sealed by welding or fine-line
         solder.  The base structure should have a heavy angle frame reinforced to support 1 ton of lead brick
         shielding. The work surface shall be reinforced from the underside with heavy steel grating to provide the
         necessary strength for holding lead brick radiation-protection and/or shall be capable of supporting at least
         200 pounds  per square  foot.  To minimize radioactive emissions into the  atmosphere,  high-efficiency
         paniculate aerosol (HEP A) filters should be considered as a best available control technology for radioactive
         isotope hoods. Guidance on the limitations, selection, and design of radioactive air-cleaning devices can
         be found in  the Nuclear Air  Cleaning Handbook, Energy Research and Development Administration
         (ERDA) 76-21, and in Nuclear Power Plant Air Cleaning Units and Components, ANSI/ASME N509.

15.7.6    PERCHLORIC ACID FUME HOODS
         In addition to the features described  for fume hoods, perchloric acid hoods must use materials that are
         nonreactive,  acid resistant, and relatively impervious. Type 316 stainless steel with welded joints should
         be specified, although certain other materials may be acceptable.  Corners shall be rounded to facilitate
         cleaning. Work surfaces shall be watertight with an integral trough at the rear for collection of wash-down
         water.

         *  Perchloric acid fume hoods shall be constant-volume bypass or auxiliary air type with an average face
            velocity of 100 fpm.

         •  A wash-down system must be provided that has spray nozzles to adequately wash the entire assembly
            including the blower, all ductwork,  and the interior of the hood, with an easily accessible strainer to
            filter particulates in  the water supply that might  clog the nozzles. The wash-down system shall be
            activated immediately after the hood has been used.

         •  Ductwork shall be installed with a minimal amount of horizontal runs and no sharp turns; ductwork also
            must not  be shared with any other hood.
                                                15-27

-------
                                                                              Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998                                                                   and Planning Guidelines
                                                                   Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements


         •   Exhaust fans most be of an acid-resistant, nonsparkiog (AMCA Standard Type A) construction.
             Lubrication shall be with a fluorocarbon grease only. Gaskets shall be of a tetrafluoroethylene polymer.

         •   Perchloric acid must never be used in hoods not specifically designed for its use.  Organic materials,
             strong dehydrating or desiccating agents, and oxidizing or reducing materials must not be used in a hood
             used for perchloric acid.

15.7.7    SPECIAL PURPOSE HOODS
         Special purpose hoods are defined as any hood that does not conform to the specific types described above
         in this subsection. Special hoods may be used for operations for which other types are not suitable (e.g., as
         enclosures for analytical balances, gas vents from atomic absorption, or gas chromatography units). Other
         applications might present opportunities for achieving contamination control with less bench space or less
         exhaust volume (e.g., using the hoods as special mixing stations, sinks, evaporation racks, heat sources, and
         ventilated worktables). Special purpose exhaust hoods shall be designed in accordance with ANSI A9.2 and
         NFPA 45.  Appropriate applications for specific types of special purpose hoods are described below.

         •   Canopy Exhaust (Capture) Hoods:  These shall be provided as required for the removal of heat from
             specific laboratory apparatus, such as furnaces, ovens, and sterilizers, or as otherwise called for in the
             laboratory program.

         •   Flexible Spot Exhausts (Snorkels): These shall be required to remove chemical fumes or heat from
             specific laboratory instrumentation, such as high-performance liquid chromatography (HPLC), gas
             chromatography/mass spectrometry (GC/MS), and atomic absorption (AA) units. Snorkels require an
             estimated exhaust rate of 100 to 200 cfm or a rate appropriate to the intended use.

         *   Gas Cabinets:  Special exhaust cabinets will be required to bouse individual or pairs oftoxic/pyrophoric
             gas cylinders.  Leak detectors and low-exhaust flow alarms, as well as a gas purge system, shall be
             considered to provide for safe exchange of cylinders. Exhaust for these cabinets is estimated at 50 to 75
             cfm each.
                          i
15.7.8    HORIZONTAL SASHES
         Horizontal sashes, as well as other nonstandard features (larger-than-usual opening in distillation hoods,
         vented sinks, hoods larger than 6 feet), may be used under the following conditions. (It should be noted that
         horizontal sashes may put additional demands on VAV performance.)

         *   A conventional hood does not meet the specific requirements of the user (this should be reflected in the
             "standard operating procedures").

         *   The hood is used as intended by the manufacturer (i.e., the hood is not altered after installation).

         •   The hcKxi passes the prepurchase performance test in accordance with the Quantitative Performance Test
            for Laboratory Fume Hoods.

15.7.9    OTHER VENTILATED ENCLOSURES
         Ventilated enclosures are often required by a laboratory to help dissipate  heat and ensure containment of
         chemical or biological airborne contaminants produced during certain work. The various types of ventilated
         enclosures include laminar flow hoods, biological safety cabinets, glove boxes for known toxic or hazardous
         materials, canopy hoods, and slot hoods for known nonhazardous materials. These types of enclosures have
         special design requirements for their intended uses.  Ventilated devices used to control hazardous materials
         must be individually approved by SHEMD and AEREB.  Biological safety cabinets and glove boxes shall
         comply with NSF 49. Ventilating devices used for removal of heat or nuisance odors must comply with the
         parameters set forth in Industrial Ventilation, published by the ACGffl.
                                                15-28

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines	\	February 1998
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements


15.7.10  FACE VELOCITIES
         The use of a ventilated enclosure to contain and exhaust a contaminant is predicated on the ability to provide
         an airflow that is sufficient to overcome operator or other exterior influences but is not excessive. Average
         control velocities (velocity measured at the face of installed hood) required for fume hoods located in
         accordance with the room data sheets contained in Appendix C must be 100 fpm at the operating sash
         height. Under no circumstances can the control velocity be less than 80 fpm at any sash height.  The sash
         shall be equipped with a control device to maintain it at the operating height (e.g., releasable sash stops);
         the hood shall be equipped with a device to monitor the face velocity and shall provide a visible and audible
         alarm when the face velocity is less than 100 fpm.

15.7.11  ANNUAL CERTIFICATION
         The performance of fume hoods shall be certified annually and after any significant maintenance has been
         performed on the exhaust system or room air supply system.  The performance certification shall be
         performed in accordance with EPA guidelines and the procedures prescribed by SEFA

         All fume hoods purchased by EPA shall conform to the following EPA regulations:

         •  The fume hood shall be in compliance with the EPA fume hood specifications for constant-volume
            bypass-type hoods, radioactive isotope hoods, VAV-type hoods, and percholoric acid hoods.

         *  The fume hood shall pass the prepurchase tests outlined in ASHRAE110 with a performance rating of
            8.0 AM 0.05.

         •  After installation, fume hoods shall meet the EPA certification criteria outlined in ASHRAE  110. The
            test shall be performed by the manufacturer, in accordance with  SHEMD's annual certification
            guidelines,  in the presence of an EPA representative. The recommended airflow rates will provide the
            desired worker protection for any operation that should be performed with this type of equipment.  Under
            airflows lower than those proposed, the protection factors desired for normal conditions, such as operator
            movement, are uncertain. Higher flows than those proposed are not required for a good laboratory
            arrangement and will not improve hood performance. If the laboratory arrangement is unsatisfactory,
            the problem should be solved by improving the  arrangement rather than by increasing hood face
            velocity. Increased turbulence within the hood and around the operator results when higher velocities
            are used.

15.7.12  EXHAUST SYSTEM
         Individual exhaust systems should be provided for each fume hood when the mixing of effluents from the
         individual hoods is inadvisable or when the effluent must be filtered, scrubbed, washed down, or otherwise
         treated before discharge.  Manifolding of fume hood exhausts is allowed if a single discharge point is
         advantageous and the air supply suitably controls comfort conditions while maintaining proper laboratory
         pressure conditions.  Pressure in laboratories shall be maintained as negative with respect to adjacent areas.
         Manifolded exhaust systems should incorporate staged multiple constant volume fans with control dampers
         to maintain a constant static pressure in the manifold in order to ensure quick response to changing hood
         conditions.  Variable-speed fans are permitted if they are advantageous. Manifolding of fume hoods shall
         meet the requirements of NFPA 45. Blowers should be rated and should be installed at the end of each duct
         system so that all ducts within the occupied areas of a building are maintained under negative  pressure.
         Refer to subsection 15.7.2.1  above.  Hood exhaust should be  designed  in accordance  with the
         recommendations in Industrial Ventilation, published by ACGIH; ANSIZ9.5, American National Standard
         for Laboratory Ventilation; and NFPA 45. Fume hood exhaust stacks should extend a minimum of 10 feet
         above the adjacent roof level. Additional height may be required to properly disperse the exhaust. Exhaust
         stacks should provide vertical discharge of at least 3,000 fpm without caps or heads.  Air intakes for the
         facility's HVAC system shall be located as far as possible from the exhaust stack discharges.
                                                15-29

-------
                                                                             Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998       	                                                    and Planning Guidelines
                                                                  Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements


15.7.13   NOISE
         The noise exposure at the working position in front of the hood shall not exceed 70 dBa with the system
         operating. Each new hood installation shall be certified as meeting this requirement before initial use and
         shall be recertified annually thereafter. Total room performance with respect to noise levels must not exceed
         the limits specified in 29 CFR §1910.95.

15.7.14   EFFLUENT CLEANING
         When air-cleaning devices are required, the type is determined by the contaminant and the degree of
         cleaning necessary.  The type of air cleaner required  can vary from a simple  scrubber and filters to
         incinerators or specially designed units. A typical cleaning system consists of a  prefilter, followed by a
         solvent-resistant HEP A filter, followed by an activated-charcoal filter.  Some analytical activities may
         require a different cleaning system, and all cleaning systems must be approved by AEREB and SHEMD.
         HEP A filters offer considerable resistance to airflow, especially when airflow is loaded with contaminants.
         This resistance must be considered in designing a system with HEPA filters. To maintain building air
         balance, laboratories shall be kept under negative pressure relative to surrounding areas and proper hood
         control shall be maintained. It is recommended that a compensating damper be installed with aHEPAfilter
         so that the airflow will remain constant over the life of the filter. It is good practice to install a roughing
         filter ahead of a HEPA filter to prolong the life of the HEPA filter. In some situations, bag-in/bag-out fitter
         housings should be used to minimize the spread of contaminants when the HEPA or  roughing filter is
         changed. The pressure drop across HEPA and roughing filters should be monitored, and filters changed
         when necessary.  The filter plenum should be located on the inlet side of the fan to allow the fan to be
         serviced from the clean side of a filter. It is good practice to allow a straight run of duct before the ran in
         order to obtain good fan performance as well as to allow for future installation of other air-cleaning
         equipment.


15.8    Other Equipment

15.8.1    GLOVE BOXES
         Glove boxes will be Government-furnished equipment These ventilated enclosures are often required by
         laboratory personnel to ensure containment of chemical and biological airborne contaminants produced
         during the employee's work in the box and to prevent escape of those contaminants into the room. Such
         enclosures permit manual manipulations within the box by means of armholes provided with impervious
         gloves, which are sealed to the box at the armholes.  These types of enclosures have  special  design
         requirements that are related to their intended use, and they must be individually approved by SHEMD and
         AEREB.

15.8.2    BIOLOGICAL SAFETY CABINETS
         Laminar-flow biological safety cabinets shall have met minimum standards for cabinet classifications, as
         stated in NSF pamphlet 49, for personnel, environmental, and product safety and shall be identified by a
         distinctive NSF seal.  Field recertification, performed by a competent technician and done according to the
         procedures outlined  in NSF standard 49, will be required once the cabinet(s) is installed.  Cabinet
         classification shall be determined during laboratory programming, in consultation with the users of the
         facility. These types of cabinets have special design requirements depending on their intended use (such
         as protecting personnel from harmful agents inside the cabinet; protecting the work product, experiment,
         or procedure from contaminants outside the cabinet; or protecting the laboratory environment from
         contaminants inside the cabinet) and must be individually approved by SHEMD and AEREB.

15.8.3    FLAMMABLE LIQUID STORAGE CABINETS,
         Cabinets for the storage of Class I, Class n, and Class III A liquids shall be provided in accordance with the
         design, construction, and storage capacity requirements stated in NFPA 30, Chapter 4. Venting of storage
         cabinets is not required for fire protection purposes, but venting may be required to comply with local codes
         or authorities having jurisdiction.

                                               15-30

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines	February 1998
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements


          •   If cabinet venting is required, the cabinet shall be vented to the outside as recommended by the unit
             manufacturer and in a manner that will not compromise the specified performance of the cabinet  The
             cabinet shall be vented from the bottom with makeup air supplied at the top. Mechanical exhaust
             ventilation should be provided at a rate of SO cfin and should comply with NFPA 91, standard for
             Exhaust Systems for Air Conveying of Materials. Manifolding the vents of multiple storage cabinets
             is not recommended.

          •   Nonvented cabinets shall be sealed with the bungs supplied with the cabinet or with bungs specified by
             the manufacturer of the cabinet

15.8.4    LABORATORY SERVICE FITTINGS
          Laboratory service fittings for each laboratory space are specified in the room data sheets and shall be
          compatible with their intended use. All service valves, fittings, and accessories shall be of cast brass with
          a minimum copper content of 85 percent except for items that are to be brass-forged  or bar stock.  All
          service valves, fittings, and accessories shall be especially designed for laboratory use. All laboratory service
          fittings shall have an acid-resisting and solvent-resisting clear plastic coating applied over a clean, polished,
          chrome-plated surface.  Service fittings at fume hoods shall have an acid-resistant and solvent-resistant
          plastic coating applied over a fine sandblasted surface, properly cleaned.


15.9     Air Filtration and Exhaust Systems

15.9.1    DRY FILTRATION
          Air-cleaning equipment for ductwork and for equipment installation shall be easily removable, serviceable,
          and maintainable.  Air-cleaning equipment shall have face velocities as recommended by the filter
          manufacturer in order to achieve the specified efficiency at the lowest possible pressure drop. Filters shall
          be constructed of noncombustible materials that meet the requirements of UL 900, Class I.  Air filters shall
          be located on the suction side of fans and coils and in other special locations as required for air treatment.
          Air-filter pressure drop gauges of the diaphragm-actuated dial type (preferred) or the inclined manometer
          type shall be located on all filter assemblies except small fen coils and fan-powered VAV terminal units.
          The ASHRAE dust spot method shall be used in specifying the efficiencies required for medium-efficiency
          filters. Filters shall be specified, and installed for use, as prefilters, medium-efficiency filters, or high-
          efficiency filters.  These filters shall comply with ARI 850.  Prefilters are normally provided for high-
          efficiency filters, being either prefilters or medium-efficiency filters depending on the upstream air particle
          size distribution.

15.9.2    ABSOLUTE FILTRATION
          Absolute filtration, where required in fume hood exhaust systems, will have an efficiency of 99.97 percent,
          as determined by the dioctyl phthalate (DOP) aerosol test for absolute filters, and shall satisfy ASHRAE
          standard 52-76. Filter housing shall be of bag-in/gas-out design.

15.9.2.1     TEST ACCESS
            The design location shall facilitate in-place testing of HEP A filters, with particular attention given to
            plenum hardware that allows the HEP A filter bank to be tested without requiring the testing personnel
            to enter the plenum. Utility services shall be extended to the plenum location (e.g., electrical receptacles
            and compressed air) to facilitate testing work. In-place testing design requirements shall meet all the
            recommendations of UL 586 and ASME N510.  HEPA filtration systems shall be designed with
            prefilters installed upstream of HEPA filters to extend the HEPA filter's life.  The installation of
            prefilters may be omitted if an analysis of filtration requirements and consideration of the filter assembly
            justify omission.
                                                15-31

-------
                                                                      Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998	                                     and Planning Guidelines
                                                            Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements


15.9.2.2     FIRE PROTECTION OF HEPA FILTER ASSEMBLIES
                                           15-32

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines	;	.	February 1998
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements


            In providing fire protection for the HEP A filters, the design shall sufficiently separate prefilters or fire
            screens equipped with water spray from the HEP A filters in order to restrict impingement of moisture
            on the HEP A filters.  Under conditions of limited separation, moisture eliminators or other means of
            reducing entrained moisture shall be provided. Moisture eliminators may be omitted where system
            design provides sufficient filter redundancy to ensure continued effluent filtration in the event of fire
            within any portion of the system. The HEP A filter fire protection system shall be activated in a manner
            consistent with the fire protection system in the room or building in which the filters are located.

15.9.3    AIR-CLEANING DEVICES FOR SPECIAL APPLICATIONS
         Filters include dry-type dust collectors, wet collectors, centrifugal collectors, absorbers,  oxidizers, and
         chemical treatment filters, which are used primarily in industrial and process-type applications associated
         with air or gases that have heavy dust loadings in exhaust systems or stack gas effluents.  Filters shall be
         designed according to the requirements given in the project criteria, the ASHRAE Handbook ofHVAC
         Systems and Equipment and ACGHVs Industrial Ventilation.

15.9.4    OPERATION
         All building systems shall be designed for continuous operation, unless otherwise specified in the project
         criteria.

15.9.5    MAINTENANCE ACCESS
         The air supply and exhaust plenums shall be designed so that such elements as motors, bearings, control
         valves, and steam traps are easily accessible for maintenance.

15.9.6    LOCATION OF AIR INTAKE
         The outside air intake(s) shall be located to provide the cleanest possible source of fresh air for the building
         and shall be so placed, relative to the building's exhausts, vent stacks, etc., as to prevent entrainment of
         contaminated air from outside sources, including, but not limited to, fume hood exhaust, vehicle exhaust,
         exhaust from adjacent structures, and sources of potential microbial  contamination, such as vegetation,
         organic matter, and bird and animal droppings.

15.9.7    VENTILATION RATES
         Ventilation devices, in general, shall be those recommended in ASHRAE standard 62-1989 and Section 1
         of Indoor Air Quality Requirements: Design Process.  At a minimum, Table 15.9.7, Special Ventilation
         Rates, shall be taken into account in the design of the system.

       Table 15.9.7 Special Ventilation Rates

                  Area                                 Ventilation Requirements
       Laboratories                A minimum of 8 air changes per hour, single-pass air, per
                                  ASHRAE 62-1989 and this Manual, subsection 15.5.11.
       Offices and administrative    As required for human comfort but with a minimum of 20 cfm of outside
       spaces                     air per occupant as stated in ASHRAE 62-1989.
       Chemical storage            Must meet  NFPA 30 or NFPA 45 requirements, depending on use.
                                  Minimum of 6 to 10 air changes per hour, single pass only.
       Smoking rooms             Air supply from smoking rooms shall not be recirculated.  Air should
                                  be exhausted to outside by separate ductwork and exhaust fan.
                                  Minimum of 60 cfm of outside air per person, per ASHRAE 62-1989.

15.9.8    ROOM AIR CHANGE RATES
         EPA experience generally shows that the existing policy, which calls for a minimum of eight air changes
         per hour, provides sufficient dilution to manage background levels of toxic substances and is acceptable in
         terms of chemical analysis  operations, odor control, comfort,  and provision of 20 cfm of outside air per

                                                15-33

-------
                                                                               , Architecture, Engineering,
February 199B	                                                   and Planning Guidelines
                                                                     Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements


         person. Air change rates may have to be greater to provide heat control or to provide adequate ventilation
         for exhausting  toxic or noxious materials.

15.9.9   PLUME STUDY (LABORATORY EXHAUST)
         A study of prevailing wind patterns shall be obtained for the proposed building site. The study shall be
         performed to ensure proper design height of the laboratory exhaust stack(s) and of fresh-air intake locations.
         Stack design shall consider all elements of the site, including ground-level landscaping, large variations in
         terrain, complex groupings of adjacent buildings, height and massing of building(s) (taking into account
         exterior details), complex emission geometry, orientation to prevailing winds, nature of discharge particles,
         and volume of discharge. On the basis of the results of this study, the design professional can recommend
         optimum building orientation on the site and incorporate structural details that minimize effects on the
         dispersion of exhaust emissions.


15.10  Plumbing

15.10.1  PIPING
         These criteria apply to plumbing systems (fixtures, supply, drain, waste and vent piping, service water
         heating system, safety devices, and appurtenances) inside the building and up to 5 feet beyond the building
         exterior wall. For new systems, domestic water shall be supplied by a separate service line and not by a
         combined fire protection and potable-water service or a combined process water and potable-water system
         within the building. Plumbing shall comply with the National Standard Plumbing Code (NSPC) (or another
         locally adopted, nationally recognized plumbing code), the ASHRAE handbooks, and ASHRAE standard
         90.

15.10.1.1     SUPPLY
             Type K copper tubing shall be used below grade. Type L copper tubing shall be used above grade.
             Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride (CPVC) and polybutylene (PB) plastic pipe and tubing may be used in
             lieu of copper tubing above grade where not subject to impact damage or otherwise prohibited by the
             project criteria.

             •   Fittings for Type K tubing shall be flared brass, solder-type bronze or wrought copper. Fittings for
                Type L tubing shall be solder-type bronze or wrought copper. Fittings for plastic pipe and tubing
                shall be solvent-cemented or shall use Schedule 80 threaded. No lead solder shall be used for copper
                pipe in potable-water systems.

             •   Stop valves shall be provided at each fixture. Accessible shutoff valves shall be provided at branches
                serving floors, fixture batteries for isolation, or at risers serving multiple floors. Shutoff valves also
                shall be provided to isolate equipment, valves, and appurtenances for ease of maintenance.

             •   Accessible drain valves shall be provided to drain the entire system. Manual air vents shall be
                provided at high points in the system.

             •   Provision for expansion shall be made where thermal expansion and contraction cause piping
                systems to move. This movement shall be accommodated by using the inherent flexibility of the
                piping system as laid out, by loops, by manufactured expansion joints, or by couplings.

             •   Accessible manufactured water hammer arresters shall be provided. Dielectric connections shall be
                made between ferrous and nonferrous metallic pipe.

             •   Where domestic water or fire protection service lines enter buildings, suitable flexibility shall be
               • provided to protect against differential settlement or seismic activity, in accordance with the NSPC
                and NFPA 13, respectively.

                                                 15-34

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines                                                       	February 1998
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements


15.10.1.2    DRAIN, WASTE, AND VENT LINES
            Underground lines that do not service the laboratory areas shall be service-weight cast-iron soil pipe
            hub-type (with gasket); hubless cast-iron soil pipe may be used in locations where piping is accessible.
            Aboveground (above grade) lines that are l'/4 inches in diameter and larger shall be either hubless or
            hub-type (with gasket) service-weight cast-iron pipe.  Lines that are 1V4 inches through 6 inches in
            diameter may be acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene (ABS) or PVC plastic pipe where allowed by the project
            criteria. Pipe and fittings shall be joined by solvent cement or elastomeric seals. Lines that are less than
            l'/j inches in diameter shall be either (1) Type L copper with solder-type bronze fittings or wrought
            copper fittings or (2) galvanized steel with galvanized malleable iron recessed threaded and coupled
            fittings.  Cast-iron soil pipe fittings and connections shall comply with Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute
            (CISPI) guidelines. Provisions for expansion shall be included, as above. Underground lines servicing
            the laboratory area shall be acid-resistant sewer pipe ANSI/ASTM D-2146-69; polyethylene plastic pipe
            and fittings, Schedule 40, ASTMD-1785; poly (vinyl chloride) (PVC) plastic pipe, Schedule 40,80, and
            120, ASTMD-2241; poly (vinyl chloride) (PVC) plastic pipe (SDR-PR), ASTM D-2683; or socket-type
            polyethylene fittings for outside diameter-controlled polyethylene pipe. They shall be welded together
            following ANSI/American Welding Society (AWS) D1.1, structural welding code; ASTM D-2241; and
            ASTM D-28S5. Solvent-cemented joints with poly (vinyl chloride) (PVC) pipe and finings shall be
            made.

15.10.1.3    TRAP SEAL PROTECTION
            A trap primer valve and floor/funnel drain with trap primer valve discharge connections shall be used
            where there is the possibility of loss of the seal in floor/funnel drain traps.

15.KU.4    STERILIZATION
            New supply systems or  existing supply systems that have undergone rehabilitation will require
            sterilization in accordance with American Water Works Association (AWWA) C652, AWWA C5186,
            or the local governing plumbing code.

15.10.1.5    MISCELLANEOUS
            Access panels shall be provided where maintenance or replacement of equipment, valves, or other
            devices is necessary. Escutcheons shall be provided at wall, ceiling, and floor penetrations of piping in
            occupied areas.

15.10.2   PLUMBING FIXTURES
         Fixtures and appurtenances suitable for use by handicapped persons shall comply with the Americans with
         Disabilities Act (ADA).  Fixtures shall contain no lead. Self-contained mechanically refrigerated coolers
         shall be provided wherever a need for drinking fountains exists. Ratings shall be based on ARI 1010.
         Electrical equipment shall be UL  listed.

15.10.3   BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
         Backflow preventers of the reduced-pressure-zone type shall be provided on any domestic water and fire
         protection lines  serving the building. All domestic water lines shall be provided with water hammer
         suppressors and vacuum breakers at high points of supply lines or at the fixture.

15.10.4   SAFETY DEVICES
         Tempering valves shall be of the fail-safe pressure-balance type.  Hot-water generation equipment shall be
         provided with ASME code-stamped tanks, when of sufficient capacity, water temperature, or hot input rate
         to be within  the jurisdiction  of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.  Approved pressure-relief
         devices—combination temperature-pr --
-------
                                                                              Architecture, Engineering,'
February 1998                                                                  and Planning Guidelines
                                                                   Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements


15.10.4.1    PRESSURE-REDUCING VALVES
            Pressure-reducing valves shall be provided where service pressure at fixtures or devices exceeds the
            normal operating range recommended by the manufacturer.  Wherever a pressure-reducing valve's
            failure may cause equipment damage or unsafe conditions, a pressure-relief valve shall be provided
            downstream of the reducing valve.

15.10.5   EMERGENCY EYEWASH UNITS
         Emergency eyewash units or combination eyewash/safety-shower units shall be provided in all work areas
         where, during routine operations or during foreseeable emergencies, the eyes of an individual may come into
         contact with a substance that can cause corrosion, severe irritation, or permanent tissue damage, or that is
         toxic by absorption.  Eyewash units shall be designed to flush both eyes (double-headed unit) simultaneously
         and to provide hands-free operation. Units shall be placed in a location away from potential sources of
         hazard (e.g., fume hoods) and near the exit door. The eyewash units chosen should provide protection of
         the nozzle area with pop-off covers, and other protective features to prevent contamination of the flushing
         system.  Design, operation, flow, water temperature, and similar characteristics shall meet the criteria in
         ANSI Z358.1-1990. Water for the units shall be supplied by the potable-water system. Eyewash units shall
         be in accessible locations that require no more than 10 seconds to reach; units should be no more than 50
         feet travel distance from the potential hazard. Their location in all laboratory spaces shall be standardized
         as much as possible. The location shall be well lighted and shall be clearly identified with a highly visible
         sign. Final location shall be approved by the EPA project officer during the design phase.

15.10.6   EMERGENCY SAFETY SHOWERS
         Emergency safety shower units shall  be provided in areas where, during routine operations or during
         foreseeable emergencies, areas of the body may come into contact with a substance that is corrosive, severely
         irritating to the skin, or toxic by skin absorption.  Each safety shower unit shall be equipped with an
         installed flexible hand-held drench hose with a spray head like that used in hand-held eyewash units; this
         shall be mounted on a rack. All piping for the emergency safety showers shall be above the ceiling except
         for the shower head and the pull bar connection. Design, operation, flow rates, and similar characteristics
         shall meet the criteria in ANSI Z358.1-1990. Water for shower units shall be supplied by the potable-water
         system. Rigid pull bars of stainless steel should be used to activate the shower and should extend to within
         54 inches of the floor. The floor area of the emergency safety shower shall be textured, well lighted,
         identified with a highly visible sign, and maintained tree of items that obstruct its use. A water flow alarm
         shall sound when the safety shower is activated. Location of safety showers shall be standardized as much
         as possible.  Emergency safety showers in laboratories shall be located at the room entrance on the right-
         hand side of the exit door (hinge side); instrument laboratories and laboratory support spaces shall have
         showers located in the corridor at the pull side of the room door.

15.10.7   GLASSWARE WASHING SINKS
         Sinks dedicated to the purpose of washing laboratory glassware shall have a high or telescoping spigot with
         a swing-type gooseneck to accommodate large pieces of glassware. Large sinks shall be provided with a
         hand-held sprayer whose weight is supported for ease of operation. All glassware washing sinks shall be
         ventilated at a rate of 280 to 300 dm with an exhaust air duct connection at the top of the sink below the
         bench top.

15.10.8   COMPRESSED-AIR SYSTEMS
         When compressed-air systems are required, these systems should have oil and water traps, a dryer, and all
         controls. Unless otherwise specified in the project criteria, each compressed-air system shall have duplex
         compressors (one redundant) with an automatic lead/lag switch and a single compressor tank. Compressed-
         air systems for processes shall be completely independent of the compressed-air system for the HVAC
         controls.  The compressed-air system shall provide a water trap and pressure regulation at each laboratory.
         An audible alarm and remote annunciation shall be provided to alert personnel to a loss of air pressure.  Air
         compressors shall use vibration pads and springs, as needed, to substantially diminish vibration and sound
                                                15-36

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines	February 1998
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements


         generated by compressors. Further, compressor location should minimize transmission of vibration and
         sound to the building or rooms that the compressors service.

15.10.9   VACUUM SYSTEMS
         When a laboratory vacuum system is required, it shall be composed of several vacuum pumps capable of
         evacuating air at a regulated suction of 25 inches of mercury or as specified in the project criteria.  Storage
         volume and number of pumps shall be determined at the design stage as needed to meet laboratory
         benchwork requirements. Unless otherwise specified in the project criteria, each vacuum system shall have
         duplex pumps, an automatic lead/lag switch, and a single tank. An audible alarm and remote annunciation
         shall be provided to alert personnel to a loss of vacuum.  Vacuum pumps shall use vibration pads and
         springs, as needed, to substantially diminish vibration and sound generated by the pumps.  Further, pump
         location should minimize transmission of vibration and sound to the building or rooms that the pumps
         service.

15.10.10  CENTRALIZED LABORATORY WATER SYSTEMS
         The following requirements apply to laboratory water systems.

15.10.10.1   DEIONIZED WATER (DI) SYSTEM
            Unless otherwise specified in the project criteria, the central deionized water system shall have a
            resistivity of greater than  10 megaohms at the tap in each laboratory. Water quality shall conform to
            ASTM Type I requirements for reagent-quality water and to American Pharmaceutical Association
            (APhA) requirements for water used in microbiological testing.  Type I water is typically prepared by
            distilling feed water that has a maximum conductivity of 20 megaohms per cm (at 25 °C), then polishing
            it with mixed-bed deionizers and passing it through a 0.2-micron membrane filter. Pipes and fittings
            for the Dl system shall be polyvmylidine fluoride (PVDF) schedule 80 or unpigmented polypropylene.
            A bypass or drain legs shall be provided at the lowest points in the piping system to avoid stagnation of
            water at the branch pipes  during extended periods of non-use.

15.10.10.2   HOT AND COLD WATER, POTABLE
            (Refer also to subsection 15.10.1.1.) The laboratory potable-water supply shall be piped in Type K or
            Type L copper. Only potable water shall be used for emergency eyewash units and emergency showers.

15.10.10.3   INDUSTRIAL HOT AND COLD WATER, NONPOTABLE
            The laboratory nonpotable-water supply, identified as industrial hot/cold water, shall be piped in Type
            K or Type L copper. Approved backflow prevention devices shall isolate the laboratory nonpotable water
            system from the potable-water  system.  Hot-water supply shall be insulated, and hot water shall be
            recirculated to conserve energy.

15.10.10.4   CULTURE WATER  SYSTEM
            Culture water system piping shall be of Schedule 80 unpigmented polypropylene and shall have no metal
            in contact with the water.  The holding tank shall be lined with unpigmented polypropylene. Transfer
            pumps shall be of solid unpigmented polypropylene.

15.10.11  NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
         Unless otherwise specified in the project criteria, each laboratory must have a natural gas distribution
         system.

15.10.12  NONFLAMMABLE- AND  FLAMMABLE-GAS SYSTEMS
         Systems for flammable and nonflammable gas must meet the following requirements.
                                              15-37

-------
                                                                               Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998                                                                    and Planning Guidelines
                                                                    Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements


15.10.12.1    GENERAL.
             Special gas services for flammable and nonflammable gases shall be provided to all laboratories
             requiring their use. Gases shall be stored and piped in accordance with NFPA 45, Chapter 8, and shall
             conform to Chapter 4, paragraphs 11 and 12, of the Safety Manual, as applicable.

             •   Gas cylinders for nonflammable gases, both in-use and standby, shall be manifolded from a remotely
                located space that is central to the laboratory areas and served by and accessible from the main
                storeroom or loading and receiving dock area.  This space shall be designed and ventilated in
                accordance with code requirements.

             •   Flammable-gas cylinders shall be provided at the point of use only and shall be housed in ventilated
                cabinet enclosures with leak detection and alarm-monitoring devices.

15.10.12.2    DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS
             For all laboratories except metals analysis laboratories, a seamless-copper-piping gas-distribution system
             for nonflammable gases shall be  provided from the space identified in the previous subsection to all
             designated laboratories. Ideally, the length of the gas distribution lines should not exceed 100 feet, to
             avoid the necessity for pipe joints. If pipe joints are required due to line length, prior approval by EPA
             is required. Each copper line of this system shall be placed inside a larger diameter PVC pipe and
             vented to the outside of the building. Regulator valves and other auxiliary equipment required to furnish
             gas at the required pressures shall be provided. Pipe sizes shall be coordinated to ensure proper velocity
             of the gas from the cylinders^) to the point of application. The number and type of gas outlets in each
             room are indicated in the room data sheets. Exact and final outlet location in each laboratory must be
             approved by EPA during the design phase. The system design shall include a capability for individual
             room cutoff.

15.10.12.3    DISTRIBUTION TO METALS LABORATORIES
             For all laboratories used for metals analysis, a seamless-Teflon-piping gas-distribution system shall be
             provided from the space identified in subsection 15.10.12.1. to all metals laboratories. The Teflon lines
             shall be placed inside larger PVC pipes and vented to the outside of the building. Each Teflon line in
             this system shall be equipped, at both ends, with regulator valves and other auxiliary equipment required
             to furnish gas at required pressures. Gas-distribution systems other than Teflon may be utilized if
             approved by EPA.  Pipe  sizes shall be coordinated to ensure proper velocity of the gas from the
             cylinders) to the point of use.

15.10.12.4    PIPING EXIT CORRIDOR RESTRICTION
             No piping from any of these systems shall be run above or in the exit corridors.

15.10.12.5    BOTTLE GAS SUPPLY
             The bottle gas supply shall be provided with duty and standby sets with automatic changeover valves and
             controls. For all gases, an indicator panel shall be installed close to the point of use in each of the
             laboratories. Rooms may be clustered in the panel as long as the distance between the point of use and
             the panel does not exceed 75 feet. See room data sheet requirements for the types, volumes, and other
             design information.

             •   Multipoint gas analyzer and alarm system.  When toxic or explosive gases are used  in a confined
                space, a multipoint gas analyzer and alarm system shall be provided to monitor concentration of the
                gases within this space.  This  system shall consist of gas sensors/transmitters, wiring, and a
                microprocessor-based  monitoring-and-alarm control panel.  The number and type of sensors/
                transmitters  shall depend on the specific application.   Each sensor/transmitter shall transmit a
                frequency signal proportional to the gas concentration and shall have a special amplifier to eliminate
                the effects of radio frequency interferences. The control panel shall be capable of monitoring, and
                providing an alarm on, different types of gases in different zones; the panel shall have an audible and

                                                 15-38

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines	.	February1998
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements


                a visible alarm. The control panel shall also have a factory-wired terminal strip to interface with the
                energy management system for remote monitoring and alarms.

15.10.12.6   LIQUID NITROGEN AND LIQUID ARGON
            Liquid nitrogen and liquid argon must be delivered to the point of use in liquid form. Insulation in the
            delivery system must be sufficient to prevent evaporation losses of liquid nitrogen. The gas distribution
            room for these two gases shall be as close as possible to the laboratory rooms where the gases are
            used—preferably adjacent to them. This gas distribution room shall also be directly accessible from the
            outside of the building without use of the laboratory corridors.  One large tank for each gas shall be
            provided; each tank shall be permanently fixed in the room. The tanks shall be outfitted with necessary
            valves and controls, as required by the gas supplier.

15.10.12.7   TESTING AND PURGING
            Before acceptance, the distribution system must be pressure tested and purged.  The required level of
            purity specified at the point of use shall be maintained at all points in the system during testing and
            purging.

15.10.13 DRINKING FOUNTAINS
         At least one drinking fountain shall be provided on each block of space so that no person will have to travel
         more than 150 feet to reach it The water shall be chilled. The refrigeration coils shall not be assembled
         using lead solder nor shall these coils contain lead as a lining. All drinking fountains and locations for
         drinking fountains shall comply with ADA.

15.10.14 TOILETS, SINKS, AND LAVATORIES
         Requirements are as follows.

15.10.14.1   GENERAL
            Separate toilet facilities for men and women shall be provided.  The facilities must be located so that
            employees will not have to travel more than 150 feet to reach them. Unless otherwise specified by EPA,
            each toilet room shall have a sufficient number of water closets, with a minimum of two for each men's
            toilet room and a minimum of four for each women's toilet room, enclosed with modem stall partitions
            and doors.  Each men's toilet room should also have at least two urinals. The number of water closets
            in each women's toilet room shall be no less than the sum of water closets plus urinals of the adjacent
            men's toilet room. The toilet rooms' hot water should be set at 105°F, or as required by the project
            criteria. Water closets and urinals shall not be visible when the toilet room entry door is open.

15.10.14.2   ACCESSORIES
            Each main toilet room shall contain:

            •   A soap dispenser, shelf, and minor above the lavatory.
            •   A toilet paper dispenser in each water closet stall.
            •   A coat hook on the inside face of each water closet stall door and on the wall immediately inside the
                door of the toilet room.
            •   At least one modem paper towel dispenser and waste receptacle for every two lavatories.
            *   A coin-operated sanitary napkin dispenser in women's toilet rooms.
            •   Ceramic tile or comparable wainscot from the floor to a minimum height of 4 feet 6 inches.
            •   A disposable-toilet-seat-cover dispenser.
            •   A convenience electrical outlet located adjacent to one mirror in each toilet room.
            •   A small covered container located inside each water closet partition enclosure in the women's toilet
                room for the disposal of used sanitary napkins.
                                                15-39

-------
                                                                              Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998	 and Planning Guidelines
                                                                   Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements


15.10.14.3   TOILET ROOM ACCESSIBILITY
            All public toilet rooms shall be located along an accessible path of travel; must have accessible fixtures,
            accessories,  and doors and  adequate maneuvering clearances; and shall meet UFAS and ADA
            requirements.

15.10.14.4   DIMENSIONS
            All toilet rooms designated for public access shall have one toilet stall that:

            •  Is 60 inches wide.

            •  Has a minimum depth of 56 inches when wall-mounted toilets are used or 59 inches when floor-
               mounted sets are used

            •  Has a clear floor area.

            •  Has a door that is  32 inches wide and swings out.

            •  Has handrails on each side (front-transfer stall) or on the side and back (side-transfer stall).
               Handrails shall be 33 to 36 inches high and parallel to the floor, shall be 1V4 to 1V4 inches in outside
               diameter, shall have l'/i inches of clearance between rail and wall, and shall be fastened securely at
               ends and center. Handrails shall have no sharp edges and must permit the continuous sliding of
               hands.

            *  Has a water closet mounted at a height of 17 to 19 inches, measured from the floor to the top of the
               seat. Hand-operated or automatic flush controls shall be mounted no higher than 44 inches above
               the floor.

15.10.14.5   ALTERNATE DIMENSIONS
            A toilet stall measuring 36 or 48 inches wide by 66 inches, but preferably 72 inches, deep may be
            acceptable, as determined by EPA.

15.10.14.6   LAVATORY ACCESSIBILITY
            Accessibility shall be in compliance with ADA. At least one lavatory shall be mounted with a clearance
            of 29 inches from the floor to the top of the bottom of the apron. The height from the floor to the top
            of the  lavatory rim  shall not exceed 34 inches.  Faucets shall be lever operated, push type, or
            electronically activated for one-hand operation without the need for tight pinching or grasping. Drain
            pipes and hot-water pipes under a lavatory must be covered, insulated, or recessed far enough so that
            individuals in wheelchairs who are without sensation will not burn themselves.

15.10.14.7   ACCESSIBLE MIRRORS, URINALS, AND ACCESSORIES
            Accessibility shall be in compliance with ADA. One mirror with shelf shall be provided above the
            lavatory at as low a height as possible and no higher than 40 inches above the floor, measured from the
            top of the shelf and the bottom of the mirror. A common mirror provided for both the able and the
            disabled must provide a convenient view for both. Toilet rooms for men shall have wall-mounted urinals
            with elongated lips, with the basin opening no more than 17 inches above the floor.  Accessible floor-
            mounted stall urinals  with basins at the level of the floor are acceptable.  The toilet room shall have at
            least one towel rack, towel dispenser, and other dispensers  and disposal units mounted no higher than
            48 inches from the floor, or 54 inches if a person in a wheelchair has to approach it from the side.

15.10.14.8   TOILET SCHEDULE
            The number of water closets, urinals, and lavatories shall comply with all state and local codes and with
            project criteria. If a conflict exists between the project criteria and the state and local codes, the more
            stringent shall apply unless otherwise directed by the contracting officer.


                                                15-40

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines	February 1998
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements


15.10.14.9   WATER-CONSERVING WATER CLOSETS, SINKS, AND LAVATORIES
            Flow control devices shall be installed (unless otherwise dictated by the project criteria) on all water
            closets, sinks, and lavatories.  Devices shall limit water closet flow to 154 gallons per flush, public
            lavatories to 1A gallon per minute, and regular lavatories lo\lA gallons per minute.

15.10.15  SHOWER STALLS
         Shower stalls shall be of fiberglass construction, complete with door, soap ledge, shower head, separate hot-
         and cold-water knobs, non-skid floor finish, and standard 2-inch floor drain.  Shower stalls shall also
         provide a small change area with lockers. Emergency shower deluge heads shall not be used in regular
         shower stalls. For more information about emergency showers see subsection 15.10.6. Accessibility shall
         be in compliance with ADA.

15.10.16  HOSE BIBBS
         Three-quarter-inch hose bibbs should be provided on exterior walls of the building(s), 30 inches above
         grade. At least one hose bibb shall be installed on each wall. When an exterior wall exceeds 75 feet in
         length, additional bibbs shall be installed so that distance between bibbs does not exceed 75 feet Depending
         on the geographical location of the facility, the design professional shall use freeze-proof hose bibbs.


15.11   Nonsanitary Laboratory Waste
         All nonsanitary wastewaters from the laboratories are required to pass through an acid neutralization system
         prior to discharge into the local publicly owned treatment works. The system shall be designed and
         constructed in accordance with EPA standards for wastewater neutralization.  The system shall have the
         capability of continuous pH flow monitoring and recording. The recorders shall be located in the office of
         the facility engineer, or in another suitable area. Sampling capability is required to allow for routine
         monitoring of facility wastewater effluent


15.12   Codes and Standards
         In addition to the references presented earlier in this section, the codes and standards of the organizations
         listed in Table 15.12, Codes and Standards, shall apply to all mechanical and plumbing systems, equipment,
         and piping, whether or not they are specifically listed in Section 15, Mechanical Requirements, of this
         Manual. In the event of conflict between the codes and standards of the listed organizations and other codes
         and standards that may be listed elsewhere in this document, the most stringent shall govern.
                                                15-41

-------
                                                                           Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998	                                                          and Planning Guidelines
                                                                 Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements
Table 15.12  Codes and Standards	
AABC           Associated Air Balance Council
ACGIH          American Conference of Government industrial Hygienists
ADC            Air Diffusion Council
AGA            American Gas Association
AMCA          Air Movement and Control Association
ANSI            American National Standards Institute
ARI             Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute
ASHRAE        American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers
ASME           American Society of Mechanical Engineers
ASTM           American Society for Testing and Materials
AWWA          American Water Works Association
CGA            Compressed Gas Association
NEC            National Electrical Code
NEMA          National Electrical Manufacturers Association
NFPA           National Fire Protection Association
NSC            National Safety Code
N5F            National Sanitation Foundation
OIL)             Owners Insurance Underwriters
OSHA           Occupational Safety and Health Act
SMACNA        Sheet Metal and Air-Conditioning Contractors National Association
UBCC           Uniform Building Code Congress
UL             Underwriters Laboratories
Other federal, state, and local authorities having jurisdiction.	'    	
15.13   Testing, Balancing, and Commissioning

15.13.1   INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR
         An independent air balance and testing agency that specializes in the balancing and testing of HVAC
         systems shall be used to balance, adjust, and test air-moving equipment and the air distribution system,
         water system, gas system, and compressed air-piping systems.

15.13.2   CONTRACTOR CREDENTIALS
         The independent contractor shall be an organization (1)  whose specialty is testing and balancing
         environmental systems, (2) that is a member of the Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) and the
         National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB), and (3) that has satisfactorily balanced at least three
         systems whose type and size are comparable to those of this project.

15.13.3   CONTRACTOR REGISTRATION
         The independent testing and balancing contractor shall be registered in the state in which the project is
         located.

15.13.4   SCOPE OF WORK
         The testing and balancing work shall include, but shall not necessarily be limited to, the following items:

         •  All air-conditioning supply and return systems
         *  Air exhaust systems
         •  Hood supply and exhaust systems (including certification and performance testing)
         *  All hydronic systems
         *  Gas and compressed-air systems.
                                              15-42

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines
                                   February 1998
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements

15.13.5  TESTING AND BALANCING DEVICES
         HVAC air and water distribution systems shall be provided with permanently installed calibrated testing
         and balancing devices and with access, as needed, to accurately measure and adjust water flows, pressures,
         or temperatures as required. At a minimum, the balancing devices in Table 15.13.5.1, Required Balancing
         Devices for Water and Steam Distribution Systems, and Table 15.13.5.2, Required Balancing Devices for
         Air Distribution Systems, shall be provided.  Test devices shall be located and installed according to AABC
         Volume A-82.
       Table 15.13.5.1  Required Balancing Devices for Water and Steam Distribution Systems
       System Components (Water)	Required System Devices	
       Pump suction and discharge piping
       Pump discharge piping

       Chiller evaporator water suction and discharge
       piping •
       Boiler or heat exchanger suction and discharge
       piping
       Heating or cooling coil (air-handling  unit [AHU])
       suction and discharge piping
       Heating or cooling coil (AHU) discharge piping

       Reheat coil, fan coil unit, unit heater, ports, and
       finned tube radiation, convector (1)  discharge
       piping
       (2) suction piping
       Three-way control valves (each port) suction and
       discharge piping
       Boiler discharge piping
 Manifold pressure gauge with pressure taps
 Flow-measuring device (type depending on accuracy
 required) or inlet and discharge pressure gauges
 Thermometer/test well; pressure gauge and
 gaugecock
 Same devices as required for chiller evaporator
 piping
 Thermometer/test well; pressure gauge/pressure tap
 Presettable calibrated balancing valve with integral
 pressure test ports
 Presettable calibrated balancing valve with integral
 pressure test ports; temperature test; and pressure
 tap

 Pressure tap

 Flow-measuring device (orifice or venturi type)
       Table 15.13.5.2  Required Balancing Devices for Air Distribution Systems
       System Components
Required System Device
       Diffusers, grilles, registers

       Branch ductwork runs

       Fan discharge ductwork

       Fan suction ductwork
       Cooling coil suction and discharge airstreams
       Heating coil suction and discharge airstreams
       Mixed-air plenum airstream
Round butterfly or square/rectangular opposed-blade
volume damper, either integral with device or in spin-in
takeoffs
Rectangular/square or round (with more than one
opposed-blade damper and terminal device). Sealed
test hole for pilot tube traverse
Sealed test holes for pitot tube traverse.  Sealed test
hole for static pressure measurements
Sealed test hole for static pressure measurement
Duct-mounted airstream thermometer
Duct-mounted airstream thermometer
Duct-mounted airstream thermometer
                                                 15-43^

-------
February 1998
Architecture, Engineering,
 and Planning Guidelines
                                                                  Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements


15.13.6   MECHANICAL SYSTEM COMMISSIONING
         Before acceptance for occupancy and Government assumption of operating responsibilities for the facility,
         the lessor/contractor shall conduct commissioning of all mechanical and associated building systems. The
         lessor/contractor shall record all system operation verifications and submit a statement that all systems
         operations have been observed and that all systems meet the intent of the design and are operating properly.

15.13.7   REPORTING
         The testing and balancing contractor approved by the contracting officer shall, at the completion of the
         balancing work, submit a complete report to EPA for approval. The report shall be delivered at least 15 days
         prior to final inspection of the building.


15.14   Ductwork

15.14.1   GENERAL
         The Contractor shall provide all ductwork, including that required for air supply and exhaust return of
         laboratory fume hoods and equipment. Ductwork systems shall be designed for efficient distribution of air
         to and from  the conditioned spaces; noise, available space, maintenance, air quality, air quantity, and
         optimum balance between expenditure of fan  energy (annual operating cost) and duct size (initial
         investment) shall also  be considered.

15.14.2   FABRICATION
         Ductwork for air supply, return air, and general exhaust shall be fabricated of galvanized sheet metal.
         Laboratory fume hood and equipment exhaust shall be of P VC-coated galvanized sheet metal or of Type 316
         welded stainless steel,  depending on the specific laboratory function and type of process being exhausted.
         Polypropylene and glass duct material shall be considered for highly corrosive exhaust applications.
         Construction of exhaust ductwork for laboratories with fume hoods shall conform to the requirements of
         ANSI/AHA  Z9.5-1992.

15.14.2.1    COMPLIANCE
            Ductwork systems shall be designed to meet the leakage rate requirements of the SMACNAHVACAir
            Duct Leakage Test Manual. Ductwork, accessories, and support systems shall be designed to comply
            with the following:

               ACGIH Industrial Ventilation Manual
               ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals
               NFPA 45 Fire Protection for Laboratories Using Chemicals
               NFPA 90 A Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems
               NFPA 91 Installation of Exhaust Systems for Air Conveying of Materials
               NFPA % Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations
               SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible
               SMACNA Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards
               SMACNA Round Industrial Duct Construction Standards
               SMACNA HVAC Duct Design Manual.

15.14.2.2    SPECIAL APPLICATIONS
            Ductwork shall also meet the following requirements.

            •   Ductwork shall  be designed to comply with NFPA 90 A. This includes specifications and installation
               of smoke and fire dampers at rated wall penetrations and smoke pressurization/contairunent dampers
               as required for  smoke pressurization/evacuation systems.  Fire dampers shall not be used on the
               exhaust system  ducting if the system must maintain confinement of hazardous materials during and
               after a fire.
                                               15-44

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines                               '                                   February 1998
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements


            •   Ductwork shall be designed to resist corrosive contaminants if any arc present. Exhaust ductwork
                from laboratory fume hoods shall not be of spiral construction and shall be sloped toward the fume
                hood for drainage of condensation.  Laboratory ductwork shall be  in  accordance with the
                requirements of NFPA 45.

            •   Ductwork that handles moisture-laden air that is exhausted from areas such as shower rooms,
                dishwashing areas, and other areas where condensation may occur on the duct interior shall be of
                aluminum construction, have welded joints and seams, and provide drainage at low points.

            •   Penetrations of ductwork through security barriers shall be minimized. Any such penetrations that
                are more than % square inches in area and 6 inches in smallest dimension must be provided with
                a penetration delay equal to that required for the security barrier. The physical attributes, intended
                service of the ductwork, and the axial configuration of the barrier penetration shall be considered in
                the design of the penetration delay.

15.14.3   ACCESS PANELS
         All ductwork shall have an access panel that provides access to each operating part, including:

         •  Splitter dampers
         •  Manual volume dampers
         *  Motorized volume damper
         •  Fire dampers.

15.14.4   INSULATION
         All supply air ductwork shall be insulated with a vapor barrier unless otherwise dictated by the project
         criteria. Supply air ductwork installed below ceilings and in conditioned spaces may not require insulation
         if the surrounding  air has a low dew point and condensation will not occur. Return and exhaust air
         ductwork may be insulated where condensation may occur when air is routed through nonconditioned areas.

15.14.5   FIRE DAMPERS
         Fire dampers shall be provided in accordance with codes, except in the exhaust systems of laboratory areas.


15.15   Fire Protection

15.15.1   GENERAL
         The decision to install sprinkler protection in the facility shall Debased on NFPA 101, NFPA 45, the Safety
         Manual, state and local codes, and the project criteria, whichever is most stringent. All  sprinkler systems
         shall comply with NFPA 13 and be approved by Factory Mutual or another nationally recognized insurance
         company. Special protection systems may be used to extinguish or control fire in easily ignited, fast-burning
         substances such as flammable liquids, some gases, and some chemicals. Such protection systems shall also
         be used to protect ordinary combustibles in certain high-value occupancies that are especially susceptible
         to damage. Special protection systems supplement automatic sprinklers as described by NFPA and shall
         not be used as a substitute for them except where water is not available for sprinkler protection. Halon
         systems shall not be used unless directed by the project criteria.

15.15.2   WATER SUPPLIES
         Except as noted below, every building shall be provided, at a minimum, with a water supply that is available
         for use by fire department mobile pumping apparatus. The water supply shall normally be provided by fire
         hydrants suitable for firefighting apparatus and located within 5 feet of paved roadways. The hydrants shall
         be supplied from a dependable public or private water main system. Alternative water supplies shall be
         developed in accordance with NFPA 1231. Other water supplies shall be available to buildings where fire
         protection requires them. Fire protection water does not have to meet drinking water standards.

                                                15-45

-------
                                                                              Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998	\	)	and Planning Guidelines
                                                                   Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements


         The water supply system shall provide ample water for each of the three types of fire protection water use:
         outside fire department hose streams from hydrants, small and large hose streams from inside-building
         standpipe or hose connections, and automatic sprinkler systems. The minimum requirements for each type
         of water use shall not be cumulative or additive and are determined as described below.

15.15.2.1     FIRE DEPARTMENT HOSE STREAMS
             The hose stream required shall be determined by using the needed fire flow calculation method outlined
             in Section 300 of the Fire Suppression Rating Schedule of the Insurance Service Office. The needed fire
             flow shall be based on the fire areas of the building, not on the entire area of the building. The fire flow
             for the fire area requiring the greatest water flow shall be the needed fire flow for the building.

15.15.2.2     STANDPIPE HOSE STREAM
             When standpipe systems are provided or required, the minimum water supply shall be in accordance
             with NFPA14 and the local building code and shall be based on the number of standpipe risers provided
             in the building or in each fire area.

15.15.2.3     AUTOMATIC SPRINKLERS
             The minimum flow required to meet the needs of the automatic sprinkler system shall be determined by
             hydraulic calculations as required for sprinkler system designs.  The water supply requirements shall
             include all sprinkler flow and required hose stream allowances outlined in NFPA 13.

15.15.3   SIZE AND ZONING
         The sprinkler system main shall be sized to meet the fire flow and pressure requirements set by the local
         authority. Fire pump(s) shall be provided, if needed, and shall be installed in a separate room along with
         the sprinkler system main valves. Sprinkler system protection zones shall have the same boundaries as the
         fire alarm system fire zones. Each sprinkler system protection zone shall be equipped with electrically
         supervised control valves and water flow alarm switches connected to the fire alarm system.

15.15.4   SYSTEMS
         Fire protection systems must meet the following requirements.

15.15.4.1     AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER PROTECTION
             Automatic sprinkler protection shall be provided in all new EPA facilities. All sprinkler systems shall
             be hydraulically calculated in accordance with NFPA 13. All design documents, including the hydraulic
             calculations, must be maintained at the building to facilitate future modifications of the sprinkler system.
             Existing facilities shall be provided with sprinkler protection under the following circumstances:

            ' *   In major modifications to existing laboratories that use chemicals, flammable liquids, or explosive
                materials.

             •   Throughout all floors of any building where EPA occupancy is 75 feet high or higher. The height
                shall be measured from the lowest point of fire department access to the floor level of the highest
                occupiable story.

             •   Throughout occupancies exceeding the area or height limitations allowed by the local building code.

             •   In all areas below grade that meet the definition of "windowless" in local code.

             •   In all areas that contain a high-severity occupancy as defined by the General Services Administration
                (GSA).

             •   Throughout windowless buildings, windowless floors ofbuildings, and windowless areas that exceed
                the allowable limits of the local building code.

                                                15-46

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines
February 1998
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements


             •   In cooling towers of combustible construction under the conditions described in subsection 15.5.5.

             •   In any location where the maximum fire potential of the occupancy exceeds the fire-resistance
                capabilities of exposed  live-load-bearing  structural elements (e.g., when a flammable-liquids
                operation is moved into a former office area).

             •   Throughout open-plan office space that has a fuel load in excess of 6 pounds per square foot.

             •   Throughout electronic equipment operation areas, including data storage areas.  On/off type
                sprinkler heads and sprinkler guards may be used to minimize water damage in these areas.

15.15.4.2     WET PIPE
             Sprinkler systems shall normally be wet pipe.  Hydraulic designs shall be performed for all systems.

15.15.4.3     DRY PIPE
             In unheated areas or other areas subject to  freezing temperatures, dry-pipe systems shall be provided.
             Because of the time delays associated with  the release of the air in the system, water demands for dry-
             pipe systems shall be computed on the basis of areas 30 percent greater than those used to computer
             demands for comparable wet-pipe systems.  Where the unheated area is small, it may be cost-effective
             to install an antifreeze system or a small dry-pipe system supplied from the wet-pipe system in the main
             heated area.

15.15.4.4     PREACTION
             A preaction system shall be used where it is particularly important to prevent the accidental discharge
             of water.  Need for a  preaction  system shall be  determined on the basis of review by, and
             recommendation of, a professional fire protection engineer. The detection system chosen to activate the
             preaction valve shall have a high reliability and shall be equipment with a separate alarm/supervisory
             signal to indicate status. The detection system must be designed to be more sensitive than the closed
             sprinklers in the preaction system but should not be so sensitive as to cause false alarms and unnecessary
             actuation of the preaction valve.

15.15.4.5     DELUGE
             For extra hazard areas and specific hard-to-extinguish fuels such as explosives and pyrophoric metals,
             a  deluge system with open sprinkler heads may be used to wet down the entire protected area
             simultaneously. Deluge systems shall comply with NFPA 13.  If quick response is required, deluge
             system piping may be primed with water. The nozzles must be provided with blow-off caps for water-
             filled deluge systems.

15.15.4.6     SELF-RESTORING
             Self-restoring sprinkler systems, such as the on/off multicycle system or systems using individual on/off
             sprinkler heads, shall be considered where the water from sprinklers will become contaminated by
             contact with room contents, where there is a concern about water damage, or where water supply or
             storage volume is marginal.

15.15.4.7     QUICK RESPONSE
             Quick-response sprinklers must be used in new installations except where prohibited. Other specialized
             automatic sprinklers, such as large drop, early-suppression fast-response, or extended-coverage heads,
             are acceptable for use in sprinkler systems. The use of specialized sprinklers is appropriate when a
             higher level of protection is desired or an equivalent level of protection is necessary to compensate for
             failure to meet other code requirements.  Use of specialized sprinkler heads should  be  limited to
             applications for which they have been specifically listed (e.g., UL, FM).
                                                15-17

-------
                                                                             Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998                                                                  and Planning Guidelines
                                                                  Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements


15.15.4.8    WATER SPRAY
            Installation of water spray systems shall comply with NFPA IS.

15.15.4.9    CARBON DIOXIDE
            Agent quantity requirements and installation procedures shall comply with NFPA 12.

15.15.4.10   DRY CHEMICAL
            Systems shall comply with NFPA 17.

            •  Design requirements. Systems shall be designed in accordance with  NFPA 17 and NFPA 96.
               Discharge of dry chemical shall actuate a pressure switch connected to an alarm in the building fire
               alarm system.  Refer to Section 16,  Electrical Requirements, of this Manual for fire alarm
               requirements.

            *  Acceptance tests.  Afierinstallation,aUmechamcalandelectricalequipmentshallbetestedtoensure
               correct operation and function. When all necessary corrections have been made, a full discharge test
               shall be conducted. Plastic or cotton bags shall be attached to each individual nozzle, and the system
               activated. Cooking appliance nozzles must discharge at least 2 pounds of the agent, and duct or
               plenum nozzles must discharge at least 5 pounds of the agent  Preengineered systems that fail to
               discharge these amounts will be considered unsatisfactory.

15.15.4.11   FOAM
            Foam systems shall comply with NFPA 11, NFPA 11 A, NFPA 16, NFPA 16A, and NFPA 409.

15.15.4.12   STANDPIPES AND HOSE SYSTEMS
            NFPA 45 requires the installation of standpipe and hose systems in all laboratory buildings that are two
            or more stories above or below the grade level.  Installation of standpipe systems shall comply with
            NFPA 14.

15.15.4.13   PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
            Portable fire extinguishers shall comply with NFPA 10 except that halon  extinguishers shall not be
            placed in any EPA facility. See Section 10, Specialties, of this Manual for more information on portable
            fire extinguishers.

15.15.4.14   HALON-1301 FIRE-EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS
            Fire protection systems that contain halon-1301 (CFjBr, a halogenated hydrocarbon) shall not be used
            in EPA facilities. Existing systems that use halon-1301 should be removed from service in accordance
            with Title VI of the 1990 Clean Air Act Amendments. (The halon from the systems should have been
            recovered by the end of fiscal year  1994.) The hardware may be left in place in anticipation of an
            environmentally acceptable  replacement.  No new systems that use halon are to be installed in EPA
            facilities. This policy applies to both fixed and portable systems. The halon recovered from systems
            should be made available through the Halon Recycling Corporation (1-800-258*1283). Refer to list of
            acceptable halon substitutes approved under significant new alternatives policy (SNAP) as of October 16,
            1996 (published by EPA's Air and Radiation Stratospheric Protection Division).

15.15.4.15   GASEOUS FIRE-EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS
           . While carbon dioxide systems are allowed in normally occupied spaces, it is recommended that their use
            as a total flooding agent be limited to areas that are usually not occupied.  Any carbon dioxide automatic
            extinguishing system that is to be used in usually occupied space must be reviewed and approved by
            AEREB and SHEMD and must meet the design requirements of NFPA 12 and 29 CFR §1910.162(0)5.
            A number of clean-agent, gaseous fire-extinguishing systems are becoming available as an alternative
            to halon and carbon dioxide systems. Among these are FM-200 and Inergen. Because of the unique
            nature and limited approvals for these new systems, any design and installation shall be certified by a

                                               15-48

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines                                                                   February 1998
Section 15 - Mechanical Requirements


            licensed professional engineer as appropriate for the hazard to be protected against.  The certification
            must include a detailed analysis of the hazards to be protected against; any limitations on, or exclusions
            of, hazardous chemicals that may be protected against by the design; and documentation to support the
            design concentration of the agent. Any documentation of the design shall meet the requirements under
            Flame Extinguishment of NFPA 2001. The installation of such a system shall meet the requirements
            described below.

            *   Design requirements.  Systems shall be designed in accordance with NFPA 2001 and other
                applicable standards for the hazard to be protected against Discharge of a system shall actuate a
                pressure switch or other device connected to initiate an alarm in the building fire alarm system.
                Refer to Section 16, Electrical Requirements, of this Manual for fire alarm requirements.

            •   Acceptance tests. After iristallatiori, all mechanical and electrical ep,ujprnent shall be tested to ensure
                correct operation and function. All approval or acceptance testing shall be performed in accordance
                with Section 4-7 of NFPA 2001.

15.15.5  OPERATION
         Operation and maintenance instructions and system layouts shall be posted at the control equipment. All
         personnel who may be expected to inspect, test, maintain, or operate fire protection apparatus shall be
         thoroughly trained and kept trained in the functions they are expected to perform.

15.15.6  CODES
         In addition to meeting the code requirements mentioned in the above subsections, the design shall comply
         with the requirements of the local authority that has jurisdiction over the project

END OF SECTION 15
                                                 15-49

-------

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines	;	February 1998
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements
                        Section 16 - Electrical Requirements
16.1     General

16.1.1    CODE COMPLIANCE
         All work done in this section shall comply with the applicable requirements of the most current edition of
         the following codes and references:

            National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) codes and references
            National Electrical Code (NEC) (NFPA 70)
            Life Safety Code (NFPA 101)
            National Fire Alarm Code (NFPA 72)
            Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems (NFPA 90A)
            Factory Mutual (FM) Engineering Loss Prevention Data Sheet 5-4, Transformers
            Emergency and Standby Power Systems (NFPA 110)
            Stored Electrical Energy Emergency and Standby Power Systems (NFPA 111)
            Lightning Protection Systems (NFPA 780)
            29 CFR §§1910.303-305
            Prudent Practices in the Laboratory: Handling and Disposal of Chemicals, National Research Council
            Title m Standards for the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)
            Standards of the National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
            National Electrical Safety Code (NESC)
            Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association (IPCEA)
            Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) standards.

         In addition, all work must comply with all applicable federal, state, city, and local codes, regulations,
         ordinances, publications, and manuals. All newly manufactured equipment shall be listed by Underwriters
         Laboratories Inc. (UL) or a similar testing laboratory acceptable to EPA.  When codes conflict, the most
         stringent standard shall govern.

16.1.2    ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS
         Electrical installations shall maintain the integrity of fire stopping, fire resistance, fire separation, smoke
         control, zoning, and other structurally oriented fire safety features in accordance with NEC Article 300-21
         and NFPA 101.

16.1.3    ENERGY CONSERVATION IN DESIGN
         After careful  study of the facility's requirements as well as of the day-to-day operation of its various
         departments, the design professional shall design systems that meet facility operating requirements in an
         energy-efficient manner. The health and safety aspects of the operation must retain first priority, however,
         and cannot be relaxed or traded off for more efficient systems. System and lighting design shall comply
         with the requirements of American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.
         (ASHRAE) standard 90, the Facilities Management and Services Division (FMSD) Energy Conservation
         Planning Handbook, EPA's Green Lights Program and Partner Supports Program, and any state or local
         energy conservation codes or recommendations.

16.1.3.1     LOCAL ENERGY CONSERVATION PROGRAMS
            The local utility company shall be contacted to investigate any energy conservation programs that they
            may have in effect. The economic validity of pursuing these programs shall be presented to EPA in the
            early design phase of the project, and if the programs are deemed viable, they shall be incorporated into
            the design for the project.


                                              16-1

-------
                                                                             'Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998	and Planning Guidelines
                                                                    Section 16 - Electrical Requirements


16.1.3.2     LOAD SHEDDING/PEAK SHAVING
            The payback involved in introducing a load-shedding/peak-shaving system into the facility design shall
            be investigated. If the payback is sufficient to warrant the initial capital expenditure and if approval is
            obtained from EPA, this type of system shall be included in the design of the project If a generator is
            involved in this system, careful consideration should be given to the rating of the generator and the type
            of duty it will be subject to. Such factors as the various fuel sources, exhaust fume contribution to
            outdoor air quality, local air quality standards, and energy-efficient generator equipment shall also be
            considered.

16.1.3.3     DEMAND-SIDE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
            A demand-side management system to keep the peak demand for the facility below a predetermined level
            shall be investigated. An economic analysis shall be done to determine the payback on such a system
            (if demand rates are already very low, this type of system may not be economically feasible).

16.1.4    COORDINATION OF WORK
         A coordinated set of documents (i.e., coordination between architectural; electrical; heating, ventilation, and
         air-conditioning [HVAC]); plumbing; equipment; and structural systems for bidding) shall be provided.
         Documentation shall clearly identify the division of work among the trades and delineate the coordination
         responsibilities of the contractor. Special attention shall be given to designed-in equipment and equipment
         to be provided by the facility occupants.

16.1.4.1     CALCULATIONS
            Short-circuit, load, and lighting calculations shall be provided early in the design phase.

16.1.5    POWER FACTORS
         Electrical utilization equipment rated greater than 100 volts (V), as well as all lighting equipment, shall
         have a power factor of not less than 85 percent under cated-load conditions. If the equipment to be used for
         this project cannot be obtained with the above power factor, power factor correction devices shall be installed
         to bring the building system power factor up to 85 percent All required devices shall be switched with the
         utilization equipment unless doing so results in an unsafe condition.

16.1.6    HANDICAPPED ACCESSIBILITY REQUIREMENTS
         The facility shall  also comply with the electrical requirements of the Uniform  Federal Accessibility
         Standards (UFAS) (1984), adopted by the General Services Administration (GSA)  in 41CFR Parts 101-
         19.6, as well as with ADA and all state and local laws and standards for buildings and facilities that must
         be accessible and usable by physically handicapped people. The most stringent of these codes shall apply.

16.1.7    MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT STANDARDS
         All specified materials and equipment shall be standard products of manufacturers that are regularly and
         currently engaged in production of such items.  Items that are obsolete or to be discontinued by the
         manufacturer, as well as materials and equipment of an experimental nature (or products that would be
         installed in a facility for the first time with this project), are not acceptable and will  not be permitted. All
         material and equipment shall be specification grade, new, free from defects, and high quality, and shall be
         entirely suitable for these specific facilities.

16.1.8    ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
         Careful consideration shall be given in the design to the types of materials to be used for the project as they
         relate to the environment in which they will be installed. Exterior equipment may be subject to different
         types of corrosive atmospheres. Interior equipment in laboratories and testing and storage areas may also
         be subject to corrosive conditions.  All equipment and material shall be suitable for the environment in
         which it will be installed.  Noise mitigation shall be provided for equipment such as transformers and
         generators.
                                                16-2

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines	February 1998
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements
16.2     Primary Distribution

16.2.1     DUCTBANKS AND CABLE
          All primary cable shall be run underground in ductbanks for new building sites.  For extension of, or
          addition to, existing buildings where primary cabling will be used to extend an existing system to a new
          substation, primary cabling may be run within the building provided that it is installed in a raceway system
          (conduit) appropriate to the installation.

16.2.1.1     DUCTBANK ENCASEMENT
            All underground ductbanks shall be concrete encased for primary circuits (600 volts and above) and
            where secondary-service reliability is a prime consideration. Minimum duct size shall be 2 inches. A
            minimum of 25 percent spare ducts (but not less than two spare ducts) shall be provided in each duct
            run. Spare ducts shall be plugged or capped to prevent contamination. The locations where manholes
            are to be included shall be investigated to ensure that they will drain properly. Ductbank runs shall be
            located in the exterior utility corridors established in  the master plans. Locations shall be carefully
            coordinated with other site utilities in the corridor to avoid any conflicts. A 4-inch-wide yellow plastic
            marker tape saying "Danger: Buried High Voltage Cable" shall be placed directly over the high voltage
            line at no more than 6 inches below finished grade.

16.2.2     SWITCHES
          When a new campus-type utility distribution system or an extension of an existing campus-type distribution
          system is a part of the project, a loop system shall be considered.  This system shall have sectionalizing
          primary switches. Primary switches  shall be of load break design. All switches shall be pad mounted.
          Enclosures for switches shall be suitable to the environment in which the switches will be located.  Where
          switches are to be located indoors, they shall be physically isolated from any emergency electrical equipment
          and shall be located in electrical rooms only.

16.2.3     OVERHEAD POWER SUPPLY LINES
          Overhead power supply lines can be used only where service is to be installed in remote or unsettled areas,
          industrial areas, or areas where underground service is not feasible.  Maximum use shall be made of single-
          pole structures. Overhead power supply lines may also be used for feeders to small single-phase loads or
          buildings. Careful consideration shall be given to the location of overhead lines in relation to future land
          use.

16.2.3.1     POWER AND COMMUNICATION POLES
            Joint use of poles for power and communications distribution shall maintain safety standards and shall
            limit electrical interference to communications services.  In joint use of poles, either for multiple
            electrical distribution systems or for both electrical distribution and communication lines, underbuilt
            lines or cables shall be of vertical construction. Use of double-stacked cross run construction shall be
            allowed only where proper clearances for hot-line maintenance work can be ensured. Clearances shall
            comply with American National Standards Institute (ANSI) standard C2.

16.2.4     SYSTEM REDUNDANCY
          A risk/benefit analysis should be performed to justify added capital costs for system redundancy.
                                                16-3

-------
                                                                              Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998	and Planning Guidelines
                                                                     Section 16 - Electrical Requirements
16.3    Service Entrance

16.3.1    OVERHEAD SERVICES
         Overhead services to buildings should not be used except in particular circumstances where underground
         services are not feasible, and then only with approval of the EPA contracting officer's representative (COR).
         Where electrical service to the building is by overhead lines, proper dip poles, weatherheads, and supports
         shall be provided.  Hie main service switch, panelboard, or switchboard shall be located immediately
         adjacent to the entrance of feeders into the building. Code-required clearances shall be maintained under
         all overhead lines. The openings necessary for bringing conductors into buildings shall be grouted or
         otherwise fire-stopped.

16.3.2    UNDERGROUND SERVICES
         To the greatest extent possible, public utility transformers shall be located outside of the actual building.
         If public utility transformers must be located within buildings because of site constraints, they shall be
         installed in standard transformer vaults conforming to the requirements of the NEC. These vaults shall not
         be located adjacent to, or directly beneath, any exit from the building.

16.3.3    SERVICE CAPACITY
         Incoming transformers must be provided, as required, and must be of sufficient capacity to accommodate
         the full design load. In calculating the design load, a demand factor of 100 percent should be used for
         lighting and fixed mechanical equipment loads and a demand factor of 75 percent for all other loads. The
         incoming service shall have sufficient capacity to accommodate the full design load plus 30 percent
         additional capacity for future growth.

16.3.4    METERING
         Where medium voltage power is brought to the facility, electrical energy metering (kilowatt hour Pcwh])
         shall be furnished at each substation of 500 kilovolt-ampere (kVa) or greater capacity. Demand metering
         (kilowatt demand [kwd]) shall be furnished as required for load management. The economics of primary
         metering and secondary metering for campus-type facilities shall also be investigated; the most cost-effective
         method shall be used.

16.3.4.1     LOCAL UTILITY COMPANY
            Coordination with the local utility company should be performed to determine points of utility metering
            requirements.  Single metering is preferred.

16.3.5    SERVICE ENTRANCE EQUIPMENT
         Service entrance equipment shall consist of a main switch or switches, a main circuit breaker or circuit
         breakers, or a main switchboard or panelboard.  In determining whether the service entrance equipment
         should be of the fused or circuit breaker type, careful consideration shall be given to the short-circuit current
         available at various points in the proposed distribution system.

16.3.5.1     SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS
            All service entrance equipment shall have copper busing. If the main service consists of a switchboard
            or panelboard, it shall have at least 10 percent of the switchboard rating as spare breaker or switches and
            20 percent of the rating as bused spaces. The electrical system shall be properly coordinated for selective
            tripping in order to permit removal of only that portion of the system that has experienced a fault or
            overload condition.

16.3.5.2     RENOVATION
            If this project is a renovation or an extension of an  existing building, the history of the loads shall be
            carefully studied to ensure that the existing service entrance equipment has sufficient capacity to handle
            the loads of the addition or renovation and has spare capacity for future loads.

                                                16-4

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines	;	February 1998
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements
16.4     Interior Electrical Systems

16.4.1     BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
          Electrical systems shall be designed so that all components operate within their capacities for initial and
          projected loads. Preferred standard voltages (per ANSI C84.1) shall be used, with a single voltage level
          characteristic in any classification, in order to minimize stocks of spare equipment and to standardize
          operating and maintenance practices and procedures. On-site acceptance testing shall be required for each
          major electrical system. Tests shall be performed in the presence of EPA personnel.  Copies of all test
          results shall be submitted for approval. All receptacles, switches, and wiring devices shall be specification
          grade. All safety switches shall be heavy duty. All equipment shall be new. Refer to subsection 16.13,
          Service Entrance, for requirements for electrical components located in various environmental conditions.

16.4.2     SERVICE EQUIPMENT
          All service entrance equipment shall be UL listed for use as service entrance equipment. All components
          shall be factory wired for switchboards, panelboards, or unit substations before shipment. Service entrance
          equipment shall be physically isolated from all emergency power systems so that a failure in either system
          will not affect the operation of the other system.  All service switchboards shall have factory-installed
          ammeters and voltmeters.

16.4.3     CONDUCTORS
          All conductors (wire and cable) shall be copper. All conductors for systems operating at 480 volts and below
          shall have 600-volt insulation with distinctive markings, as required by UL, for identification in the field.
          All conductors shall be continuous, without splices.  All conductors operating at 600 volts and above shall
          be insulated and shall have the appropriate voltage and insulation ratings as required by their location in
          the system and in the facility.  Branch circuit wiring shall not be smaller than No. 12 American Wire Gage
          (AWG.) All conductors shall be color coded to identify each phase and the neutral. The grounding
          conductor shall be green or bare.

16.4.4     RACEWAYS
          All electrical wiring shall be installed in conduit or raceway or shall be otherwise physically protected in
          accordance with the NEC. Conduit shall be at least V* inch. Conduits installed in stud partitions or above
          lay-in ceilings may be electrical metallic tubing (EMT). Conduit concealed in floor slab or in concrete
          masonry walls, or conduit run exposed 5.0 feet above finished floor, shall be of rigid galvanized steel.
          Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit may be used underground to feed site lighting and site power circuits; the
          remaining outdoor conduits shall be of PVC-coated rigid galvanized steel.

16.4.4.1     CONDUIT
            Service entrance conduits shall be concrete-encased P VC or PVC-coated rigid galvanized steel. Rigid
            galvanized steel conduit shall be used in hazardous areas,  as described by the  NEC, unless the
            environment is corrosive to steel conduit, in which case PVC conduit may be used. Aluminum conduit
            shall be used for high-frequency circuits, where steel will cause magnetic problems, or in atmospheres
            in which steel conduit is unsuitable. Aluminum conduit shall not be used underground, encased in
            concrete, or used in atmospheres that are corrosive to aluminum.

16.4.4.2     FLEXIBLE-METAL CONDUIT
            Liquid-tight flexible-metal conduit shall be used for connections to meters, transformers, pumps, and
            other equipment, as required by the NEC,  where vibration or movement can be a problem and where
            there is a need for protection from liquids, vapors, or solids.

16.4,4.3     RATED ASSEMBLIES
            Raceways that penetrate fire-rated assemblies shall be noncombustible. Openings shall be sealed to
            maintain the established fire ratings as defined by UL.

                                                16-5

-------
                                                                             Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998	and Planning Guidelines
                                                                    Section 16 - Electrical Requirements


16.4.4.4     SURFACE METAL RACEWAYS
            Surface metal raceways shall be used to provide receptacles with power and for low-potential sendees
            (e.g., data, telecommunications, wiring) in the laboratories themselves. The design professional shall
            review and make recommendations to EPA concerning the type of surface metal raceways appropriate
            to the project. The design professional shall consider using single-compartment surface metal raceways
            (2% inches high by VA inches deep, minimum size) where only power receptacles are required and
            double-compartment surface metal raceways (43/i inches high by 2Vi inches deep, minipnmt size) where
            both power receptacles and telecommunicadons/data outlets are required. Raceway covers shall be
            precut to 12-inch sections. The raceway shall be divisible into two or three separate wiring components
            to facilitate installation of power or low-potential wiring. The material and color of the raceway shall
            be appropriate to the atmosphere in which the raceway will be installed.

16.4.4.5     PLENUMS, DUCTS, AND OTHER AIR-HANDLING SPACES
            All wiring shall be in accordance with NEC Article 300, except that communication circuits (Article
            800) and Class 2 and Class 3 circuits (Article 725) need not be run in conduit when conductors are of
            materials that are classified  by  UL as  having  adequate fire-resistant and low smoke-producing
            characteristics.

16.4.5    HARMONICS
         The design of the electrical distribution system (both normal and emergency power) shall take into account
         the effects that harmonics from nonlinear loads can produce on the system. Harmonics from nonlinear loads
         can affect the capacities of the neutral conductor, panelboards, phase conductors, and emergency generators.
         "K" rated transformers shall be used where  the associated panelboards are feeding a large quantity of
         nonlinear loads. Special attention shall be given to the harmonics produced by variable-speed and variable-
         frequency drive units used for control of HVAC equipment

16.4.5.1     NEUTRAL CONDUCTOR
            The neutral conductors of four-wire system feeders), directly serving nonlinear  load shall be sized at
            double the amperes of the phase conductors through the entire interior electrical distribution system.
            The neutral conductors of 480/272-volt, four-wire feeders serving the lighting panels that control the
            electronic ballast fluorescent fixtures shall be sized at double the wire size  of the phase conductors.

16.4.6    DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT
         The facility may have special requirements with respect to ground fault protection on the main switchboard
         (such as two levels of ground fault). EPA shall be consulted concerning any special requirements above
         those required by the NEC. Ground fault protection shall be used in all laboratory areas where personnel
         are operating electrical equipment and are  exposed to electrical shock hazards while operating the
         equipment. Ground fault protection systems shall also be installed in areas where they are required by the
         Safety Manual.

16.4.6.1     TRANSFORMERS
            Transformers shall be located and installed in accordance with NEC Article 450 and in such a way as
            to minimize the fire and contamination hazards to the EPA facility and its occupants. The following
            requirements also apply:

            •  Whenever any public utility transformer or other equipment involves a dielectric fluid that is
               combustible, toxic, or otherwise hazardous, it shall not be  located inside an EPA facility.

            •  Utility transformer vaults or transformer locations abutting an EPA building shall conform to the
               requirements of the NEC.  Transformer equipment shall not be located adjacent to, or directly
               beneath, any exit.
                                                16-6

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines	\	February 1998
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements


            •   Transformers, fluorescent fixtures, and other electrical devices containing polychlorinatedbiphenyls
                (PCBs) shall not be used in EPA facilities.

            •   All transformers located within an EPA building shall be dry-type only, unless they are located
                within a transformer vault.

16.4.6.2     DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS
            Dry-type transformers shall be provided with four 2.5 percent taps, two above and two below rated
            primary voltage. All transformers shall be designed for continuous operation at not more than a 150
            degrees Celsius (°C) temperature rise, above 40°C ambient.  All transformers shall conform to the
            design, temperature-rise, testing, and other requirements specified by the Acoustical Society of America
            (ASA), NEMA, and IEEE standards and shall have a rated sound level of 45 decibels (dB) or below.
            To ensure against objectionable levels of noise being transmitted through the building, the dry-type
            transformers  shall be mounted on approved vibration-eliminating mountings.   Connection to
            transformers shall be  made with flexible steel conduit (Greenfield) with grounding jumper.  All
            transformers shall comply with the requirements of the Safety Manual. All dry-type transformers shall
            be designed for nonlinear loads and shall be isolated-type transformers. They shall not be K-rated and
            shall be shielded and located as close as possible to the load.  The designer shall consider the use of
            shielded isolation transformers or uninterruptible power supply (UPS) power for sensitive computer and
            other electronic equipment loads.

16.4.6.3     OUTSIDE SUBSTATIONS AND  TRANSFORMER INSTALLATIONS
            In addition to the requirements above, outside substations and transformers shall meet the following
            requirements:

            *   The installation of transformers should meet the most current requirements of Article 450 of the
                NEC.

            •   Transformers insulated with a dielectric fluid identified as nonflammable shall be permitted to be
                installed indoors or outdoors. If such transformers are  installed indoors, they shall be within a
                transformer vault and furnished with a liquid confinement area and a pressure relief vent.  A
                nonflammable dielectric fluid is one that does not have a flash point or fire point and is not
                flammable in air.

16.4.6.4     PANELBOARDS AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
            Panelboards and circuit breakers must meet the following requirements.

16.4.6.4.1          COMPLIANCE
                Panelboards shall comply with UL 67 and UL 50.  Panelboards for use as service-disconnecting
                means shall also conform to UL 869. Panelboards shall be equipped with a circuit breaker. Design
                shall be such that any individual breaker can be removed without disturbing adjacent units and
                without loosening or removing supplemental insulation supplied as a means of obtaining clearances
                as required by UL.  Where "space only" is indicated, provisions should  be made for the future
                installation of a breaker, which shall be sized as indicated.  All panelboard locks included in the
                project shall be keyed alike. All distribution panels serving fluorescent fixtures, laboratory room
                distribution panels, and any other panels serving nonlinear load shall be UL listed and labeled for
                nonlinear loads.

16.4.6.4.2          DIRECTORIES
                Directories shall be provided to indicate the load served by each circuit. These directories shall be
                typed and shall be mounted in a holder behind transparent protective covering.  Bus board shall be
                supported on bases independent of the circuit breakers. Main buses and back pans shall be designed
                so that breakers may be changed without machining, drilling, or tapping.  An isolated neutral bus

                                                16-7

-------
                                                                               Architecture, Engineering,
February1998                                                                   arid Planning Guidelines
                                                                      Section 16 - Electrical Requirements


                shall be provided in each panel for connection of circuit-neutral conductors. A separate ground bus
                marked with a yellow stripe along its front and bonded to the steel cabinet shall be provided for
                connecting grounding conductors. A separate ground bus marked with a green strip along its front
                and isolated from the panel cabinet shall be provided for connecting isolated insulated ground wires.

16.4.6.4.3          CIRCUIT BREAKERS
                Circuit breakers shall comply with Federal Specification W-C 375 and shall be thermal magnetic
                type with an interrupting capacity of 10,000 amperes symmetrical minimum.  Breaker terminals
                shall be UL listed as suitable for the type of conductor provided. Plug-in circuit breakers are not
                acceptable. Common trip-type multiple breakers with a single operating handle shall be provided.
                Breaker design shall be such that an overload in one pole automatically causes all poles to open.
                Phase sequences should be maintained throughout each panel so that any adjacent breaker poles are
                connected to phases A, B, and C, respectively. Circuit breakers should be provided with ground fault
                interrupter (UL 1053 and the NEC). In addition, circuit breakers should be provided with a push-to-
                test button, visible indication of tripped condition, and an ability to detect a current imbalance of
                approximately 5 milliamperes.

16.4.6.4.4          SHUNT TRIP BREAKERS
                Shunt trip breakers shall be provided in branch circuit panelboards, as designated by EPA, to remove
                power to laboratory modules or other areas or equipment upon activation of fire protection systems
                or devices in the immediate area.

16.4.6.5      LABORATORY MODULE
             Each laboratory module shall be provided with a separate 120/208-volt, three-phase,  four-wire
             panelboard.  The branch circuit system shall be as flexible as possible to accommodate any type of
             laboratory alteration. In addition, each laboratory module shall be provided with emergency power from
             an emergency power panelboard; the emergency power panelboard may serve more than one module.
             The panelboard should be rated for nonlinear loads.

16.4.6.6      WIRE CLOSETS
             Wire closets that leave passages between floors constitute shafts and shall be protected in accordance
             with local building codes and the Safety Manual. In any case where wire closet ventilation arrangements
             or other features cannot conform to the requirements for a shaft, all openings through the floor shall be
             fire-stopped (grouted).  In any  building where smoke control systems are likely to be involved, such
             additional fire stopping, or other methods to increase the smoke passage resistance of openings around
             doors or through wire passes, shall be provided as necessary to meet the needed level of efficiency for
             smoke control systems.

16.4.7    MOTOR CONTROLLERS AND DISCONNECTS
         Motor controllers and starters shall be provided for all motors and equipment containing motors.  All
         controllers shall have thermal-overload protection in each phase. Magnetic-type motor controllers shall
         have undervoltage protection when used with momentary-contact pushbutton stations or switches and shall
         have undervoltage release when used with maintained-contact pushbutton stations or switches.

         When used with a pressure, float, or similar automatic-type or maintained-contact switch, the controller
         shall have a hand-off-automatic selector switch. Connections to the selector switch shall be such that only
         the normal automatic regulatory-control devices will be bypassed when the switch is in the "hand" position.
         All safety control devices, such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, high-temperature cutouts, and motor-
         overload protective devices, shall be connected in the motor circuit in both the "hand" and the "automatic"
         positions. Control circuit connections to any hand-off-automatic selector switch or to more than one
         automatic regulatory-control device shall be made in accordance with a manufacturer-approved wiring
         diagram.  The selector switch shall be capable of locking in any position.
                                                 16-8

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines	February 1998
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements


         For each motor that is not in sight of the controller, either the controlled disconnecting means shall be
         capable of being locked in the open position or a manually operated, nonfused switch that will disconnect
         the motor from the source of supply shall be placed within sight of the motor location.

         Overload protective devices shall give adequate protection to the motor windings, shall be of the thermal
         inverse-time-limit type, and shall include a manual-reset pushbutton on the outside of the motor controller
         case. Hie cover of a combination motor controller and manual switch or circuit breaker shall be interlocked
         with the operating handle of the switch or circuit breaker so that the cover cannot be opened unless the
         handle of the switch or circuit breaker is in the off position. Variable-frequency drive units shall be
         considered  for larger HVAC equipment loads, and for other motor loads as feasible.  See Section 15,
         Mechanical Requirements, of this Manual for equipment to be used with variable-speed drives.

16.4.7.1     CONTROL EQUIPMENT
            Control equipment shall comply with the National Electrical Manufacturers  Association (NEMA)
            Industrial Controls and Systems (ICS) standards and with UL 508.  Single-phase motors may be
            controlled directly by automatic control devices of adequate rating. Automatically controlled polyphase
            motors and all polyphase motors rated greater than 1 horsepower (hp) shall have magnetic starters.
            Control devices shall be of adequate voltage and shall have an adequate current rating for the duty to
            be performed.  Pilot control circuits shall operate with one side grounded and at no greater than 120
            volts. Where control power transformers are required, they shall be located inside the associated motor
            starter housing, shall be protected against faults and overload by properly sized overcurrent devices, and
            shall be of sufficient capacity to serve all devices connected to them without overload. Reduced-voltage
            starters shall be provided for larger motors to avoid an unacceptable voltage dip when the motors are
            started.

16.4.7.2     SAFETY DISCONNECT  SWITCHES
            Safety disconnect switches  shall be provided for all hard-wired electrically operated equipment and
            motors in locations where they are required by code. Switches shall meet the requirements of Federal
            Specification W-S 865c and NEMA Type HD. Enclosure shall be NEMA I for indoor use and NEMA
            3R for exterior use. All safety switches shall be horsepower rated. The switches shall be of the quick-
            make quick-break type, and all parts shall be mounted on insulating base to permit replacement of any
            part from the  front of the  switch.  All current-carrying parts shall be of higher rated  load without
            excessive heating. Contacts shall be plated to prevent corrosion and oxidation and to ensure suitable
            conductivity.

16.4.7.2.1          GROUND FAULT PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT
               With the exception of emergency systems, systems carrying 150 volts or greater to ground and not
               exceeding 600 volts phase-to-phase shall be provided with ground fault protection for each service-
               disconnecting means rated 1,000 amperes or more.  Necessary precautions shall, however, be taken
               to minimize the possibility of nuisance tripping.  In addition, all buses or other conductors at motor
               control centers, switchgear, switchboards, and busways shall be insulated or isolated.

16.4.7.2.2          GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTER PROTECTION FOR PERSONNEL
               At a minimum, ground fault circuit interrupter (GFCI) protection shall be provided for all 125-volt,
               single-phase, 15- and 20-ampere receptacles located outdoors; elevator electrical systems; as required
               by NEC Article 620  and the National Research Council's Prudent Practices; and receptacles
               installed on roofs. GFCI protection shall also be required in the following circumstances:

               •  In any location where EPA personnel are operating electrical equipment in direct contact with
                  water or other liquids or where electrical receptacles are installed within 6 feet of a sink provided
                  with a plumbed water supply or a drain, tub, or other water source.

               *  If GFCI protection is prescribed for electrical equipment by the equipment's manufacturer.

                                                16-9

-------
                                                                              Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998                                                                   and Planning Guidelines
                                                                     Section 16 - Electrical Requirements


                •   If previous experience indicates a need for GFCI protection.

                This protection shall be provided in new and existing construction by means of interrupter devices
                incorporated in receptacles or circuit breakers. These GFCI receptacles may be terminating type or
                feed-through type, whichever will satisfy the need.  GFCI receptacles shall be color coded or shall
                otherwise indicate GFCI protectioa Scheduled testing of the GFCI is required in accordance with
                the manufacturer's recommendations, but not less than semiannually.

16.4.7.2.3           REMOVAL OF GFCI CIRCUITS
                Existing circuits with GFCI protection shall remain unless persistent problems are encountered or
                unless renovations occur that would alter the use so that GFCI protection is not necessary.  An
                example of such a renovation would be converting an aquatic laboratory to office space.  Upon
                completion of the initial installation, the electrical ground system shall be checked or verified for
                continuity with the conduit system, the equipment housing, and the final connection to the receptacle
                grounding stud. In aquatic laboratories and other required areas, not only will the GFCI-protective
                device be installed in the receptacle, but also the receptacles will be connected to the grounded
                system.

16.4.7.3      MOTOR CONTROL CENTER
             Where several motors (all of larger-than-fractional horsepower) are located in one room or space, a
             motor control center should be used. Busing in the control center should be arranged so that the center
             can be expanded from both ends. Bus shall be of silver-plated copper.  Interconnecting wires shall be
             copper. Terminal blocks should be of the plug-in type so that controllers may be removed without
             disconnecting individual control wiring.

16.4.8    GROUNDING
         The grounding system for the facility shall be permanent, effective, and complete from the service entrance
         to most electrical devices.  The grounding system shall conform to the mandatory and applicable advisory
         rules of NEC Article 250. In addition, green insulated copper ground wire shall be connected between each
         laboratory electrical outlet and the feeder panel isolated ground bus.  This conductor shall be sized in
         accordance with NEC Table 250-95. Grounding systems shall comply with the NEC and IEEE 142. A
         separate ground conductor shall be used.  Raceway systems shall not be used as a ground path.

16.4.8.1      LABORATORY BUILDING MODULE GROUNDING
             In addition to the grounding indicated above, all laboratory building modules shall have a bare earth
             copper ground grid or field, direct buried outside, to provide an isolated ground for instrumentation.
             This ground system (and any other isolated ground system required for special areas) shall be clearly
             identified and protected against improper usage. All building ground systems shall be tied together as
             required by NEC Article 250.

16.4.8.2      GROUND BUS
             Every panelboard and switchboard in the facility shall be provided with a ground bus.

16.4.9    LABORATORY POWER REQUIREMENTS
         See the room data sheets for specific and generic laboratory room requirements.  Specific and generic
         electrical requirements are indicated for most spaces. In the design of a new facility, however, these
         requirements must be reviewed, verified, and tested with the appropriate EPA representatives and must gain
         approval from EPA. This reviewing, verification, and testing should occur during the program verification
         and design phase  of the project. Refer to subsections 16.4.6.4 and 16.4.8.1 above for requirements for
         panelboard and grounding requirements for laboratory modules, respectively. In addition, the following
         requirements apply:
                                                16-10

-------
Architecture, Engineering.
and Planning Guidelines	February 1998
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements


         •  All 120-volt general convenience receptacles shall be rated a minimum of 20 amperes and shall be
            grounding type (NEMA S-20R) and specification grade.

         •  120-volt circuits shall have a minimum rating of 20 amperes.

         •  A maximum of four general convenience receptacles shall be connected to a circuit

         •  Equipment such as refrigerators, freezers, and centrifuges shall each have individual dedicated circuits.

         •  Receptacles for 6-foot-Iong or longer fume hoods shall be alternately wired for two circuits.

         •  Receptacles located within 6 feet of a sink shall be GFCI type.

         *  All branch circuits  or panelboard feeder conduit runs shall be provided with separate equipment
            grounding conductors sized per NEC Table 250-95.

         •  Each laboratory shall be provided with separate, dedicated 120/208-volt, three-phase, four-wire
            panelboards; panelboards shall be spaced at a maximum spacing of one panelboard every two modules.
            Additional panelboards shall be provided as required by electrical usage or as directed by the EPA
            project officer.

         •  Each laboratory panelboard shall be provided with a separate ground bus.

         *  Receptacles that are located above wall or island benches and at equipment spaces shall be in surface
            metal raceways wherever possible. Raceways shall be single compartment or double compartment (for
            both power and telecommunications/data) as directed by the EPA project officer.

         »  In accordance with NEMA 14-30R, 30-ampere, 125/250-volt single-phase receptacles will be provided
            for 30-ampere, 208-volt single-phase equipment.

         •  One receptacle on a  dedicated 20-ampere, 120-volt emergency power circuit shall be provided in each
            laboratory.  Emergency power shall also be provided for special equipment requiring such power.

         •  UPS systems within  the computer/data-processing rooms and laboratories and their supply and output
            circuits shall comply with NEC Article 645-10.


16.5    Interior Lighting System

16.5.1    ILLUMINATION LEVELS
         The  minimum acceptable  levels of maintained illumination shall be  as indicated in Table 16.5.1,
         Illumination Levels, for the particular areas.  For areas not listed in Table 16.5.1, the recommendations of
         the Institute of Environmental Science (IBS) handbooks shall be followed.
                                                16-11

-------
February 1998
                                                  Architecture, Engineering,
                                                    and Planning Guidelines
                                                                    Section 16 - Electrical Requirements
Table 16.5.1 Illumination Levels
FUNCTION
                               FOOTCANDLES
                           FUNCTION
FOOTCANDLES
General office space                          50
Animal room                                 70
Autopsy                                    100
Boiler room                                  20
Corridors                                    25
Emergency lighting (general)                    3
Emergency lighting in laboratory blocks           5
Examination                                100
Laboratories (dual switching)           .    50/100
Loading dock                                20
Lobby                                      50
Locker rooms                                20
Shops (dual switching)                    50/100
General office and record rooms                50
Parking, driveway, and walkways              1-3
                           Stairways                                   20
                           Storage
                            Inactive                                    5
                            Rough bulky                               10
                            Medium                                   20
                            Fine                                      50
                           Telephone equipment room                    70
                           Toilets                                      30
                           Exterior entrances                             5
                           Desk level (task lighting)                  70-100
                           Utility rooms                                 20
                           X-ray                                       10
                           Parking decks                                5
                           Library-conference rooms (dual switching)   50/100
Note:
al illumination 30 inches above the floor.
16.5.2    LIGHTING CONTROLS
         Switches shall be provided to control lighting in all areas. Large rooms (more than 200 square feet) shall
         have multiple switching to reduce the lighting level by approximately half.

16.5.2.1     DAYLIGHT-LEVEL SENSORY CONTROLS
            In building areas (except laboratories) that are larger than 200 square feet and that will have a large
            contribution of natural daylight, daylight-level sensory controls shall be used to control lighting levels.

16.5.2.2     BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEMS
            In buildings  with building automation systems (HAS), the BAS (in addition to light switches) shall
            control overall building lighting. Each floor shall be a separate control zone with appropriate subzoning
            of each floor for special functions.

16.S.2.3     OCCUPANCY SENSORS
            Occupancy sensors shall be provided (in addition to switches) to control lighting in offices and smaller
            rooms, bath and locker areas, and conference rooms.

16.5.3    LAMPS AND BALLASTS
         Electrical  discharge lamps and high-intensity discharge (HID)  lamps should be  the primary lamps
         considered in the selection of the illumination concept.  The lighting system shall use, to the maximum
         extent feasible, energy-efficient fixtures with electronic high-frequency ballasts, T-S fluorescent lamps, and
         high-quality light reflectors and lenses.  The use of filament light sources should be kept to an absolute
         minimum (i.e., only in spaces that do not have a need for high levels of illumination, that are normally
         occupied only for short durations, and for which discharge lamps are not suitable).  Where fluorescent lamps
         will be utilized, these lamps shall be of the T-8 type to conserve energy.

16.5.3.1     INDOOR HID LIGHTING
            In using HID lighting indoors, the required color rendition shall be carefully considered from both visual
            and health safety perspectives.
                                               16-12

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines                                           	              February 1998
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements


16.5.3.2     BALLASTS
                                               16-13

-------
                                                                               Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998	     and Planning Guidelines
                                                                      Section 16 - Electrical Requirements


             All ballasts to be used on this project shall be of the energy-saving type (electronic high-frequency
             ballasts shall be used in all possible locations).

16.5.3.3      LIGHT FIXTURE SELECTION
             The selection of light fixtures should involve careful consideration of the quality of construction, ease
             of maintenance, ease of relamping, efficiency, illumination characteristics, mounting technique, and
             special purpose characteristics (e.g., vapoiproof, explosion-proof, elimination of radio frequency
             interferences).

16.5.4    EMERGENCY LIGHTING (BATTERY UNITS)
         An emergency lighting system shall be provided in accordance with. NEC Article 700 and arranged to
         provide a minimum of 3 footcandles of illumination (measured at floor level) throughout the path of egress,
         including exit access routes, exit stairways, and other routes, such as exit passageways to the outside of the
         building.

         •   Laboratories and large open areas such as cafeterias; assembly areas; large mechanical, electrical, and
             storage rooms; and open-plan office spaces where exit access is normally through the major portion of
             the areas shall be provided with emergency lighting. In addition, emergency lighting systems shall be
             provided in any location where chemicals are stored, handled, or used and in large computer rooms.

         •   The emergency lighting in laboratory rooms should provide  at least  5 footcandles of illumination,
             measured at the exit access door.

         •   The type of system used shall be such that it will operate in the event of any failure of a public utility or
             internal disruption of the normal power distribution system in a building.

         •   Buildings of seven stories or less may be powered from connections to two separate substations from a
             reliable public utility. Automatic transfer switching shall be provided for the emergency power supply.

         •   The emergency lighting shall be connected to a generator, when a generator is provided. In buildings
             where there is no emergency generator, battery backup shall be provided for egress and emergency
             lighting. This battery backup may be by unit-type battery fixtures, battery packs in fluorescent fixtures,
             or use of inverters. Where HID lamps are used (and connected to a generator), a standby lighting system
             shall be provided to meet emergency lighting requirements during HID lamp restrike periods.

16.5.5    ENERGY CONSERVATION
         EPA seeks to minimize energy use dedicated to electric lighting and the resulting cooling loads through
         proper use of natural lighting in the facility. In effect, it seeks a well-integrated lighting system for its new
         buildings that makes optimum use of both natural and artificial lighting sources and balances the buildings'
         heating and cooling needs. A lighting-power budget shall be determined, in conformance with ASHRAE
         90, and strictly adhered to in the design of the lighting for each facility. This budget may be exceeded in
         laboratory areas and in shops where a  higher level of illumination is required because of the type of work
         being performed.

16.5.6    GREEN LIGHTS
         All design of lighting for EPA facilities shall be in accordance with the EPA Green Lights Program.

16.5.7    GLARE
         The selection of the type of diffuser and lens to be used on the lighting fixtures shall take into account the
         glare that can be produced on the work surface. All lighting design shall minimize the effects of glare on
         the task surface. Indirect lighting shall be used wherever possible.

16.5.7.1      LIGHT FIXTURE LOCATION

                                                 16-14

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines	February 1998
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements


            In locating lighting fixtures, consideration must be given to the fact that many of the surfaces in the
            facility (especially in laboratory areas) have highly reflective materials at the task location.  Fixtures
            should be located to keep glare to a minimum.

16.S.8    AUTOMATIC DATA PROCESSING AREAS
         Lighting fixture types, location, and illumination levels shall be coordinated with the equipment and
         functions of the telecommunications, alarm, and automatic data processing (ADP) centers to provide the
         required illumination without: •

         •  interfering with prompt identification of self-illuminated indicating devices
         •  Creating reflecting glare that might detract from adequate observations of essential equipment
         *  Creating electrical or electromagnetic interference detrimental to proper operation of equipment


16.6    Fire Safety Requirements for Lighting Fixtures
         Lighting fixtures shall comply with the NEC and the following criteria.

16.6.1    MOUNTING
         All lamps shall be mounted in a way that prevents direct contact between the lamp and any combustible
         material. Wherever accidental contact is remotely possible, the lamp shall be protected by a guard, globe,
         reflector, fixture, or other protective means (NEC Article 410).

16.6.2    FLUORESCENT FIXTURES
         All fluorescent fixtures installed indoors shall be provided with ballasts that have integral thermal overload
         protection (NEC Article 410).

16.6.3    LIGHT DIFFUSERS
         Light difiusers shall be either of noncombustible material or of a design or material that will drop from the
         fixture before ignition.   Where combustible dropout-type fixtures  are used, plastic material shall not
         constitute more than 30 percent of the total ceiling area. Where luminous or difiuser ceilings are used, these
         restrictions also apply.

16.6.4    LOCATION
         Lighting in locations where dangerous gases, liquids, dusts, or fibers may exist shall meet the requirements
         of NEC Article 500.
16.7    Exterior Lighting Systems

16.7.1    GENERAL
         Exterior lighting systems shall comply with the IES lighting handbook. System controls shall use a time
         clock and/or photocell to provide illumination only when needed. In buildings with a BAS (building
         automation system), exterior lighting shall be switched by photocells in series with timers and the BAS
         system.

16.7.1.1     EXTERIOR LIGHT GLARE
            Light glare shall be kept to a minimum in situations where it would impede effective operations of
            protective force personnel; interfere with rail, highway, or navigable water traffic; or be objectionable
            to occupants of adjacent properties.

16.7.1.2     HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE LAMPS
            Maximum use shall be made of HID lamps such as metal halide or high-pressure sodium vapor lamps.
                                              16-15

-------
                                                                            Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998                                                                 and Planning Guidelines
                                                                   Section 16 - Electrical Requirements


16.7.1.3     EARLY HOURS LIGHTING
            Consideration shall be given to reducing the amount of light in parking lot areas daring times (early
            morning hours 12:00 AM to 4:30 AM) when it is very unlikely that the lots will be in use. EPA personnel
            at the site shall be contacted before this is made a pan of the design.

16.7.2    PARKING LOT LIGHTING
         Lighting over driveways and parking areas shall consist of a complete HID lighting system, including
         control equipment, underground wiring, luminaries, and all necessary accessories for a complete and
         functioning system.  The maintained level of illumination shall be at least 1 to 3 footcandles.

16.7.3    BUILDING FACADE LIGHTING
         Appropriate lighting shall be provided at each exterior door and for functional and security illumination of
         exterior programmed areas.

16.7.4    TRAFFIC CONTROL LIGHTING
         If the facility is on a  site where traffic controls are necessary and will not be provided by the local
         municipality or state transportation authority, a complete traffic control system for the facility shall be
         designed, including all stoplights, directional lights, controls, and wiring, for a complete operating system.

16.7.5    ROADWAY LIGHTING
         All new access roadways, or continuations of loop or access roadways, and driveways shall be lighted. The
         maintained level of illumination shall be at least 1 to 3 footcandles on vehicular roadways and pedestrian
         walkways.  The same type of lighting that is used for parking lots (HID source) shall be used for roadways.

16.7.6    EXTERIOR ELECTRIC SIGNS
         All exterior electric signs and nonelectric signs shall be integrated into the total design of the facility and
         approved by the COR.


16.8    Emergency Power System

16.8.1    GENERAL
         An emergency power system shall be designed and provided for all administrative and laboratory space.
         The system shall provide electric power in the event of loss of normal power and shall provide power for
         emergency and egress lighting. The system shall also supply power to critical equipment during planned
         outages for maintenance. The emergency power system shall comply with NFPA37,theNEC,NFPA101,
         NFPA 110, and IEEE 446.

16.8.1.1     BATTERY-TYPE LIGHTING
            In smaller buildings when the emergency power system is installed primarily for egress lighting, battery-
            type lighting units shall be used.

16.8.1.2     EMERGENCY POWER
            In facilities where the emergency power needs are larger than can be handled by battery packs, an
            emergency generator shall be supplied. This emergency power system shall be composed of a diesel
            engine-driven generator equipped with phase-synchronized automatic transfer switch or switches and
            with necessary controls for automatic operation.  If the loads and the availability of natural gas allow,
            a natural gas generator  shall be considered.  All automatic  transfer switches shall be of the
            isolation/bypass type. The generators) shall transfer and pick up the critical load(s) within 10 seconds.
            The system shall be able to cany a continuous full load for not less than 24 hours. The exhaust and fuel
            pipe vents shall be arranged and located away from fresh-air intakes. The exhaust shall be located where
            maximum dilution can be accomplished. The generator shall be designed to handle nonlinear loads plus
            25 percent spare capacity. The generator shall be water cooled.

                                               16-16

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines	February 1998
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements



                Table 16.8.1, Emergency Power Requirements, outlines the emergency power requirements for
                different building heights and particular fire safety systems.  Generators are not required by these
                criteria unless an analysis of the cost of installation and maintenance of acceptable emergency power
                sources shows that a generator is the most cost-effective power source. Automatic switching schemes
                shall be provided for all emergency power sources.  Where emergency generators are used, their
                installation shall be in accordance with NFPA 110 and NEC Article 700.

 Table 16.8.1 Emergency Power Requirements

                                                             Acceptable Sources of Emergency Power*
                                                             Building Height*       Building Height *
 Emergency System  	 	75 Feet or Less  	 Over 75 Feet
Emergency lighting (1V4 hours)
Exit lighting (1!4 hours)
Fire alarm
Fire pump
Jockey pump
Elevator
Smoke control
Sprinkler system air compressor
Special extinguishing system power supply (dry chemical,
CO2, or other EPA-approved system)
Fume hoods (full or partial containment or where deemed
necessary)
1.2.3
1, 2, 3
1.3
N.R.
N.R.
N.R.
—
N.R.
N.R.
1.2
1.3
1,3
1,3
1.2
1.2
1. y
N.R.
N.R.
N.R.
1.2
 Note:  1 = Generator; 2 ^Qnnectioaeitliv to two sepanteprimaiy source
 N.R. = Not Required.

 * Power source must be capable of providing power to one elevator on a selective basts when the building contains six or fewer elevators.
   Otherwise, two elevators must be supplied on a selective basis.
 ' The building height for application of the criteria shall be determined by measurement of the distance from grade level of the lowest
   accessible floor to ceiling height of the highest occupied floor in the building. Mechanical rooms and penthouse are not considered
   occupied floors in this case.	
16.8.1.3      EMERGENCY GENERATOR LOCATION
             The preferable location for the generator is outdoors. The location should be such that the generator will
             be hidden from view and should be to the rear of the main facility. The generator should be placed over
             vibration isolators and should make use of noise dampers and other devices, as required, to substantially
             attenuate noise and vibration resulting from its operation. The generator shall be equipped with a low-
             noise exhaust silencer (hospital or critical type) and weatherproof housing.

16.8.1.4      ECONOMIC ANALYSIS
             For all installations where a generator is provided, an economic analysis shall be done to determine the
             economic feasibility of including load-shedding or peak-shaving equipment as part of the installation.
             EPA will provide instructions on the possible inclusion of this item in the project after the economic
             analysis has been completed.

16.8.1.5      FUEL STORAGE TANK
             If a diesel-type generator is used, the system shall be provided with a fuel storage tank that is capable
             of carrying a continuous full load for not less than 24 hours.  The preferred type of tank is an
             aboveground storage tank.  If allowed by EPA, the tank may be installed underground.  If so, the tank


                                                  16-17

-------
February 1998
Architecture, Engineering,
 and Planning Guidelines
                                                                     Section 16 - Electrical Requirements
            shall be of double-wall construction and  of noncorrosive material with interstitial  monitoring
            capabilities. The tank shall meet all of the interim prohibition (40 CFR §280.1) requirements or the
            most current promulgated rules effective on the date of installation.  Cathodic protection shall be
            installed for protecting all metal parts of underground fuel storage tanks.

16.8.2    EMERGENCY LOADS
         In addition to the loads required by NFPA 101, NEC, and the room data sheets, the following loads shall
         be connected to the emergency power system:

            One receptacle in each laboratory
            Fire alarm system
            Exit lights
            Emergency lighting system—3 footcandles minimum for egress; 10 footcandles at switchboards
            Special laboratory equipment
            Telephone relay system
            Controlled-temperature rooms
            Certain HVAC systems (as required by the applicable state and local codes and as directed by EPA)
            Critical sump pumps and other associated mechanical equipment and controls
            All animal care facilities
            Local HVAC air compressors for special rooms
            Paging system
            Selected elevators (as required by the applicable state and local codes and as directed by EPA)
            Gas chromatograph
            Selected refrigerators and freezers (as directed by EPA)
            Incubators
            X-ray fluorescent analyzer
            UPS system
            Air-conditioning system associated with computer rooms and environmental rooms
            Security systems
            Safety alarm systems.

16.8.3    UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY
         A UPS system shall be provided for loads requiring guaranteed continuous power. The application of UPS
        . systems shall comply with  IEEE 446.  UPS equipment can  be of the rotary or stationary  type.  A
         recommendation shall be made concerning the appropriate type of system for a particular facility. UPS
         equipment shall be provided with multiple power supplies (normal power, static switch bypass power, and
         total system bypass power). The UPS system shall be sized to provide at least 5 minutes of protection upon
         loss of normal power. Total system bypass power shall include an isolation transformer. All components
         shall be UL listed.  The supplied UPS system shall be specified to operate properly with an emergency
         generator.

16.8.3.1     MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS
            The UPS system shall operate continuously  and in conjunction with the existing building electrical
            system to provide precise power for critical equipment loads.  The static system shall consist of a solid-
            state inverter, a rectifier/battery charger, a storage battery, a static bypass transfer switch, synchronizing
            circuitry, and an internal maintenance bypass  switch.  The rotary system shall include a solid-state
            inverter, a battery charger, a storage battery, an automatic transfer assembly, an internal (automatic)
            bypass switch, and a low-voltage transient synchronous generator. The UPS system, along with the
            supporting equipment, shall be housed in dedicated room(s) under controlled environmental conditions
            that meet the manufacturer's recommendations and code requirements.

16.8.3.2     CODES, STANDARDS, AND DOCUMENTS
            The UPS shall be designed in accordance with the applicable codes and standards of the following:
                                                16-18

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines	;	February 1998
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements


                NEMA
                IEEE inverter standards
                ASA
                American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)
                National Electrical Code
                Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)
                Local codes.

16.8.3.3     ON-LINE REVERSE TRANSFER SYSTEM
            The UPS shall be designed to operate as an on-line-reverse transfer system in the following modes:

            •   Normal (Static).  The critical  load shall be  continuously supplied by  the inverter.   The
                rectifier/battery charger shall derive power from the utility alternating current (AC) source and
                supply direct current (DC) power to the inverter while simultaneously float-charging the battery.

            •   Normal (Rotary). The critical load shall receive power from the utility company to the motor-
                generator set, which powers the critical load and charges the batteries.

            •   Emergency (Static). Upon failure of the utility AC power source, the critical load shall be supplied
                by the inverter, which, without any switching, obtains its power from the storage battery. There shall
                be no interruption to the critical load upon failure or restoration of the utility AC source.

            *   Emergency (Rotary). Upon failure of the utility AC power source, the control logic shall turn on the
                inverter and provide AC power from the battery to the motor-generator set and from the motor-
                generator set to the critical load. The inverter shall be capable of full-power operation within 50
                milliseconds afterjoss of utility power.

            •   Recharge. Upon restoration of the utility AC source (prior to complete discharge of the battery), the
                rectifier/battery charger powers the inverter and simultaneously recharges the battery. This shall be
                an automatic function and shall cause no interruption to the critical load.

            •   Bypass mode.  If the UPS must be taken out of seiviix for inaintenance or repair of internal failures,
                the static bypass transfer switch shall be used to transfer the load to the alternate source without
                interruption.  Automatic retransfer or forward transfer of the load shall be accomplished after the
                UPS  inverter  synchronizes to the  alternate bypass AC input source.  Once the sources are
                synchronized, the static bypass transfer switch shall forward transfer the load front the bypass input
                source to the UPS inverter output by paralleling the two loads and then disconnecting the bypass AC
                input source. Overlap shall be limited to one-half cycle.

            •   Maintenance bypass/test  Internal switches shall be provided to isolate the UPS inverter output and
                static bypass transfer switch output from the AC bypass input source and the load. The switches, in
                conjunction with the staticbypass transfer switch, shall enable the lead to be reverse-transferred from
                the UPS inverter output to the AC bypass input source without interruption.  The switches shall
                enable  the UPS inverter and static bypass transfer switch to be tested without affecting load
                operation.

            •   Downgrade. If only the battery will be taken out of service for maintenance, it shall be disconnected
                from the rectifier/battery charger and inverter by means of an external battery disconnect.  The UPS
                shall  continue to function as specified herein, except for power outage protection and transient
                characteristics.

16.8.3.4     UPS OUTPUT
            The UPS output shall have the following characteristics:

                                                 16-19

-------
February 1998
Architecture, Engineering,
 and Planning Guidelines
                                                                     Section 16 - Electrical Requirements


            •   Frequency: 60 hertz (Hz) nominal +0.5 Hz (when synchronized to the bypass AC input source).

            •   Output voltage transient characteristics for

                -   25 percent load step change +4 percent
                -   50 percent load step change +6 percent
                •   100 percent load step change +10 percent/-8 percent

            •   Output voltage transient response: The system output voltage shall return to within +1 percent of
                the steady state value within 30 milliseconds.

            •   Output voltage regulation: The steady state output voltage shall not deviate by more than +1.0
                percent from no load to full load.

16.8.3.5     OUTPUT FREQUENCY REGULATION
            The UPS shall be capable of providing the nominal output frequency +0.1 percent when the UPS inverter
            is not synchronized (free running) to the AC bypass input line.   •

16.8.3.6     SYSTEM OVERLOAD
            System overload is a load of at least 125 percent of the system rating for aperiod of 10 niinutes, and 150
            percent current for 1 minute. Overloads in excess of 170 percent of the UPS rating, on an instantaneous
            basis, or in excess of the overload time periods previously stated shall cause the static bypass transfer
            switch to reverse-transfer and allow the AC bypass input source to supply the necessary fault-clearing
            current After approximately 5 seconds, the static bypass transfer switch shall automatically forward-
            transfer, and normal UPS operation shall resume.  If the overload still exists after the 5-second period,
            the static bypass transfer switch shall automatically reverse-transfer the load to the AC bypass input
            source and the UPS inverter shall turn off. The system shall require manual restart after this sequence.

16.8.3.7     SYSTEM EFFICIENCY
            The overall efficiency, input to output, shall be at least 95 percent with the battery fully charged and the
            inverter supplying full-rated load.

16.8.3.8     LOCATIONS AND LOADS
            The UPS system shall be located in special rooms or in the same room as computer equipment.  These
            rooms shall have special HVAC equipment to maintain the proper environmental conditions for the UPS
            system and its batteries both under normal conditions and during a power outage.

16.8.3.8.1          UPS LOAD
                The UPS load will consist of the equipment and outlets designated for UPS power connection in the
                room data sheets.

16.8.3.8.2          BATTERY ROOM
                The battery room for the UPS shall be well ventilated so as not to allow  an explosive mixture of
                hydrogen to accumulate. A minimum air change rate of six air changes per hour is required. These
                battery rooms shall contain all devices required by the Safety Manual (including mechanical
                ventilation, an emergency eyewash station, and a fire/smoke sensing device). An exhaust fan, roof
                ventilator, or ducted in-line fan should be used for ventilation.  The fan shall be connected to the
                normal (e.g., utility) power system.  Makeup air shall be provided and should be filtered. The
                mechanical ventilation system for a UPS room shall be monitored to ensure that any failure is
                detected promptly. The system may be designed  so that failure triggers  a wanting from the fire
                alarm system of an audible alarm at a constantly attended location.  The ventilation requirements
                in  this subsection are not meant to apply to sealed battery units that are provided for specific
                equipment.  The installation of the UPS system shall be in accordance with NFPA 111. An
                                                16-20

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines	February 1998
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements


               emergency eyewash station, isolated from electrical power sources, shall be provided in battery
               rooms, and an emergency shower shall be nearby. Explosion-proof wiring, however, is normally not
               required in battery rooms.  A fire- or smoke-sensing device shall be installed in battery rooms.
               Selection of this device should be appropriate to the design of the battery room.


16.9    Lightning Protection System

16.9.1    MINIMUM SCOPE
         A lightning protection system shall be provided for all facilities containing laboratory modules, as well as
         for facilities containing radioactive or explosive materials. The requirements and installation criteria for
         lightning protection systems shall be in accordance with NFPA 780, UL 96A, and the local building code.

16.9.2    ADDITIONAL SCOPE
         For building types not in the above description, the guide in NFPA 780 shall be used to assess the risk of
         loss due to lightning.

16.9.3    MASTER LABEL
         For buildings described in subsection 16.9.1 and for facilities with a strong risk potential (per NFPA 780),
         equipment, accessories, and material necessary for a complete master-labeled lightning protection system
         for all building components should be furnished and installed. The system shall comply with NFPA 780,
         UL 96A, and Lightning Protection Institute (LPI) 175. All cables, lightning rods, and accessories shall be
         copper. All connections and splices shall be of the exothermic weld type.

16.9.3.1     MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS
            The installed system shall be  unobtrusive, with conductors built during construction (so they are
            concealed).  The system shall also be properly flashed and watertight  Installation shall be done in
            conformance with shop drawings prepared by the supplier and approved by the Government.

16.9.3.2     CERTIFICATION DELIVERY
            Before  the lightning protection system is accepted, the contractor shall obtain and deliver to the
            supervising architect the UL master label or an equivalent certification.


16.10   Seismic Requirements

16.10.1   SEISMIC  REVIEW
         The design ad construction of all new EPA facilities shall comply with those standards and practices that
         are substantially equivalent to, or exceed, the National Earthquake Hazard Reduction Program (NEHRP)
         Recommended Provisions for the Development of Seismic Regulations for New Buildings.


16.11   Automatic Data Processing Power Systems

16.11.1   ISOLATION OF ADP SYSTEMS
         Adverse effects that voltage level variations, transients,  and frequency variations may have on ADP
         equipment  shall be minimized. ADP equipment shall be isolated as needed for protection. UPS or power
         distribution units (PDUs) may be used for isolation.

16.11.2   COMPUTER POWER
         All computer power shall enter the UPS room or computer room at 480 volts and feed 120/208-volt UPS
         or PDUs that have monitoring capabilities with some transient protection.  PDU shall limit the cable runs


                                              16-21

-------
                                                                           Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998                                                                 and Planning Guidelines
                                                                  Section 16 - Electrical Requirements


         to 100 feet from the PDU to the ADP equipment The user will provide a list of equipment cable types and
         plug types. All circuits shall have separate neutrals.  All UPS units and PDUs shall be connected to a
         central monitoring and control system.

16.11.3   POWER PANELBOARDS AND DISTRIBUTION PANELS
         All individual power panelboards not exceeding 200 amperes shall have meters for the main breaker, with
         readouts on panel. All main distribution panels shall have meters on all breakers. Non-UPS/PDU outlets
         shall be spaced every 20 feet around the computer room for utility use (vacuums, drills, etc.).

16.11.4   LIGHTING
         Under-floor lights with cutoff timer(s) shall be installed in computer room(s). Room lighting for computer
         rooms shall be either indirect lighting, to reduce glare on terminal screens, or overhead lighting of the
         parabolic type, to reduce eye strain.

16.11.5   GROUNDING
         All computer power shall be grounded to a large single-point ground within the raised floor system grid
         (bolt-in type).


16.12   Cathodic Protection

16.12.1   INVESTIGATION AND RECOMMENDATION
         An investigation shall be conducted and a determination made, on whether cathodic protection is required.
         for buried utilities. If a cathodic protection system is required, a system shall be recommended to satisfy
         the local conditions. The  cathodic protection system shall be designed by a design professional who is
         National Association of Corrosion Engineers (NACE) certified and has 2 to 3 years* experience in similar
         installations.
16.13   Environmental Considerations (Raceways, Enclosures)

16.13.1   CORROSIVE ATMOSPHERE
         Special consideration shall be given to the type of raceways to be used in corrosive environments (such as
         chemical storage areas, some laboratories, and areas near air-handling exhausts for spaces with corrosive
         fumes).  All raceways to be used in corrosive atmospheres shall be deemed suitable by the raceway
         manufacturer for the atmosphere in which they will be installed.

16.13.1.1    EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURES
            The enclosures for electrical equipment (e.g., panels, switches, breakers) shall have the proper NEMA
            rating for the atmosphere in which the equipment is being installed.

16.13.2   SALTWATER ATMOSPHERE
         Careful consideration shall be given to the type of materials to be used for exterior electrical work (including
         lighting) when the facility is located near or in a coastal area.  Salt air can have a detrimental (corrosive)
         effect on steel and any painted electrical surfaces. The use of EMT or any thin wall  raceways in the interior
         of the building should also be weighed carefully because storage of these materials outside of the building
         (or storage or installation in the building before it is fully enclosed) could result in corrosion.

16.13.3   EXTREME COLD
         Electrical equipment such as emergency generators, transformers, and switch gear installed in weatherproof
         enclosures of  the facility that are subject to  extremely  cold temperatures should be provided with
         supplemental heating within the enclosures.


                                              16-22

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines                                                                 February 1998
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements


16.13.4   EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERE
         In all areas where atmospheres contain combustible materials, all electrical equipment, including raceways,
         fittings, and boxes, shall be designed in accordance with NEC Article 500. Steps shall be taken to control
         or eliminate static electricity in areas where materials that are ignitable by static spark discharge are
         processed or handled.  These materials include spark-sensitive explosives, propellants, and pyrotechnics,
         as well as solvent vapors and flammable gases.  Electrical wiring, fittings, boxes, and devices located at
         exhaust fens that are exhausting areas containing combustible materials shall also be designed in accordance
         with NEC Article 500.

16.13.5   FLOODPLAIN AREAS
         Electrical equipment shall not be located below grade in facilities sited in floodplain areas. Emergency
         generators shall be located so that they are not subject to water damage due to flooding. Normal power
         equipment (floor mounted) located at grade level in floodplain areas shall be placed on at least 6 inches of
         housekeeping pads (higher if water level will reach the equipment on 6-inch pads).


16.14   Communication Systems

16.14.1   TELECOMMUNICATIONS/DATA SYSTEMS
         All  telecommunications   and data  systems   must   comply  with  the  "EPA   Structured
         Wiring/Telecommunication Guidelines."

16.14.2   VIDEO CONFERENCE ROOMS
         Designated video conference rooms must be supported by communication  wiring specified in AT&T's
         Technical Advisory-T1.5 Premise Wiring Requirements and "FTS-2000 Switched Digital Video Guidelines
         for EPA Video Teleconference Facilities," January 2,1991. These requirements suggest that cabled video
         teleconference space (CVTS) communication wiring should be limited to 300 unrepeated cable runs. The
         network interface (service delivery point) to support CVTS rooms will be located in the network control
         facility (NCF); therefore, CVTS room locations must be within 300 cable feet of the NCF and have conduit
         access for 22-gauge shielded solid copper twisted-pair wire. Longer runs may require repeaters and require
         additional expenses, but they must remain within the 1.5-decibel loss specifications of the technical advisory
         manuscript concerning the wiring.

16.14.3   RECORDING SYSTEMS
         In areas where conferences are to be recorded, built-in microphones shall be provided along with a closet
         containing the recording equipment. Wiring shall be installed from the microphone (omnidirectional) to
         recorders for a complete system.

16.14.4   SATELLITE DISHES
         An area may be required for the installation of satellite dishes that will be used for telecommunications,
         television reception, or data transmission. If required, an area shall also be designed for location of satellite
         dish head-in equipment (receivers and transmitters). Where use of a satellite dish is required, power shall
         be furnished for all head-in equipment  Cable raceways shall be provided from the satellite dish location
         to the room for the head-in equipment and from the head-in equipment to each outlet served and to the
         controller location for the dish. All equipment and cable will be furnished by EPA.

16.14.5   TELEVISION BROADCAST SYSTEMS
         In facilities from which a local or national television station will be broadcasting live meetings or press
         conferences, a complete raceway (or cable-tray) system shall be furnished to allow the station to run cables
         from the designated television van parking areas to the conference/press room. If cable tray is provided, it
         shall be completely accessible throughout its length.
                                               16-23

-------
                                                                             Architecture. Engineering,
February 1998                                     .                            and Planning Guidelines
                                                                    Section 16 - Electrical Requirements


16.14.5.1    WEATHERPROOF RECEPTACLES/DISCONNECT SWITCHES
            In addition, weatherproof receptacles or disconnect switches (fused) shall be provided at the van parking
            areas to allow each van to receive power from the building.

16.14.6   MICROWAVE COMMUNICATIONS
         Where required, an area shall be designed for the installation of a microwave dish that will be used for
         telecommunications or data transmission. An area shall also be designed for microwave head-in equipment.
         Power shall be furnished for all head-in equipment  Cable raceways shall be provided from the microwave
         dish location to the room for the head-in equipment and, from there, to the room where the controller will
         be located. All equipment and cables will be furnished by EPA.

16.14.7   OTHER
         A complete raceway system shall be furnished for other communication/data systems (systems not otherwise
         mentioned in subsection 16.14). The raceway system shall include raceways, outlet and junction boxes, and
         power connections (direct or receptacle) for all associated equipment to be located in the facility. Unless
         otherwise directed by EPA, all cabling and equipment for these other systems will be furnished by EPA.


16.15   Alarm and Security Systems

16.15.1   FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
         Fire alarm systems must be installed in accordance with NEC Article 760. Devices that activate fire alarm
         systems and evacuation alarms must be  completely separated from other building systems such as
         environmental monitoring systems and security systems. Other features of the fire alarm system (e.g., fan
         shutdown) may be shared with these other building systems, but the performance of the fire alarm system
         must not be compromised and must meet the requirements stated in this subsection.  In general, auxiliary
         functions, such as elevator recall and smoke control, are not performed by the fire alarm system but by other
         mechanical or electrical systems. The main fire alarm system should supervise any auxiliary system (e.g.,
         computer room). Activation of the main fire alarm shall also activate the audible (and visual, if applicable)
         devices of the auxiliary system in the associated alarm area.  The fire protection system shall be in
         compliance with the most current codes and publications, as listed below (see other sections for additional
         codes and standards):

            Sprinkler Systems, NFPA 13
            Standpipe and Hose Systems, NFPA 14
            National Fire Alarm Code, NFPA 72
            GSA/PBS-PQ100
            ADA Requirements
            Safety Manual, Chapters 2, 3, and 5.

16.15.1.1    BASIC REQUIREMENTS
            In any office, computer room, library, classroom, cafeteria, or similar business-type occupancy, fire
            alarm systems are required if the occupancies have any of these characteristics:

            •  The occupancies are two or more stories above the level of exit discharge.
            •  The occupancies may have 100 or more occupants, above or below grade.
            •  The occupancies consist of more than 50,000 square feet.
            *  A human voice, gas-powered  horn, or other similar nonelectric system cannot efficiently or
               effectively be used to alert occupants to an emergency.

            Storage occupancies equal to or larger than 100,000 square feet shall have fire alarm systems. All other
            occupancies shall follow the requirements in NFPA 101.
                                               16-24

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines                                                                    February 1998
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements


16.15.1.2    MANUAL SYSTEMS INPUT
            Each system shall provide manual input from manual fire alarm stations, which shall be located is exit
            or pubUccoiridon adjacent to each stairway and to each exit fiom the building. Additional stations may
            be provided at any location where there is a special risk or where the travel distance to the nearest station
            exceeds 200 feet.  As a general principle, the station shall be placed so that a person using it will be
            between the fire and the exit If necessary, emergency telephone systems shall be provided in the exit
            stairs or in another protected location, as indicated for  manual fire alarm stations.  In addition,
            telephones shall be provided at each elevator lobby, at the ground floor, and on alternate elevator-capture
            floors.

16.15.1.3    AUTOMATIC SYSTEMS INPUT
            Automatic fire detection shall be provided as described below.

            *   A water flow switch shall be provided for each floor or fire area protected by wet-pipe sprinkler
                systems.  Other types of sprinkler systems will be activated by a pressure switch at the dry or deluge
                valve only.

            *   Automatic heat or smoke detection shall not be installed in lieu of automatic sprinkler protection
                unless this decision is otherwise supported through recognized equivalency methodologies (NFPA
                101M).  Detection shall be provided where a preaction or deluge sprinkler system exists. Automatic
                sprinkler protection requirements are described in  Section IS, Mechanical Requirements, of this
                Mamiat

            •   Smoke detectors shall be provided for essential electronic equipment (NFPA 72, Chapter 7), air-
                handling systems (NFPA 72, Chapter 5), and elevator  lobbies and machine rooms (NFPA 72,
                Chapter 5).  All smoke detectors shall be approved for their intended use and installation. Smoke
                detectors require periodic maintenance, and arrangements for this should be made at the time of
                installation to ensure proper operation and to guard against false alarm or unintended discharge.

            •   Heat and smoke detection in air-handling systems shall comply with NFPA 90A. Detectors, when
                required, shall be located in the main supply duct downstream of a fan filter and in the return air
                ducts for each floor or fire area.

            •   When heat and smoke detectors are installed, they shall be designed and installed in accordance with
                NFPA 72.

            •   Special hazard protection systems shall initiate an alarm. These special systems include, but are not
                limited to, dry chemical extinguishing systems, elevator recall systems, and computer detection
                systems.

            •   Supervisory signals shall be transmitted under each of the following conditions:

                -  Operation of generator
                -  Operation of fire pump
                -  Loss of primary power to a fire alarm system, fire pump, or extinguishing system
                -  Loss of air pressure for dry-pipe sprinkler system
                -  Loss of a central processing unit (CPU) or of CPU peripheral equipment in a multiplex system
                -  Low water level in pressure tanks, elevated tanks, or reservoirs
                -  When control valves in the supply or distribution lines of automatic sprinkler systems, fire
                  pumps, standpipe systems, or interior building fire main systems are closed either a maximum
                  of two complete turns of a valve wheel or 10 percent closure of the valve, whichever is less. (In
                  this case, the signal will be transmitted by tamper switches.)
                                                16-25

-------
                                                                              Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998       	                                                    and Planning Guidelines
                                                                     Section 16 - Electrical Requirements


16.15.1.4     AUTOMATIC SYSTEMS OUTPUT
             In all buildings, the primary alarms to the occupants and the fire department, and other critical signals
             or activation of emergency equipment shall be initiated automatically.  In no case shall these alarms
             depend on manual action. Various outputs include those listed below.

             *  Elevator control smoke detector actuation shall sound an alarm at the fire alarm panel, recall
               elevators, and notify the fire department but shall not initiate an audible alarm signal to building
               occupants or start any smoke control system, except as noted below. The smoke detector alarm
               signal shall be received at a central station or some other location that is constantly attended. This
               will ensure an investigative response to the alarm.

             •  General area smoke detectors shall initiate an evacuation alarm for the portion of the building or area
               in which they are used to increase the level of protection.  In such situations, smoke detectors and
               fire alarm panels equipped to provide alarm verification may be desirable.

             •  All alarm signals or messages shall be continuous. Where public address systems are provided for
               the facility, there shall be provisions for making announcements from the main fire alarm panel or
               from an attended location where the fire alarm signal is received. The public address system does
               not have to be an integral part of the fire alarm system.  Coded alarm signals are unacceptable.

             •  The output of special extinguishing systems, such as those provided for kitchens, shall include the
               actuation of the building fire alarm system. Special detection systems shall indicate a supervisory
               signal at the fire alarm panel.

             •  If an entire building can be evacuated within 5 minutes, the fire alarm shall sound either throughout
               the building or on selected floors. Where selective evacuation is used on the basis of local code
               requirements, features such as smoke control and  automatic sprinklers shall be provided, as
               necessary, to ensure the safety of occupants remaining in the building.

             •  For voice communications systems, only the occupants of the fire floor, the floor below, and the floor
               aboveareexpectedtorelocateorevacuate. These occupants must automatically receive that message
               and be notified of the emergency.  Where automatic prerecorded voices are used,  message
               arrangement and content shall be designed to fit the needs of the individual building (e.g., bilingual
               messages where appropriate).

             •  The use of visual signals to supplement the audible fire alarm system shall be provided in accordance
               with NFPA 72 and Title IH standards of ADA.

             *  Every alarm reported on a building fire alarm system shall automatically actuate one of the
               following:

               -   A transmitter approved by UL, connected to a privately operated, central-station, protective
                   signaling system conforming to NFPA 72. The central-station facility shall be listed by UL;
                   automatic telephone dialers shall not be used.

               -   An auxiliary tripping device connected to a municipal fire alarm box to notify the local fire
                   department, in accordance with NFPA 72.

               -   A direct  supervised circuit between a building and the local fire alarm headquarters or a
                   constantly manned fire station, in accordance with NFPA 72.

               -   As a last resort, an alternate method approved by SHEMD.
                                                16-26

-------
Architecture. Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines
                                                         February 1998
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements
                   Notification of the fire department shall occur no more than 90 secondsafter the initiation of an
                   alarm. The specific location of the alarm may be determined by fire department personnel after
                   they arrive.

                   A supervisory condition shall transmit a separate signal to a central station, different from an
                   alarm signal. No more than one supervisory signal shall be provided for an entire building.
                   Refer to the automatic systems input information in subsection 16.15.1.3 above for required
                   supervisory conditions.

                   Additional automatic actions shall be performed for smoke control, elevator capture, and door
                   closings. Smoke control and elevator capture shall be coordinated with the evacuation plan for
                   a building.  (A summary of system actions is shown in Table 16.15.1.)
 Table 16.15.1 Status Condition
                                                                             Input Device
Output Function
Transmit signal to fire department
Indicate location of device on control panel and annunciator
Cause audible signal at control panel
Initiate emergency operation of elevators
Initiate smoke control sequence
Result in a record on system printer
Cause audible alarm signal throughout building
(voice or nonvoice)
A - Manual fire alarm station D = Water flow detectors and automatic extuu
A
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

wishing
B
X
X
X
X*

X


systems
C
X
X
X


X



D
X
X
X
X
X
X
X


E
X
X
X


X



F

X
X






 B = Smoke detectors (other than duct)
 C - Duct smoke detectors
E • Supervisory device
   F = Emergency telephone
 Note: Only smoke detectors associated with the elevators (e.g., the elevator lobby) must initiate elevator emergency operation.
16.15.1.5     MANUAL SYSTEMS OUTPUT
             Any action that can be performed automatically must be able to be initiated manually from the control
             center or fire alarm system control panel. A smoke control panel shall be provided when smoke control
             systems are required. The control center, or fire alarm system control panel, shall have the capability
             of canceling and restoring any action that has been initiated automatically or manually.

16.15.1.6     SYSTEMS FEATURES
             All systems shall include the following:

             *  Indication of normal or abnormal conditions
             •  Annunciation of alarm, supervisory, or trouble conditions by zone
             •  Graphic annunciation of alarm conditions by zone
             *  Ringback feature when a silence switch for audible trouble signal is provided.

16.15.1.7     HIGH-RISE SYSTEMS FEATURES
             For buildings 12 stories tall or higher, the systems shall also include the following:

             •  Permanent record of alarm, supervisory, or trouble conditions via printer
             *  Initiation of an alert tone followed by a digitized voice message.
                                                 16-27

-------
                                                                              Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998              •                                                    and Planning Guidelines
                                                                     Section 16 - Electrical Requirements


             All power supply equipment and wiring shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of NEC
             andNFPA72.

16.15.1.8     RELIABILITY
             The maximum amount of time from actuation of a system input device to initiation of all system
             functions shall be 10 seconds.  Any system alarm input device shall be capable of initiating an alarm
             during a single break, or a single ground fault condition, on any system alarm-initiating circuit (Class
             A feature, Style D or E). In addition, any signaling line circuit of a multiplex system  (other than
             combination multiplex-point wired systems) shall also perform its intended service during a wire-to-wire
             short or a combination of a single break and a single ground of a circuit (Class A feature, Style D or E).

16.15.1.9     CODE COMPLIANCE, MANUAL SYSTEM
             A complete, code-complying fire alarm system shall be designed.  For small buildings, and where
             allowed by code, the system may be a manual system only. The  manual  system shall include manual
             stations, fire alarm annunciator signals, and an annunciator panel indicating the zone where the alarm
             was initiated.  The alarm shall be sent to the local fire station.

16.15.1.10    CODE COMPLIANCE, AUTOMATIC SYSTEM
       1      In large facilities, or where required by code, the systems shall be automatic and shall include smoke
             detectors, manual pull stations, rate of rise detectors, alarm bells or horns and strobe lights, sprinklers,
             and a central annunciator panel.  Suppression systems shall be tied to the central annunciator panel.
             The fire alarm system shall be tied to the local fire station in the area. Smoke detectors shall be provided
             in all corridors and designated laboratory modules.

16.15.1.11    CENTRAL, LOCAL, AND PROPRIETARY ALARM SYSTEM
             The building(s) shall be protected by a central, local, proprietary-type fire alarm system. Location of
             pull stations, bells, automatic fire detectors, and other equipment pertinent to the fire alarm system shall
             be in accordance with the referenced NFPA and local codes. When there is a difference between the
             NFP A codes and local codes, compliance with the most stringent code will be required. Visual alarms
             are required throughout the facility for handicapped  fire warning.  The system  shall  meet  GSA
             requirements for fire alarms and communication systems, as contained in Chapter 18 (Electrical) of the
             GSA Fire Safety Criteria.

16.15.1.12    CENTRAL STATION SERVICE
             The building(s) shall be protected by local fire alarm system(s) connected to either a UL-listed central
             station or central station service (NFPA 72).

16.15.1.13    SYSTEM GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
             Pull stations shall be installed adjacent to all exit stair doors. Actuation of a manual station shall set off
             an alarm throughout the building, as required, and shall send a manual station alarm signal to the local
             fire department through a central station service. Actuation of any suppression system  (sprinkler,
             dry/wet chemical) protecting the building and its occupants shall set off an alarm as described for pull
             stations, but will send a suppression signal to the central station service.  All valves on the building's
             sprinkler system and/or standpipe systems shall be supervised by the fire alarm control panel.  The
             closure of a valve shall initiate a supervisory signal to the building's fire alarm control panel and to the
             central station service.  Low-air-pressure switches on  dry-pipe  sprinkler systems and low-nitrogen-
             pressure switches on preaction sprinkler systems shall be supervised by the building's fire alarm control
             panels.  The closure of these normally open supervisory switches shall initiate a supervisory signal to
             the building's fire alarm control panels and to the listed central station service.  Elevator lobby smoke
             detection systems shall be incorporated into zones labeled "Elevator Smoke Detector" and shall actuate
             a prealarm signal in the fire alarm control panel and  send a prealarm  signal to the  central station
             service. Likewise, elevator lobby smoke detectors shall be monitored for trouble by the building fire
             alarm system. Smoke detector systems and subsystem(s) shall be connected to actuate a prealarm signal

                                                16-28

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines
February 1998
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements


            to a central station service. These panels shall also be monitored for trouble by the building fire alarm
            system. Visual and audible alarm signals are required throughout the facility.

16.15.1.14   FIRE ZONES
            Building(s) shall be subdivided into fire zones as recommended by NFPA and local codes.  Graphic
            annunciators shall be provided at the main entrances and the security control center. These annunciators
            shall clearly show the outline of the buildings, the fire zones, and the alarm-initiating devices. Alarm
            signals shall be transmitted directly to a UL-listed central station service.

16.15.1.15   WIRE CLASS AND CIRCUIT SURVIVABILITY
            The fire alarm system-initiating device circuits shall be wired Class A, and alarm-indicating circuits
            (visual and audible) shall be wired Class A (NFPA 72). All initiating and indicating circuits shall be
            wired to be survivable, as defined in paragraph 13.i, Chapter 18, of the GSA Fire Safety Criteria.

16.15.1.16   CONTROL CENTER
            Building(s) must have a control center where fire-related control panels are located. This control center
            must be located next to the main entrance and shall be separated from the rest of the building by 1-hour
            fire resistive construction. Emergency lighting must be provided.  Air-handling,  lighting, and fire
            protection systems for the emergency control center must be arranged to operate independently of the
            effects of fire anywhere in the building.

16.15.1.17   SYSTEM AND OPERATION STANDARDS AND CODES
            The fire alarm system and its operation shall be in accordance with NFPA standards, local codes, and
            the requirements of GSA handbook PBS-PQ100, Facilities Standards for the Public Building Service.

16.15.1.18   SIGNAL DEVICES
            Signal devices shall include pull stations, heat and smoke detectors, and signals tarn, the sprinkler
            system fire pump (if required). Smoke detectors shall be provided in the spaces described above, in all
            corridors, elevator lobbies, air-handling equipment, and ductwork, and in special spaces as described
            in the room data sheets.  Heat detectors shall be provided in all mechanical equipment rooms, and in
            electrical rooms. All signal devices shall be addressable (i.e., each device shall have its own address,
            which shall report to monitoring devices in the English language for clear and quick identification of
            the alarm source). The fire alarm central panel shall report the various signals, defined to suit smoke
            purge requirements, to the direct digital control (DDC) portion of the building automation system,
            which, in turn, will sequence fans and smoke dampers to meet the smoke control requirements. The fire
            alarm central panel shall be able to adjust the sensitivity of all smoke detectors.

16.15.1.19   HELD-OPEN FIRE DOORS
            Fire doors that are normally held open by electromagnetic devices should be released by the action of
            any automatic detection, extinguishing, or manual alarm signaling device. Additional information on
            door requirements may be found in Section 8, Doors and Windows, of this Manual. Maintenance,
            operation, testing, and equipment shall conform to NFPA 72, National Fire Alarm Code.

16.15.1.20   ELECTRICAL SUPERVISION/EMERGENCY POWER
            The fire alarm wiring and equipment must be electrically supervised. Emergency power must be
            provided and must be able to operate the system in the supervisory mode for 48 hours and to operate all
            alarm devices and system output signals for at least 90 minutes. All alarm-initiating devices, except
            smoke detectors, must be capable of signaling an alarm during a single break or a single ground fault.

16.15.2   SAFETY ALARM SYSTEM
         Requirements for this system are as follows.

16.15.2.1    ANNUNCIATOR PANEL
                                               16-29

-------
February 1998
Architecture, Engineering,
 and Planning Guidelines
                                                                     Section 16 - Electrical Requirements


            A central safely alarm system annunciator panel that will indicate any abnormal condition shall be
            designed for the facility.  The annunciator panel shall include all relays, switches, and controls, as
            required for system operation.  The basic operation of the panel shall indicate any abnormal condition
            in a function supervised by the annunciator system, causing the associated indication to flash and the
            common audible signal to sound continuously. The audible signal can be silenced at any time by the
            operation of an "acknowledge" push button. The audible signal will automatically sound again with any
            new indication. The visual signal shall become steady when acknowledged.

16.15.2.2    INDICATING PLATES
            Indicating plates shall be red with filled-in place characters. All lamps in the annunciator are tested
            simultaneously by pressing the remotely mounted "Lamp Test" push button. The annunciator shall
            indicate the following systems and equipment statuses:

                Fire alarm initiation
                HVAC system motors alarms
                Emergency generator running
                Freezer and cold box temperature alarms
                UPS system failure
                Fume hood and bio-safety cabinet alarms (critical low-flow)
                Location of activated detection, extinguishing or tuajnat alarm device
                Exhaust hood and ventilated cabinet failure alarms (critical low-flow)
                Exhaust systems for instrument and safety cabinet failure alarms (critical low-flow)
                Acid neutralization system alarms
                Power failure
                Incubator temperature alarm
                Gas alarm
                Sensor (gas) alarm
                Laboratory negative pressure failure alarm
                Additional systems to be identified by the agency.

16.15.3   SECURITY SYSTEMS
         General requirements and requirements for particular types of systems and facility and site areas are as
         follows.

16.15.3.1  .  GENERAL
            A complete security system shall be designed for the facility. All security systems shall be operated and
            monitored from a central point selected by EPA. All security systems shall have a primary and an
            emergency power source.

16.15.3.1.1       STANDBY BATTERIES
                Standby batteries  or a UPS shall be furnished to power the system automatically in the event of
                commercial power failure.  If the facility has a generator, batteries shall ensure that there is no loss
                of power to central equipment until the generator takes over. An alarm shall not be generated when
                the equipment transfers from AC to DC operation as it does from DC to AC operation. If the facility
                does not have an emergency generator, sufficient batteries shall be provided to power the controller
                and necessary devices to prevent unauthorized entry into the building (electronic locks shall stay in
                the locked position upon power loss but  shall still allow emergency egress). Batteries shall be
                chargeable.  If batteries lose charge, an alarm condition shall indicate this at the control console.

16.15.3.1.2       CONDUIT OR RACEWAY
                All wiring shall be in conduit or surface metal raceway.
                                                16-30

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines                                                                  February 1998
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements


16.15.3.2    ACCESS SYSTEMS
            A complete building access system shall be designed; this system shall be of the on-line type that reports
            to a central controller.  The professional designing this system shall have at least 2 to 3 years of
            experience in the design of similar installations.

16.15.3.2.1     KEY CARD CONTROL
               Key card control shall be provided for all entry to the facility. The key card reader should read key
               cards with numbering encoded within the card.  The card reader shall be capable of operating in an
               off-line mode to allow persons to enter and exit without recording of card numbers. The card reader
               shall also be capable of operating in an on-line mode, which causes the card reader to report into a
               central controller that provides additional security checks on the key card and provides a printout
               of time, date, card number, etc., for the person entering or leaving the premises. The system shall
               be of the anti-passback type. In addition, one key access lock and card reader shall be furnished
               inside the building for every 5,000 square feet of gross floor area (in addition to the vestibules) and
               at entry to controlled computer areas.

16.15.3.2.2     COMPUTERIZED ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
               The computerized access control system shall be capable of programming access cards by hour and
               day. The system shall be designed with 50 percent spare capacity for both card readers and number
               of cards on the system.  Key cards, once removed from the system, shall be replaceable without
               lowering the integrity of the system or reducing the system's capacity.

16.15.3.2.3     PROXIMITY TYPE CARD READERS
               Card readers shall be of the proximity type and shall be suitable for the environment in which they
               will be located.

16.15.3.2.4     PROGRAMMABLE KEY PAD, SMALL FACILITIES
               For very small facilities, a programmable keypad may be used at each entry to control access to the
               system.  The keypad shall be suitable for the environment in which it will be located.

16.15.3.3    INTRUSION DETECTION SYSTEMS
            A design professional with a minimum of 2 to 3 years' experience in the design of similar installations
            shall design a complete intrusion detection system. The intrusion detection system shall protect all grade
            level doors, operable windows, and openings leading into the facility, as well as roof hatches and roof
           . access doors. Operable windows shall be lockable and accessible windows shall be equipped with an
            alarm.  Roof access doors or hatches shall be secured with heavy-duty hardware and equipped with an
            alarm.  All floor telecommunications closets shall be locked with dead bolt locking devices.  In addition
            to installing perimeter protection, the design professional shall equip a minimum of 10 interior doors
            with an alarm, as designated by EPA.  Door switches shall be of the balanced magnetic type.

16.15.3.3.1     CENTRAL CONTROL, REMOTELY MONITORED
               The entire system shall be monitored at the central control desk of the facility and remotely
               monitored either on the campus, by an alarm company, or by the local law enforcement agency.

16.15.3.4    SITE ACCESS SYSTEMS
            One alarm zone with an infrared beam shall be provided to monitor vehicles passing through the gate
            of the fenced area.  The beam should be positioned to monitor the entire length of the fence on the side
            with the gate. The alarm zone shall be monitored at the central alarm desk (as part of the intrusion
            detection  system) by remote monitoring of the same type as the intrusion detection system. One zone
            and an infrared beam detection system shall be provided for each location where there is a gate in the
            fenced-in area of the site.

16.15.3.5    CLOSED-CIRCUIT TELEVISION SECURITY SYSTEMS

                                               16-31

-------
                                                                              Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998	and Planning Guidelines
                                                                     Section 16 - Electrical Requirements


             A complete closed-circuit television (CCTV) security system shall be designed.  The professional
             designing this system shall have at least 2 to 3 years of experience in the design of similar installations.
             Conduit and wiring shall be installed for the system and a camera shall be installed at all entrance and
             exit areas. The location of the camera shall be suitable for monitoring persons' movements when they
             are entering or leaving the building.  An emergency circuit shall provide power for each camera
             location. Conduit, wiring, cameras, and  all other appropriate monitoring equipment shall also be
             installed in all parking lots, loading docks, and computer areas.

16.15.3.5.1      CAMERAS, FIXED OR PAN-TILT-ZOOM
                Cameras shaU be of the fbced or oan-tUt-zoomtvpe, as required for each specific location.  Cameras
                shall be housed  in proper enclosures  for the environment in which they are to operate (e.g.,
                enclosures with defrosters or heaters, weatherproof enclosures, corrosion-resistant or vandal-proof
                enclosures).                                  «

16.15.3.5.2      CAMERAS, MONITORED AND CONTROLLED
                All cameras shall be monitored and controlled at the facility's central control station. Monitors shall
                be event driven.  A video cassette recorder (VCR) shall be provided to record unauthorized access
                (control by guard).  A 120-volt single-duplex receptacle (emergency power) shall be provided
                immediately next to all CCTV camera  locations.

16.15.3.5.3      CCTV SECURITY CAMERAS, LOADING DOCKS
                CCTV cameras shall be provided to monitor entry and exit from the loading dock areas. CCTV
                monitors (in addition to that at the central console for the loading dock areas) shall be provided in
                the loading dock office to provide identification of delivery vehicles before the loading dock doors
                are opened.

16.15.3.6     PERIMETER SYSTEMS
             A complete grade-level perimeter intrusion detection system shall be designed. This system shall be in
             addition to the intrusion detection system described above and shall be monitored at the same control
             panel provided for the intrusion detection system.

16.15.3.6.1      ULTRASONIC PROTECTION
                Ultrasonic protection should be furnished to protect the grade-level, glass-enclosed office area and
                any other area that contains exterior glass at grade level. The ultrasonic control panel shall be the
                type that controls nominally 20 pairs of transmitters and receivers.  Input should be connected into
                the main alarm panels as a separate zone. Sufficient transmitter-receiver pairs shall be installed to
                protect the entire office area and other  grade level areas with exterior glass.

16.15.3.7     DATA PROCESSING
             A complete access-intrusion detection system shall be designed for all data processing areas. A card
             reader and balanced magnetic switch shall be provided at each door leading into the data processing
             areas. Card readers shall be of the proximity type. The system shall be monitored at the central control
             station for the facility. The control computer shall be capable of programming access cards by hour and
             day. The central controller shall also furnish a printout of time, date, card number, etc., for the person
             entering or leaving the data processing area. The system shall be of the anti-passback type.

16.15.3.7.1      COMPUTER AREA DOORS
              . If a card access system is being furnished for other doors in the facility, the same cards shall work
                for the computer area doors (if so encoded for certain personnel).

16.15.3.7.2      CENTRAL CONTROL DOOR MONITORING
                The door shall be monitored at the central control station in case it is left open or the card access
                system is bypassed.

                                                16-32

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines                                                                   February 1998
Section 16 - Electrical Requirements


16.15.3.8    PARKING CONTROLS
            The parking facility(s) shall be enclosed and equipped with a perimeter sensor system and lockable
            gates. The gates shaU be equipped with a computerized access control system. EPA card readers shall
            be installed in parallel with any other card readers (if required) on all the access roads.

16.15.3.8.1      ACCESS SYSTEM
                The parking control access system shall have all the components discussed above for access systems.
                For very small facilities, a programmable keypad may be used in lieu of a card reader.  The same
                cards used for building access shall operate the parking controls (if so encoded).

16.15.4  DISASTER EVACUATION SYSTEM
         If the facility is located in an area prone to tornados or hurricanes, a wanting/evacuation alarm system for
         the building shall be included. The system shall provide for building evacuation in accordance with the
         facility's emergency preparedness plan, which shall be coordinated with the community's emergency
         preparedness plan.

16.15.5  EXIT LIGHTING AND MARKINGS
         The requirements for exit lighting and marking are contained in NFPA 101 and the local building code.

         *  Exit lighting and exit signs shall be provided to clearly indicate the location of exits in conformance with
            29 CFR §1910.36 and §1910.37 and the Life Safety Code (NFPA 101). The means of egress, exterior
            steps, and ramps shall be adequately lighted to prevent accidents.

         •  Internally illuminated signs shall meet the following criteria:

            .  Emergency lighting for the area shall conform to OSHA and the Life Safety Code and shall provide
                at least 5 footcandles on the sign surface.

            •  Exit signs shall be at least 8 inches high by 12'A inches long.

            -  Letters shall be at least 6 inches high.

            •  The maximum physical distance to a visual sign shall not exceed 100 feet. In addition, an exit sign
                shall be visible from all points in the corridor.

END OF SECTION 16
                                                16-33

-------

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines
                    February 1998
Appendix A
                Appendix A - Codes, Regulatory Requirements,
           Reference Standards, Trade Organizations, and Guides
For all documents listed in this appendix, the latest edition shall be used unless indicated otherwise by the EPA
contracting officer. (Where an acronym may stand for more than one name, use in this document shall be as indicated
in the specific Section.)	'	
AA        Aluminum Association                   ABMA
           900 19th St., NW
           Washington, DC 20006

AAA       American Arbitration Association
           140 W. 51st. St.
           New York, NY 10020                    ACCA

AABC     Associated Air Balance Council
           1518K.SI..NW
           Washington, DC 20005
                                                 ACEA
AAMA     Architectural Aluminum
           Manufacturers Association
           2700 River Rd., Suite 118
           Des Plaines, EL 60018
                                                 ACEC
AASHTO   American Association of State
           Highway and Transportation
           Officials
           444 N. Capitol St., NW, Suite 225
           Washington, DC 20001                   ACGffl

ABC       Associated Builders and Contractors,
           Inc.
           729 15th St., NW
           Washington, DC 20005                   ACI
           or
           Association of Bituminous                 ACPA
           Contractors
           2020 K St., NW, Suite 800
           Washington, DC 20006

ABCA     American Building Contractors            ACPA
           Association
           11100 Valley Blvd., Suite 120
           El Monte, CA 91731
American Boiler Manufacturers
Association
950 North Glebe Rd.
Suite 160
Arlington, VA 22203

Air-Conditioning Contractors of
America
1513 16th St.
Washington, DC  20036

Allied Construction Employers
Association
180 N. Executive Drive
Brookfield, Wl 53008

American Consulting Engineers
Council
1015 15th St., NW, Suite 802
Washington, DC  20005

American Conference of Government
Industrial Hygienists
6500 Glenway Ave., Building D-7
Cincinnati, OH 45211

American Concrete Institute
22400 W. Seven Mile Rd.
Detroit, MI 48219

American Concrete Pavement
Association
3800 N. Wilke Rd., Suite 490
Arlington Heights, IL 60004

American Concrete Pipe Association
8320 Old Courthouse Rd.
Vienna, VA 22180
                                                            or
                                            A-l

-------
February 1998
            Architecture, Engineering,
             and Planning Guidelines
                                                                                       Appendix A
           American Concrete Pumping               AHA
           Association
           P.O. Box 4307
           1034 Tennessee St.
           Vallejo, CA 94590                         AHLI

ACSM     American Congress on Surveying and
           Mapping
           210 Little Falls St.                          AHMA
           Falls Church, VA 22046

ADA       Americans with Disabilities Act
           (For employment questions)
           U.S. Equal Employment Opportunity          AI
               Commission
           ADA Legal Services
           1801 L St., NW
           Washington, DC 20507                     AIA

           (For transportation questions)
           U.S. Department of Transportation
           Office of Assistant General Counsel           AIA / NA
               for Regulation and Enforcement
           400 7th St., SW
           Washington, DC 20590

           (For public accommodations questions)        AIC
           U.S. Department of Justice
           Office of Americans with Disabilities
               Act
           P.O. Box 66118                           AISC
           Washington, DC 20035-6118

           (For telecommunications questions)
           Federal Communications Commission
               Consumer Assistance                   AISI
           1919MSt.,NW
           Washington, DC 20554

           (For architectural accessibility               AITC
           questions)
           Access Board
           1331 F St., NW,  Suite 1000
           Washington, DC 20004-1111
                                                    ALSC
AGA       American Gas Association, Inc.
           1515 Wilson Blvd.
           Arlington, VA 22209

AGC       Associated General Contractors of           AMCA
           America
           1957 East St., NW
           Washington, DC 20006
American Hardboard Association
520 N. Hicks M
Palantine,IL 60067

American Home Lighting Institute
435 N. Michigan Ave., Suite 1717
Chicago, IL 60611

American Hardware Manufacturers
Association
93 IN. Plum Grove Rd,
Schaumburg, IL 60173

Asphalt Institute
Asphalt Institute Building
College Park, MD 20740

American Institute of Architects
1735 New York Ave., NW
Washington, DC 20006

Asbestos Information Association/
North America
1745 Jefferson Davis Hwy., Suite 509
Arlington, VA  22202

American Institute of Constructors
20 S. Front St.
Columbus, OH  43215

American Institute of Steel
Construction, Inc.
400 N. Michigan Ave.
Chicago, IL 60611

American Iron and Steel Institute
1133 15th St., NW, Suite 300
Washington, DC 20005

American Institute of Timber
Construction
11818 S.E. Mill Plain Blvd.
Vancouver, WA 98684

American Lumber Standards
Committee
P.O. Box 210
Germantown, MD 20874

Air Movement and Control
Association
30 West University Dr.
Arlington Heights, IL 60004
                                              A-2

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines
                                February 1998
Appendix A
ANL      Argonne National Laboratory
           9800 South Cass Ave.
           Argoime, IL 60439

ANS       American Nuclear Society
           555 North Kensington Ave.
           LaGrange Park, IL 60525                  ASC

ANSI      American National Standards
           Institute
           1430 Broadway
           New York, NY 10018

APA      American Plywood Association
           P.O. Box 11700
           Tacoma,WA  98411
                                                   ASCC
APA      Architectural Precast Association
        •   825 E. 64th St.
           Indianapolis, IN  46220

APFA     American Pipe Fitting Association          ASCE
           8136 Old Keene Mill Rd., #B-311
           Springfield, VA  22152
API       American Petroleum Institute
           1220 L. St., NW
           Washington, DC 20037
           or
           American Subcontractors Association
           1004 Duke St
           Alexandria, VA 22314

           Adhesive and Sealant Council, Inc.
           1500 Wilson Blvd., Suite 515
           Arlington, VA 22209-2495

           or

           Associated Specialty Contractors
           7315 Wisconsin Ave.
           Bethesda,MD 20814

           American Society of Concrete
           Construction
           426 S. Westgate
           Addison, IL 60101

           American Society of Civil Engineers
           345 E. 47th St.
           New York, NY  10017
AREA     American Railway Engineering
           Association
           50 F St., NW, Suite 7702                   ASID
           Washington, DC 20001

ARI       Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration
           Institute
           1501 Wilson Blvd., 6th Floor                ASME
           Arlington, VA 22209

ARMA     Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers
           Association
           6288 Montrose Road
           Rockville,MD 20852                      ASPE

ARTBA    American Road and Transportation
           Builders Association
           525 School St., SW
           Washington, DC 20024                    ASSE

ASA       Acoustical Society of America
           500 Sunnyside Blvd.
           Woodberry, NY 11797
ASHRAE   American Society of Heating,
           Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning
           Engineers Inc.
           179 ITulie Circle, NE
           Atlanta, GA 30329
           American Society of Interior
           Designers
           1430 Broadway
           New York, NY 10018

           American Society of Mechanical
           Engineers
           United Engineering Center
           345 E. 47th St.
           New York, NY 10017

           American Society of Professional
           Estimators
           3617 Thousand Oaks Blvd., Suite 210
           Westlake, CA 91362

           American Society of Sanitary
           Engineers
           P.O. Box 40362
           Bay Village, OH 44140
                                              A-3

-------
February 1998
                       Architecture, Engineering,
                        and Planning Guidelines
                                                                                     Appendix A
ASTM     American Society for Testing and
           Materials
           1916 Race St.
           Philadelphia, PA 19103

AWCI     Association of the Wai! and Ceiling
           Industries International
           25 K St., NE, Suite 300
           Washington, DC 20002

AWI       Architectural Woodwork Institute
           2310 S. Walter Reed Dr.
           Arlington, VA 22206

AWS       American Welding Society, Inc.
           550 N.W. LeJeune Rd.
           Miami, FL 33126

AWWA    American Water Works Association
           6666 West Quincy Ave.
           Denver, CO 80235

BHMA     Builder's Hardware Manufacturers
           Association, Inc.
           60 E. 42nd St., Room 511
           New York, NY 10165

BIA       Brick Institute of America
           11490 Commerce Park Dr., Suite 300
           Reston,VA  22091

BMRI     Building Materials Research
           Institute, Inc.
           501 5th Ave., #1402
           New York, NY 10017

BOCA     Building Officials and Code
           Administrators International
           4051 W. Flossmoor Rd.
           Country Club Hills, IL 60477

BRB       Building Research Board
           2101 Constitution Ave., NW
           Washington, DC 20418

BSC       Building Systems Council
           15th and MSts., NW
           Washington, DC 20005

BSI        Building Stone Institute
           420 Lexington Ave., Suite 2800
           New York, NY  10170
CA        Congressional Acts
           Superintendent of Documents
           Government Printing Office
           Washington, DC 20402

CABO     Council of American Building
           Officials
           5203 Leesburg Pike, Suite 708
           Falls, Church, VA 22041

CDA       Copper Development Association,
           Inc.
           Greenwich Office Park 2
           51 Weaver St.
           Grant, CT 06836

CERC     Coastal Engineering Research
           Center
           U.S. Army Corps of Engineers
           P.O. Box 631
           Vicksburg,MA 39180

CFR       Code of Federal Regulations
           Superintendent of Documents
           Government Printing Office
           Washington, DC 20402

CGA       Compressed Gas Association
           Crystal Gateway One, Suite 501
           1235 Jefferson Davis Highway
           Arlington, VA 22202

CIEA      Construction Industry Employers
           Association
           625 Ensminger Rd.
           Tonawanda,NY 14150

CIMA     Construction Industry
           Manufacturers Association
           111 E. Wisconsin Ave., Suite 940
           Milwaukee, WI 53202-4879

CISCA     Ceilings and Interior Systems
           Construction Association
           104 Wilmot, Suite 201
           Deerfield,IL  60015

CISPI     Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute
           1499 Chain Bridge Rd., Suite 203
           McLean, VA  22101
                                              A-4

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines
                                                                                   February 1998
Appendix A
CLFMI    Chain Link Fence Manufacturers           DIPRA
           Institute
           1776 Massachusetts Ave., NW
           Suite 500
           Washington, DC 20036
                                                   DOE
CMAA     Crane Manufacturers Association of
           America
           1326 Freeport Road
           Pittsburgh, PA  15238
                                                              Ductile Iron Pipe Research
                                                              Association
                                                              245 Riverchase Parkway E., Suite 0
                                                              Birmingham, AL 35244

                                                              U.S. Department of Energy
                                                              1000 Independence Ave., SW
                                                              Washington, DC 20585
CPMA     Construction Products
           Manufacturing Council
           P.O. Box 21008
           Washington, DC 20009-0508               DOT

CRA      California Redwood Association
           405 Enfrente Dr., Suite 200
           Nevato, CA 94949                        EIA

CRI       Carpet and Rug Institute
           P.O. Box 2048
           Dalton, GA 30722-2048                    EIMA

CRSI      Concrete Reinforced Steel Institutes
           933 N. Plum Grove Rd.
           Schaumburg, EL 60195
                                                   DOE/OSTI DOE/Office of Scientific and
                                                              Technical Information
                                                              P.O. Box 62
                                                              Oak Ridge, TN 37831
                                                   EO
                                                   EPA
                                                   ESCSI
CSI        Construction Specifications Institute
           601 Madison St.
           Alexandria, VA 22314

CTI        Ceramic Tile Institute
           700 N. Virgil Ave.
           Los Angeles, CA 90029

           or

           Cooling Tower Institute
           P.O. Box 73383
           Houston, TX 77273
DFI        Deep Foundations Institute                 FAA
           P.O. Box 359
           Springfield, NJ 07081

DHI       Door and Hardware Institute
           7711 Old Springhouse Rd.                  FCC
           McLean, VA 22101-3474
U.S. Department of Transportation
400 7th St., SW
Washington, DC 20590

Electronics Industries Association
2001 Eye St., NW
Washington, DC 20006

Exterior Insulation Manufacturers
Association
Box 75037
Washington, DC 20013

Executive Orders
National Archives and Records
    Administration
8th St and Pennsylvania Ave., NW
Washington, DC 20408

Environmental Protection Agency
401 M St., SW
Washington, DC 20460

Expanded Shale, Clay and Slate
Institute
6218 Montrose Rd.
Rockville,MD 20852

Federal Aviation Administration
U.S. Department of Transportation
400 7th St., SW
Washington, DC 20590

Federal Construction Council
Building Research Board
National Research Council
2101 Constitution Ave., NW
Washington, DC 20418
                                              A-5

-------
February 1998
                       Architecture, Engineering,
                        and Planning Guidelines
                                                                                      Appendix A
FEMA     Federal Emergency Management
           Agency
           Federal Center Plaza
           500 C St., SW
           Washington, DC 20472

FGMA     Flat Glass Marketing Association
           White Lakes Professional Building
           3310 Harrison St.
           Topeka,KS 66611

FHA       Federal Housing Administration
           4517thSt.,SW,Rm.3158
           Washington, DC 20410

FITS       Federal Information Processing
           Standards
           National Bureau of Standards
           Room 64-B, Technology
           Gaithersburg, MD 20899

FM        Factory Mutual Engineering and
           Research
           1151 Boston Providence Turnpike
           Norwood, MA 02062

FPRS      Forest Products Research Society
           2801 Marshall Ct.
           Madison, WI 53705

FR        Federal Register
           Superintendent of Documents
           U.S. Government Printing Office
           710 North Capitol St., NW
           Washington, DC 20402

FS         Federal Specifications
           Attention: NPFC Code 1052
           Naval Publications and Forms Center
           5801 Tabor Ave.
           Philadelphia, PA  19120-5099

FTI        Facing Tile Institute
           P.O. Box 8880
           Canton, OH 44711

GA        Gypsum Association
           1603 Omngton Ave., Suite 1210
           Evanston, IL 60201
GBCA     General Building Contractors
           Association
           36 S. 18th St.
           P.O. Box 15959
           Philadelphia, PA 19103

GSA       General Services Administration
           Public Buildings Service
           Office of Governmentwide Real
               Property Policy and Oversight
           19th and FSts.,NW
           Washington, DC 20405

HES       Health Education Services
           P.O. Box 7282
           Albany, NY 12224

HPMA     Hardwood Plywood Manufacturers
           Association
           P.O. Box 2789
           Reston, VA 22090

           International Association of Bridge,
           Structural and Ornamental Iron
           Workers
           1750 New York Ave., NW, Suite 400
           Washington, DC 20006

IAEA      International Atomic Energy Agency
           'Vienna International Center
           Wagranerstrasse 5
           Post Fach 100
           A-1400 Vienna, Austria

IALD      International Association of Lighting
           Designers
           18 E. 16th St., Suite 208
           New York, NY 10003

IAPMO    International Association of
           Plumbing and Mechanical Officials
           20001 Walnut DriveS.
           Walnut, CA 91789

ICAA      Insulation Contractors Association of
           America
           15819 Crabbs Branch Way
           Rockville,MD 20855

ICBO      International Conference of Building
           Officials
           5360 S. Workman Mill Rd.
           Whittier.CA 90601
                                              A-6

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines
                                February 1998
Appendix A
ICEA      Insulated Cable Engineers
           Association
           P. O. Box P
           South Yarmouth, MA 02664

ICRP      International Commission on
           Radiological Protection
           Maxwell House
           FairviewPark
           Ehnsford,NY 10523

IEEE      Institute of Electrical and Electronics
           Engineers
           345 E. 47th St.
           New York, NY  10017

IES        Institute of Environmental Sciences
           940 East Northwest Highway
           Mount Prospect, DL 56056

EESNA     Illuminating Engineering Society of
           North America
           345 E. 47th St.
           New York, NY 10017

IFI        Industrial Fasteners Institute
           1505 E. Ohio Building
           Cleveland, OH 44114

IHEA .     Industrial Heating Equipment
           Association
           1901 N. Moore St.
           Arlington, VA 22209

IILP       International Institute of Lath and
           Plaster
           795 Raymond Ave.
           St. Paul, MN 55114

ILIA       Indiana Limestone Institute of
           America
           Stone  City Bank Building, Suite 400
           Bedford, IN 47421

IMI        International Masonry Institute
           823 15th St., NW, Suite 1001
           Washington, DC 20005

IPCEA     Insulated Power Cable Engineers
           Association
IRF       International Road Federation
           525 School SL, SW
           Washington, DC  20024

ISDSI     Insulated Steel Door Systems
           Institute
           712 Lakewood Center North
           14600 Detroit Ave.
           Cleveland, OH 44107

LANL     Los Alamos National Laboratory
           P.O. Box 1663
           Los Alamos, NM  87545

LBL       Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory
           1 Cyclostron Road
           Berkeley, CA  94720

LLNL     Lawrence Livermore National
           Laboratory
           Livermore, CA 94550

LPI       Lightning Protection Institute
           48 North Ayer St.
           Harvard, IL 60033

           Manufacturers Standardization
           Society of the Valve and Fittings
           Industry
           127 Park St,NE
           Vienna,  VA 22180

MBMA    Metal Building Manufacturers
           Association
           1230 Keith Building
           Cleveland, OH 44115

MCAA     Mason Contractors Association of
           America
           17W601 14th St.
           Oakbrook Terrace, IL 60181

           or

           Mechanical Contractors Association
           of America
           5410 Grosvenor, Suite 120
           Bethesda,MD 20814

MIA       Marble Institute of America
           33505 State St.
           Farmington, MI 48024
                                              A-7

-------
February 1998
                       Architecture, Engineering,
                        and Planning Guidelines
                                                                                      Appendix A
MFMA    Maple Flooring Manufacturers
           Association
           60 Revere Dr., Suite 500
           Northbrook, IL 60062

MLSFA    Metal Lath/Steel Framing
           Association
           600 S. Federal, Suite 400
           Chicago, IL 60605

           National Building Material
           Distributors Association
           1701 Lake Ave., Suite 170
           Glenview.IL 60025

           National Forest Products Association
           1250 Connecticut Ave., NW, Suite 200
           Washington, DC 20036

           National Housing Rehabilitation
           Association
           1726 18th St., NW
           Washington, DC 20009

           National Particlcboard Association
           2306 Perkins PI.
           Silver Spring, MD  20910

           National Wood Window and Door
           Association.
           205 Touhy Ave.
           Park Ridge, EL 60068

NAAMM   National Association of Architectural
           Metal Manufacturers
           600 South Federal St.
           Chicago, IL 60605

NACE     National Association of Corrosion
           Engineers
           P.O. Box 218340
           Houston, XX 77218

NADC     National Association of Demolition
           Contractors
           •4415 W. Harrison St.
           Hillside, IL  60162
           or
NADC     National Association of Dredging
           Contractors
           16251 St., NW, Suite 321
           Washington, DC 20006

NAEC     National Association of Elevator
           Contractors
           4053 La Vista Rd., Suite 120
           Tucker, GA 30084

NAFCD    National Association of Floor
           Covering Distributors
           13-126 Merchandise Matt
           Chicago, IL 60654

NAHB     National Association of Home
           Builders
           15th and MSts.,NW
           Washington, DC 20005

NAHRO   National Association of Housing
           Redevelopment Officials
           1320 187th St., NW
           Washington, DC 20036

NAPA     National Asphalt Pavement
           Association
           68.11 Kenilworth Ave., Suite 620
           P.O. Box 517
           RiverdaIe,MD  20737

NAPHCC  National Association of Plumbing,
           Heating, and Cooling Contractors
           P.O. Box 6808
           Falls Church, VA 22046

NARSC    National Association of Reinforcing
           Steel Contractors
           10382 Main St.
           P.O. Box 225
           Fairfax, VA 22030

NASA     National Aeronautics and Space
           Administration
           300 East St., SW
           Washington, DC 20546

NAVFAC  U.S. Naval Facilities Engineering
           Command
           Attention Cash Sales/Code 1051
           Naval Publications and Forms Center
           5801 Tabor Ave.
           Philadelphia, PA 19120-5099
                                              A-8

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines
                                February 1998
Appendix A
NAWIC    National Association of Women in
           Construction
           327 S. Adams St.
           Fort Worth, TX  76104

NBMA     National Building Manufacturers
           Association
           142 Lexington Ave.
           New York, NY 10016

NBS       National Bureau of Standards
           (currently National Institute of
           Standards and Technology)
           Gaithersburg, MD

NCA       National Constructors Association
           1101 15th St., NW, Suite 1000
           Washington, DC 20005

NCMA     National Concrete Masonry
           Association
           P.O. Box 781
           Herndon, VA 22070

NCR?     National Council on Radiation
           Protection and Measurement
           7910 Woodmont Ave., Suite 800
           Belhesda, MD 20814

NCSBCS   National Conference of State
           Building Codes and Standards
           481 Carlisle Dr.
           Herndon, VA 22070

NEC       National Electrical Code
           National Fire Protection Association
           Batterymarch Park
           Quincy, MA 02269

NECA     National Electrical Contractors
           Association
           7315 Wisconsin Ave.
           13th Floor, West Building
           Bethesda,MD 20814

NEMA     National Electrical Manufacturers
           Association
           2101 L St., NW,  Suite 300
           Washington, DC 20037
NESC     National Electrical Safety Code
           Institute of Electrical & Electronics
           Engineers, Inc.
           345 East 47th St.
           New York, NY 10017

NFPA     National Fire Protection Association
           Batterymarch Park
           Quincy, MA 02269

NGA      National Glass Association
           8200 Greenssboro Dr., Suite 302
           McLean, VA 22101

Nffl       National Institutes of Health
           Public Health Service
           U.S. Department of Health and Human
               Services
           Bethesda, MD 20205

NU        National Institute of Justice
           633 Indiana Ave., NW
           Washington, DC 20531

NIOSH    National Institute of Occupational
           Safety and Health
           U.S. Public Health Service

NKCA     National Kitchen Cabinet Association
           P.O. Box 6830
           Falls Church, VA 22046

NLA       National Lime Association
           3601 N.Fairfax Dr.
           Arlington, VA 22201

NLBMDA  National Lumber and Building
           Material Dealers Association
           40 Ivy SL, SE
           Washington, DC 20003

NOAA     National Oceanic and Atmospheric
           Administration
           Washington Science Center, Building 5
           6010 Executive Blvd.
           Rockville, MD 20852

NOFMA   National Oak Flooring
           Manufacturers Association
           P.O. Box 3009
           Memphis, TN 38173-0009
                                              A-9

-------
February 1998
                      Architecture, Engineering,
                        and Planning Guidelines
                                                                                      Appendix A
NPCA     National Paint and Coatings
           Association
           1500 Rhode Island Ave., NW
           Washington, DC 20005

NPCA     National Precast Concrete
           Association
           825 E. 64th St.
           Indianapolis, IN 46220

NRC       U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission
           Publications Division
           Washington, DC 20555

NRCA     National Roofing Contractors
           Association
           1 OBare Center
           6250 River Rd.
           Rosemont,IL 60018

NRMCA   National Ready Mixed Concrete
           Association
           900 Spring St.
           Silver Spring, MD 20910

NSA       National Security Agency/
           Central Security Service
           FortMeade, MD 20755

           or

           National Stone Association
           1415 Elliot PL, NW
           Washington, DC 20007

NSF       National Sanitation Foundation
           P.O. Box 1468
           34 Plymouth Rd.
           Ann Arbor, MI 48015

NSPC      National Standard Plumbing Code
           Published by: National Association of
           Plumbing-Heating-Cooling Contractors
           P.O. Box 6808
           Falls Church, VA  22040

NSPE      National Society of Professional
           Engineers
           1420 King  St.
           Alexandria, VA 22314
NTIA      National Telecommunications and
           Information Administration
           Main Commerce Building
           Washington, DC 20230

NTIS      National Technical Information
           Service
           5485 Port Royal Rd.
           Springfield, VA 22161

NTMA     National Terrazzo and Mosaic
           Association
           3166 Des Plaines Ave., Suite 132
           DesPlaines, IL 60018

NWMA    National Woodwork Manufacturers'
           Association
           400 W. Madison St.
           Chicago, IL 60606

NWWDA   National Wood Window and Door
           Association
           1400 East Touhy Ave.
           Des Plaines, IL 60018

OMB      Office of Management and Budget
           Old Executive Office Building
           Washington, DC 20503

OPCMIA   Operative Plasterers' and Cement
           Masons4 International Association of
           the United States and Canada
           1125 17th St., NW, 6th Floor
           Washington, DC 20036

OSHA     Occupational Safety and Health
           Administration
           U.S. Department of Labor
           200 Constitution Ave., NW
           Washington, DC 20201

           Pipe Line Contractors Association
           4100 First City Center
           1700 Pacific Ave.
           Dallas, TX 75201

PCA       Portland Cement Association
           5420 Old Orchard Rd.
           Skokie,IL  60077

PCI        Precast Concrete Institute
           175 W. Jackson Blvd., Suite 1859
           Chicago, IL 60604
                                              A-10

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines
                                 February 1998
Appendix A
PDCA     Painting and Decorating Contractors
           of America
           7223 Lee Highway
           Falls Church, VA 22046

PDI       Plumbing and Drainage Institute
           1106 W. 77th St. Dr.
           Indianapolis, IN 46260

PHCIB    Plumbing-Heating-Cooling
           Information Bureau
           303 E. Wacker Dr., Suite 711
           Chicago, IL 60601

PMI.      Plumbing Manufacturers Institute
           800 Roosevelt Rd., Building C, Suite
           20
           GlenEllyn,IL 60137

PPI       Plastics Pipe Institute
           355 Lexington Ave.   ^
           New York, NY 10017

PSIC      Passive Solar Industries Council
           2836 Duke St.
           Alexandria, VA 22314

PTI       Post-Tensioning Institute
           1717 W. Northern Ave., Suite 218
           Phoenix, AZ 85021

RCRC     Reinforced Concrete Research
           Council
           5420 Old Orchard Rd.
           Skokie, IL 60077

RCSHSB   Red Cedar Shingle and Handsplit
           Shake Bureau
           515 116th Ave., NE, Suite 275
           Bellevue, WA 98004

RFCA     Resilient Flooring and Carpet
           Association, Inc.
           14570 E. 14th St., Suite 511
           SanLandro, CA 94570

RFCI      Resilient Floor Covering Institute
           966 Hungerford Dr., Suite 12B
           Rockville,MD 20850
           Scientific Apparatus Makers
           Association
           225 Reinekers Lane
           Suite 625
           Alexandria, VA 22314

SBA       Systems Builders Association
           P.O. Box 117
           West Milton, OH 45383

SBCCI     Southern Building Code Congress
           International, Inc.
           900MontclairRd.
           Birmingham,  AL 35213

SCS       Soil Conservation Service
           U.S. Department of Agriculture
           14th St. and Independence Ave., SW
           Washington, DC 20250

SDI       Steel Deck Institute
           P.O. Box 9506
           Canton, OH 44711

           or

           Steel Door Institute
           712 Lakewood Center N.
           14600 Detroit  Ave.
           Cleveland, OH 44107

SIGMA    Sealed Insulating Glass
           Manufacturers Association
           111 E. Wacker Dr., Suite 600
           Chicago, IL 60601

SJI        Steel Joist Institute
           1205 48th Ave., N., Suite A
           Myrtle Beach,  SC 29577

SMA     _  Screen Manufacturers Association
           655 Irving Park, Suite 201
           Chicago, IL 60613-3198

           or

           Stucco Manufacturers Association
           14006 Ventura Blvd.
           Sherman Oaks, CA 91423
                                              A-ll

-------
February 1998
                       Architecture, Engineering,
                        and Planning Guidelines
                                                                                      Appendix A
SMACNA  Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning
           Contractors National Association,
           Inc.
           8224 Old Courthouse Rd.
           Vienna, VA 221*80

SMWIA    Sheet Metal Workers International
           Association
           1750 New York Ave,, NW
           Washington, DC 20006

SNL       Sandia National Laboratories
           P.O. Box 5800
           Albuquerque, NM 87185

SPRI      Single Ply Roofing Institute
           104 WilmotRoad, Suite 201
           Deerfield,IL  60015-5195

SSFI       Scaffolding, Shoring, and Forming
           Institute, Inc.
           1230 Keith Building
           Cleveland, OH 44115

SSPC      Steel Structures Painting Council
           4400 5th Ave.
           Pittsburgh, PA 15213

SWI       Sealant and Waterproofcrs Institute
           3101 Broadway, Suite 300
           Kansas City, MO 64111

           or

           Steel Window Institute
           1230 Keith Building
           Cleveland, OH 44115

TCA       Tile Council of America
           P.,O. Box 2222
           Princeton, NJ 08542

           or

TCA       Tilt-Up Concrete Association
           5420 Old Orchard Rd,
           Skokie,IL  60077

TCAA     Tile Contractors Association of
           America, Inc.
           112 N. Alfred St.
           Alexandria, VA  22314
TIMA     Thermal Insulation Manufacturers
           Association
           7KirbyPlaza
           Mount Kisco, NY 10549

           U.S. Department of Labor/
           Occupational Safety and Health
           Administration
           200 Constitution Ave., NW
           Washington, DC 20210

           U.S. Forest Products Laboratory
           One Gifford Pinchot Dr.
           Madison, WI 53705-2398

UBC       Uniform Building Code
           International Conference of Building
           Officials
           5360 Workman Mill Road
           Whittier, CA 90601-2298

UL        Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
           333 Pfingsten Rd.
           Northbrook, IL 60062

USACE    U.S. Department of the Army
           Corps of Engineers
           20 Massachusetts Ave., NW
           Washington, DC 20314

USAF      U.S. Department of the Air Force
           Manuals may be ordered from
           headquarters of any Air Force Base

VMA      Valve Manufacturers Association of
           America
           1050 17th St., NW, Suite 701
           Washington, DC 20036

WMA     Wallcovering Manufacturers
           Association
           355 Lexington Ave.
           New York, NY  10017

WPCF     Water Pollution Control Federation
           601 Wythe St.
           Alexandria, VA 22314-1994

WRC      Water Resources Council,
           Hydrology Committee
           U.S. Department of the Interior
           C St. between 18th & 19th Sts., NW
           Washington, DC 20240
                                              A-12

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines
                                February 1998
Appendix A
WRI       Wire Reinforcement Institute
           8361-A Greensboro Dr.
           McLean, VA 22102
WWPA    Western Wood Products Association
           Yeon Building
           522S.W.  5th Ave.
           Portland, OR 97204
END OF APPENDIX A
                                             A-13

-------

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines	February 1998
Appendix B - Indoor Air Quality Requirements
              Appendix B - Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) Requirements


B.1   Design Process
       The Indoor Air Quality Requirements are organized to correspond to the design and construction process.
       This section addresses the design process.

B.1.I  GENERAL
       A new facility using good building practices in indoor air quality design and operation is required.  It is also
       the intent that IAQ be achieved without sacrificing other important aspects of the facility. A facility is
       required in which indoor air quality is maintained at the best practicable level using currently available
       knowledge and proven technology that is cost effective and consistent with the normal function of a
       laboratory facility with related office space. As a result, a Quality Assurance/Quality Control Manual shall
       be produced. The Indoor Air Quality Control Plan referenced throughout this document shall be contained
       in this Manual. The IAQ Plan shall address in detail building materials selection, minimizing introduction
       of outdoor air pollution, pre-occupancy procedures to accelerate off-gassing, and operations and
       maintenance procedures that limit introduction of harmful chemicals. A number of considerations are
       presented here to emphasize the significance in achieving acceptable indoor air quality.  These
       considerations are followed by primary strategies for IAQ control.  They are listed below and discussed in
       more detail at various points throughout this section.

B.l.1.1   CONSIDERATIONS FOR ACCEPTABLE INDOOR AIR QUALITY.
          Refer to the publication, Building Air Quality: A Guide for Building Owners and Facility Managers.
          U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS), Center for Disease Control (CDC), National
          Institute of Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) Pub. No. 91-114.

B.I. 1.1.1     The most effective means of indoor air pollution control is to eliminate, reduce, or contain the
             sources of indoor air pollution. Evidence must be provided that this strategy has been applied to
             every aspect of the building design, construction requirements, and operational requirements. The
             overall strategy must include control strategies for outdoor sources, building materials and
             equipment, furnishings, occupants, and maintenance, including housekeeping activities that occur
             indoors.

B. 1.1.1.1.1     Training of operations and maintenance personnel, as well as occupants, in heating, ventilation,
               and air-conditioning (HVAC) operations is a requirement.

B. 1.1.1.1.2     Proper operation and maintenance of the facilities and their HVAC systems are critical to
               maintaining IAQ. Training of operations and maintenance personnel is a requirement. Explicit
               assumptions regarding operation and maintenance must be made during design and must be
               documented in a facilities operation manual. They must reflect a clear intent to maintain indoor
               air quality at the highest practicable level.

B. 1.1.1.1.3     Required ventilation air must be delivered to occupants' "breathing zone."  This requires careful
               attention to the design and installation of the air distribution system and its controls, particularly
               at the local level. Innovative approaches to achieving improved "ventilation efficiency" are
               sought in order to minimize wasteful and ineffective space air distribution.  A clear presentation
               of the ventilation system space air distribution concept is a part of the design professional's
               responsibilities.  (For definition of "breathing zone" and 'Ventilation efficiency" see B.2 -
               Supplemental Indoor Air Quality Information.)
                                                 B-l

-------
                                                                                Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998                                                                    and Planning Guidelines
                                                              Appendix B - Indoor Air Quality Requirements


B.U.I.1.4      American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)
                Standard 62-1989, Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality, is to be considered a part of
               . these requirements.

B.I.1.2   PRIMARY STRATEGIES FOR IAQ CONTROL
          Primary strategies are as follows:

          •   Source control
          •   Ventilation controls
             -  Outside air supply
             •  Air cleaning
             •  Space air distribution
          •   Operation and maintenance.

B.1.2  SOURCE CONTROL
       While it shall be required that all of the above-listed strategies be employed to control IAQ, source control is
       considered the most effective control method for most pollutants. Effective source control requires that
       potential sources be clearly identified and addressed. It must be demonstrated that the design involved
       thorough consideration of sources of indoor pollutants and their control. The discussion on source control
       is organized to cover outdoor sources and indoor sources of indoor air pollutants.  Potential pollutant
       sources shall be examined at each stage of the building design and development process and effective
       control strategies shall be utilized.

B.l.2.1   OUTDOOR POLLUTANT SOURCES

B.1.2.1.1     The sources of air pollutants that must be considered are adjacent and nearby stationary pollution
             sources, for example, exhausts from other research facilities or from commercial buildings such as
             dry-cleaning establishments or restaurants, nearby roadways, parking lots, loading docks, trash
             storage, and garage and their motor vehicle traffic patterns.  Consideration must be given to
             variations in the potential sources over time, including daily, weekly, and seasonal patterns.

B. 1.2.1.2     Temporal and spatial variations in wind direction and velocity, traffic patterns, and emissions from
             industrial processes that affect air quality at the site must be considered. The locations and forms of
             adjacent buildings that might result in local wind patterns causing reentrainment of the facility's
             own exhausts must be considered and addressed. The potential impact that ponds, cooling towers,
             cooling coil drip pans, and other potential sites of microbial contamination may have on IAQ must
             also be considered.  Previous land uses, such as agriculture or industry, might result in emissions
             from contaminated soil or groundwater as a potential source of indoor air pollutants. Some
             examples of potentially significant prior uses are wood preservation and treatment; solid or
             hazardous waste handling, storage, treatment, or disposal; dry-cleaning processes; leather, paint,  or
             chemical manufacturing; refrigerated storage; gasoline storage or dispensing; and agriculture.  Even
             nearby building demolition can result in significant site contamination through release of building
             materials such as asbestos into air or into soil, which may remain on-site or be backfilled onto it.

B.l.2.1.3     SITE EVALUATION

B.l.2.1.3.1      Solutions must include the potential impact of the site itself on indoor air quality.  The prior
                history of the site must be disclosed as part of the research and review process (see the
                Supplemental Indoor Air Quality Information, Site Evaluation, and Contaminants Source
                Distribution subsections later in this appendix). Solutions must include consideration of the
                following factors:

                •  Prior history of the site

                                                  B-2

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines	February 1998
Appendix B - Indoor Air Quality Requirements


                •  Off-site and on-site sources of pollution                                              )
                •  Soils and soil gases (including radon, organic chemicals, metals, and microbes)
                •  Ambient air quality
                •  Landscaping (including highly sporulating types of plantings).

B.I.2.1.3.2      The design professional shall review his responsibilities for an Environmental Assessment (EA)
                and an Environmental Impact Study (EIS) as described in Section 2, Site Work, of this Manual
                (subsection 2.3.1). Also see Chapter 7, paragraph 9, of the Safety Manual for additional
                requirements.

B. 1.2.1.4    EXTERIOR DESIGN IMPLICATIONS
             Solutions must include the following considerations:

B. 1.2.1.4.1      If this project is a new facility, locate the building on the site as far removed as possible from
                pollutant sources, or out of the normal wind patterns coming from pollutant sources. Vegetation
                or other screens should be utilized to form a barrier to paniculate matter or to absorb certain
                chemicals. Vegetation should be used, where effective, to protect a building from motor vehicle
                pollutant sources. Where vegetation is used, potential microbial contamination from it should be
                avoided.

B. 1.2.1.4.2      Building designs must include locating air intakes remote from pollution generation points or
                areas, creating architectural barriers to direct polluted airflow away from building air intakes,
                providing appropriate filtration for identified pollutants, and locating air-pollutant-sensitive
                elements away from exterior sources. Air intake locations for both mechanical and natural
                ventilation shall not be located near exhaust outlets or where outdoor air pollution plumes are
                expected.

B. 1.2.1.4.3      Selection and location of window and door systems must include consideration of their designed
                protection against infiltration and the outdoor air pollutants that might pass through the
                openings.

B.l.2.1.4.4      The chemical and physical interactions between the building fabric and identified pollutants that
                might cause deterioration of the building fabric and systems or that might result in amplification
                of the contaminant concentrations in indoor air must be addressed.

B.l.2.2   INDOOR POLLUTANT SOURCES

B. 1.2.2.1     Indoor sources include the building fabric itself, equipment, furnishings, appliances, human
             metabolism and activities, consumer products, maintenance materials and processes, pest control
             materials, and others.

B. 1.2.2.2    INTERIOR DESIGN APPLICATIONS

B. 1.2.2.2.1      Major approaches to source control for indoor pollutants include building design, careful material
                selection, materials modification and treatment; isolation of pollution-generating activities; and
                management controls on polluting activities.

B. 1.2.2.2.2      Source reduction involves a variety of design strategies and practices, including the following:

                *  Source removal
                •  Product selections
                •  Substitution
                •  Product use controls

                                                   B-3

-------
                                                                                Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998	                                             and Planning Guidelines
                                                               Appendix B - Indoor Air Quality Requirements


                •  Enclosure
                •  Encapsulation
                •  Treatment
                •  Conditioning.

B. 1.2.2.2.3      The building design must reflect consideration of the IAQ impacts of siting, orientation,
                configuration, materials, environmental control, and interior layout. The basic characteristics of
                the building—its size, shape, and exterior shell, as well as major environmental control
                strategies, including illumination, ventilation, acoustics, and thermal environment—must reflect
                the emphasis placed on IAQ. This requires that the preliminary estimates of loads and the
                capacities of systems designed to handle them include specific loads related to ventilation
                requirements and air cleaning (filtration, precipitators, absorption, or scrubbing, as required by
                ambient air and indoor air quality standards referenced in this section and applicable codes and
                standards).

B.1.2.2.2.4      Ideally, precipitators, absorbers, and scrubbers should be avoided because of their high
                maintenance costs. Where proposed, a cost/benefit study must be submitted.

B.l.2.3   BUILDING MATERIALS EVALUATION
          The design professional shall provide descriptions of measures that will be taken to minimize the use of
          indoor air pollution sources in the building construction, finishes, maintenance, and operation.
          Measures consist of the following four phases.

B.l.2.3.1     It shall be the responsibility of the design professional to review all products and materials and
             identify those considered likely to emit toxic or irritating chemicals in the completed facility. The
             design professional shall establish a library or repository that is locally available for inspection and
             use by the Government. This library shall contain product composition specifications for all
             products and materials used in construction. Copies of all specifications shall also be submitted to
             the Government.

B. 1.2.3.2     The Government reserves the right to screen all products and materials, based on printed
             information from manufacturers and information in the open literature, and to target selected
             products for testing.

B.l.2.3.3     The Government reserves the right to require emissions testing of selected products, at no cost to the
             Government, to determine chemical content, emissions rate, or change in composition due to
             environmental exposure. Based on test results, the Government reserves the right to disallow
             installation of a given product or material in the completed facility. All testing will be by the
             suppliers, with test guidance provided by the Government. The design professional shall coordinate
             this process.

B. 1.2.3.4     Material selection, modification, and handling shall minimize indoor air pollution.

B.l.2.4   RESULTS OF MATERIALS EVALUATION

B. 1.2.4.1     The results of the process must be the selection and appropriate installation of materials that have
             low content of toxic or irritating chemicals and that have stable chemicals (low emissions).  The
             design professional may be required to computer-model selected materials for the purposes of
             exposure assessment.  Details of the materials evaluation process are presented in the Supplemental
             Indoor Air Quality Information presented later in this appendix.
                                                  B-4

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines	;	\	February 1998
Appendix B - Indoor Air Quality Requirements


B.1.2.4.2    Special procedures available to prevent or remedy problems of indoor air quality that result from
             material emissions will be required prior to occupancy of the building. These procedures are  .
             discussed in the Supplemental Indoor Air Quality Information presented later in this appendix.

B.l.2.5   MATERIALS AFFECTING INDOOR ADR QUALITY
          Careful selection and application are required for all interior finish materials and compounds that may
          result in indoor air residues. Particular attention should be paid to the following materials:

          •   Adhesives
          •   Sealants
          •   Caulking
          *   Wood preservatives and finishes
          •   Pesticides
          •   Fungicides
          •   Carpet
          •   Carpet padding
          •   Paints
          •   Insulations: thermal, fire and acoustic
          •   Wood paneling
          •   Composite wood products such as particle board, cardboard, wafer board, chipboard, etc.
          •   Gaskets
          •   Glazing compounds
          •   Control joint fillers
          •   Floor coverings
          •   Wall coverings
    ,      *   Ceiling tiles, panels
          •   Furniture
          *   Systems furniture.

B.l.2.6   DESIGN

B. 1.2.6.1     The design of the HVAC system shall minimize conditions conducive to microbial growth, chemical
             contamination, and paniculate matter releases, and distribution of such within the building. Designs
             shall minimize conditions of accumulated moisture that, together with warmth and darkness,
             encourage the growth of microorganisms.

B. 1.2.6.2     Reliable control  of humidity shall be provided. Water shall not be permitted to accumulate in drain
             pans. Drip or drain pans must be readily maintainable.  Carbon-containing materials shall be
             avoided in areas where water accumulates.

B. 1.2.6.3     The HVAC system must be readily accessible to allow for maintenance, frequent inspection, and
             cleaning of surfaces exposed to the airstream. Care must be taken to avoid use of materials that will
             release nonbiological particles into the airstream.

B.1.3  HVAC SYSTEM DESIGN

B.l.3.1   IMPORTANT IAQ ISSUES
          Important IAQ issues are as follows:

          •  The selection and installation of components and materials
          •   Control of moisture accumulation within the system
          •  Deliver}' of required outside air to the occupants' breathing zone
          •  Design of a readily maintainable system

                                                 B-5

-------
                                                                                Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998                                                                    and Planning Guidelines
                                                              Appendix B - Indoor Air Quality Requirements


          •   Implementation of energy management strategies that do not compromise indoor air quality
          •   Space air distribution (both supply and return)
          •   Humidity control
          *   Isolation zones for IAQ control.

B.l.3.2   VENTILATION STANDARD

B. 1.3.2.1     ASHRAE standard 62-1989, Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality, shall be followed.
             Additionally, requirements of Section 1S, Mechanical Requirements, of this Manual shall be
             followed. Certain aspects of the ASHRAE standard are highlighted within this document.

B.1.3.2.2     Emphasis on maintenance of ventilation system equipment is presented in terms of "readily
             maintainable" installations.  This is a change from earlier language, which read "readily accessible."

B.L3.3   OUTSIDE AIR SUPPLY

6.1.3.3.1     The HVAC system design must reflect the anticipated ventilation efficiency as the basis for
             assumptions that result in the sizing of equipment that impacts outside air supply quantities.

B.I.3.3,2     The general office minimum ventilation rate is 20 cubic feet per minute (cfm) per person.  This
             refers to the quantity of outside air actually delivered to the breathing zone. Maintaining this rate
             will require a larger quantity of outside air at the building intakes to compensate for ventilation
             efficiency below 100 percent. Twenty cfm per person is the required minimum quantity of outside
             air delivered to the occupants under conditions of minimum outdoor air supply. Where multiple
             spaces with dissimilar ratios of outside air to total air are served by a common air supply system, air
             quality shall be determined by Equation 6-1 of ASHRAE standard 62.  Performance will be
             determined by tracer gas injection at the supply fan and measurement at representative locations.

B. 1.3.3.3     It is important to note that the minimum outside air requirements in the ASHRAE standard are
             predicated on an indoor environment that is free of significant sources of pollution.

B.l.3.3.4     The presence of unavoidable sources of pollutants will require a higher percentage of outside air
             supply. Thus, the HVAC system must be capable of providing and sustaining higher outdoor air
             supply rates.

B.l.3.4   AIR CLEANING

B. 1.3.4.1     The facility will utilize the most technologically advanced and cost-effective techniques to minimize
             the presence of gas, vapor, and paniculate phase pollutants to the maximum practical extent.

B. 1.3.4.2     The trade-offs between cleaning and recirculating return air and conditioning outside air vary greatly
             from time to time. The HVAC system and the building automation system (BAS) must be capable of
             detecting critical factors that will allow the automatic selection of the most cost-effective mix of air
             cleaning, outside air supply volume, and recirculated air. The  critical factors are the thermal
             properties and contaminant contents of both the outside air and the return air relative to the design
             conditions.

B.I.3.4.3     OUTSIDE AIR CONTAMINANTS
             Air-cleaning devices (e.g., scrubbers)  may be required that are capable of removing outdoor
             pollutants that periodically exceed established standard (National Ambient Air Quality Standards
             [NAAQS] and Table E-l, Ambient  Air Quality Guidelines) from ASHRAE standard 62-1989. This
             may involve the provision of air cleaning beyond the usual panel type paniculate filters currently
             used in most commercial building.  However, as stated earlier, precipitators, absorption and


                                                 B-6

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines	February 1998
Appendix B - Indoor Air Quality Requirements


            scrubbing should be avoided because of their high maintenance costs. Where proposed, a
            cost/benefit study must be submitted.

B. 1.3,4.4    RE CIRCULATION AIR CONTAMINANTS
            Furthermore, additional air-cleaning technologies must be used, if necessary, to achieve acceptable
            indoor air quality where recirculation air contaminant levels result in supply air quality problems.

B.l.3.5   SPACE AIR DISTRIBUTION

B. 1.3.5.1    This method of indoor contaminant control presents a large potential for significant improvement in
            ventilation efficiency and, thereby, in indoor air quality. Poor ventilation efficiency results in
            deterioration of indoor air quality and increased operational costs. The Government requires that the
            design professional address the ventilation efficiency of the system.

B. 1.3.5.2    The Government requires that Air Distribution Performance Index (ADPI) exceed 80 percent and
            that the design professional describe the approach and provide calculations.

B. 1.3.5.3    Ceiling plenums may be used for return air provided that sufficient return dampers and duct headers
            are provided to permit accurate air balancing and provided that all code wiring provisions are
            followed for smoke and fire safety.

B.I.4  INDOOR AIR QUALITY REFERENCE GUIDELINES
       The design professional shall  review and respond to the EPA publication, Building Air Quality:  A Guide
      for Building O\vners and Facility Managers, U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS),
       Center for Disease Control (CDC), National Institute of Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) Pub. No.
       91-114, as well as the American Institute of Architects (ALA) documents composing the Environmental
       Resource Guide.
B.2  Supplemental Indoor Air Quality Information

B.2.1 GENERAL
      The accompanying material has been provided to advise users of this Manual on the nature of testing and
      evaluative procedures to which the facility may be subject.

B.2.1.1    SITE EVALUATION

B.2.1.1.1     Valuable air quality and weather data are available from local air quality monitoring and regulatory
             agencies, National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration monitoring stations, airports, harbors,
             and even certain resort and athletic establishments. Data on prior uses of sites may be available
             through historic building surveys or documentation, older fire insurance maps, municipal land use
             records, assessors' and recorders' files, and other state and local health, waste disposal, or hazardous
             materials control agencies.

B.2.1.1.2     A set of manuals for air quality considerations in residential planning was prepared for the United
             States Department of Housing and Urban Development in 1978. While written for the residential
             environment, the methods and procedures described there will be useful for any type of building.
             These manuals provide illustrative base maps, calculations sheets, and other aids for the preparation
             of a comprehensive assessment.

B.2.1.1.3     The following references are for the manuals cited above; they will be helpful in the site evaluation.
             Thuillier, R.H. 1978. Air Quality Considerations in Residential Planning, Volume 1. Guide for
             Rapid Assessment of Air Quality at Housing Sites. Volume 2. Manual for Air Quality

                                                 B-7

-------
                                                                             •• Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998                                                        .          and Planning Guidelines
                                                            Appendix B - Indoor Air Quality Requirements


             Considerations for Residential Locations.  Volume 3. Scientific Support and Documentation.
             Washington, D.C.: United States Department of Housing and Urban Development.

B.2.I.2   CONTAMINANTS SOURCE DISTRIBUTION
         Table B.2.1.2, Sources Contributing to Indoor Air Pollution, provides a summary of likely sources of
         indoor air pollution.


 Table B.2.1.2 Sources Contributing to Indoor Air Pollution	

 Type of Location	Description and Characteristics	•	

 Outdoor Air                              Cyclical
                                         Daily traffic patterns
                                         Diurnal thermal patterns
                                         Seasonal thermal patterns
                                         Seasonal air quality variations
                                         Daily or seasonal releases from neighboring structures or land
                                         Episodic
                                         Extreme weather conditions
	Accidental releases	

 Base Building                            Building materials and equipment
                                         Exposed to interior
                                         Exposed to air distribution system
	Concealed	.	

 Occupants and Their Activities              Metabolic  activity
                                         Work, recreational, food preparation, personal hygiene
                                         Operation of machines and equipment

 Building Maintenance                      Routine cleaning
                                         Dusting, vacuuming
                                         Waxing and polishing
                                         Repair of building equipment
                                         Treatment for pests, odors

B.2.1.3   BUILDING MATERIALS EVALUATION  PROCESS

B.2.1.3. 1     PHASE 1 - IDENTIFYING TARGET PRODUCTS

B.2.1.3.1,1      The first step is to become familiar with the overall project, design, and space planning program;
               building design; and construction schedule. This understanding is essential for other tasks as
               well as for the building materials evaluation work. The simultaneous timing of certain
               construction tasks in relation to installation of major interior furnishings and workstation
               components increases the potential for retention of airborne contaminants from construction
               processes on large-surface area materials such as carpets and textiles until long after initial
               occupancy. Table B.2.1.3.1.1,  Potential Sources of Indoor Air Pollutants, shows pollutant
               sources warranting particular attention.
                                                B-8

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines	February 1998
Appendix B * Indoor Air Quality Requirements


 Table B.2.1.3.1.1  Potential Sources of Indoor Air Pollutants
          Adhesives
          Sealants
          Caulking
          Wood preservatives and finishes
          Pesticides
          Fungicides
          Carpet
          Carpet padding
          Paints
          Insulations:  thermal, fire, and acoustic
Wood paneling
Composite wood products such as particle
board, chipboard, wafer board, cardboard, etc.
Gaskets
Glazing compounds
Control joint fillers
Floor coverings
Wall coverings
Ceiling tiles, panels
B.2.1.3.1.2      This is followed by a review of the design-professional-intended use of major interior finish
                materials including floor coverings, wall coverings, ceiling system, HVAC duct materials, and
                furnishings.  Considerations include the criteria for selection of certain products (for example,
                maintenance, cost, acoustics, aesthetics, and functional performance) as well as the quantities
                and applications contemplated. This review phase concludes with identification of products and
                materials that might emit toxic or irritating chemicals in the completed building. At this point,
                all questionable products and materials are considered for further screening.

B.2.1.3.1.3      The "Environmental Resource Guide" published by AIA may be of assistance in evaluating
                building materials.

B.2.1.3.2     PHASE 2 - SCREENING TARGET PRODUCTS

B.2.1.3.2.1      GENERAL
                Screening of major components of the building fabric and furnishings is done by determining the
                following:

                •   Components' quantity and distribution in the building
                •   Chemical composition
                •   Stability of chemical substances of concern
                •   Toxic or irritation potential of components' major chemical constituents.

                The result of this screening process is the identification of products and materials for further
                investigation.

B.2.1.3.2.2      PHASE 2 (A) - QUANTITATIVE ASSESSMENT
                Quantitative use and distribution assessment involves identifying the major classes of materials,
                furnishings, and finishes to be used and determining the extent of use, use per unit of floor area,
                and potential exposure of occupants due to the nature of the product use.

B.2.1.3.2.3      PHASE 2 (B) - CHEMICAL CONTENT
                At this phase, chemical content is assessed from published general information on building
                products and materials, information obtained from the building's interior designers, or
                manufacturers' and suppliers' product literature and data sheets. The last are obtained by
                requiring all potential vendors to provide Manufacturer's Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs) for all
                products assembled by them and the names of suppliers of each product not assembled by them.
                Additionally, manufacturers should be required to provide contact information for each of their
                suppliers and to request the contact individual to cooperate with the design team. These
                secondary suppliers and  manufacturers are contacted and additional MSDSs and other
                information are obtained.


                                                 B-9

-------
                                                                               Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998                                                                   and Planning Guidelines
                                                              Appendix B - Indoor Air Quality Requirements


                MSDSs are U.S. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) mandated documents
                listing all hazardous substances contained in the product they cover, they are generally available
                for most products of interest. OSHA requires that MSDSs be available for most products of
                interest. OSHA requires that MSDSs be available to workers for all hazardous substances to
                which the worker will be exposed. Thus, whether in a factory or at the construction site, each
                substance used in building materials, products, and furnishings is theoretically covered by an
                MSDS.

B.2.1.3.2.4      PHASE 2 (C) - CHEMICAL STABILITY
                Stability (chemical emissions) assessments are done by reviewing the vapor pressure and
                molecular weight data for chemicals of concern, as identified on the MSDSs. Many sources can
                be used to obtain the data:

                •   American Conference of Government Industrial Hygienists, 1988. Industrial Ventilation:
                   A Manual of Recommended Practice.

                •   National Institute of Occupational Safety and Health 1982,1984. Registry of Toxic Effects of
                   Chemical Substances.  1981-1982. Volumes 1-3 (RTECS) plus the RTECS 1983-4
                   Supplement (2 volumes).

                •   National Institute of Occupational Safety and Health 198S.  Pocket Guide to Chemical
                   Hazards.

                •   Sax, N.I.  1979.  Dangerous Properties of Industrial Materials.  5th Edition. New York: Van
                   Nostrand Reinhold.

                *   Verschueren, K. 1983.  Handbook of Environmental Data on Organic Chemicals.  2nd
                   Edition. New York: Van Nostrand Reinhold.

                Additional information on potential emissions into building air is obtained by reviewing
                emissions test reports and articles in the published literature. See especially:

                •   Tucker, W.G. 1986. "Research Overview: Sources of Indoor Air Pollutants." in
                   Proceedings oflAQ '86, Managing Indoor Air for Health and Energy Conservation.  Atlanta:
                   American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.

                •   Levin, H. 1987.  "The Evaluation of Building Materials and Furnishings in New Buildings."
                   inlAQ '87, Practical Control of Indoor Air Quality. Atlanta, Georgia: American Society
                   for Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers.

                Emission factors can vary significantly—up to a factor of 1,000—for different brands of similar
                products. Therefore, it is important to obtain as much information as possible about the identity
                and quantities of constituents in a given product.  While such a paper evaluation cannot be
                definitive, it can be  useful in selecting potentially acceptable products. It also can be useful in
                identifying specific compounds to be measured if laboratory testing is performed.

B.2.1.3.2.5      PHASE 2 (D) EXPOSURE AND TOXICITY EVALUATION

B.2.1.3.2.5.1        Toxicity and irritation potential of the constituent compounds are evaluated using standard
                   reference sources (ACGM 1980). Exposure evaluations by computer modeling may also be
                   required.
                                                 B-10

-------
Architecture, Engineering.
and Planning Guidelines	;	February 1998
Appendix B - Indoor Air Quality Requirements


                   •  American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists, Inc. Documentation of the
                      threshold limit values, 4th ed. Cincinnati.

                   •  Gosselin, G.D., and F.C. Clayton, eds.  1981. Patty's Industrial Hygiene and Toxicology.
                      3d rev. ed. Volumes 1-3. New York: John Wiley and Sons.

                   •  NIOSH. 1983. Registry of Toxic Effects of Chemical Substances. 1981-2, Volumes 1-3.
                      Cincinnati: National Institute of Occupational Safety and Health, U.S. Public Health
                      Service.

                   •  NIOSH. 1985. Registry of Toxic Effects of Chemical Substances. 1983-4.  Supplement,
                      Volumes 1-2. Cincinnati: National Institute of Occupational Safety and Health, U.S.
                      Public Health Service.

                   •  NIOSH. 1985. Pocket Guide to Chemical Hazards. Cincinnati: National Institute of
                      Occupational Safety and Health, U.S. Public Health Service.

                   •  Olishifski, J.B., ed 1979. Fundamentals of Industrial Hygiene. National Safety Council.

                   •  Sax, N.I. 1979. Dangerous Properties of Industrial Materials. 5th ed. New York:  Van
                      Nostrand Reinhold.

                   •  Sparks, L. 1989. IAQModel.

B.2.1.3.2.5.2      . Sax (1979), for example, lists a "summary of toxicity statement" or rating (THR) for each
                   substance covered. Ratings of "none," "low,"  "moderate," "high," or "unknown" are given.
                   The route or routes of entry are given for specified toxic effects. LD50 (lethal dose for 50% of
                   experimental animals) are given for various exposure routes, tests and experimental species.
                   Human irritation potential and target organs or sites are also listed, and carcinogenicity and
                   mutagenicity assessment is reported.

B.2.1.3.2.5.3       NIOSH's Registry of Toxic Effects of Chemical Substances 1981-1982. Volumes 1-3
                   (RTECS) plus the RTECS 1983-4 Supplement (2 volumes) provide an annotated listing of
                   toxicity and irritation research for tens of thousands of chemical substances. RTECS also
                   provides a comprehensive list of alternative trade and generic names by which products may
                   be known or marketed, chemical formulas, and cross-references to the Chemical Abstracts
                   Service (CAS) number for each chemical.

B.2.1.3.2.5.4       A database on building materials emission rates is now being developed by EPA. There is
                   also a large database developed by the National Aeronautics and Space Administration
                   (NASA) for spacecraft design and operation. Work currently in progress will make both of
                   these databases accessible and useful at this point in the process.  From this review,
                   determinations are made regarding materials that will require laboratory testing according to
                   the outcome of the combination of reviewed factors.  A combination of high volatility and
                   moderate toxicity would result in further consideration of the substance and the product. A
                   very low volatility and moderate toxicity would be examined in terms of the quantity of the
                   product and the quantity of the substance present in that product. No algorithm has been
                   established for this evaluation; a qualitative assessment is the most reasonable approach given
                   the limited amount of data currently available.

B.2.1.3.2.6      RESULTS
                The results of this screening process allow identification of the products most likely to emit
                significant quantities of irritating or toxic substances.  These are likely to be the carpet system


                                                 B-ll

-------
                                                                               Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998                                                       '_          and Planning Guidelines
                                                             Appendix B - Indoor Air Quality Requirements


                (carpet, pad or backing, and adhesive), workstation (office furnishings) work surfaces and
                interior partitions, and ceiling tiles. Shelving materials, adhesive, caulking compounds, and
                some wood finishes are also materials of concern. These materials should be evaluated by
                emissions testing.

B.2.1.3.3     PHASE 3 - EMISSIONS TESTING

B.2.1.3.3.1      Test methods include bulk testing and environmental chamber and headspace air sampling. Air
                sampling can also be done in the first completed building prior to, during, and after materials
                installation to develop air quality profiles of the installation.  Chamber tests can be conducted in
                a very small chamber (less than 0.1 cubic meter) or in a medium-size chamber capable of
                accommodating full-size samples.

B.2.1.3.3.2      Cut samples create problems of distorted ratios between surface area and edges, and cuts through
                materials can expose materials not normally exposed in the assembled product. Sealing the
                edges reduces some of these effects. Room-size chambers can also be used, but they are
             '   expensive and require larger quantities of materials.

B.2.1.3.3.3      Ratios of materials, surface area, and weight to chamber volume and wall area should be kept
                reasonably similar to the ratios found in actual building situations. Multiple materials tests may
                also be run to determine "sink" effects, the tendency of materials to absorb airborne substances on
                their surfaces and rerelease them to the air.

B.2.1.3.3.4      Air movement, temperature, and relative humidity, as well as outdoor (or pure) air exchange..
                rates in the chamber should approximate those found in buildings. Airflow should be controlled
                within the chamber to ensure good mixing and to minimize unusually high velocities at material
                surfaces. Guidance is available from A Standard Guide for Small-Scale Environmental Chamber
                Measurements of Organic Emissions from Indoor Materials /Products now under development
                by ASTM Subcommittee D-22.05 on Indoor Air (1916 Race St., Philadelphia, PA  19103).

B.2.1.3.3.5      Material samples are generally conditioned by being placed in the chamber at controlled
                temperature and under forced air circulation for several hours or even days prior to testing. In
                order to best meet the purpose of the testing, handling of the material should resemble that
                employed in actual installations of the materials in buildings. Products are stored in factory
                containers until testing. Once opened, they are kept in  a normally ventilated room containing
                typical, new office furnishings until additional testing is conducted. Complete and careful
                recordkeeping is essential to interpretation of testing results.

B.2.1.3.4     ANALYSIS AND RECOMMENDATIONS
             Based on the results of the four-phase materials evaluation process, products can be selected,
             modified, treated, or otherwise managed to improve indoor air quality.

B.2.1.3.5     DEFINITIONS

B.2.1.3.5.1      BREATHING ZONE
                The air space bounded by the lower and upper horizontal planes where human respiration occurs.
                For office space, this zone is between 42 and 64 inches  above the floor. All breathing zone
                measurements shall be made at a height of 42 inches.

B.2.1.3.5.2      ROOM VENTILATION EFFICIENCY
                Percentage of the outdoor air entering the room per person that actually ventilates the breathing
                zone.
                                                 B-12

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines	February 1998
Appendix B - Indoor Air Quality Requirements


B.2.1.3.5.3      OVERALL (BUILDING) VENTILATION EFFICIENCY
                Percentage of the outdoor air entering the building per person that actually ventilates the
                breathing zone.

B.2.1.3.5.4      VOLATILE ORGANIC CHEMICALS
                Such compounds having vapor pressures above 0.1 mm of mercury.

B.2.1.3.5.5      SEMTVOLATILE ORGANIC CHEMICALS
                Such compounds having vapor pressures of less than 0.1 mm of mercury down to .0000001 mm
                of mercury.
B.3  Construction Process

B.3.1 GENERAL
      The construction process offers many opportunities to observe and correct problems before the building is
      completed and occupied. As part of the Quality Assurance/Quality Control Manual, a review of change
      orders, shop drawings and other submittals, and installations in the field shall be used to avoid construction
      and occupancy delays, call-backs, and problems in the occupied building.

B.3.1.1    CHANGE ORDERS, SHOP DRAWINGS

B.3.1.1.1    Changes made and details supplied by contractors or designers during construction can significantly
            affect indoor air quality.  Changes made in response to previously anticipated problems or events
            during construction must meet the design intent and the established performance criteria outlined in
            the IAQ Quality Assurance/Quality Control Manual.

B.3.1.1.2    The design professional must review, evaluate, and follow-up on change orders, field orders, and
            shop drawing approval requests for items determined to be significant to indoor environmental
            quality. These include HVAC system design and components, insulations, sealants, finish materials,
            and furnishings, among others. The list of items requiring special attention with respect to IAQ
            shall have been identified in the IAQ Quality Assurance/Quality Control Manual and the procedures
            and criteria for their selection specified.

B.3.2 COMMISSIONING

B.3.2.1    Simultaneous thermal and air balance must include complete system balancing under heating, cooling,
          and economizer cycles.  Limitations imposed by weather conditions shall be overcome by completion of
          the balance work at the earliest available opportunity.

B.3.2.2    Effective training programs must be included in control system and HVAC equipment construction
          contracts.

B.3.2.3    Evidence that the facility's ventilation system is fully functional and that air quality is acceptable prior
          to initial occupancy of any specific area will be the responsibility of the design professional. This will be
          accomplished through performance testing during or immediately after the "commissioning" of the
          completed facility.

B.3.2.4    While no specifics for performance verification are included in the proposed OSHA 29 CFR indoor air
          quality standard, it is the intent that the actual facility be measured prior to occupancy and periodically
          after occupancy to determine IAQ conformance to ASHRAE, the requirements of this document, and
          other specified code and Governmental requirements in force.
                                                B-13

-------
                                                                               Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998                                                                   and Planning Guidelines
                                                             Appendix B - Indoor Air Quality Requirements


B.3.3 AIR-OUT PROCEDURES
      Refer to the requirements of Chapter 4, paragraph 3.b, and Chapter 7, paragraph 3.e(4), of the Safety
      Manual for off-gassing.

B.3.3.1   An IAQ control procedure known as the "air-out" will be employed after completion of the building,
         commissioning of the equipment, and installation of major furnishings.

B.3.3.2   The purpose of the air-out is to remove chemical emissions from materials in the building in order to
         reduce occupant exposure to these chemicals once occupancy commences. The air-out is achieved by the
         use of adequate ventilation for an extended period of time. This will require an additional time period of
         1 to 3 weeks after commissioning and prior to occupancy.

B.3.3.3   Some material, such as carpets and other flooring systems, may require elevated air temperatures to
         accelerate their chemical emissions. Refer to the IAQ Quality Assurance/Quality Control Manual
         and/or the building acceptance test manual for appropriate recommendations.

B.3.3.4   Supplemental air movement devices such as portable fans shall be used to increase airflow within
         enclosed spaces to improve the efficacy of the air-out procedure.

B.3.3.5   The air-out must be carefully planned and conducted to avoid adverse effects on building components
         and equipment. Refer to the IAQ Quality Assurance/Quality Control Manual and/or building
         acceptance test manual.

B.3.3.6   Such a process requires careful planning of commissioning and occupancy. The Government will
         provide an occupancy schedule for purposes of planning the air-out process.

END OF APPENDIX B
                                                B-14

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines	   .	February 1998
Appendix C - Room Data Sheets
                           Appendix C - Room Data Sheets


C.1  General
      This section contains the room data sheets for various typical functional layouts for EPA laboratories and
      laboratory support spaces. These data sheets should be used as guides and references during the
      programming and design process of a specific project Final laboratory layouts must be developed with the
      individual users and their research requirements as provided in Section 1, General Planning and Design
      Data, of this Manual. Specific criteria and requirements should be verified by the design team with EPA,
      local, state, and federal regulatory agencies.


C.2  Typical Room Requirements

C.2.1 ROOM DATA SHEETS
      The room data sheets for typical room arrangements are shown in the following laboratory and laboratory
      support room layouts.  Specific requirements, developed during the programming process with the
      individual user of the room, shall be in accordance with Section 1, General Planning and Design Data, of
      this Manual.  The final layouts for these areas will be the responsibility of the design professional with
      approval by EPA.

C.2.2 STANDARDS AND SYMBOLS
      Standard  requirements for each area or room, as indicated in the various sections of this Manual, must also
      be defined for each specific laboratory facility Program of Requirements (POR). A listing and definitions of
      typical standard requirements, symbols, and abbreviations are provided in the following subsections as
      examples.


C.3  Definition of Standard Requirements
      AH standard requirements shall be in accordance with codes and with all other requirements of this
      document. The narrative description of requirements in this section and elsewhere in this Manual shall take
      precedence over drawings. If an item is described in the narrative but not shown in a drawing, that is not to
      be taken as a waiver of the requirement.  The schematic drawings are provided for illustrative purposes
      only.

C.3.1 LABORATORY CLASSIFICATION STANDARD
      The required construction for all laboratory units shall be classified as Fire Hazard Class B laboratories per
      NFPA 45.

C.3.2 ARCHITECTURAL STANDARDS
      The following typical standards may be modified in accordance with specific project requirements.

C.3.2.1   FLOORING
         Provide chemical-resistant vinyl tile or seamless vinyl flooring. When a seamless vinyl floor material is
         required, the base shall also be seamless and integrally coved. Floor and base materials are described in
         Section 9, Finishes, of this Manual.

C.3.2.2   BASE
         Provide 4-inch-high vinyl or rubber base with matching end stops and preformed or molded corner
         units.
                                               C-l

-------
                                                                                Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998                                                •                   and Planning Guidelines
                                                                          Appendix C - Room Data Sheets


C.3.2.3   WALLS
         Provide masonry or gypsum wallboard partitions extending from the floor to the underside of structural
         slab.  Wall surfaces shall be painted with semigloss enamel paint. In instrumentation rooms, where
         sound absorption is required, walls shall be properly attenuated  Reverberating wall areas should be
         reduced to a minimum.  See also Partitions in Section 1, General Planning and Design Data, of this
         Manual for flame spread and smoke development specifications.

C.3.2.4   CEILING
         Finished ceilings shall be suspended acoustical tile system. Tiles shall be of a nonflaking material.
         Ceilings in extraction, preparation, glassware washing, microbiology, and similar wet laboratories shall
         be of water-resistant tile materials or painted gypsum wallboard.  Ceiling height in all laboratory spaces
         shall be a minimum of 9 feet 8 inches.

C.3.2.5   DOORS
         Open doors should not protrude more  than 6 inches into exit corridors.  Door sizes and hardware are as
         follows:

         •   Hallway access doors: pair doors;  3 feet (active) with 1 foot panel (top and bottom bolts at inactive);
             wire glass (4-inch-by-25-inch or 5-inch-by 20-inch vision panel); no threshold; Americans with
             Disabilities Act (ADA)~compliant hardware; automatic closure.

         •   Interconnecting (between laboratories):  3  feet; push plate; vision panel; dual swing.

         •   Interconnecting (between blocks):  4 feet (minimum) with panic bar hardware; automatic closures.

         *   Exterior fire doors: 4 feet with panic bar hardware; automatic closures.

         •   All doors shall be a minimum height of 7 feet.

C.3.2.6   CASEWORK
         Laboratory casework shall be of modular design and interchangeable. Standard casework shall be of
         metal construction; room data sheets will indicate exceptions (wood or approved plastic laminate) to
         these requirements. Casework shall be as described in Section 10, Specialties, of this Manual under
         Laboratory Casework. Unless otherwise noted in the room data sheets, peninsulas shall not have reagent
         shelves.  Six-inch drawers are standard in the base drawer units.  All units shall include label holders on
         all drawers and doors.

         •   Vented Storage Cabinets: Vented  acid/base storage cabinets shall be 3-foot-wide metal cabinets.
             The inner surfaces of the cabinet shall be factory coated to resist acid/base fumes and spills. One
             adjustable shelf shall be provided.  Venting shall be as for vented chemical storage cabinets.

         •   Countertops: Man-made stone impregnated with chemical (e.g., acids, bases, solvents) resistant
             epoxies. Countertops adjacent to sinks shall have grooved drainboards. Casework along walls shall
             have a 4-inch-high backsplash.

         •   Knee Space: Unless otherwise noted in specific room data sheets, knee spaces shall be 3 feet in
             length and 29 inches in height.

C.3.2.7   EMERGENCY RESPONSE EQUIPMENT CLOSETS
         Hallway closets approximately 3 feet by 3 feet shall be located throughout the laboratory block, with
         equal travel distance between closets.  These closets will house laboratory supplies for spill cleanup.
                                                  C-2

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines	February 1998
Appendix C - Room Data Sheets


C.3.3 MECHANICAL STANDARDS

C.3.3.1   HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC)
         The laboratory HVAC system shall be designed as a one-pass air system with exhaust through hoods
         where hoods are used. HVAC systems should be continuously operational 24 hours a day, 7 days a
         week, summer and winter. Design temperatures shall be as follows:

C.3.3.1.1    Every laboratory room shall be controlled individually in accordance with the following: summer:
            72 degrees Fahrenheit (°F) dry bulb (db) ± 2°F and 50 percent relative humidity (RH) ± 5 percent;
            winter: 72 °F db ± 2°F and 30 percent RH ± 5 percent.  For laboratories that are primarily
            instrumentation rooms, the standard shall be 72 °F db ± 2°F.

C.3.3.1.2    See also Mechanical Requirements, Section IS, of this Manual under Load Calculations for
            additional requirements.

C.3.3.2   EMERGENCY EYE/FACE WASH
         Emergency eye/face wash stations shall be provided at a minimum of one per single module (308 net
         usable space feet [NUSF]) in accessible locations. These stations shall be away from fume hoods, shall
         require no more than 10 seconds to reach, and should be within a travel distance of no greater than SO
         feet from the hazard.  See Section IS, Mechanical Requirements, of this Manual for additional
         requirements.

C.3.3.3   EMERGENCY SHOWERS
         Emergency showers shall be provided in all work areas where, during routine operations or foreseeable
         emergencies, areas of the body may come into contact with a substance that is corrosive or severely
         irritating to the skin or that is toxic by skin absorption. Emergency showers shall be in accessible
         locations, away from fume hoods; shall require no more than 10 seconds to reach; and should be within
         a travel distance of no greater than 50 feet from the hazard. See Section 15, Mechanical Requirements,
         of this Manual for additional requirements.

C.3.3.4   DEIONIZED WATER SYSTEM
         A deionized water (DI) system shall be provided at a resistivity > 10 megaohms at tap. Refer to Section
         IS, Mechanical Requirements, of this Manual under Deionized Water (DI) System for specific
         requirements. This system may be a centralized system or several decentralized systems depending on
         the requirements of the specific laboratory facility.

C.3.3.5   NONFLAMMABLE-GAS DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
         Outlets shall be provided as specified in the room data sheet (exact location to be determined by the
         Government during design stage). See also Section 15, Mechanical Requirements, of this Manual for
         additional requirements.  This system may be a centralized system or several decentralized systems
         depending on the requirements of the specific laboratory facility.

C.3.3.6   FIRE PROTECTION
         The entire laboratory facility shall be sprinklered. Instrumentation laboratories shall have a preaction
         sprinkler system.  Portable fire extinguishers shall be provided in all laboratory rooms. Refer to
         Section 10, Specialties, under Portable Fire Extinguishers, and Section IS, Mechanical Requirements, of
         this Manual for additional requirements.

C.3.3.7   FUME HOODS
         All fume hoods called for in the specific design criteria of this document shall satisfy all requirements
         stated in Section 15, Mechanical Requirements, of this Manual under Laboratory Fume Hoods.
                                                C-3

-------
                                                                                Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998                       '                                             and Planning Guidelines
                                                                          Appendix C - Room Data Sheets


          •   Fume hoods shall be equipped with a low exhaust flow safety alarm system designed to signal unsafe
             operating conditions whenever fume hood velocity falls below 70 percent of specified design value.
             The alarm system shall consist of an audible and visual alarm to indicate malfunction or unsafe
             operating conditions.  Additional specific standard utility and service requirements shall be indicated
             for each specific laboratory facility project.

          •   Noise Control. The noise level at the face of the hood shall not exceed 70 decibels (dB) with the
             system operating, nor shall it exceed 55 dB at benchtop level elsewhere in the laboratory room.

C.3.3,8   LABORATORY SERVICE FITTINGS
          Laboratory service fittings for piped utilities (e.g., water faucets and spigots, gas jets or nozzles, etc.)
          shall have a solvent, and acid-resistant epoxy-powder coating or shall be made of poiyvinyl chloride
          (PVC) or equivalent corrosion-resistant materials where required.

C.3.4  ELECTRICAL STANDARD

C.3.4.1   ELECTRICAL OUTLETS
          Laboratory standard electrical outlets shall be duplex convenience 20 ampere (amp)/120V outlets in
          surface metal raceways as defined in Section 16, Electrical Requirements, of this Manual. These outlets
          should be provided in addition to specific electrical outlets called for or shown in the respective room
          data sheets, and in addition to outlets needed to feed the equipment used in each room. These outlets
          shall be located either on the reagent shelf or, if no reagent shelf is required, 8 inches above countertop
          level when base cabinets are used, and 44 inches above floor level in other locations. The maximum
          spacing between outlets shall be 3 feet.

          Additional requirements are as follows:

          •   Peninsulas Without Reagent Shelf.  Provide a quadruplex pedestal or other type of outlet every 3 feet
             in the center of the peninsula; pedestal units shall have brass, waterproof covers.

          •   Peninsulas With Reagent Shelf.  Provide duplex outlets in surface metal raceway every 3 feet flush
             along the face of the bottom shelf on each side of the peninsulas.
          ft
          •   Equipment Outlet Location. Electrical outlet location shall be near the equipment to be powered; the
             exact location of equipment and outlets shall be determined by the Government during early design
             stage.

          •   GFCI protection shall be provided within 6 feet of water sources.

C.3.4.2   LIGHTING
          Laboratory standard lighting should be fluorescent uniform lighting with two levels of lighting at
          benchtop and double switching. The high level should be  100 footcandles and the low level should be
          50 footcandles. See also Section 16, Electrical Requirements. Pendant lighting with direct/indirect
          light is recommended.

C.3.4.3   EMERGENCY LIGHTING
          Provide a minimum of 5 footcandles throughout exit path, including laboratory modules. See also
          Section 16, Electrical Requirements, of this Manual for specific requirements.

C3.4.4   SWITCHES
          Provide at least one snitch for room lighting at 54  inches above the finished floor (AFF) at each door
          that provides hallway egress. See also Section 16,  Electrical Requirements, of this Manual for specific
          requirements.

                                                  C-4

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines	February 1998
Appendix C - Room Data Sheets


C.3.4.5   EMERGENCY POWER SYSTEM
         Emergency power system shall be provided by a diesel-driven emergency generator. See room data
         sheets and Section 16, Electrical Requirements. An uninterruptible (UPS) system or systems shall be
         provided if required by specific laboratory facility needs.

C.3.4.6   FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
         Fire alarm systems shall be provided in accordance with the criteria set forth in Section 16, Electrical
         Requirements, of this Manual.

C.3.4.7   TELEPHONE OUTLETS
         Telephone outlets shall be provided, one per single laboratory module space. The exact location for
         outlets shall be determined by the Government at an early design stage. Provide one telephone outlet
         per 125 NUSF of office space.  If workstations are identified and are smaller than 125 NUSF, one outlet
         per workstation will be required.

C.3.4.8   LOCAL AREA NETWORK (LAN) COMPUTER OUTLETS
         LAN computer outlets shall be provided, one per single module space. The exact location for outlets
         shall be determined by the Government at an early design stage. Provide one LAN outlet per 125 NUSF
         of office space. If workstations are identified and are smaller than 125 NUSF, one outlet per
         workstation will be required.

C.3.4.9   LEWS COMPUTER OUTLETS
         Laboratory Information Management Systems  (LIMS) computer outlets shall be provided, one per single
         module space. The exact location for outlets shall be determined by the Government at an early design
         stage.  Provide one LIMS outlet per 125 NUSF of office space.

C.3.4.10  OUTLET COVER PLATES
         All telephone, computer, and electrical outlets  shall be PVC or equivalent corrosion-resistant cover/face
         plates; metal covers shall not be used.
                                               C-5

-------
February 1998
                                              Architecture, Engineering,
                                               and Planning Guidelines
                                                      Appendix C - Room Data Sheets
C.4  Laboratory Symbols List


     PLUMBING SYMBOLS


     A      AIR.COMP. (100PSIGU.O.N.)

     LA     AIR, LAB (15PSIGU.N.O)

     C02    CARBON DIOXIDE

     RO     REVERSE OSMOSIS WATER

     SS     SAFETY SHOWER

     CW     COLD WATER

     CHWS'  CHILLED WATER SUPPLY

     CHWR   CHILLED WATER RETURN
                                 HW     HOT WATER


                                 C33    CUP SINK


                                 I	n   LAB SINK


                                 EJro   FLOOR DRAIN


                                 0 FLD  FUNNEL DRAIN


                                   FO   FLOOR SINK


                                        SHUT-OFF VALVE


                                 EW     EYE WASH
    ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS
     D
DIMMER SWITCH


20A SOL REC 120V


20A DUPLEX REC 120V


30A SGL REC 208V SINGLE PHASE


30A SGL REC 120« 208V SINGLE PHASE


20A SGL REC 208V 3 PHASE


SPECIAL PWR ERC


PEDESTAL BOX WITH REC


SURFACE RACEWAY
(J)    -  JUNCTION BOX


W]3    WARNING LIGHT


£J      LIGHT FIXTURE


SQ     SAFE LIGHT


CZH     DISC SWITCH


*<      TELEPHONE


WP      WEATHERPROOF


EP      EXPLOSION PROOF


EM      EMERGENCY CKT


HS3      COMPUTER OUTLET
                                    C-6

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines
                                          February 1998
Appendix C - Room Data Sheets



C.4  Laboratory Symbols List (Continued)


      ARCHITECTURAL SYMBOLS

                            Cup Sink

                            Epoxy Sink
        0
                            Stainless Steel Sink



                            Fume Hood




                            Biological Safety Cabinet



                            Government Furnished Equipment



                            Umbilical 5" x 18"
Snorkle
150 cfm Exhaust (U.N.O.)
      COUNTERTOP MATERIALS
                           Epoxy Top


                           Acid Resistant Plastic Laminate

                           Stainless Steel
                                      C-7

-------
February 1998
                                          Architecture, Engineering,
                                           and Planning Guidelines
                                                      Appendix C - Room Data Sheets
EXAMPLE 1



EXAMPLE 2



EXAMPLES



EXAMPLE 4



EXAMPLES



EXAMPLE 6



EXAMPLE?



EXAMPLES
                                 APPENDIX C
                    TYPICAL LABORATORY ROOM EXAMPLES
I MODULE LABORATORY
2 MODULE LABORATORY
2 MODULE LABORATORY
3 MODULE INSTRUMENT LABORATORY
4 MODULE CHEMISTRY LABORATORY
ICP-MS LABORATORY
VOA LABORATORY (CONTRACTOR)
LOW LEVEL EXTRACTION LABORATORY
                                    C-8

-------
 Architecture, Engineering,
 and Planning Guidelines 	February 1998
 Appendix C - Room Data Sheets


                                      ROOM DATA SHEETS


 The following information shall be provided for each laboratory space.

 SPACE TYPE
 Information given to generally describe type of laboratory space by Junction.

 AREA
 Information provided as part of a specific space requirement for a particular project.
 Example is used to illustrate a Typical I-Module Laboratory.

 SPACE NAME
 Information provided as part of specific description of space usage for a particular project.

 ACTIVITY / PROGRAM NAME
 Information provided to assign responsibility for a specific space to a particular Branch/Section for a project.

 OCCUPANCY
 Identifies number of personnel in a given space for a defined period of time.

 BUILDING SECTION
 Identifies functional grouping in which space is to be located.

 ADJACENCIES
 Information is to be developed during programming by the design professional in consultation with representative
facility users and with approval by EPA.

 OPERATION / TASK DESCRIPTION
 Information is to be developed during programming by the design professional in consultation with representative
facility users and with approval by EPA.

 LIST OF REQUIREMENTS

      Ceiling - height and type

      Doors - size and type

      Flooring - material

      Walls - materials and finishes

      Window Treatment

      Special Construction - if required

      Outfitting

      Fixed Laboratory Equipment - list of casework requirements such as:
      •  Metal Casework - "C" Frame
      •  LF of Base Cabinets - 36 Inches High
      • *  LF of Wall Cabinets - Glass Door
      •  LF Adjustable Wall Shelving - 2 Tier

                                               C-9

-------
                                                                             Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998                                                                  and Planning Guidelines
                                                                       Appendix C - Room Data Sheets


         Epoxy Top
         Fume Hood with Services
         Vented Solvent Storage Cabinet Below Hood
         Vented OSHA Cabinet (30 Gallon)
         Laboratory Sink
         Cup Sink
         Laboratory Desks with Bookshelves, Tackboards and File with Storage Cabinets

      Mechanical Service Requirements
      •  Temperature and Humidity Control
      •  100 Percent Supply and Exhaust - 24 Hour-Operation

      Electrical Service
      •  120V/20 Amp AC at Fume Hood
      *  120V/20 Amp Receptacles 24 Inches on Center in Raceway
      •  208V/30 Amp-1 Phase, 4 Wire AC at Fume Hood
      •  Disconnect Switch at Door for 120/208V Laboratory Power
      •  Telephone
      •  Cable Tray
      •  Emergency Power
      •  Fluorescent Lighting -100 Footcandles at 36 Inches AFF
      •  Security
      •  Computer Outlets

      Plumbing/Fire Protection
      •  Industrial Hot and Cold Water, Sink
      •  Industrial Cold Water, Cup Sink
      •  Deionized Water
      •  Laboratory Drain (Acid Waste)
      •  Compressed Air, 15 psi Serrated Connection
      *  Nitrogen Cylinder
      •  Laboratory Vacuum
      •  Water Sprinklers
      *  Dry Chemical and Carbon Dioxide Extinguisher in Safety Niches
      •  Safety Shower/Eyewash Station

CHEMICALS USED IN THIS ROOM
Types and quantities used are to be identified during programming by the design professional in consultation with
representative facility users and with approval by EPA. The following is used as an example:
Small quantities of organic solvents, acids, and bases (generally less than 1 gallon of each at any one time) in
concentrations ranging from weak solutions to concentrated materials. Standard reagent chemicals in gram
proportions.

MOVABLE EQUIPMENT & FURNISHINGS
List of Government Furnished/Government Installed (GFGI) equipment and furnishings is to be identified during
programming by the design professional in consultation with representative facility users and approval by EPA.
The following is used as an example:

      •  Analytical Balances
      •  Bench Top Drying Ovens
      •  Refrigerators
      •  Other
                                                C-10

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines
February 1998
Appendix C - Room Data Sheets
                                       EXAMPLE 1
                                1 MODULE LABORATORY
1 . 	 =r
\


.
\




                                          C-ll

-------
February 1998
                  Architecture, Engineering,
                   and Planning Guidelines
                                                                  Appendix C - Room Data Sheets
                                        EXAMPLE 2
                                 2 MODULE LABORATORY
                      Desk Height
                                        n
                      a
                                       Space-
                                                       Cabinets
                         • Kef.
                                        Knee Space
Fiannable
Storage.
Cobwts
                                            C-12

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines
February 1998
Appendix C - Room Data Sheets
                                       EXAMPLES
                                2 MODULE LABORATORY


Weigh.
Tabie

H
Glass,.

                                                                 0
                                           C-13

-------
February 1998
                            Architecture, Engineering,
                             and Planning Guidelines
                                                             Appendix C - Room Data Sheets
                                     EXAMPLE 4

                         3 MODULE CHEMISTRY LABORATORY
                o
                                             O
I     I
§     I
                                               ii
                                               1,1

                                               'Jl
                                               a
                                            o
                                        C-14

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines
February 1998
Appendix C - Room Data Sheets
                                      EXAMPLES
                          4 MODULE CHEMISTRY LABORATORY
                                   CD

                                   OD
                        o
                        o
                                  cz>

                                  CD
                        O
                                          C-15

-------
February 1998
Architecture, Engineering,
 and Planning Guidelines
                                                            Appendix C - Room Data Sheets
                                     EXAMPLE 6

                                ICP-MS LABORATORY
                     Adjustable Shelves
                                  O
                                  P

                                   o
                                   Instrunent
                                      A
                                        C-16

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines
February 1998
Appendix C - Room Data Sheets
                                     EXAMPLE?
                          VGA LABORATORY (CONTRACTOR)
                                        C-17

-------
February 1998
                                Architecture, Engineering,
                                  and Planning Guidelines
                                                               Appendix C - Room Data Sheets
                                      EXAMPLES
                        LOW LEVEL EXTRACTION LABORATORY
                         o
                     Fine Hood
                                 CD
ir*
                                           (V)
	^J
                  Tabtr
                         O
                            Move«fel*


                          C&totnetC-
                                           too Snt«r
               •-R
       ^^

       S
                                         C-18

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines	;	February 1998
Appendix D - Design Guidelines
                             Appendix  D  - Design Guidelines
D.1    Amenities
        Amenities in laboratory facilities are spaces and/or features that provide an enjoyable environment for
        staff and visitors.  An amenity exceeds the minimum functional requirements established by the program
        and may include the following:

D, 1.1   Interaction spaces, lounges, and break areas should be strategically located to foster maximum interaction
        •while being convenient to both offices and laboratories.

D. 1.2   Conference and meeting room spaces appropriate to the laboratory/office functions should be provided in
        close proximity to the laboratory. The meeting room spaces should be of various sizes and shapes to
        accommodate a wide range of conference needs. At least one of these conference rooms should be
        designed to accommodate teleconferencing.

D.I.3   Lunchroom facilities should be sized specifically to each facility.  Quality design of food service areas,
        concession areas, and seating areas will contribute to an enhanced quality of life for the researchers.
        Refrigerator space must be integrated into coffee and vending areas to eliminate the temptation to store
        lunches in refrigerators within the laboratories. Consideration should be given to appropriate microwave
        and oven appliances. A "white board" for impromptu conversations should be considered.

D. 1.4   Toilets and lockers in close proximity to the laboratories and offices should be coordinated to provide
        maximum benefit to the staff.  These facilities could be contiguous in most cases. Where appropriate, the
        toilet/locker combination should accommodate a shower.  The shower could satisfy staff after exercise and
        be used to stabilize a chemical accident victim prior to medical assistance.

D. 1.4.1    Attempt to locate lockers and toilets close to laboratories and offices in such a manner that clothing
           and valuables are easily accessible to the staff, precluding co-location of casework in the laboratory for
           personal items. Avoid placement of lockers in corridors.

D. 1.5   Space for an employee wellness center with appropriate facilities should be considered.

D. 1.6   Provide special attention to artwork and/or photos and how they are to be integrated into the design. The
        solution should include an integrated design for the display of research materials throughout the
        laboratory. Displays should be easily, quickly, and inexpensively changeable.

D. 1.7   For reasons of safety, day or elder care facilities should not be included inside a laboratory facility.


D.2    Aesthetics
        Aesthetics refers to the nature of both the interior and exterior of the facility.  Aesthetic considerations
        should include, but shall not be limited to, the following:

D.2.1   Contextual relationship of the adjacent buildings and environment. Color, texture, and massing of
        building components should be investigated.  Historical and contextual details should be considered.

D.2.2   The landscape design shall integrate site and building into one concept.

D.2.3   The sequence of access, entry, and use of the building from the viewpoint of both staff and visitor must be
        considered.


                                                  D-l

-------
                                                                                  Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998	and Planning Guidelines
                                                                            Appendix D - Design Guidelines


D.2.4   The interior finishes must be integrated into a single concept for the entire facility.  This shall include all
        visible materials.

D.2.5   Consider accent and background colors, with special attention to their psychological effect on people.

D.2,6   Consideration shall be given to lighting from the view of both visual comfort and aesthetics. Visual
        comfort probability (VCP) for lighting fixtures should be a factor in selection. Consider accent, indirect,
        artwork, and general lighting.

D.2.7   Consider the introduction of natural light in the design.  Consider methods to introduce natural light into
        the interior circulation spaces.

D.2.8   Special aesthetic consideration should be given to all building entrance lobby spaces.


D.3    Interaction
        Interaction of researchers is important in a research facility.  There is a relationship between researcher
        interaction and the flow of technical information (Managing the Flow a/Technology, Thomas Allen,
        1977,1984, NOT Press).  Incorporate appropriate interaction space where feasible.

D.3.1   DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
        Design considerations to  promote researcher interaction shall include, but shall not be limited to, the
        following:

D.3.1.1     Communication is a function of both organization and proximity. People communicate more if they
            work on a similar project or are in close proximity to each other. For weekly contact, it has been
            shown that communication drops off dramatically after 30 meters.  It is desirable to cluster researchers
            in 30-meter-diameter groups, with shared facilities in between these research clusters.

D.3.1.2     Building form has an influence on communication. Whenever possible, the researchers that need to
            communicate should be located in close proximity on the same floor. It has been shown that floor
            space of less than 10,000 square meters (108,000 square feet) should be located on one floor if
            possible.

D.3.1.3     The laboratory director shall be located strategically among his or her research staff. The director's
            office is best located toward the center of the facility. From an interaction perspective, a corner office
            with the best view is not the best location for the director's office.

D.3.1.4     Offices in a cluster may be a better form to promote communication and interaction among
            researchers.  To minimize separation, a square configuration is desirable. Buildings that are arranged
            in odd shapes to provide everyone with an outside office view, often compromise researcher
            communication. Solutions that provide for both natural light and office clusters should be strongly
            considered.

D.3.1.5     When offices are put near laboratories,  the researchers located in these offices have a greater sense of
            territoriality than if offices are farther away.

D.3.1.6     Direct access should be provided to managers. Locating secretaries directly outside the manager's
            door often  inhibits a subordinate from initiating informal contact with that manager.

D.3.1.7     Library space appropriate to the laboratory/office functions should be located strategically to promote
            researcher  interaction and efficiency.
                                                   D-2

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines
February 1998
Appendix D - Design Guidelines
D.3.1.S    Shared but Wing facilities can be used as a tool to promote greater researcher communication.  Place
           the shared facilities to provide maximum intergroup communication. Shared building facilities should
           be located by proximity and in locations that enhance the users' ability to positively influence
           researcher interaction.  Shared building facilities include, but are not limited to, the following:

              Washrooms
              Copy machine areas
              Coffee areas
              Computer rooms
              Secretarial and message areas
              Computer printer terminals
              Instruction areas
              Lounges
              Special test equipment
              Libraries
              Conference rooms
              Supply rooms
              Food vending
              Common refrigerator
              Locker facilities
              Exercise facilities
              Day-care facilities
              Elevators
              Stairs
              Reception
              Drinking fountains.
D.4    Color
        Color selection for building exterior and interior shall be responsive to the local environment, provide a
        favorable psychological effect on people, and minimize maintenance.

D.4.1   SITE CONTEXTURALKM
        Color of both building and landscape elements should complement the context environment.

D.4.1. J     LANDSCAPE MATERIAL
           Concepts for the design shall include the color and texture of the landscape material, how it relates to
           existing vegetation, how accent colors are to be used, and how color changes throughout the year.
           Establish a concept or strategy for landscape material selection.

D.4.1.2     SITE AND BUILDINGS
           Concepts for the design shall include the color, texture; and details, and how they relate to the existing
           site and buildings. Establish the existing materials. New building materials shall relate to the existing
           materials. New details shall relate to the existing details in a coherent manner.

D.4.1.3     MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
           Color affects the maintenance requirements of buildings.  Care should be exercised to take color and
           maintenance into consideration during the color selection process.
                                                 D-3

-------
                                                                            Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998                                                                 and Planning Guidelines
                                                                       Appendix D - Design Guidelines


D.5    Laboratory/Office Location
        There are four basic locations of researcher offices related to the laboratories: offices separate from
        laboratories, grouped offices across the corridor from laboratories, offices not grouped but across the
        corridor from the laboratories, offices not grouped but on the same side of the corridor as the laboratories.

D.5.1   ASSETS AND LIABILITIES
        There are assets and liabilities for each design choice. The following questions shall be answered on a
        building-by-building basis. After the questions are answered, the designer needs to "test" various
        laboratory/office options with the users. The designer must keep in mind that clustered offices offer
        greater potential for researcher interaction then do offices lining the corridors.

          Do the offices require an exterior view, interior view, or no view?
          What is the relationship between secretarial support and the offices?
          What is the proportion of offices to laboratories?
          What are the user needs and how do they affect office configuration and location?
          How are the laboratories to be configured?
          How should the offices relate to the laboratories?
          What are the sizes of the offices?
          Are there any special psychological influences regarding office location?
          Who will use the offices?
          Where will technicians be located?
          Is constant visual supervision over the laboratories required?

D.5.2   DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
        The following design considerations should be kept in mind while configuration is under design.

D.5.2.1    OFFICES SEPARATE FROM LABORATORIES

          Advantages:

          •  Noise or vibration to offices is minimized.
          •  Some offices may need to be separated from prime researchers to foster other administrative needs.
          •  In renovated building solutions, the close proximity of laboratories and offices may not be an
             option due to other factors.
          •  There is less researcher territoriality of laboratories if researchers are farther from their
             laboratories.
          •  Separate heating, ventilation, and air-conditioning (HVAC) system allowing for recirculated air,
             thereby reducing operational costs.

          Disadvantages:

          •  Longer circulation between offices and laboratories.
          •  Reduced researcher interaction unless offices are clustered.

D.5.2.2    OFFICES NOT GROUPED BUT ACROSS THE CORRIDOR FROM THE LABORATORIES

          Advantages:

          •  Close office laboratory relationship reduces walking distance for researchers.
          •  Very efficient use of a double-loaded corridor.
          •  Relatively easy to integrate this massing into an easy and efficient structural solution.
          *  Relatively contiguous building mass that will be more energy efficient than other solutions.
                                               D-4

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines                                                                   February 1998
Appendix D - Design Guidelines


           Disadvantages:

           *  The advantages of clustering offices in terms of interaction are not possible.
           •  Exterior light normally does not penetrate wall to the corridor or to the laboratories unless
              clerestory lighting is used.
           •  Promotes an uninteresting corridor environment
           •  Promotes territoriality of laboratory space.

D.5.2.3    GROUPED OFFICES ACROSS THE CORRIDOR FROM LABORATORIES

           Advantages:

           •  Offices in relatively close proximity to laboratories.
           •  Outside light to offices, laboratories, and corridors.
           •  This concept presents increased opportunity for researcher interaction.
           •  Offices are slightly removed from laboratories, thereby reducing noise and vibration to and from
              offices.
           •  Allows offices to be on separate HVAC system from the laboratories, thereby reducing operational
              costs.

           Disadvantages:

           •  Does not provide flexibility in reconfiguration of office space.
           •  The clustered office configuration significantly increases the exterior envelope of the building,
              resulting in higher energy and construction costs.

D.5.2.4    OFFICES NOT GROUPED BUT ON THE SAME SIDE OF THE CORRIDOR AS THE
           LABORATORIES

           Advantages:

           •  Provides close proximity to the laboratories, which reduces walking time between offices and
              laboratories.
           •  Provides greater safety due to the almost constant supervision of the research laboratories.
           *  Promotes natural lighting to corridors since exterior is not lined with offices.

           Disadvantages:

           •  Office dimensions are more controlled by the laboratory module than other concepts.
           •  Because the office is between the corridor and the laboratory, the amount of light available to the
              laboratory tends to be reduced.
           •  Premium cost for office space in locations better allocated for laboratories or laboratory support.
           •  HVAC costs cannot be reduced because office space is on laboratory ventilation system.


D.6    Lockers  and  Showers
        Lockers must be provided for both sexes. Each locker room can be designed as a separate element or
        integrated into a locker/toilet/shower group. There are some advantages to providing these functions in a
        coordinated group.

        •   Utilities  are clustered for service to both toilet and shower areas.
        •   Duplicated functions in these areas can be eliminated.
        •   Close proximity provides greater efficiency in use of facilities.

                                                D-5

-------
                                                                            Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998	..	  and Planning Guidelines
                                                                       Appendix D - Design Guidelines
D.7    Environmentally Conscious Design
        EPA's objective is to foster environmentally conscious design in its facilities. To that end, consideration
        must include, but shall not be limited to, the following:

        •   Site planning that is environmentally based.
        •   Facility designs that reflect environmental as well as energy conscious concepts.
        •   Material selection based on low energy consumption both in the production and in transportation to
           the site.
        •   Material selection based on using indigenous materials and retraining from using ecologically
           sensitive materials.
        •   Material selection based on reducing hazardous chemicals within the buildings due to off-gassing of
           material.
        *   Material selection based on the products' life cycle energy use.
        •   Ecologically sensitive use of water within the facilities.
        •   Sensitive use of HVAC components to reduce pollution, conserve energy, and maintain the appropriate
           quality for the interior environment
        •   Concepts that focus on recycling of materials.


D.8    Office (Administration)
        The administrative offices shall be designed considering the following factors:

D.8.1   CIRCULATION PATTERNS OF VISITOR GROUPS
        If there are visitors expected at the facility, the design shall accommodate not only tour groups, but all
        other visitors and their potential circulation patterns from the administration area to their destination
        point.  Staging areas for tours should be anticipated.

D.8.2   CIRCULATION PATTERNS OF RESEARCH STAFF
        Often, the placement of administration and administration support between research groups will foster
        intergroup interaction. Consider researchers' interaction as a prime determinant for location of
        administration and administration support.

D.8.3   EFFICIENT ACCESS TO ADMINISTRATIVE SUPPORT AREAS
        The use of and control over administration support functions necessitate their close proximity to
        administrative offices, especially the resource center and meeting rooms.

D.8.4   SUPPORT SPACE FOR ADMINISTRATION OFFICES
        The support space shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following:

           Security control / reception
           Conference room
           Teleconference room
           Storage
           Copier
           Coffee area/vending
           Computer access/printer output
           Visitor information center.
                                                D-6

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines
February 1996
Appendix D - Design Guidelines
D.8.4.1    SECURITY CONTROL/RECEPTION
           Security control shall be at the main entrance to the facility.  The security control area shall have good
           visual control over the building entrance and lobby area.  Administrative areas shall be in close
           proximity to the security control to provide reception function activities to support the security control
           staff.

D.8.4.2    CONFERENCE ROOM
           Conference room areas must be sized in proportion to the number of staff and conference activities
           anticipated. In most building programs, conference room areas have been under programmed. The
           proper and adequate design of conference space for administrative areas and research areas reduces
           travel time and promotes interaction. "Satellite conference rooms" can also double as "satellite
           resource centers" for periodicals related to special laboratory groups.

D.8.4.2.1      Conference areas that are centrally located for general administrative meetings are often designed
              to be subdivided with the use of folding sound-resistant doors. A vending area and related seating
              area may be coordinated adjacent to the main conference area to provide a broader use of the
              conference area. When conference areas and food-related areas are adjacent to one another, walls
              and doors must provide adequate sound control.

D.8.4.3    TELECONFERENCE ROOM
           The teleconference room shall be designed to meet the specific teleconferencing needs of the facility.
           Additional issues to resolve include:

              Number of participants anticipated
              Special lighting requirements
              Special acoustic requirements
              Acoustic isolation from adjacent spaces
              Storage requirements
              Control room requirements
              -  Determine whether a common control room for two conference rooms is required
              -  Define control room requirements
              -  Identity equipment requirements
              •  Is a control room even required.

D.8.4.4    STORAGE
           Storage areas adjacent to administrative offices are required to hold paper stock and miscellaneous
           equipment storage.  Storage areas are often underprogrammed in facilities. Special attention shall be
           exercised regarding the need for storage space to hold extra supplies related to administrative
           conference space (e.g., tables, chairs, overhead projectors, slide projectors, and easels).

D.8.4.5    COPIER
           Copier area shall be provided in close proximity to administrative areas. It shall be located to promote
           researchers/staff interaction. Area shall be exhausted to the outside to provide adequate air quality.
           Adequate space adjacent to the copier is needed for proper storage, recycle paper bins, and collating or
           layout areas for sorting copies.

D.8.4.6    COFFEE/VENDING
           A coffee/vending area shall be strategically located within a short travel distance from the area
           serviced.  The coffee/vending area should be located to promote communication  and researcher
           interaction. Adequate area shall be provided for storage of various kinds of recycled products.  Often
           coffee/vending areas are co-located with concession purchased items. Special attention must be given
           to designing concession areas for both functional use and good aesthetic design.
                                                 D-7

-------
                                                                               Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998	and Planning Guidelines
                                                                          Appendix D - Design Guidelines


D.8.4.7    COMPUTER ACCESS/PRINTER OUTPUT
           Computer areas including computer staff offices, paper storage and computer tape storage are often
           designed into a "computer suite." Often, the "suite" will include printer output areas.

D.8.4.7.1      The computer area shall be located as centrally as possible to reduce travel as well as wiring to
              computer terminals. The computer printer output areas are good interaction areas for researchers
              and should be located to promote interaction.

D.8.4.7.2      Special care is required to design both floor loading and fire ratings for film and paper storage
              areas. Special fire protection consideration is required for the computer areas.  A preaction fire
              protection system shall be a part of the fire protection analysis for these areas.

D.8.4.7.3      Computer areas will probably have access flooring that may require accessible ramps (Americans
              with Disabilities Act [ADA] compliance required) to these areas. Special acoustical consideration
              is required in computer and printer output areas. If a glass wall is used to view into the computer
              area, adequate attention shall be given to fire protection of this glass wall.

D.8.4.8    VISITOR INFORMATION CENTER
           If the laboratory will be open to domestic and/or foreign visitors, a visitor center should be considered.
           A visitor center shall include, at a minimum, the following amenities:

           •  Relaxation area
           •  Projection/sound equipment
           *  Large screen television with video cassette record (VCR)
           *  Coffee area.

D.8.5   SIGNAGE
        Provide coordinated and integrated signage in compliance with ADA requirements. The signage solution
        should encompass the following:

           Exterior facility signage
           Directory signage (lobby)
           Directional signage
           Room signage (integrate with safety information)
           Employment information
           Employee photo information
           Current events notices
           New publications display
           Position opening notices.


D.9    Laboratories
        The laboratory layout results from an in-depth analysis of research type, workflow patterns, and
        relationships to support spaces and other laboratories.

D.9.1   MODULE
        A laboratory module is usually  11 feet in width and between 26 and 33 feet in length. Laboratories with
        heavy instrumentation requirements may require the wider module due to equipment wire and service
        access.
                                                 D-8

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines                                                                  February 1998
Appendix D - Design Guidelines


D.9.2   DISTRIBUTION OF SERVICES
        An important consideration for the laboratory design is the distribution of services on a modular basis
        within the laboratory. Special design attention shall be paid to location of structural members related to
        penetrations for services along the walls and near the benches located in the center of the laboratory.

D.9.3   FUME HOOD PLACEMENT
        Fume hood placement is important and shall be away from egress and circulation patterns. A 5-foot
        minimum aisle width shall be maintained in front of fume hoods. It is good design practice not to have
        "dead-end" circulation patterns that may trap an individual in case of a laboratory accident. Two means
        of egress from a laboratory with any fume hood are required. Refer to Chapter 5, paragraph 12, of the
        Safety Manual for additional requirements.

D.9.4   EYEWASH AND SAFETY SHOWER
        Eyewash and safety shower placement is important A good location for both safety items is at the hinge
        side of the egress laboratory door out of the path of travel. A fire extinguisher location in the laboratory is
        preferable. Refer to Chapter 4, paragraph 16, of the Safety Manual for  additional requirements.

D.9.4.1     SAFETY SHOWER
           Safety showers shall be located in a position away from the face of a hood;  if a hood accident occurs,
           staff will be able to use the safety shower facility.

D.9.5   ELECTRICAL PANEL/FIRE EXTINGUISHER
        The electrical panel to "shut down" the laboratory may be located outside of the laboratory; if an accident
        occurs, researchers may exit the laboratory and "shut it down" from the outside.  It is good practice to
        locate a fire extinguisher in the corridor outside the laboratory in addition to those located within the
        laboratory.

D.9.6   SIGNAGE
        The laboratory signage should contain the room number, room name, occupants by name, hazardous
        chemicals within the laboratory, emergency telephone number, and special procedures in case of
        emergency.  Provide coordinated and integrated signage in compliance with ADA requirements.  The
        signage solution should encompass the following:

           Directional signage
           Room signage (integrate with safety information)
           Special chemical information for each space containing hazardous chemicals
           Employment information
           Employee photo information
           Current event notices
           New publications display
           Position opening notices.

D.9.7   DOORS
        The laboratory doors shall swing in the direction of egress from the laboratory. The laboratory door
        consists of a 3-foot active leaf and a 1-foot inactive leaf to facilitate movement  of equipment into the
        laboratory.

D.9.8   HVAC DIFFUSERS
        HVAC diffiisers shall be located so that they do not "short circuit" the airflow to a hood.
                                                D-9

-------
                                                                              Architecture, Engineering,
February 1998                                                                   and Planning Guidelines
                                                                         Appendix D - Design Guidelines


D.9.9   WALLS
        Laboratory walls shall be considered for extra structural reinforcing because the potential loads they may
        support due to shelving or cabinets. This consideration shall include future modifications to the room
        layout and additional shelving or cabinet requirements.

D.9.10  LABORATORY SUPPORT
        Laboratory support space shall suit the needs of the specific laboratory. In some cases, a service corridor
        is used for laboratory support In some cases, special support spaces are needed between laboratories.

D.9.11  LABORATORY TECHNICIAN
        It is desirable to provide work space for technicians outside of the laboratories in order to reduce their
        exposure to the laboratory chemicals.  There is also a need to provide some work space in the laboratory
        for laboratory-related work. Ideally, both requirements can be met to provide the greatest productivity to
        technicians within the most healthful environment possible.


D.10  Library
        The library shall be located with good access to storage, services elevator, and conference facilities.
        Additional issues are as follows:

           Type of library storage
           Computer terminals required
           Study carrels required
           Work space required
           Floor loading/structural requirements.


D.11   Outside Research Facilities
        Any outside related research space shall be constructed and designed to be of a quality that is in keeping
        with the research complex environment.

D.11.1  EXTERIOR SPACES
        The exterior spaces on the property shall be adequately secured to eliminate the potential of unauthorized
        individuals gaining access to the property.  Potentially hazardous or accident prone exterior areas shall be
        secured by adequate perimeter security.


D.12  Custodial Space
        Custodial space shall be strategically located on each floor for efficient maintenance with adequate storage
        space for cleaning equipment and supplies.  Besides the custodial space located on each floor, a central
        custodial office, locker rooms and storage space shall be considered during the early phases of design.
        This area shall be located in close proximity to other building services areas.

D.12.1  SHOP FACILITIES
        Shop facilities shall be located with exterior access appropriate to their function.  The shop facilities shall
        be remotely located from vibration, noise, and dust-sensitive areas.

D.12.2  OVERHEAD HOISTS
        Overhead hoist requirements shall be defined early in the programming and design phases.

D.12.3  WELDING
        Welding areas shall be designed to meet all code requirements.


                                                D-10

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines                                                                 February 1998
Appendix D - Design Guidelines
D.13   Loading Dock/Staging
        Appropriate loading dock/staging facilities are required relative to the size, function, and material
        requirements of each laboratory.

D.I3.1   LOADING DOCK SIZE AM) REQUIREMENTS
        The truck turning radius to loading facilities should be appropriate to the truck size anticipated. The
        loading dock might include a leveling device for accommodating different size trucks.  A covered
        loading/unloading area is desirable.

D.13.2   HVAC INTAKE
        Special care shall be exercised not to locate mechanical air intakes toward the loading dock area. Idling
        trucks located in loading dock areas may cause contamination of intake air.

D.13.3   VIDEO MONITORING
        The loading dock area shall be considered for video monitoring for security purposes. Issues to resolve
        are as follows:

           Nitrogen storage requirements and location; note security fence requirements
           Breakout area size
           Bulk mail process defined
           Access for emergency vehicle and ramps
           Truck parameters (dock height, leveter requirements)
           Security requirements
           Concrete paving for loading dock area
           Dumpster and compaction requirements.


D.14   Chemical Storage
      '  The chemical storage area location shall be researched with regard to the quantity and type of chemicals
        stored.  Chemical storage and gas cylinder storage may be located in close proximity.  Special code
        consideration shall be given to providing adequate fire protection and separation. Special consideration
        shall be given to contaminated chemicals and contaminated fire protection water. The response time of
        the fire department is a factor that shall be considered Special attention shall be paid to explosion relief
        panels and their location and safety. Refer to NFPA 30 and 45 and Chapter 4, paragraph 10, of the Safety
        Manual for additional requirements.

D.14.1   ADDITIONAL ISSUES TO RESOLVE

           Type of chemicals to be stored
           Quantity of chemicals to be stored
           Dispensing procedures
           Explosion relief panel requirements
           Fire rating separation requirements
           Building code requirements
           Zoning requirements
           Government agency requirements
           State agency requirements
           Agency having jurisdiction
           Safety officers for facility
           Local fire marshal.
                                               D-ll

-------
                                                                              Architecture, Engineering,
February1998	and Planning Guidelines
                                                                         Appendix D - Design Guidelines


D.15  Recycling/Waste Handling
        Recycling design considerations are important and must be considered at the early programming and
        design phases. Recycling receptacles most be sized and adequate space provided on each floor and in the
        central loading area. Special attention is also required in vending locations for various types of
        recyclables. Waste handling in laboratories with animal research requires special consideration at the
        early program and design stages. Early in the program and design, identify the type and size of facilities
        anticipated for waste storage, waste compaction, and waste removal.


D.16  General Storage
        General storage is usually required on every floor. General storage facilities are the most typically
        forgotten or undersized spaces in EPA research facilities.  In Government research facilities, where it is
        difficult to resolve equipment disposition, adequate storage space is critical.

D. 16.1  Additional issues to resolve:

        •   Ensure good access to service elevator
        *   Size rooms with freezers relative to freezer dimensions and layout
        *   Check corridors for movement of equipment
        •   Resolve signal runs to central control area as required by program.


D.17  Food Service
        Food service must be located with good access to the loading dock and the service elevator. The food
        service shall be as centrally located as possible with an exterior view if possible.

D. 17.1  Additional issues to resolve:

        *   Quantity of seating required
        *   Type of food service to be provided
        •   Secondary uses of food service spaces.


D. 18  Emergency Generator Location

D. IS. I  Location parameters:

        *   Locate with fresh air intakes
        •   Locate with exhaust away from fresh air intakes
        •   Locate away from vibration, acoustic, or electrically sensitive equipment.

D. 18.2  Additional issues to resolve:

        •   Size and shape of room, including usable space around generator
        •   Fuel supply and location (note code and environmental requirements)
        •   If located outside, determine the screening parameters  of such equipment
        *   Exhaust requirements.
                                                D-12

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines	February 1998
Appendix D - Design Guidelines
D.19  Floor Loadings
        The design professional must secure any special requirements for floor loading from the Project Officer
        •with the understanding that building codes, local codes, and agencies having jurisdiction regulate these
        requirements.  Analysis in the early planning stages of a project is required to establish the loadings for
        specific pieces of equipment since these equipment loads may exceed the design floor loads. The timing
        and sequencing that the equipment is placed into the building must be considered; this will affect the
        design or construction phasing.  The travel path of the equipment into the building must also be
        considered.  The most stringent floor loading requirements shall govern.


D.20  Parking
        Parking and its related circulation shall be separated from the service circulation to minimize conflicts.

D.20.1  GENERAL RULES /LOCAL CODE
        Parking at EPA facilities varies with the function of the facility. Some facilities' parking accommodates
        approximately 19 to 24 cars per 10,000 gross square feet of building.  These ranges tend to have parking
        problems. As a general rule, parking requirements shall follow local codes. If the parking falls under 25
        cars per 10,000 gross square feet of the facility, a more detailed analysis shall be made to verify that
        adequate parking is provided. If local codes require more parking spaces, the more stringent requirements
        shall apply.


D.21   Fire Department Access
        Fire department access to buildings is very important  In designing buildings, and fire department access
        to them, ensure that the fire access road is far enough away from the building (road to be at least 20 feet in
        width with the edge of the road at least 10 feet from building per NFPA I) that the distance will not
        hamper fire fighting.  Dead-end roadways for fire fighting vehicles shall not be allowed.

D.21.1  HIGH RISE BUILDINGS
        For high-rise buildings, special attention to fire fighting apparatus areas is required. A fire control room
        inside the building is required.

D.21.2  AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION
        In conjunction with local and EPA requirements, the local fire marshal shall be consulted to address and
        resolve any of his special concerns.

D.21.3  ELEVATORS AND FIRE VICTIMS
        Special attention shall be provided to the elevator/service elevator design and its function in a fire fighting
        mode.  Special consideration shall be given to the removal of fire victims from the building.
END OF APPENDIX D
                                               D-13

-------

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines
                               February 1998
Appendix E
                   Appendix E - Abbreviations and Acronyms
Note:  Where an acronym is shown to stand for more than one term, use in the document shall be as indicated in
      the specific Section.
AABC       Associated Air Balance Council
AASHTO     American Association of State
             Highway and Transportation
             Officials
ABS         Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene
AC          alternating current
ACGM       American Conference of
             Government Industrial Hygienists
ACI         American Concrete Institute
ACMD       Atmospheric Characterization and
             Modeling Division
ADA         Americans with Disabilities Act
ADC         Air Diffusion Council
ADP         automated data processing
ADPI        Air Distribution Performance Index
AE&P       Architecture, Engineering, and
             Planning
AEERL       Air and Energy Engineering
             Research Laboratory
AEREB       Architecture, Engineering and Real
             Estate Branch
AFF         above the finished floor
AGA         American Gas Association
AHU         air-handling unit
AJ A         American Institute of Architects
AIHA        American Industrial Hygiene
             Association
AISC        American Institute of Steel
             Construction
A1SI         American Iron and Steel Institute
AMCA       Air Movement and Control
             Association
amp         ampere
ANSI        American National Standards
             Institute
APhA        American Pharmaceutical
             Association
AQMD       Air Quality Management Division
AREA        American Railway Engineering
             Association
AREAL      Atmospheric Research and Exposure
             Assessment Laboratory
ARI         Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration
             Institute
ASCE        American Society of Civil Engineers
ASHRAE     American Society of Heating,
             Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning
             Engineers
ASME        American Society of Mechanical
             Engineers
ASTM        American Society for Testing and
             Materials
AT&T        American Telephone and Telegraph
             Company
AWG        American Wire Gage
AWS        American Welding Society
AWWA      American Water Works Association
BAS         building automation system
bhp          boiler horsepower
BIA         Brick Institute of America
BOCA        Building Officials and Code
             Administrators International
BSC         biological safety cabinet
                                             E-l

-------
February 1998
                       Architecture, Engineering,
                        and Planning Guidelines
Btu          British thermal unit
°C          degrees Celsius
CADD       computer aided drafting design
CCTV       closed circuit television
CDC         Center for Disease Control
CERC       Coastal Engineering Research Center
CERCLA     Comprehensive Environmental
             Response, Compensation, and
             Liability Act
CFCs        chlorofluorocarbon compounds
cfm          cubic feet per minute
C-Frame      cantilevered frame
CGA         Compressed Gas Association
CISPI        Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute
CFR         Code of Federal Regulations
CMD        Contracts Management Division
CMU        concrete masonry unit
COR         Contracting Officer's Representative
CPSC        Consumer Products Safety
             Commission
CPVC       chlorinated polyvinyl chloride
CRF         critical radiant flux
CTI          Ceramic Tile Institute;
             Cooling Tower Institute
CVTS       cabled video teleconference space
db           dry bulb
dB          decibels
dB A         decibels of sound measured on an
             A-scale
DC          direct current
DDC         direct digital controls
DHHS   ;   Department of Health and Human
             Services
                                   Appendix E

DI           deionized water
DOP         dioctyl phthalate
DOT         U.S. Department of Transportation
DTD         Developmental Toxicology Division
EA          Environmental Assessment
ECAO       Environmental Criteria and
             Assessment Office
EERD       Ecosystem Exposure Research
             Division
EIS          Environmental Impact Statement
EM          Engineering Memorandum
EMCS       Energy Management Control System
EMF         electromagnetic fields
EMS         Energy Management System '
EMT         electrical metallic tubing
EPA         Environmental Protection Agency
ERDA       Energy Research and Development
             Administration
ESD         Emission Standards Division
ETD         Environmental Toxicology Division
°F           degrees Fahrenheit
°Fdb        degrees Fahrenheit dry bulb
FAA         Federal Aviation Administration
FFL          carpet pill test
FGCC       Federal Geodetic Control Committee
FM          Factory Mutual
FMSD       Facilities Management and Services
             Division
FMSD-C     Facilities Management and Services
             Division - Common Facilities
FMSD-O     Facilities Management and Services
             Division - Office Facilities
fpm          feet per minute
                                               E-2

-------
Architecture, Engineering.
and Planning Guidelines
                                 February 1998
Appendix E
GC/MS      gas chromatograph/mass
             spectrometer
GDHS       geometric design of highways and
             streets
GECD       Global Emission and Control
             Division
gpm         gallons per minute
GPS         Global Positioning System
GSA         General Services Administration
GTD         Genetic Toxicology Division
HAZMAT    hazardous materials
HCFC       hydrochlorofluorocarbon
HD          heavy duty
HEFRD      Human Exposure and Field Research
             Division
HEP A       high-efficiency particulate aerosol
HERL       Health Effects Research Laboratory
HFC         hydrofluorocarbon
HID         high-intensity discharge
HMSF       hazardous materials/waste storage
             facility
hp           horsepower
HP          high pressure
HPLC       high-performance liquid
             chromatography
HRMD       Human Resources Management
             Division
HTW        high-temperature water
HVAC       heating, ventilation, and air-
             conditioning
IAQ         indoor air quality
IBM         International Business Machines
ICBO        International Conference of Building
             Officials
ICS          Industrial Controls and Systems
ICP          inductively coupled plasma
ICSSC       Interagency Committee on Seismic
             Safety in Construction
ID           inside diameter
IPCEA       Insulated Power Cable Engineer's
       '      Association
"K" Rated    transformers specially constructed
             for use with nonlinear loads
kV          kilovolt
kVa          kilovolt - ampere
kwd          kilowatt demand
kwh          kilowatt hours •
LAN         local area network
LCC         life cycle cost
LCCA       life cycle cost analysis
LEL          lower flammable/explosive limit
LIMS        Laboratory Information Management
             Systems
low E glass   low emissrvity glass
MBMA      Metal Building Manufacturers
             Association
MDF         main distribution frame
MEF         Main Entrance Frame
/ug/L         micrograrns per liter
mg/L         milligrams per liter
MIL-F       Military Federal Specification
MRDD       Methods Research and Development
             Division
MS          mass spectrometer
MSDS       manufacturer's safety data sheets
N value      number of blows per linear foot
                                               E-3

-------
February 1998
                       Architecture, Engineering,
                        and Planning Guidelines
NAAQS      National Ambient Air Quality
             Standards
NAD        North American Datum
NAVD       North American Vertical Datum
NC          noise criteria
NCF         network control facility
NC/LC       noncombustible/timited combustible
NCMA       National Concrete Masonry
             Association
NCPD       National Contracts Payment Division
NDPD       National Data Processing Division
NEBB       National Environmental Balancing
             Bureau
NEC         National Electrical Code
NEHRP      National Earthquake Hazard
             Reduction Program
NEMA       National Electrical Manufacturers
             Association
NEMA KS1.1 Safety Guidelines for the Application
             Installation and Maintenance of
             Solid State Control
NEPA       National Environmental Policy Act
NFPA       National Fire Protection Association
NGVD       Navigable Ground Vertical Datum
NIOSH       National Institute of Occupational
             Safety and Health
NOAA       National Oceanic and Atmospheric
             Administration
NRC         noise reduction coefficient
NSC         National Safety Code
NSF         National Sanitation Foundation
NSPC        National Standard Plumbing Code
NTD  .       Neurotoxicology Division
NUSF       net usable square feet
                                   Appendix E

OAQPS      Office of Air Quality Planning and
             Standards
OAR         Office of Air and Radiation
OARM       Office of Administration and
             Resources Management
OD          Office of the Director, outside
             diameter
ODF         ozone depletion factor
OID         Owners Insurance Underwriters
ORD         Office of Research and Development
OSA         outside air ventilation systems
OSHA       Occupational Safety and Health
             Administration
OSORD      Office of the Senior Official for
             Research and Development
PB           polybutylene
PBX         private branch exchange
PCD         Pollution Control Division
pCi/L        picocuries per liter
PCI          Precast Concrete Institute
PCI-MNL     Precast Concrete Institute Manual
PDU         power distribution unit
ph           phase
plf           pounds per linear foot
FOR         Program of Requirements
psf          pounds per square foot
psi           pounds per square inch
psig         pounds per square inch gauge
PTI          Post-Tensioning Institute
PURPA      Public Utility Regulatory Policies Act
PVC         polyvinyl chloride
PVDF        polyvinylidine fluoride
QATSD      Quality Assurance and Technical
                                               E-4

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines
                                 February 1998
Appendix E

             Support Division
R (values)     thermal resistance
RCRA       Resource Conservation and Recovery
             Act
RD          relative humidity
RSD         Research Support Division
RTECS       Registry of Toxic Effects of
             Chemical Substances
SBCCI       Southern Building Code Congress
             International
SCS         Soil Conservation Service
SDR-PR      standard dimension ratio - pressure
             rated
SDWA       Safe Drinking Water Act
SEFA        Scientific Equipment and Furniture
             Association
SFO         Solicitation for Offer
SHEMD      Safety, Health and Environmental
             Management Division
SHEMP      Safety, Health and Environmental
             Management Program
SMACNA    Sheet Metal and Air-Conditioning
             Contractors National Association
END OF APPENDIX E
SNAP        Significant New Alternatives Policy
STC         sound transmission class
STL         sound transmission loss
TC          telecommunication closet
HA         Traffic Impact Analysis
TM          Technical Memorandum
TSD         Technical Support Division
UBC         Uniform Building Code
U-factor      a coefficient of beat loss
UFAS        Uniform Federal Accessibility
             Standards
UL          Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
UPS         uninterruptible power supply
UTP         unshielded twisted pair
VAV        variable air volume
VOA        volatile organic analysis
VCP         visual comfort probability
VCR        video cassette recorder
wb          wet bulb
                                               E-5

-------

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines
                                    February 1996
Index
                                                Index

TheAE&P Guidelines is indexed by major heading, and numbers refer to subsections, not page numbers. Because
the index is by heading, not subject, the index may not list all specific topics covered in the AE&P Guidelines or all
applicable subsection numbers for a listed topic. The numbers for subsections that contain only cross-references to
other sources or publications are presented in italic type for the reader's convenience.
Absolute Filtration (Air) Systems	15.9.2
Access and Egress, Security	1.8.1
ADP. See Automatic Data Processing
Air Change Rates, Rooms  	15.9.8
Air-Cleaning Devices (Special Applications) .. 15.9.3
Air Conditioning Systems. See also HVAC ... 15.5.2
Air Filtration and Exhaust Systems  	 15.9
  Absolute Filtration 	15.9.2
  Air Intake Location	15.9.6
  Dry Filtration	15.9.1
  Maintenance Access	15.9.5
  Operation	15.9.4
Air-Handling and Air Distribution Systems ..  15.5.11
  Air-Handling Units, Gas-Fired, Controls  ..  15.4.11
Air Intake, Location	15.9.5
Airports and Heliports	2.6.4
Air Volume/Exchange,  Laboratory.  See also
    Load Calculations,  Air Volume/Exchanges  15.6.4
Alarm and Security Systems	 16.15
Architectural Requirements, Facility		1.5.5
Atriums	,	13.3.1
Automatic Control Dampers	15.4.8
Automatic Data Processing
  Grounding	16.11.5
  Isolation of Systems  	16.11.1
  .Lighting	'...;  16.11.4
  Power Panelboards and Distribution Panels .  16.11.3
  Power Systems 	16.11
Auxiliary Air System	15.6.5
  Load Calculations	15.6.5
Backflow Preventers (Plumbing)  	15.10.3
Background Information (Planning and
    Design Data)	V	1.2
Balancing, HVAC. See Testing, Balancing,
    and Commissioning
Ballasts. See Lamps and Ballasts
Biological Safety Cabinets	15.8.2
Blackout Shades	9.6.2
Blinds  	9.6.1
Building Codes.  See Codes, Development
Building Directory	10.2.4
Building Movement Joints	1.9.5
Cabinets, Laboratory 	10.5.4,10.5.5,10.5.6
  Assemblies	10.5.4
  Base	10.5.5
  Wall	10.5.6
Cable (Electrical). See Ductbanks and Cable
Calculations, Structural Design  	1.9.2
Carpet	9.4.2
Casework. See Laboratory Casework
Cathodic Protection	 16.12
Ceilings, Finished  	9.3
  AIongExitPath  	9.3.3
  Not Along Exit Path	9.3.2
  Finishes  	9.3.4
  Open Ceilings	,	9.3.5
Cementitious Decks	3.6
  Materials, Design, and Construction	3.6.2
Central Heating Plant	15.5.16
Ceramic Tile Flooring	9.4.5
Chemical Storage and Handling .,	1.7.3
Chilled-Water Systems, Load-Control 	15.4.15
Coastal Development See also Waterfront
    Construction)  	2.7.8
Codes. See also specific topics	App. A
  Development	2.1.2
  Electrical	16.1.1
  Fire Protection  	15.15.6
  Mechanical	 15.12
  Scope of Requirements	1.4.2
Cold Storage Rooms	15.5.15
Communication Systems  	 16.14
  Miscellaneous	.	«	16.14.7
Compressed-Air Systems	,	15.10.8
Computer Power	16.11.2
Concrete, Cast-in-Place	3.4
  Climatic Considerations	3.4.6
  Materials, Testing, and Quality Control 	3.4.2
  Mix Proportions	3.4.4
  Mixing, Transporting, and Placing	3.4.5
  Post-Tensioned	3.4.7
  Tolerances 	3.4.3
Concrete Flooring. See Exposed Concrete Flooring
Concrete Formwork	3.2
                                                  1-1

-------
February 1998
                          Architecture, Engineering,
                           and Planning Guidelines
                                                                                                  Index
Concrete, Precast/Prestressed	3.5
  Architectural	3.5.2
  Structural	3.5.1
Concrete Reinforcement	3.3
  Details  	3.3.2
  Materials	3.3.1
Concrete, Requirements (General)	3.1
  Coal Fly Ash, in Concrete	3.1.3
  Codes	3.1.2
  Design and Construction	3.1.1
  Inspection and Testing	3.8
Concrete Structures, Repair and Restoration	. 3.7
Condensors	15.5.4
  Controls	15.4.17
Conductors	16.4.3
Constant Volume Bypass-Type Fume Hoods... 15.7.3
Conveyance (Stormwater)  	2.7.5
Conveying Systems, Building	 14.1
Cooling Towers	15.5.5
  Controls	15.4.17
Coordination of Work (Electrical)  	16.1.4
Countertops	10.5.8
Curtains	9.6.3
Decks
  Cementitious	 3.6
  Steel	5.4
Design Guidelines 	App. D
Design Requirements
  Environmental . /	1.5.9
  Structural	1.9
Development Codes. See Codes, Development
Dewatering	2.4.5
Disaster Evacuation System	16.15.4
Distribution Systems. See Electrical; Natural Gas;
    Water
Doors	8.1
  Exterior 	8.1.2
  Fire	8.1.4
  Identification  	10.2.2
  Interior	8.1.3
  Laboratory	8.1.5
Drainage.  See Street Drainage
Draperies	9.6.3
Drinking Fountains 	15.10.13
Dry Filtration (Air) Systems	15.9.1
Dry-Marker Boards 	 10.1
Ductbanks and Cable	16.2.1
Ducts	  15.5.14,15.14
  Access Panels	15.14.3
  Fabrication	15.14.2
  Fire Dampers  	15.14.5
  Insulation	15.14.4
  Noise Control	13.1.2
Earthwork 	2.4.7
Effluent Cleaning	15.7.14
Electrical Equipment	 11.9
  Distribution Equipment	16.4.6
  Materials and Equipment Standards	16.4.2
Electrical Service Entrance	 16.3
  Equipment 	16.3.5
  Metering	16.3.4
  Overhead Services 	16.3.1
  Service Capacity	16.3.3
  Underground Services .	16.3.2
Electrical Systems  	 16.1
  Distribution 	2.8.4,16.2
    Redundancy	16.2.4
  Environmental Requirements	16.1.8
  installations 	16.1.2
  Interior	16.4
    Materials and Methods 	16.4.1
    Service Equipment  	16.4.2
Elevators	 14.2
  Capture Floor	14.2.3
  Chemical Transport Use	14.2.5
  Recall	14.2.1
  Signage	14.2.4
  Smoke Detectors	14.2.2
Emergency Eyewash Units	  10.4,15.10.5
Emergency Power System	 16.8
  Emergency Loads	16.8.2
Emergency Safety Showers	  10.4,15.10.6
Energy Conservation in Design	 16.1.3
  Lighting	16.5.5
Energy Efficiency, Facility	15.3.7
Energy Management Control Systems	15.4
  Energy Management Systems	15.4.19
  Zoning	15.4.2
Energy Metering  	15.4.20
Environmental Considerations, Siting	2.2.3
  Raceways, Enclosures	  16.13
Environmental Design Requirements	1.5.9
  Electrical Systems	16.1.8
Environmental Rooms	10.5.13,15.5.15
Equipment.  See also specific equipment
    categories 	 11.1
  Consultants	  11.10
  Design 	 11.1
  Electrical   	 11.9
  Floor Preparation 	 11.4
  High-Technology 	 11.8
  Mechanical	 11.9
  Specifications	 11.7
  Ventilation, Equipment Rooms	  11.6,15.3.5
Erosion and Sedimentation Control	2.7.3
Escalators	  13.3.4,14.3
                                                  1-2

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines
                                    February 1998
Index
Evacuation System, Disaster	16.15.4
Exhaust, Laboratory. See also Fume Hoods,
    Laboratory
  Plume Study	15.9.9
Existing Facility Description 	1.2.1
Exit Lighting and Markings. See Lighting; Signage
Exposed Concrete Flooring	9.4.7
Exterior Areas and Facilities. See Planning, Exterior
    Areas and Facilities
Eyewash Units, Emergency. See Emergency Eyewash
    Units
Facility and Campus Components  	1.2.2
Facility Design and Layout	  1.5
  Architectural Requirements	1.5.5
  Specific Room Requirements	1.5.7
  Guide for Architectural Layout	1.5.8
Facility Organization	1.4.3
Facility Siting	2.4.3
Fan Control, Variable-Air-Volume	15.4.9
Fans/Motors	15.5.12
Final Finishing Material. See Finishes, Interior
Finished, Ceilings. See Ceilings, Finished
Finishes, Interior	 9.1
  Airspace	9.1.3
  Combustible Substances	 9.1.4
  Final Finishes	 9.1.2
  Trim and Incidental  	9.1.1
Finishes, Wall.  See Wall Finishes, Paint, and
    Covering
Fire Alarm System	16.15.1
Fire Barrier Walls  	 13.2
  Openings 	13.2.2-3
Fire Doors  	8.1.4
Fire Extinguishers, Portable	10.3
  Locations 	10.3.1
Fire Protection	 15.15
  Codes	15.15.6
  Operations		15.15.5
  Systems	15.15.4
  System Size and Zoning	15.15.3
  Water Supplies	15.15.2
Fire and Smoke Detection and Protection Controls,
    Air-Handling Systems	15.4.10
FireWalls  	  13.2,13.2.1
  Openings	 13.2.3
Flammable Gas Systems	15.10.12
Flammable Liquid Storage Cabinets	15.8.3
Floodplain and Wetlands Development.  See also
    Raceways and Enclosures, Environmental
    Considerations)	 2.7.7
Flooring, Special  	9.4.6
Floor Treatments.  See also Carpet; Ceramic;
    Exposed Concrete; Vinyl)	9.4
Fluorescent Fixtures	16.6.2
Fume Hoods, Laboratory. See also specific
    hoodtypes)	  10.5.12,15.7
  Certification	15.7.11
  Effluent Cleaning	15.7.14
  Exhaust	15.7.2
    System	15.7.12
  Face Velocities	15.7.10
  Horizontal Sashes	15.7.8
  Noise  	15.7.13
Functional Organization	1.2.3
Furniture and Furnishings. See also Cabinets,
    Laboratory	12.1
Gas. See Natural Gas; Nonflammable and
    Flammable Gas
Geotechnical Investigation	2.3.3
Glare (Lighting)	16.5.7
Glassware Washing Sinks  	15.10.7
Glove Boxes	15.8.1
GreenLights  	16.5.6
Grounding	16.4.8
  Automatic Data Processing Power	16.11.5
Groundwater Investigation	2.3.4
Grout	4.2.1,4.2.3
Handicapped Accessibility (Electrical)	16.1.6
Hardscape Requirements  	2.5.4
Harmonics	16.4.5
Hazardous Waste Handling  	 1.7
  Hazardous Materials/Waste Storage Facility  .. 1.7.4
Heat Generation and Distribution, Central Planfl5.5.16
Heating and Cooling Coils	15.5.13
Heating and Cooling, Simultaneous	15.4.5
'Heating and Cooling Systems, Combination,
    Two-Pipe and Three-Pipe 	15.4.14
Heating Equipment  	15.5.7
Heating Systems	15.5.6
Heating, Ventilation, and Air-Conditiomng. See
    HVAC
Heliports. See Airports and Heliports
High-Technology Equipment.  See Equipment
Hose Bibbs	 15.10.16
Hot-Water Systems, Load Control  	15.4.15
Humidity Control	15.4.4
HVAC Requirements	15.3
HVAC Selection	15.3.3
  Control Valve Selection  	15.4.13
                                                  1-3

-------
February 1998
                          Architecture, Engineering,
                           and Planning Guidelines
                                                                                                  Index
HVAC Systems.  See also Testing, Balancing, and
    Commissioning [HVAC Systems]) 	 15.5
  Coils	15.5.13
  Control Setback and Shutdown Devices	15.4.3
  Economizer Cycle	15.4.7
  Fire/Smoke Detection and
    Protection	  15.4.10,15.4.2.2
  Laboratory 	15.3.8
  Performance	15.3.2
Illumination Levels, Interior	16.5.1
Interior Finishes. See Finishes, Interior
Janitor Closets	1.6.2
Laboratory Air Volume/Exchange. See Air
    Volume/Exchange, Laboratory
Laboratory Cabinets. See Cabinets, Laboratory
Laboratory Casework.  See also Cabinets; Fume
    Hoods; Shelving 	 10.5
  Materials  	10.5.9
  Minimum Standards	10.5.11
  Modular Design  	10.5.2
  Quality	10.5.10
  Support Capability 	10.5.3
Laboratory Doors	8.1.5
Laboratory Exhaust See Fume Hoods, Laboratory
Laboratory Fume Hoods. See Fume Hoods, Laboratory
Laboratory Power Requirements. See Power
    Requirements, Laboratory
Laboratory Service Fittings	15.8.4
Laboratory Waste, Nonsanitary  	  15.11
Laboratory Water Systems, Centralized	15.10.10
Lamps and Ballasts	16.5.3
Land Resources  	2.2.1
Landscaping and Site-Related Requirements	2.5
Lavatories.  See Toilets, Sinks, and Lavatories
Layout and Clearances
  Equipment	 11.3
  Guide for Architectural Layout	1.5.8
  Programmed Space	1.5.3
  Specific Room Requirements  	1.5.7
Lead-Based Paint	9.2.1
Lease Administration	1.10
Light Diffusers	16.6.3
Light-Gauge Steel. See Steel, Light-Gauge
Lighting Fixtures, Fire Safety	 16.6
  Fluorescent Fixtures	16.6.2
  Light Diflusers	16.6.3
  Location	16.6.4
  Mounting	16.6.1
Lighting Systems, Exterior	 16.7
  Building Facade	 16.7.3
  Parking Lot	16.7.2
  Roadway	16.7.5
  Signs (Electric)	16.7.6
  Traffic Control	16.7.4
Lighting Systems, Interior	 16.5
  Automatic Data Processing Areas ..  16.5.8,16.11.4
  Controls	16.5.2
  Emergency (Battery Units)	16.5.4
  Energy Conservation	16.5.5
  Exit	16.15.5
  Green Lights	16.5.6
Lightning Protection Systems	 16.9
  Additional Scope	 16.9.2
  Master Label	16.9.3
  Minimum Scope	16.9.1
Liquid Chalk Boards  	 10.1
Load Calculations  	 15.6
  Air Volume/Exchange 	15.6.4
  Auxiliary Air  	15.6.5
  Design  	15.6.3
  Submitting	15:6.2
Load Control
  Chilled-Water Systems	15.4.16
  Hot-Water Systems	15.4.15
Loading Facilities	2.6.2
Loads, Building	1.9.3
Magnetic Boards  	 10.1
Masonry
  Accessories	4.4
  Codes and Specifications	4.1.2
  Design and Construction	4.1.1
  Inspection and Testing	4.6
  Reinforced  	4.5
  Unit  	4.3
Material and Equipment (Electrical), Standards  16.1.7
Mechanical Equipment. See Equipment; Plumbing;
    and other specific systems
Mechanical System Commissioning	15.13.6
Metals, General Requirements	5.1
Metals, Miscellaneous 	5.5
  Codes and Specifications	5.5.2
Metering.  See Electrical Metering; Energy Metering
Microwave Communications  	16.14.6
Moisture Transport	7.4
Monumental Stairs	13.3.3
Mortar	4.2.1, 4.2.2
Motor Controllers and Disconnects  	16.4.7
Natural  Gas Distribution Systems	2.8.3,15.10.11
Noise Control	 13.1
  FumeHoods	15.7.13
Nonflammable- and Flammable-Gas Systems 15.10.12
                                                  1-4

-------
Architecture, Engineering,
and Planning Guidelines
                                    February 1998
Index
Nonsanitary Laboratory Wastes. See Laboratory
    Waste, Nonsanitary
Offer Requirements 	L10.1
Open Ceilings.  See Ceilings, Finished
Overview, Facility Design and Layout	1.5.1
Paint  	9.2.1,9.5
  Accent  	9.5.4
  Colors, Wall and Ceiling  	9.5.3
  Lead-Based	9.2.1
  Reflectance	9.5.2
Panel and Curtain Walls	7.5,7.5.1
Parking Facilities	2.6.2
  Lighting	16.7.2
Partitions, Wood and Plastic. See also Panel and
    Curtain Walls; Spandrel Walls  	6.2
  Ceiling High	 6.2.1
  Less-than-Ceiling High	6.2.3
  Wood Stud	,	6.2.2
Pedestrian Access	2.6.3
Penetrations	13.3.5
Perchloric Acid Fume Hoods	...'... 15.7.6
Piping
  Noise Control	13.1.2
  Plumbing  	15.10.1
Planning
  Criteria	1.3.3
  Goals  	1.3.1
  Objectives	1.3.2
  Requirements	 1.3
Planning and Design, Site  	2.4.2
Planning, Exterior Areas and Facilities 	1.5.4
Planning Studies, Evaluations, and Reports	1.1.2
Plumbing	 15.10
  Fixtures  	15.10.2
  Piping	15.10.1
Plume Study (Laboratory Exhaust)	15.9.9
Power Factors (Electrical)  	16.1.5
Power Requirements, Laboratory	16.4.9
Power Supply Lines, Overhead	16.2.3
Power Systems. See also Electrical Systems
  Automatic Data Processing Power	16.11
  Emergency Power	16.8
Preengineered Metal Buildings	5.7
  Codes and Specifications	5.7.1
  Loads	5.7.2
Professional Qualifications, Site Designers	2.5.2
Programmed Space, Design and Layout	1.5.3
Pumps and Pumping Systems (HVAC)	15.5.9
Purpose of Project	1.1.1
Raceways	;	16.4.4
Raceways and Enclosures, Environmental
    Considerations	 16.13
  Corrosive Atmosphere  	16.13.1
  Explosive Atmosphere  	16.13.4
  Extreme Cold	16.13.3
  Floodplains	16.13.5
  Saltwater Atmosphere	16.13.2
Radioisotope Hoods	15.7.5
Radioisotopes, Hazardous Waste  	1.7.2
Recording Systems	16.14.3
Recreational Requirements (Site)	2.5.5
References. See also Codes
  Mechanical Requirements	 15.2
  Site Work	2.9
Reflectance. See Paint
Reinforced Masonry. See Masonry
Requirements, Summary of. See Summary of
    Requirements
Restrooms  	1.6.1,15.10.14
Room Numbering	10.2.3
Room Air Change Rates	15.9.8
Safety Alarm System 	16.15.2
Safety Devices	10.4
  Plumbing	15.10.4
Safety Showers, Emergency. See Emergency Safety
    Showers
Satellite Dishes  	16.14.4
Scope of Project	1.1,2.1
  General Design and Planning	1.1
  Site Work	2.1
Scope of Requirements	1.4
Security	1.8
  Systems	'.	16.15.3
Sedimentation Control.  See Erosion and
    Sedimentation Control
Seismic Requirements  	 16.10
Seismic Review	16.10.1
Service (Electrical) Entrance. See Electrical Service
    Entrance
Service Fittings, Laboratory	15.8.4
Shafts	 13.3.2
Shelving, Laboratory	10.5.7
Shoring and Underpinning		2.4.6
Shower Stalls. See also Emergency Safety
    Showers	15.10.15
Signage
  Elevator	14.2.4
  Exit Markings	16.15.5
  Exterior (Electric)	16.7.6
  Interior	10.2
    Door Identification  	10.2.2
    Room Numbering	10.2.3
Sinks. See Toilets, Sinks, and Lavatories
                                                  1-5   .

-------
February 1998
                          Architecture, Engineering,
                           and Planning Guidelines
                                                                                                 Index
Site
  Development	2.4
    Facility Design  	1.5.2
  Designers, Professional Qualifications 	2.5.2
  Evaluation 	2.3.2
  Influences	2.2
  Investigation	2.3
  Planning and Design	2.4.2
  Preparation	2.4.4
  Requirements, General	2.5.3
  Surveys	2.3.1
Smote Detection Controls.  See Fire and Smoke
    Detection and Protection Controls
Smoke Detectors, Elevator	14.1.2
Solid Waste Collection Systems	 2.8.6
Sound Dampening	13.1.3
Space Identification,- Facility 	1.5.6
Spandrel Walls	7.5,7.5.2
Special Purpose Hoods	15.7.7
Special Room Requirements	1.6
  Janitor Closets  	1.6.2
  Restrooms .....".	1.6.1
Steam Distribution Systems	15.5.10
Steam Systems, Control	15.4.18
Steel Decks, Codes and Standards  	5.4
Steel Joists
  Codes and Specifications	 5.3.1
  Intended Use	5.3.2
  Support of Vibrating Equipment	5.3.3
Steel, Light-Gauge, Codes and Specifications	5.6
Steel, Structural
  Codes and Standards	5.2
  Inspection and Testing	5.8
Stornrwater Management	2.7
Stormwater Quality	 2.7.6
Stormwater Retention and Detention	2.7.4
Street Drainage 	2.7,1
Structural Design Requirements	1.9
Structural Steel. See Steel, Structural
Structural Support, Equipment	  11.5
Structural Systems	1.9.4
Summary of Requirements	1.4.4
Sun Shading	8.3
  Laboratory Windows	8.3.2
Surveying	2.4.1
Switches	16.2.2
TackBoards	  10.1
Telecommunications Systems	2.8.5
  Telecommunications/Data Systems	16.14.1
Television Broadcast Systems	16.14.5
Testing, Balancing, and Commissioning
    (HVAC Systems)	  15.13
  Contractors	  15.13.1-3
  Devices	15.13.5
  Reporting	15.13.7
  ScopeofWork  	15.13.4
Thermal and Moisture Requirements
  Design Characteristics  	7.2
  General	7.1
Thermal Resistance	7.3
Tile Flooring. See Vinyl Tile; Ceramic Tile
Toilets, Sinks, and Lavatories	15.10.14
Transportation Systems  	2.2.2
Trim and Incidental Finishes. See Finishes, Interior
Underpinning. See Shoring and Underpinning
Uninterruptible Power Supply  	16.8.3
Unit Masonry. See Masonry
UPS. See Uninterruptible Power Supply
Utilities and Support Services	2.8
Vacuum Systems  	15.10.9
Variable-Air-Volume Hoods	15.7.4
Variable-Air-Volume Systems, Fan Control ...  15.4.9
Vehicle Access and Circulation. See also Lighting
    Systems, Exterior	2.6.1
Vehicle and Pedestrian Movement. See also
    Transportation Systems	2.6
Ventilated Enclosures (other than fume hoods).  15.7.9
Ventilation Control, Mechanical 	15.4.6
Ventilation, Equipment Rooms	  11.6,15.3.5
Ventilation-Exhaust Systems	15.3.4
Ventilation Rates	15.9.7
Ventilation Requirements, Equipment ..  11.6,15.3.5
Vertical Openings and Shafts	13.3
  Atriums	13.3.1
  Escalators	13.3.4
  Monumental Stairs	13.3.3
  Penetrations	13.3.5
  Shafts	13.3.2
Vibrating, Equipment, Support of	5.3.3
Vibration Isolation .'	13.1.1
Video Conference Rooms		16.14.2
Vinyl Flooring, Seamless	9.4.4
Vinyl Tile	9.4.3
Wall Finishes, Paint and Covering	9.2
  Covering	9.2.3
  Finishes	 9.2.2-3
  Lead-Based Paint	9.2.1
Waste Heat Recovery Systems  	15.3.6
Waste, Laboratory. See Hazardous Waste Handling;
    Laboratory Waste, Nonsanitary
Waste, Solid. See Solid Waste
Wastewater Collection Systems 	2.8.2
Water Chillers	15.5.3
                                                  1-6

-------